http://download.intel.com/support/network/sb/fedexcasestudyfinal.pdf - Manuels - INTEL
INTEL sur FNAC.COM
- Revenir à l'accueil
Manuel d'installation pour les processeurs Intel® Pentium® 4 - M
Voir également :
![[ ]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/layout.gif)
Brochure_journées_ré..> 18-Dec-2011 08:50 1.8M
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/text.gif)
INTEL-All-Wi-Fi-is-N..> 01-Apr-2015 14:58 2.5M
INTEL-Aspera-FASP-Sp..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 641K
INTEL-CLC-Genomics-W..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 644K
INTEL-Education.htm 23-Mar-2015 18:56 646K
INTEL-Fiche-produit-..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03 1.9M
INTEL-Find-the-Best-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 560K
INTEL-Finding-an-app..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03 2.0M
INTEL-Glossaire.htm 24-Mar-2015 05:59 923K
INTEL-Intel-Code-of-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 629K
INTEL-Intel-Edison-G..> 01-Apr-2015 14:57 2.5M
INTEL-Intel-Educatio..> 01-Apr-2015 15:02 2.0M
INTEL-Intel-Xeon-Pro..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 640K
INTEL-LSI-incorpore-..> 01-Apr-2015 15:01 2.0M
INTEL-Linux-Tutorial..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56 2.5M
INTEL-Look-Inside-In..> 01-Apr-2015 14:57 2.5M
INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56 2.6M
INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56 2.5M
INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:59 2.3M
INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00 2.3M
INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00 2.3M
INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00 2.3M
INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:59 2.3M
INTEL-Pentium-Proces..> 01-Apr-2015 15:04 1.9M
INTEL-Processeur-Int..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 628K
INTEL-Processeurs-ov..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 670K
INTEL-Processeurs-ov..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 679K
INTEL-Release_Notes_..> 01-Apr-2015 15:02 2.0M
INTEL-Ressources-tec..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 628K
INTEL-Salesforce-Dis..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 641K
INTEL-Telemedicine-S..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 560K
INTEL-Texas-Advanced..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 641K
INTEL-University-of-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 641K
INTEL-Videos-Tech-10..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 712K
INTEL-Videos-Tech-10..> 23-Mar-2015 18:55 722K
INTEL-Xeon-Processor..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 641K
INTEL-download.intel..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 679K
INTEL-download.intel..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 712K
INTEL-download.intel..> 01-Apr-2015 15:04 1.9M
INTEL-intelbxrts2011..> 01-Apr-2015 14:58 2.5M
INTEL-intelthermalso..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00 2.3M
INTEL-motherboards-s..> 01-Apr-2015 15:01 2.2M
INTEL-rts2011ac_ther..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56 2.6M
INTEL-x25e_high_perf..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03 1.9M
INTEL-x25e_high_perf..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03 2.0M
INTELdocumentation.htm 26-Jan-2012 18:19 7.3M
getting_started_ampl..> 18-Dec-2011 08:49 2.1M
getting_started_c.pdf 18-Dec-2011 08:50 85K
mklman.pdf 18-Dec-2011 08:55 18M
Recherche par catégories :
Imprimantes Téléphones
GSM Informatique
Ordinateurs Galaxy
Photo TV
Electroménager
Vidéos :
Samsung Mobile :
SAMSUNG MEMORY - MEMOIRE :
Tutoriels :
Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Air-View-Tutoriel-Video
Samsung- GALAXY S4 - Air Gesture - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung- GALAXY S4 - Lecteur optique - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung - GALAXY S4 - Smart Scroll - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung GALAXY S4 - ChatOn - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung GALAXY S4 - S Translator - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung, vidéos en français :
Boxed Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M Installation Notes
Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on
the World Wide Web.
Avant d’effectuer l’installation du processeur, veuillez prendre en compte les indications d’installation
explicitées dans les notes d’installation disponibles sur le Web
Prima di installare il processore, prendere in considerazione i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di
installazione disponibili su World Wide Web.
Vor der Installation des Prozessors sollten die Hinweise zur Integration beachtet werden, die im
Installationshandbuch (im Internet verfügbar) zu finden sind.
Antes de instalar el procesador, tenga en cuenta las consideraciones de integración que se encuentran en las
notas de instalación disponibles en la World Wide Web.
Antes de instalar o processador, leve em consideração os problemas de integração encontrados nas notas sobre
a instalação, disponíveis na World Wide Web.
http://support.intel.com/support/processors
1. Obtain access to your processor socket by using the documentation provided by your original equipment
manufacturer.
Accédez à la prise du processeur en suivant les instructions données dans la documentation fournie par le
fabricant de votre équipement original.
Per accedere alla presa del processore, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale
dell’apparecchio.
Legen Sie die Fassung des Prozessors frei. Anleitungen dazu finden Sie in der Dokumentation des
Originalgeräteherstellers.
Con la ayuda de la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo, obtenga acceso al
zócalo del procesador.
Consulte a documentação fornecida pelo fabricante original do equipamento para saber como obter acesso
ao soquete do processador.
2. Find and remove the cooling solution if it prevents you from accessing the processor socket. See the
documentation provided by the original equipment manufacturer for more information.
Repérez, puis retirez la solution de refroidissement si elle vous empêche d’atteindre la prise du processeur.
Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, référez-vous à la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre
équipement original.
Individuare e rimuovere la soluzione di raffreddamento qualora impedisca l’accesso alla presa del processore.
Per maggiori informazioni, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale
dell’apparecchio.
Sollte die Kühlflüssigkeit den Zugriff zur Fassung des Prozessors verhindern, ist sie zu entfernen. Weitere
Anleitungen finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers.
Si la solución refrigerante no le permite acceder al zócalo del procesador, sáquela. Para obtener más información,
consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo.
Encontre e remova o dispositivo de resfriamento se ele evitar o acesso ao soquete do processador. Consulte
a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para obter mais informações.
Open (O) Locked (L)
478-pin
micro-FCPGA
To install the processor, use a screwdriver to disengage (open) the socket actuator.
Pour installer le processeur, désenclenchez (ouvrez) l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis.
Per installare il processore, staccare (aprire) il dispositivo di azionamento della presa utilizzando un cacciavite.
Um den Prozessor installieren zu können, muß zuerst mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der
Fassung geöffnet werden.
Para instalar el procesador, desactive (abra) el disparador del zócalo con un destornillador.
Para instalar o processador, utilize uma chave de fenda para desengatar (abrir) o atuador do soquete.
3. Figure A
Pin A1
Using Figure B, place the processor into the socket. Align the processor’s pin A1 with the arrow on the microFCPGA
socket. If the processor does not drop completely into the socket, turn the actuator until the processor
drops completely in.
En vous aidant de la figure B, mettez le processeur dans la prise. Placez la broche A1 du processeur dans le
prolongement de la flèche de la prise micro-FCPGA. Si le processeur ne s’enfonce pas complètement dans la
prise, tournez l’actionneur jusqu’à ce que le processeur s’enfonce complètement.
Osservando la figura B, inserire il processore nella presa. Allineare il piedino del processore A1 con la freccia
che si trova sulla presa micro-FCPGA. Se non si riesce ad inserire completamente il processore nella presa,
girare il dispositivo di azionamento sino a quando il processore non viene completamente inserito.
4. Figure B
NOTE: For installation only in systems supporting
a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M.
Den Prozessor in die Fassung einsetzen wie in Abbildung B veranschaulicht. Dabei sollte der Pin A1 des
Prozessors mit dem auf der Mikro-FCPGA Fassung abgebildeten Pfeil ausgerichtet werden. Läßt sich der
Prozessor nicht ganz in die Fassung einsetzen, die Spannvorrichtung solange drehen, bis der Prozessor sicher
in der Fassung sitzt.
Usando la Figura B como guía, coloque el procesador dentro del zócalo. Alinee el pin A1 del procesador con
la flecha del zócalo del micro-FCPGA. Si el procesador no encaja perfectamente dentro del zócalo, gire el
disparador hasta que el procesador quede bien colocado.
Consultando a Figura B, coloque o processador no soquete. Alinhe o pino A1 do processador com a seta do
micro-soquete FCPGA. Se o processador não entrar completamente no soquete, gire o atuador até que o
processador entre completamente.
5. While gently holding the processor down with your finger, secure the processor in the socket by closing the
socket actuator with a screwdriver (see figure A). For updated installation information, see
http://support.intel.com/support/processors
Tout en appuyant doucement sur le processeur avec votre doigt, assurez-vous qu’il est bien en place dans la
prise en fermant l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis (voir figure A). Pour obtenir des informations
d’installation mises à jour, consultez : http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Mantenere fermo il processore esercitando una leggera pressione con il dito e nel frattempo fissare il processore
nella presa chiudendo il dispositivo di azionamento della presa con un cacciavite (vedi fig. A). Per informazioni
più aggiornate relative all’installazione, consultare il sito: http://support.intel.com/support Den
Prozessor vorsichtig nach unten gedrückt halten und mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der
Fassung festdrehen (siehe Abbildung A). Aktualisierte Informationen zur Installation finden Sie unter:
http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Sujetando el procesador con un dedo, fije el procesador en el zócalo cerrando el disparador con un destornillador
(Figura A). Para obtener información de instalación actualizada, consulte: http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Pressione levemente o processador para baixo com o dedo, ao mesmo tempo que afixa o processador no
soquete fechando o atuador com uma chave de fenda (veja a Figura A). Para obter informações atualizadas
sobre instalação, consulte a página: http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
6. Re-attach the cooling system and re-assemble the system per the installation manual provided by the original
equipment manufacturer. Note: Your system may require special voltage and speed settings. Consult your
original equipment manufacturer’s documentation to determine the correct settings.
Remettez le système de refroidissement en place et rassemblez le système en suivant les instructions données
dans le manuel d’installation fourni par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Remarque : Il se peut que
votre système nécessite des réglages spéciaux de tension et de vitesse. Consultez la documentation fournie par
le fabricant de votre équipement original pour déterminer les réglages corrects.
Fissare nuovamente il sistema di raffreddamento e riassemblare il sistema per l’installazione manuale fornita
dal fornitore dell’apparecchio. Nota: per il sistema in dotazione potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare una tensione
speciale e particolari impostazioni di velocità. Per determinare le impostazioni corrette, consultare la documentazione
fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio.
Das Kühlsystem wieder anbringen und gemäß den Anweisungen des vom Originalgerätehersteller mitgelieferten
Installationshandbuchs wieder zusammensetzen. Hinweis: Ihr System erfordert unter Umständen spezielle
Spannungs- und Geschwindigkeitseinstellungen. Angaben zur korrekten Einstellung dieser Größen sind in der
Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers zu finden.
Vuelva a acoplar el sistema refrigerante y a armar el sistema según el manual de instrucciones suministrado por
el fabricante original del equipo. Nota: Es posible que su sistema tenga requisitos de voltaje y velocidad especiales.
Para determinar cuáles son los valores correctos, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante
original del equipo.
Recoloque o dispositivo de resfriamento e monte o sistema de acordo com o manual de instalação fornecido
pelo fabricante original do equipamento. Lembre-se: o sistema pode necessitar de ajustes específicos de voltagem
e velocidade. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para determinar os ajustes
corretos.
Notes
www.intel.com
support.intel.com
1-916-377-7000
07:00-17:00
U.S. Pacific Time
Monday–Friday
To obtain warranty
service in the U.S.
and Canada 1-800-628-8686
América Latina 916-377-0114
(en Español)
Brazil 916-377-0180
(en Portuguese)
Monday–Friday 09:00-18:00
For English and European
customers not listed below
+44 (0) 870 607 2439
Francais +33 (0) 141 91 85 29
Deutsch +49 (0) 69 9509 6099
Italiano +39 (0) 2 696 33276
Monday–Friday 0830-16:00 CET
For the latest support offerings,
please see support.intel.com
Asia-Pacific/English Support
Pakistan* 63-2-636-8415
Hours: 0900-1400
India** 000-6517, 830-3634
Hours: 0900-1500
Vietnam* 63-2-636-8416
Indonesia 803-65-7249
Thailand 1-800-6310003
Hours 09:00-1600
Hong Kong 852-2844-4456
Philippines 1-800-1-651-0117
Singapore 65-831-1311
Malaysia 1-800-80-1390
Hours: 0900-1700
Australia 1-800-649-931
Hours: 1000-1700
New Zealand 0-800-444-365
Hours: 1100-1700
Asia-Pacific/Korean Support
Korea 822-7672-595
Hours: 0900-1700
Asia-Pacific/Mandarin Support
PRC 800-820-1100
Taiwan 2-718-9915
Hours: 0900-1700
Japan support.intel.co.jp
0120-868686
Hours: 0900-1700
*IDD Long Distance into the Philippines
**Manual toll-free. When dialing from
India need to use phone with IDD
facility.
Copyright © 2002 Intel Corporation
* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other Countries.
Order Number A82732-001
Printed in USA
Boxed Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M Installation Notes
Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on
the World Wide Web.
Avant d’effectuer l’installation du processeur, veuillez prendre en compte les indications d’installation
explicitées dans les notes d’installation disponibles sur le Web
Prima di installare il processore, prendere in considerazione i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di
installazione disponibili su World Wide Web.
Vor der Installation des Prozessors sollten die Hinweise zur Integration beachtet werden, die im
Installationshandbuch (im Internet verfügbar) zu finden sind.
Antes de instalar el procesador, tenga en cuenta las consideraciones de integración que se encuentran en las
notas de instalación disponibles en la World Wide Web.
Antes de instalar o processador, leve em consideração os problemas de integração encontrados nas notas sobre
a instalação, disponíveis na World Wide Web.
http://support.intel.com/support/processors
1. Obtain access to your processor socket by using the documentation provided by your original equipment
manufacturer.
Accédez à la prise du processeur en suivant les instructions données dans la documentation fournie par le
fabricant de votre équipement original.
Per accedere alla presa del processore, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale
dell’apparecchio.
Legen Sie die Fassung des Prozessors frei. Anleitungen dazu finden Sie in der Dokumentation des
Originalgeräteherstellers.
Con la ayuda de la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo, obtenga acceso al
zócalo del procesador.
Consulte a documentação fornecida pelo fabricante original do equipamento para saber como obter acesso
ao soquete do processador.
2. Find and remove the cooling solution if it prevents you from accessing the processor socket. See the
documentation provided by the original equipment manufacturer for more information.
Repérez, puis retirez la solution de refroidissement si elle vous empêche d’atteindre la prise du processeur.
Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, référez-vous à la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre
équipement original.
Individuare e rimuovere la soluzione di raffreddamento qualora impedisca l’accesso alla presa del processore.
Per maggiori informazioni, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale
dell’apparecchio.
Sollte die Kühlflüssigkeit den Zugriff zur Fassung des Prozessors verhindern, ist sie zu entfernen. Weitere
Anleitungen finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers.
Si la solución refrigerante no le permite acceder al zócalo del procesador, sáquela. Para obtener más información,
consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo.
Encontre e remova o dispositivo de resfriamento se ele evitar o acesso ao soquete do processador. Consulte
a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para obter mais informações.
Open (O) Locked (L)
478-pin
micro-FCPGA
To install the processor, use a screwdriver to disengage (open) the socket actuator.
Pour installer le processeur, désenclenchez (ouvrez) l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis.
Per installare il processore, staccare (aprire) il dispositivo di azionamento della presa utilizzando un cacciavite.
Um den Prozessor installieren zu können, muß zuerst mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der
Fassung geöffnet werden.
Para instalar el procesador, desactive (abra) el disparador del zócalo con un destornillador.
Para instalar o processador, utilize uma chave de fenda para desengatar (abrir) o atuador do soquete.
3. Figure A
Pin A1
Using Figure B, place the processor into the socket. Align the processor’s pin A1 with the arrow on the microFCPGA
socket. If the processor does not drop completely into the socket, turn the actuator until the processor
drops completely in.
En vous aidant de la figure B, mettez le processeur dans la prise. Placez la broche A1 du processeur dans le
prolongement de la flèche de la prise micro-FCPGA. Si le processeur ne s’enfonce pas complètement dans la
prise, tournez l’actionneur jusqu’à ce que le processeur s’enfonce complètement.
Osservando la figura B, inserire il processore nella presa. Allineare il piedino del processore A1 con la freccia
che si trova sulla presa micro-FCPGA. Se non si riesce ad inserire completamente il processore nella presa,
girare il dispositivo di azionamento sino a quando il processore non viene completamente inserito.
4. Figure B
NOTE: For installation only in systems supporting
a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M.
Den Prozessor in die Fassung einsetzen wie in Abbildung B veranschaulicht. Dabei sollte der Pin A1 des
Prozessors mit dem auf der Mikro-FCPGA Fassung abgebildeten Pfeil ausgerichtet werden. Läßt sich der
Prozessor nicht ganz in die Fassung einsetzen, die Spannvorrichtung solange drehen, bis der Prozessor sicher
in der Fassung sitzt.
Usando la Figura B como guía, coloque el procesador dentro del zócalo. Alinee el pin A1 del procesador con
la flecha del zócalo del micro-FCPGA. Si el procesador no encaja perfectamente dentro del zócalo, gire el
disparador hasta que el procesador quede bien colocado.
Consultando a Figura B, coloque o processador no soquete. Alinhe o pino A1 do processador com a seta do
micro-soquete FCPGA. Se o processador não entrar completamente no soquete, gire o atuador até que o
processador entre completamente.
5. While gently holding the processor down with your finger, secure the processor in the socket by closing the
socket actuator with a screwdriver (see figure A). For updated installation information, see
http://support.intel.com/support/processors
Tout en appuyant doucement sur le processeur avec votre doigt, assurez-vous qu’il est bien en place dans la
prise en fermant l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis (voir figure A). Pour obtenir des informations
d’installation mises à jour, consultez : http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Mantenere fermo il processore esercitando una leggera pressione con il dito e nel frattempo fissare il processore
nella presa chiudendo il dispositivo di azionamento della presa con un cacciavite (vedi fig. A). Per informazioni
più aggiornate relative all’installazione, consultare il sito: http://support.intel.com/support Den
Prozessor vorsichtig nach unten gedrückt halten und mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der
Fassung festdrehen (siehe Abbildung A). Aktualisierte Informationen zur Installation finden Sie unter:
http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Sujetando el procesador con un dedo, fije el procesador en el zócalo cerrando el disparador con un destornillador
(Figura A). Para obtener información de instalación actualizada, consulte: http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Pressione levemente o processador para baixo com o dedo, ao mesmo tempo que afixa o processador no
soquete fechando o atuador com uma chave de fenda (veja a Figura A). Para obter informações atualizadas
sobre instalação, consulte a página: http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
6. Re-attach the cooling system and re-assemble the system per the installation manual provided by the original
equipment manufacturer. Note: Your system may require special voltage and speed settings. Consult your
original equipment manufacturer’s documentation to determine the correct settings.
Remettez le système de refroidissement en place et rassemblez le système en suivant les instructions données
dans le manuel d’installation fourni par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Remarque : Il se peut que
votre système nécessite des réglages spéciaux de tension et de vitesse. Consultez la documentation fournie par
le fabricant de votre équipement original pour déterminer les réglages corrects.
Fissare nuovamente il sistema di raffreddamento e riassemblare il sistema per l’installazione manuale fornita
dal fornitore dell’apparecchio. Nota: per il sistema in dotazione potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare una tensione
speciale e particolari impostazioni di velocità. Per determinare le impostazioni corrette, consultare la documentazione
fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio.
Das Kühlsystem wieder anbringen und gemäß den Anweisungen des vom Originalgerätehersteller mitgelieferten
Installationshandbuchs wieder zusammensetzen. Hinweis: Ihr System erfordert unter Umständen spezielle
Spannungs- und Geschwindigkeitseinstellungen. Angaben zur korrekten Einstellung dieser Größen sind in der
Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers zu finden.
Vuelva a acoplar el sistema refrigerante y a armar el sistema según el manual de instrucciones suministrado por
el fabricante original del equipo. Nota: Es posible que su sistema tenga requisitos de voltaje y velocidad especiales.
Para determinar cuáles son los valores correctos, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante
original del equipo.
Recoloque o dispositivo de resfriamento e monte o sistema de acordo com o manual de instalação fornecido
pelo fabricante original do equipamento. Lembre-se: o sistema pode necessitar de ajustes específicos de voltagem
e velocidade. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para determinar os ajustes
corretos.
Notes
www.intel.com
support.intel.com
1-916-377-7000
07:00-17:00
U.S. Pacific Time
Monday–Friday
To obtain warranty
service in the U.S.
and Canada 1-800-628-8686
América Latina 916-377-0114
(en Español)
Brazil 916-377-0180
(en Portuguese)
Monday–Friday 09:00-18:00
For English and European
customers not listed below
+44 (0) 870 607 2439
Francais +33 (0) 141 91 85 29
Deutsch +49 (0) 69 9509 6099
Italiano +39 (0) 2 696 33276
Monday–Friday 0830-16:00 CET
For the latest support offerings,
please see support.intel.com
Asia-Pacific/English Support
Pakistan* 63-2-636-8415
Hours: 0900-1400
India** 000-6517, 830-3634
Hours: 0900-1500
Vietnam* 63-2-636-8416
Indonesia 803-65-7249
Thailand 1-800-6310003
Hours 09:00-1600
Hong Kong 852-2844-4456
Philippines 1-800-1-651-0117
Singapore 65-831-1311
Malaysia 1-800-80-1390
Hours: 0900-1700
Australia 1-800-649-931
Hours: 1000-1700
New Zealand 0-800-444-365
Hours: 1100-1700
Asia-Pacific/Korean Support
Korea 822-7672-595
Hours: 0900-1700
Asia-Pacific/Mandarin Support
PRC 800-820-1100
Taiwan 2-718-9915
Hours: 0900-1700
Japan support.intel.co.jp
0120-868686
Hours: 0900-1700
*IDD Long Distance into the Philippines
**Manual toll-free. When dialing from
India need to use phone with IDD
facility.
Copyright © 2002 Intel Corporation
* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other Countries.
Order Number A82732-001
Printed in USA
Reference Number: 454301, Revision: 1.0
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology
enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for
Linux OS
Software User’s Guide
June 2012
Document Number: 327602-001US
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
2
INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT
AS PROVIDED IN INTEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY
WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL
PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY,
OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. Intel products are not intended for
use in medical, life saving, or life sustaining applications.
Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice.
Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked "reserved" or "undefined." Intel
reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future
changes to them.
The Intel® Matrix Storage Manager may contain design defects or errors known as errata which may cause the product to
deviate from published specifications. Current characterized errata are available on request.
Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order.
Intel, Intel® Matrix Storage Manager, Intel® Matrix Storage Technology, Intel® Rapid Recover Technology, and the Intel logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Copyright © 2012, Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
3
Contents
1 Introduction .....................................................................................................7
1.1 Terminology ..........................................................................................8
1.2 Reference Documents ...........................................................................10
2 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features ............................................................11
2.1 Feature Overview .................................................................................11
2.2 RAID 0 (Striping) .................................................................................11
2.3 RAID 1 (Mirroring) ................................................................................12
2.4 RAID 5 (Striping with Parity) ..................................................................13
2.5 RAID 10 ..............................................................................................14
2.6 Matrix RAID .........................................................................................15
2.7 Advanced Host Controller Interface .........................................................16
2.7.1 Native Command Queuing ........................................................16
2.7.2 Hot-Plug ................................................................................16
2.8 SAS Controller Unit ...............................................................................17
2.8.1 SCU OEM Parameters ...............................................................17
2.8.2 Linux libsas Sysfs Components ..................................................18
3 RAID BIOS / EFI Configuration ..........................................................................25
3.1 Overview ............................................................................................25
3.2 Enabling RAID in BIOS ..........................................................................25
4 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM........................................................26
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................26
4.2 User Interface ......................................................................................26
4.3 Version Identification ............................................................................26
4.4 RAID Volume Creation ..........................................................................27
5 Volume Creation .............................................................................................32
5.1 RAID Volume Creation ..........................................................................32
5.2 Filesystem Creation on RAID Volume .......................................................33
5.3 RAID Volume Creation Examples ............................................................33
5.4 Adding a Spare Disk .............................................................................34
5.5 Creating RAID Configuration File .............................................................34
5.6 RAID Volume Initialization / Resync ........................................................34
6 Volume Operations ..........................................................................................35
6.1 Erasing RAID Metadata .........................................................................35
6.2 Volume Assemble .................................................................................35
6.3 Stopping the Volumes ...........................................................................36
6.4 Reporting RAID Information ...................................................................36
6.5 To Fail an Active Drive ..........................................................................41
6.6 Remove a Failed Drive ..........................................................................41
6.7 Report RAID Details from BIOS ..............................................................41
6.8 Logging ..............................................................................................42
6.9 Raid Level Migration .............................................................................43
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
4
6.10 Freezing Reshape .................................................................................46
7 Online Capacity Expansion ...............................................................................47
8 RAID Monitoring .............................................................................................48
8.1 mdmon ...............................................................................................48
8.2 Monitoring Using mdadm .......................................................................49
8.3 Configuration File for Monitoring .............................................................51
8.4 Examples of monitored events in syslog ...................................................52
9 Recovery of RAID Volumes ...............................................................................53
9.1 Removing Failed Disk(s) ........................................................................53
9.2 Rebuilding ...........................................................................................54
9.3 Auto Rebuild ........................................................................................55
10 SGPIO ...........................................................................................................60
10.1 SGPIO Utility .......................................................................................60
10.2 Ledctl Utility ........................................................................................61
10.3 Ledmon Service ...................................................................................63
11 SAS Management Protocol Utilities ....................................................................64
11.1 smp_discover ......................................................................................64
11.1.1 Examples ...............................................................................64
11.2 smp_phy_control .................................................................................68
11.2.1 Examples ...............................................................................68
11.3 smp_rep_manufacturer .........................................................................68
11.3.1 Examples ...............................................................................68
11.4 smp_rep_general .................................................................................69
11.4.1 Examples ...............................................................................69
12 MDRAID Sysfs Components ..............................................................................70
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
5
Figures
Figure 1. Matrix RAID ......................................................................................15
Figure 2. User Prompt ......................................................................................26
Tables
Table 1. RAID 0 Overview ................................................................................11
Table 2. RAID 1 Overview ................................................................................12
Table 3. RAID 5 Overview ................................................................................13
Table 4. RAID 10 Overview ...............................................................................14
Table 5 mdadm monitor Parameters ..................................................................49
Table 6 Monitoring Events ................................................................................50
Table 7 SGPIO Utility Options ...........................................................................60
Table 8 ledctl options ......................................................................................61
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
6
Revision History
Document
Number
Revision
Number
Description Revision Date
327602 001 Initial Developer Release. June 2012
§
Introduction
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
7
1 Introduction
The purpose of this document is to enable a user to properly set up and configure a
system using the Linux MDADM application for Intel Matrix Storage. It provides steps
for set up and configuration, as well as a brief overview on Linux MDADM features.
Note: The information in this document is only relevant on systems with a supported Intel
chipset that include a supported Intel chipset, with a supported operating system.
Supported Intel chipsets -
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020644.htm
Supported operating systems -
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020648.htm
Note: The majority of the information in this document is related to either software
configuration or hardware integration. Intel is not responsible for the software written
by third party vendors or the implementation of Intel components in the products of
third party manufacturers.
Customers should always contact the place of purchase or system/software
manufacturer with support questions about their specific hardware or software
configuration.
Introduction
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
8
1.1 Terminology
Term Description
AHCI Advanced Host Controller Interface: an interface specification that
allows the storage driver to enable advanced Serial ATA features such
as Native Command Queuing, native hot plug, and power
management.
Continuous Update
Policy
When a recovery volume is using this policy, data on the master drive
is copied to the recovery drive automatically as long as both drives
are connected to the system.
Intel® Matrix Storage
Manager Option ROM
A code module built into the system BIOS that provides boot support
for RAID volumes as well as a user interface for configuring and
managing RAID volumes.
Master Drive The hard drive that is the designated source drive in a recovery
volume.
Matrix RAID Two independent RAID volumes within a single RAID array.
Member A hard drive used within a RAID array.
Hot- Plug* The unannounced removal and insertion of a Serial ATA hard drive
while the system is powered on.
NCQ Native Command Queuing: a command protocol in Serial ATA that
allows multiple commands to be outstanding within a hard drive at the
same time. The commands are dynamically reordered to increase hard
drive performance.
On Request Update
Policy
When a recovery volume is using this policy, data on the master drive
is copied to the recovery drive when you request it. Only changes
since the last update process are copied.
OS Operating System
Port0 A serial ATA port (connector) on a motherboard identified as Port0.
Port1 A serial ATA port (connector) on a motherboard identified as Port1.
Port2 A serial ATA port (connector) on a motherboard identified as Port2.
Port3 A serial ATA port (connector) on a motherboard identified as Port3.
POST Power-On Self Test
SAS Serial Attached SCSI
SCU SAS Controller Unit
Introduction
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
9
Term Description
RAID Redundant Array of Independent Drives: allows data to be distributed
across multiple hard drives to provide data redundancy or to enhance
data storage performance.
RAID 0 (striping) The data in the RAID volume is striped across the array's members.
Striping divides data into units and distributes those units across the
members without creating data redundancy, but improving read/write
performance.
RAID 1 (mirroring) The data in the RAID volume is mirrored across the RAID array's
members. Mirroring is the term used to describe the key feature of
RAID 1, which writes duplicate data to each member; therefore,
creating data redundancy and increasing fault tolerance.
RAID 5 (striping with
parity)
The data in the RAID volume and parity are striped across the array's
members. Parity information is written with the data in a rotating
sequence across the members of the array. This RAID level is a
preferred configuration for efficiency, fault-tolerance, and
performance.
RAID 10 (striping and
mirroring)
The RAID level where information is striped across a two disk array for
system performance. Each of the drives in the array has a mirror for
fault tolerance. RAID 10 provides the performance benefits of RAID 0
and the redundancy of RAID 1. However, it requires four hard drives.
RAID Array A logical grouping of physical hard drives.
RAID Volume A fixed amount of space across a RAID array that appears as a single
physical hard drive to the operating system. Each RAID volume is
created with a specific RAID level to provide data redundancy or to
enhance data storage performance.
Recovery Drive The hard drive that is the designated target drive in a recovery
volume.
Recovery Volume A volume utilizing Intel(R) Rapid Recover Technology.
Kilobyte Unit mount for 1024 bytes or 210 bytes
Megabyte Unit amount for 220 bytes
mdadm mdadm is a Linux utility created by Neil Brown to manage software
RAID devices on Linux. It is available under the GPL license version 2
or later.
Introduction
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
10
1.2 Reference Documents
Document Document
No./Location
mdadm manpages Linux
manpages
Ledmon manpages Linux
manpages
SMP Utils manpages Linux
manpages
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
11
2 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
Features
2.1 Feature Overview
The Intel® Matrix Storage Manager software package provides high-performance
Serial ATA and Serial ATA RAID capabilities for supported operating systems.
Supported operating systems -
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020648.htm
The key features of the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager are as follows:
RAID 0
RAID 1
RAID 5
RAID 10
Matrix RAID
Intel® Rapid Recover Technology
Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) support
SAS Controller Unit (SCU) support
2.2 RAID 0 (Striping)
RAID 0 uses the read/write capabilities of two or more hard drives working in parallel
to maximize the storage performance of a computer system.
Table 1 provides an overview of the advantages, the level of fault-tolerance provided,
and the typical usage of RAID 0.
Table 1. RAID 0 Overview
Hard Drives
Required:
2-6
Advantage: Highest transfer rates
Faulttolerance:
None – if one disk fails all data will be lost
Application: Typically used in desktops and workstations for maximum performance for
temporary data and high I/O rate. 2-drive RAID 0 available in specific mobile
configurations.
Refer to the following web site for more information on RAID 0:
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/iaa_raid/sb/CS-009337.htm
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
12
2.3 RAID 1 (Mirroring)
A RAID 1 array contains two hard drives where the data between the two is mirrored
in real time to provide good data reliability in the case of a single disk failure; when
one disk drive fails, all data is immediately available on the other without any impact
to the integrity of the data.
Table 2 provides an overview of the advantages, the level of fault-tolerance provided,
and the typical usage of RAID 1.
Table 2. RAID 1 Overview
Hard Drives
Required:
2
Advantage: 100% redundancy of data. One disk may fail, but data will continue to be
accessible. A rebuild to a new disk is recommended to maintain data
redundancy.
Faulttolerance:
Excellent – disk mirroring means that all data on one disk is duplicated on
another disk.
Application: Typically used for smaller systems where capacity of one disk is sufficient
and for any application(s) requiring very high availability. Available in
specific mobile configurations.
Refer to the following web site for more information on RAID 1:
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/iaa_raid/sb/CS-009338.htm
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
13
2.4 RAID 5 (Striping with Parity)
A RAID 5 array contains three or more hard drives where the data and parity are
striped across all the hard drives in the array. Parity is a mathematical method for
recreating data that was lost from a single drive, which increases fault-tolerance. If
there are N disks in the RAID 5 volume, the capacity for data would be N – 1 disks.
For example, if the RAID 5 volume has 5 disks, the data capacity for this RAID volume
consists of four disks.
Linux MDRAID supports four types of parity layout. However, Intel IMSM only supports
the left-asymmetric parity layout.
Table 3 provides an overview of the advantages, the level of fault-tolerance provided,
and the typical usage of RAID 5.
Table 3. RAID 5 Overview
Hard Drives
Required:
3-6
Advantage: Higher percentage of usable capacity and high read performance as well as
fault-tolerance.
Faulttolerance:
Excellent - parity information allows data to be rebuilt after replacing a failed
hard drive with a new drive.
Application: Storage of large amounts of critical data. Not available in mobile
configurations.
Refer to the following web site for more information on RAID 5:
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020653.htm
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
14
2.5 RAID 10
A RAID 10 array uses four hard drives to create a combination of RAID levels 0 and 1.
It is a striped set whose members are each a mirrored set.
Table 4 provides an overview of the advantages, the level of fault-tolerance provided,
and the typical usage of RAID 10.
Table 4. RAID 10 Overview
Hard Drives
Required:
4
Advantage: Combines the read performance of RAID 0 with the fault-tolerance of RAID
1.
Faulttolerance:
Excellent – disk mirroring means that all data on one disk is duplicated on
another disk.
Application: High-performance applications requiring data protection, such as video
editing. Not available in mobile configurations.
Refer to the following web site for more information on RAID 10:
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020655.htm
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
15
2.6 Matrix RAID
Matrix RAID allows you to create two RAID volumes on a single RAID array.
As an example, on a system with an Intel® 82801GR I/O controller hub (ICH7R),
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager allows you to create both a RAID 0 volume as well as
a RAID 5 volume across four Serial ATA hard drives. An important requirement the
Matrix RAID has is that in a Matrix RAID container, the volumes inside the container
must span the same set of member disks. Refer to Figure 1.
Figure 1. Matrix RAID
Refer to the following web site for more information on matrix RAID:
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020681.htm
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
16
2.7 Advanced Host Controller Interface
Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) is an interface specification that allows the
storage driver to enable advanced Serial ATA features such as Native Command
Queuing and Native Hot-Plug.
Intel chipsets that support AHCI:
http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm
2.7.1 Native Command Queuing
Native Command Queuing (NCQ) is a feature supported by AHCI that allows Serial
ATA hard drives to accept more than one command at a time. NCQ, when used in
conjunction with one or more hard drives that support NCQ, increases storage
performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the
order of commands.
Note: To take advantage of NCQ, you need the following:
Chipset that supports AHCI
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
One or more Serial ATA (SATA) hard drives that support NCQ
2.7.2 Hot-Plug
Hot-Plug, also referred to as hot swap, is a feature supported by AHCI that allows
Serial ATA hard drives to be removed or inserted while the system is powered on and
running. As an example, Hot-Plug may be used to replace a failed hard drive that is in
an externally-accessible drive enclosure.
Note: To take advantage of Hot-Plug, you need the following:
Chipset that supports AHCI
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
Hot-Plug capability correctly enabled in the system BIOS by the
OEM/motherboard manufacturer
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
17
2.8 SAS Controller Unit
SCU is the Intel® Serial Attached SCSI Controller Unit that is part of the C600 family
Platform Controller Hub. The Linux SCU driver (isci) has been upstreamed to the Linux
kernel since kernel version v3.0. However, the latest Linux kernel is always
recommended to get the latest bug fixes and features.
2.8.1 SCU OEM Parameters
The SCU driver requires proper OEM parameters to be loaded in order to set the
correct PHY settings. The appropriate OEM parameters shall be loaded from the
platform either from the OROM region if booting legacy or via EFI variable mechanism
if booting EFI. Below is an example of what you may see from the isci driver load. The
correct driver message displayed should be that the OEM parameter is loaded from
“platform”. This indicates the driver has found good OEM parameter from the OROM or
EFI.
isci: Intel(R) C600 SAS Controller Driver - version 1.1.0
isci 0000:03:00.0: driver configured for rev: 5 silicon
isci 0000:03:00.0: OEM parameter table found in OROM
isci 0000:03:00.0: OEM SAS parameters (version: 1.1) loaded (platform)
isci 0000:03:00.0: SCU controller 0: phy 3-0 cables: {short, short,
short, short}
scsi6 : isci
isci 0000:03:00.0: SCU controller 1: phy 3-0 cables: {short, short,
short, short}
scsi7 : isci
isci 0000:03:00.0: irq 110 for MSI/MSI-X
isci 0000:03:00.0: irq 111 for MSI/MSI-X
isci 0000:03:00.0: irq 112 for MSI/MSI-X
isci 0000:03:00.0: irq 113 for MSI/MSI-X
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
18
2.8.2 Linux libsas Sysfs Components
Linux provides driver information through sysfs, a virtual file system. The example
below provides some information on some of the libsas related components that can
be useful or informational. The sas related entries can be found in /sys/class sysfs
directory.
ls -1 /sys/class/ | grep sas
sas_device
sas_end_device
sas_expander
sas_host
sas_phy
sas_port
The sas_host directory contains all HBA attached to the computer system:
ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/
total 0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 13:45 host6 ->
../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho
st6/sas_host/host6
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 13:45 host7 ->
../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho
st7/sas_host/host7
Generally the /sys/class/sas_* directories contain symbolic links. Due to those
symbolic links can be quite long, in the follow on examples they will be omitted and
only link names will be shown.
ls -1 /sys/class/sas_expander/
expander-6:0
expander-7:0
In the expander-6:0 directory, 12 disks are shown to be attached. This can be
validated by looking into sas_end_device directory where all SAS end devices are
listed.
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
19
Below shows the devices attached to expander-6:0:
ls -1 /sys/class/sas_end_device/ | grep end_device-6
end_device-6:0:10
end_device-6:0:11
end_device-6:0:12
end_device-6:0:13
end_device-6:0:14
end_device-6:0:15
end_device-6:0:24
end_device-6:0:4
end_device-6:0:5
end_device-6:0:6
end_device-6:0:7
end_device-6:0:8
end_device-6:0:9
The example above shows that the first four PHYs in the expander are missing , and
24th phy is an extra virtual phy that is used by the expander internally.
The sas_phy directory contains all phys in the system, and the sas_port contains all
ports in the system.
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
20
To see the connection between components, it is better to transverse from the
sas_host directory. What is connected to host 6 can be seen here:
ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/
total 0
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 bsg
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:1
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:2
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:3
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 14:37 power
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_host
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 scsi_host
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:27 subsystem -> ../../../../../../../bus/scsi
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:27 uevent
And more:
ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/port-6\:0/
total 0
drwxr-xr-x 45 root root 0 May 18 09:27 expander-6:0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:36 phy-6:0 -> ../phy-6:0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:36 phy-6:1 -> ../phy-6:1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:36 phy-6:2 -> ../phy-6:2
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:36 phy-6:3 -> ../phy-6:3
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 14:36 power
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_port
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:27 uevent
Host 6 has 4 phys that are configured as a wide port, and this wide port is a
connection between the host and the expander (expander-6:0).
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
21
Below are the contents of the expander-6:0 directory:
ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/port-6\:0/expander-6\:0/
total 0
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 bsg
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:0
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:1
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:10
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:11
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:12
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:13
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:14
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:15
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:16
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:17
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:18
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:19
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:2
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:20
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:21
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:22
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:23
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:24
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:3
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:4
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:5
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:6
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:7
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:8
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
22
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:9
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:10
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:11
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:12
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:13
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:14
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:15
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:16
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:24
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:4
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:5
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:6
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:7
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:8
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:9
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 14:37 power
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_device
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_expander
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:27 uevent
The expander has 24 phys and 12 narrow ports. The contents of port-6:0:4 reveals
that some end devices are connected to that port/phy:
ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/port-6\:0/expander-6\:0/port-
6\:0\:4
total 0
drwxr-xr-x 7 root root 0 May 18 09:27 end_device-6:0:4
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:51 phy-6:0:4 -> ../phy-6:0:4
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 14:51 power
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_port
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:27 uevent
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
23
The Linux disk name can be found a few levels deeper:
ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/port-6\:0/expander-6\:0/port-
6\:0\:4/end_device-6\:0\:4/target6\:0\:0/6\:0\:0\:0/block/
total 0
drwxr-xr-x 7 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sdb
It can also be found in a different sysfs location:
ls -l /sys/block/ | grep port-6:0:4
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sdb ->
../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host
6/port-6:0/expander-6:0/port-6:0:4/end_device-6:0:4/target6:0:0/6:0:0:0/block/sdb
This is an Expander Attached (EA) configuration. In a Direct Attached (DA)
configuration the contents of host6 may look like:
ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/
total 0
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:39 bsg
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:17 phy-6:0
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:17 phy-6:1
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:17 phy-6:2
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:17 phy-6:3
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:06 port-6:0
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:02 port-6:1
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:08 port-6:2
drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:02 port-6:3
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 09:39 power
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:39 sas_host
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:39 scsi_host
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 subsystem -> ../../../../../../../bus/scsi
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:09 uevent
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
24
There are 4 phys and 4 narrow ports, and this means the 4 end devices are connected
directly to the HBA. This can be shown:
ls -l /sys/class/sas_end_device/ | grep end_device-6
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:16 end_device-6:0 ->
../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho
st6/port-6:0/end_device-6:0/sas_end_device/end_device-6:0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:16 end_device-6:1 ->
../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho
st6/port-6:1/end_device-6:1/sas_end_device/end_device-6:1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:16 end_device-6:2 ->
../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho
st6/port-6:2/end_device-6:2/sas_end_device/end_device-6:2
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:16 end_device-6:3 ->
../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho
st6/port-6:3/end_device-6:3/sas_end_device/end_device-6:3
Or by:
ls -l /sys/block/ | grep end_device-6
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 sdb ->
../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host
6/port-6:0/end_device-6:0/target6:0:4/6:0:4:0/block/sdb
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 sdc ->
../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host
6/port-6:1/end_device-6:1/target6:0:1/6:0:1:0/block/sdc
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 sdd ->
../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host
6/port-6:2/end_device-6:2/target6:0:5/6:0:5:0/block/sdd
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 sde ->
../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host
6/port-6:3/end_device-6:3/target6:0:3/6:0:3:0/block/sde
The structure of the sysfs filesystem is quite complex and full of links pointing to links.
Full description of sysfs is outside of the scope of this manual. This chapter discussed
only very briefly some major sysfs directories related to the SCU driver.
RAID BIOS / EFI Configuration
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
25
3 RAID BIOS / EFI Configuration
3.1 Overview
To install the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager, the system BIOS must include the
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager option ROM or EFI driver. The Intel® Matrix Storage
Manager option ROM / EFI driver is tied to the controller hub. For detailed
documentation please see the Intel® Rapid Storage Technology Enterprise (Intel®
RSTe) Software User’s Guide.
3.2 Enabling RAID in BIOS
To enable RAID in the system BIOS, refer to the motherboard or system
documentation or contact the motherboard or system manufacturer or place of
purchase for specific instructions.
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
26
4 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
Option ROM
4.1 Overview
The Intel® Matrix Storage Manager optional ROM is a PnP option ROM that provides a
pre-operating system user interface for RAID configurations. It also provides BIOS and
DOS disk services (Int13h).
4.2 User Interface
To enter the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager optional ROM user interface, press the
and keys simultaneously when prompted during the Power-On Self Test
(POST). Refer to Figure 2.
Figure 2. User Prompt
NOTE: The hard drive(s) and hard drive information listed for your system can differ from the
following example.
4.3 Version Identification
To identify the specific version of the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager option ROM
integrated into the system BIOS, enter the option ROM user interface. The version
number is located in the top right corner with the following format: vX.Y.W.XXXX,
where X and Y are the major and minor version numbers.
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
27
4.4 RAID Volume Creation
Use the following steps to create a RAID volume using the Intel® Matrix Storage
Manager user interface:
Note: The following procedure should only be used with a newly-built system or if you are
reinstalling your operating system. The following procedure should not be used to
migrate an existing system to RAID 0. If you wish to create matrix RAID volumes
after the operating system software is loaded, they should be created using the
MDADM tool in the Linux distribution.
1. Press the and keys simultaneously when the following window appears
during POST:
2. Select option 1. Create RAID Volume and press the key.
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
28
3. Type in a volume name and press the key, or press the key to
accept the default name.
4. Select the RAID level by using the <> or <> keys to scroll through the
available values, then press the key.
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
29
5. Press the key to select the physical disks. A dialog similar to the following
will appear:
6. Select the appropriate number of hard drives by using the <> or <> keys to
scroll through the list of available hard drives. .Press the key to select a
drive. When you have finished selecting hard drives, press the key.
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
30
7. Unless you have selected RAID 1, select the strip size by using the <> or <>
keys to scroll through the available values, then press the key.
8. Select the volume capacity and press the key. The default value indicates
the maximum volume capacity using the selected disks. If less than the maximum
volume capacity is chosen, creation of a second volume is needed to utilize the
remaining space (i.e. a matrix RAID configuration).
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
31
9. At the Create Volume prompt, press the key to create the volume. The
following prompt will appear:
10. Press the key to confirm volume creation.
11. To exit the option ROM user interface, select option 5. Exit and press the
key.
12. Press the key again to confirm exit.
Note: To change any of the information before the volume creation has been confirmed, you
must exit the Create Volume process and restart it. Press the key to exit the
Create Volume process.
Volume Creation
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
32
5 Volume Creation
RAID volumes can be created using the mdadm command line utility. Mdadm supports
the Intel Matrix Storage Manager (IMSM) meta data format when specified with the
IMSM meta data option.
5.1 RAID Volume Creation
Warning: Creating a RAID volume will permanently delete any existing data on the selected
hard drives. Back up all important data before beginning these steps.
Below is an example to create a RAID5 volume with 6 disks:
1. First a container of Intel IMSM metadata must be created.
mdadm -C /dev/md0 /dev/sd[b-g] –n 6 –e imsm
Continue creating array? y
mdadm: container /dev/md0 prepared.
The command creates a RAID container with Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
metadata format. The device node for the container will be /dev/md0. In this
example disks sdb, sdc, sdd, sde, sdf, and sdg are used for this RAID set, and the
total number of disks is 6. The wildcard expression /dev/sd[b-g] can be used to
specify the range of disks. Although individual disks can be used to list out all the
disks. i.e. /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd /dev/sde /dev/sdf /dev/sdg
2. Next a RAID 5 volume is created.
mdadm -C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 6 –l 5
The command creates a RAID 5 volume /dev/md/Volume0 within the /dev/md0
container.
The following command parameters may also be used in conjunction to give finer
control for the creation of the RAID volume.
-n : Number of active RAID devices to be used in the volume.
-x : Specifies the number of spare devices in the initial array.
-c : Specifies the chunk (stripe) size in Kilobytes. The default is 512KiB.
-l : Specifies the RAID level. The options are 0, 1, 5, 10.
-z : Specifies the size (in Kilobytes) of space dedicated on each disk to the RAID
volume. This must be a multiple of the chunk size. For example:
mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 3 –l 5 –z $((100*1024*1024))
The command above creates a RAID volume inside the /dev/md0 container with
100GB of disk space used on each disk member.
Volume Creation
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
33
5.2 Filesystem Creation on RAID Volume
After the RAID volume has been created, a filesystem can be created in order to allow
the mounting of the RAID volume.
mkfs.ext4 /dev/md/Volume0
Once the filesystem has been created, it can be mounted:
mount /dev/md/Volume0 /mnt/myraidvolume
5.3 RAID Volume Creation Examples
To create a RAID 0 volume, use the following example:
mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 2 –l 0
To create a RAID 1 volume, use the following example:
mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 2 –l 1
To create a RAID 5 volume, use the following example:
mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 3 –l 5
To create a RAID 10 volume, use the following example:
mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 4 –l 10
Note: To create multiple RAID volumes in the same container, they MUST span equal
number of disks. For example, in order to have a RAID 0 volume and a RAID 5 volume
in the same container, four disks must be used for both volumes.
Volume Creation
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
34
5.4 Adding a Spare Disk
Adding a spare disk allows immediate reconstruction of the RAID volume when a
device failure is detected. Mdraid will mark the failed device as “bad” and start
reconstruction with the first available spare disk. The spare disk can also be used to
grow the RAID volume. The spare disks sit idle during normal operations. When using
mdadm with IMSM meta data, the spare disk added to a container is dedicated to that
specific container. The following command adds a spare disk to the designated
container.
mdadm -a /dev/md0 /dev/sde
5.5 Creating RAID Configuration File
A configuration file can be created to record the existing RAID volumes. The
information can be extracted from the existing RAID setup. The configuration file is
typically stored at the default location of /etc/mdadm.conf. This allows a consistent
assemble of the appropriate RAID volumes.
mdadm -E –s –-config=mdadm.conf > /etc/mdadm.conf
5.6 RAID Volume Initialization / Resync
Immediately after a RAID volume has been created, initialization (or resync)
commences if the RAID level is 1, 10, or 5. During this time, any data stored on RAID
level 5 volumes are not guaranteed to be safe if failure occurs. If a disk failure
happens during the initialization time, recovery will not be possible. This scenario is
also true during RAID volume rebuilds.
Volume Operations
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
35
6 Volume Operations
mdadm provides various options to assemble, monitor, examine, or stop RAID
volumes.
6.1 Erasing RAID Metadata
Having incorrect and bad RAID metadata can cause RAID volumes to be assembled
incorrectly. The metadata can be erased with the following command to make sure the
disk is clean. This operation does not attempt to wipe existing user data.
mdadm --zero-superblock /dev/sdb
Multiple disks can be specified to clear the superblock at the same time.
6.2 Volume Assemble
RAID volumes can be created via OROM user interface or mdadm. Inactive RAID
volumes that are created can be activated using the assemble option with mdadm.
The following command scans for the mdadm configuration file at /etc/mdadm.conf in
order to assemble the RAID volumes. If the configuration file is not found, it scans all
available disks for RAID member disks and assembles all the RAID volumes:
mdadm –A –s
To manually assemble and activate RAID volumes without the configuration file, the
following example can be used:
mdadm –A /dev/md0 –e imsm /dev/sda /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd
mdadm –I /dev/md0
The first command assembles the container with the name /dev/md0 using the
provided list of disks. The second command assembles and activates appropriate
volumes with the device nodes.
Volume Operations
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
36
6.3 Stopping the Volumes
To stop all active RAID volumes, the following command can be used. Mdadm will scan
for and stop all running RAID volumes and containers.
mdadm –S –s
However, RAID volume names can be specified to stop the volume directly.
mdadm –S /dev/md/Volume0
And to stop a container, the following command can be used.
mdadm –S /dev/md0
6.4 Reporting RAID Information
Use the following command, to print out details about a RAID container or volume:
mdadm –D /dev/md0
/dev/md0:
Version : imsm
Raid Level : container
Total Devices : 5
Working Devices : 5
UUID : b559b502:b199f86f:ee9fbd40:cd10e91d
Member Arrays :
Number Major Minor RaidDevice
0 8 32 - /dev/sdc
1 8 48 - /dev/sdd
2 8 80 - /dev/sdf
3 8 96 - /dev/sdg
4 8 16 - /dev/sdb
Volume Operations
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
37
To display details about a RAID volume:
mdadm –D /dev/md/Volume0
/dev/md/Volume0:
Container : /dev/md0, member 0
Raid Level : raid5
Array Size : 39999488 (38.15 GiB 40.96 GB)
Used Dev Size : 9999872 (9.54 GiB 10.24 GB)
Raid Devices : 5
Total Devices : 5
Update Time : Thu Jun 17 07:40:23 2010
State : clean
Active Devices : 5
Working Devices : 5
Failed Devices : 0
Spare Devices : 0
Layout : left-asymmetric
Chunk Size : 128K
UUID : 084d2b20:09897744:36757c5b:77e0e945
Number Major Minor RaidDevice State
4 8 96 0 active sync /dev/sdg
3 8 48 1 active sync /dev/sdd
2 8 32 2 active sync /dev/sdc
1 8 16 3 active sync /dev/sdb
0 8 80 4 active sync /dev/sdf
Volume Operations
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
38
To print out RAID details about a member disk:
mdadm –E /dev/sdb
/dev/sdb:
Magic : Intel Raid ISM Cfg Sig.
Version : 1.2.04
Orig Family : e0935e91
Family : a830104b
Generation : 00000037
UUID : b559b502:b199f86f:ee9fbd40:cd10e91d
Checksum : 3ba66395 correct
MPB Sectors : 2
Disks : 5
RAID Devices : 1
Disk02 Serial : 9QMCLMDM
State : active
Id : 00000000
Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB)
[vol0]:
UUID : 084d2b20:09897744:36757c5b:77e0e945
RAID Level : 5
Members : 5
Slots : [UUUUU]
This Slot : 3
Array Size : 79998976 (38.15 GiB 40.96 GB)
Per Dev Size : 19999744 (9.54 GiB 10.24 GB)
Sector Offset : 0
Num Stripes : 19531
Volume Operations
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
39
Chunk Size : 128 KiB
Reserved : 0
Migrate State : idle
Map State : normal
Dirty State : clean
Disk00 Serial : 9QMCLYES
State : active
Id : 00000000
Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB)
Disk01 Serial : 9QMCLYB9
State : active
Id : 00000000
Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB)
Disk03 Serial : 9QMCM7XY
State : active
Id : 00000000
Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB)
Disk04 Serial : 9QMCF38Z
State : active
Id : 00000000
Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB)
Volume Operations
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
40
To get the most current status on all RAID volumes, the file /proc/mdstat can be
examined. This file is a special file that is updated continuously to show the status of
all the containers, and RAID volumes. In the example below, the status shows that
currently available RAID supports are level 4, 5, and 6. md126 is the active RAID
volume with RAID level 5 and 128k stripe size. The RAID volume contains 5 disks that
are all in normal (UP) status. md127 is the IMSM container for the RAID volume.
cat /proc/mdstat
Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active raid5 sdg[4] sdd[3] sdc[2] sdb[1] sdf[0]
39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk,
algorithm 0 [5/5] [UUUUU]
md0 : inactive sdb[4](S) sdg[3](S) sdf[2](S) sdd[1](S) sdc[0](S)
11285 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
Note: When creating containers and volumes, one will notice that in /proc/mdstat the
device names will not match up. For example, when /dev/md/Volume0 is created,
md127 will be shown in /proc/mdstat and other detail output as well. The
/dev/md/Volume0 is created as an alias of /dev/md127 device node. Looking in the
/dev/md directory, one will notice that /dev/md/Volume0 is a soft link to /dev/md127.
Volume Operations
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
41
6.5 To Fail an Active Drive
In order to mark an active drive as a failed drive (or set as faulty) manually, the
following command can to be issued:
mdadm –f /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/sdb
6.6 Remove a Failed Drive
To remove a failed drive, the following command needs to be executed. This only
works on a container based RAID volume.
mdadm –r /dev/md0 /dev/sdb
6.7 Report RAID Details from BIOS
To see what Intel® RAID support is provided by the BIOS issue the command:
mdadm -–detail-platform
Platform : Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager
Version : 8.9.0.1023
RAID Levels : raid0 raid1 raid10 raid5
Chunk Sizes : 4k 8k 16k 32k 64k 128k
Max Disks : 6
Max Volumes : 2
I/O Controller : /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1f.2
Port0 : /dev/sda (3MT0585Z)
Port1 : - non-disk device (ATAPI DVD D DH16D4S) -
Port2 : /dev/sdb (WD-WCANK2850263)
Port3 : /dev/sdc (3MT005ML)
Port4 : /dev/sdd (WD-WCANK2850441)
Port5 : /dev/sde (WD-WCANK2852905)
Port6 : - no device attached –
Volume Operations
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
42
6.8 Logging
Various messages coming from MDRAID subsystem in the kernel are logged. Typically
the messages are stored in the log file /var/log/messages in popular Linux
distributions with other kernel status, warning, and error outputs. Below is an example
snippet of what the log may look like:
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: raid5: allocated 5334kB for md126
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 0: w=1 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 1: w=2 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 2: w=3 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 3: w=4 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 4: w=5 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: raid5: raid level 5 set md126 active with 5 out of 5
devices, algorithm 0
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: RAID5 conf printout:
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: --- rd:5 wd:5
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 0, o:1, dev:sdg
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 1, o:1, dev:sdd
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 2, o:1, dev:sdc
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 3, o:1, dev:sdb
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 4, o:1, dev:sdf
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md127: detected capacity change from 0 to
40959475712
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md127: unknown partition table
Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md: md127 switched to read-write mode.
Volume Operations
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
43
6.9 Raid Level Migration
The RAID level migration feature allows changing of the RAID volume level without
loss of data stored on the volume. It does not require re-installation of the operating
system. All applications and data remain intact.
The following table shows the available migration support with Intel© IMSM metadata.
You must have the number of drives necessary for the level you’re converting to as
spare drives.
Migration capabilities with IMSM
Destination
Source level
RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 10 RAID 5
RAID 0 N/A No Yes Yes
RAID 1 Yes N/A No *Yes
RAID 10 Yes No N/A *Yes
RAID 5 No No No N/A
*Migrations from RAID 1 to RAID 5 or from RAID 10 to RAID 5 must be done in two
steps. A conversion to RAID 0 first is necessary before converting to RAID 5. During
the second step (migration from RAID 0 to RAID 5) the addition of spare drive(s) may
be needed. There is an example of migration from RAID 1 to RAID 5 below:
1) A RAID 1 is shown below:
cat /proc/mdstat
Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0]
102400 blocks super external:/md0/0 [2/2] [UU]
md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S)
2210 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
Volume Operations
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
44
2) First step is to migrate from RAID 1 to RAID 0
mdadm –G /dev/md127 –l 0
cat /proc/mdstat
Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active raid0 sdb[1]
102400 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks
md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S)
2210 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
3) Use Online Capacity Expansion to go from 1-disk RAID 0 to 2-disk RAID 0:
# mdadm -G /dev/md0 -n 2
# cat /proc/mdstat
Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active raid0 sda[2] sdb[1]
204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks
md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S)
2210 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
4) Adding a spare disk to the container:
mdadm -a /dev/md0 /dev/sdc
cat /proc/mdstat
Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active raid0 sda[2] sdb[1]
204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks
md0 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S)
3315 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
Volume Operations
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
45
5) Migrating from RAID 0 to RAID 5:
mdadm -G /dev/md127 -l 5 --layout=left-asymmetric
cat /proc/mdstat
Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active raid5 sdc[3] sda[2] sdb[1]
204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 64k chunk,
algorithm 0 [3/3] [UUU]
md0 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S)
3315 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
***NOTE: IMSM metadata supports only the left-asymmetric layout of RAID
5. The default layout is left-symmetric, so during migrations the layout for
IMSM metadata has to be specified explicitly.
Volume Operations
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
46
6.10 Freezing Reshape
If a RAID volume is in the process of reshape, the reshape process should be frozen
during the initramfs booting phase and resumed when the system is fully up. Starting
with mdadm 3.2.5 these features are supported. Distributions from the Operating
System Vendors should have taken cared of this in their init script setup utilities, but
details are described below for customers that are building their own distribution.
The parameters --freeze-reshape is used to pause the reshape operation during
system start up initramfs phase. For example:
mdadm –As --freeze-reshape
When reshape is frozen, the status provided by /proc/mdstat will denote the state
with a hypen such as “super external:-md127/0” instead of “super
external:/md127/0”:
Personalities : [raid5]
md127 : active raid5 sda[2] sdb[1] sdc[0]
10485760 blocks super external:-md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk,
algorithm 0 [3/3] [UUU]
[>....................] reshape = 2.2% (116736/5242880)
finish=501934.9min speed=0K/sec
md0 : inactive sda[2](S) sdb[1](S) sdc[0](S)
9459 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
Once the system is up, the following example with the parameter --continue can be
used to resume the reshape process:
mdadm –G /dev/md0 --continue
or with a volume:
mdadm –G /dev/md/Volume0 --continue
Online Capacity Expansion
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
47
7 Online Capacity Expansion
The Online Capacity Expansion (OLCE) feature allows the capacity expansion of the
RAID volumes. With the “online” feature, the operation can be performed while a
filesystem is mounted on top of the RAID volume. This allows avoiding having down
time from taking the RAID volume offline for service or loss of data.
The size of a RAID volume can be increased by adding additional disks to the RAID
container or (only if it is the last volume in the container) by expanding it on existing
unused disk space available to the RAID volume. In the first case if two volumes exist
in the same container, OLCE is performed automatically on both volumes (one by one)
because of the requirement that all volumes must span the same set of disks for
IMSM.
The following commands can be issued to grow the RAID volume. The first assumes
that it is the last volume in the container and we have additional room to grow, and
the second assumes that an additional disk has been added to the IMSM container.
1) If there is additional room in the last volume of the container, the volume can
be grown to the maximum available capacity. This feature is only available
starting with mdadm v3.2.5:
mdadm –G /dev/md/Volume0 –-size=max
2) The example below adds a single disk to the RAID container and then grows the
volume(s). Because IMSM volumes inside a container must span the same
number of disks, all volumes are expanded. A backup file that MDRAID will store
the backup superblock is specified. This file must not reside on any of the active
RAID volumes that are being worked on.
mdadm –a /dev/md0 /dev/sde
mdadm –G /dev/md0 –n 4 --backup-file=/tmp/backup
RAID Monitoring
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
48
8 RAID Monitoring
There are two components within the mdadm tools to monitor events for the RAID
volumes. Mdadm can be used to monitor general RAID events, and mdmon provides
the ability to monitor “metadata event” occurrences such as disk failures, clean-todirty
transitions, and etc for external metadata based RAID volumes. The kernel
provides the ability to report such actions to the userspace via sysfs, and mdmon
takes action accordingly with the monitoring capability. The mdmon polls the sysfs
looking for changes in the entries array_state, sync_action, and per disk state
attribute files.
8.1 mdmon
The mdadm monitor, mdmon, is automatically started when MDRAID volumes are
activated by mdadm through creation or assemble. However, the daemon can be
started manually:
mdmon /dev/md0
The --all parameter can be used in place of the container name to star monitors for all
active containers.
Mdmon must be started in the initramfs in order to support an external metadata
RAID array as the root filesystem. Mdmon needs to be restarted in the new
namespace once the final root filesystem has been mounted.
mdmon --takeover --all
RAID Monitoring
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
49
8.2 Monitoring Using mdadm
Mdadm monitoring can be started with the following command line:
mdadm --monitor –-scan --daemonise –-syslog
The command above runs mdadm as a daemon to monitor all md devices. All events
will be reported to syslog. The user can monitor the syslog and filter for specific
mdadm events generated.
There are additional command line parameters that can be passed to mdmon at
startup.
Table 5 mdadm monitor Parameters
Long form Short form Description
--mail -m Provide mail address to email alerts or failures to.
--program or
--alert
-p Provide program to run when an event is detected.
--delay -d Seconds of delay between polling state. Default is
60s.
--config -c Specify a different config file.
--scan -s Find mail-address/program settings in config file.
--oneshot -1 Check for degraded arrays and then exit.
--test -t Generate a TestMessage event against each array at
startup.
--syslog -y Cause all events to be reported through ’syslog’. The
messages have facility of ’daemon’ and varying
priorities.
--increment -r Give a percentage increment. mdadm will generate
RebuildNN events with the given percentage
increment.
--daemonise -f Run as background daemon if monitoring.
--pid-file -i Write the pid of the daemon process to specified file.
--no-sharing N/A This inhibits the functionality for moving spares
between arrays.
RAID Monitoring
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
50
The following table presents all the events that are reported by mdadm monitor:
Table 6 Monitoring Events
Event Name Description
DeviceDisappeared An MD array previously configured no longer exists.
RebuildStarted An MD array started reconstruction.
RebuildNN NN is a 2 digit number that indicates rebuild has passed that
many percent of the total. For example, Rebuild50 will trigger
an event when 50% of rebuild has completed.
RebuildFinished An MD array has completed rebuild.
Fail1 An active component of an array has been marked faulty.
FailSpare1 A spare device that was being rebuilt to replace a faulty device
has failed.
SpareActive A spare device that was being rebuilt to replace a fault device
is rebuilt and active.
NewArrary A new MD array has been detected in /proc/mdstat.
DegradedArray1 A newly discovered array appears to be degraded.
MoveSpare A spare drive has been moved from one array in a spare group
to another array to replace a failed disk. Both arrays are
labeled with the same spare group.
SparesMissing1 The spare device(s) does not exist in comparison to the config
file when the MD array is first discovered.
TestMessage1 Discovered new array while --test flag was used.
1: The events indicated cause email to be sent.
RAID Monitoring
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
51
8.3 Configuration File for Monitoring
Mdadm will check the mdadm.conf config file to extract the appropriate entries for
monitoring. The following entries we can set to pass to mdmon:
MAILADDR: This config entry allows an E-mail address to be used for alerts. Only one
email address should be used.
MAILFROM: This config entry sets the email address to appear from the alert emails.
The default from would be the “root” user with no domain. This entry
overrides the default.
PROGRAM: This config entry sets the program to run when mdmon detects
potentially interesting events on any of the arrays it is monitoring. There
can be only one PROGRAM line in the config file.
RAID Monitoring
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
52
8.4 Examples of monitored events in syslog
In this example we have a RAID5 volume:
Personalities : [raid5]
md127 : active raid5 sdd[2] sdc[1] sdb[0]
204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk, algorithm
0 [3/3] [UUU]
md0 : inactive sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S)
3315 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
In order to monitor all RAID containers a mdadm daemon can be started using the
following command:
mdadm --monitor --scan --daemonise --syslog
All events now will be written to syslog. After a mdadm daemon has been started the
following messages can be found in /var/log/messages or the corresponding syslog file
the distribution has designated:
May 15 09:58:40 myhost mdadm[9863]: NewArray event detected on md device
/dev/md127
May 15 09:58:40 myhost mdadm[9863]: NewArray event detected on md device
/dev/md0
When a spare disk has been added:
May 15 09:59:07 myhost mdadm[9863]: SpareActive event detected on md
device /dev/md127, component device /dev/sde
When an OLCE command is finished:
May 15 09:59:16 myhost mdadm[9863]: RebuildFinished event detected on md
device /dev/md127
When a disk fails:
May 15 10:01:04 myhost mdadm[9863]: Fail event detected on md device
/dev/md127, component device /dev/sdb
When a rebuild finishes:
May 15 10:02:22 myhost mdadm[9863]: RebuildFinished event detected on md
device /dev/md127
May 15 10:02:22 myhost mdadm[9863]: SpareActive event detected on md
device /dev/md127
When all MD devices are stopped:
May 15 10:03:27 myhost mdadm[9863]: DeviceDisappeared event detected on
md device /dev/md127
May 15 10:03:27 myhost mdadm[9863]: DeviceDisappeared event detected on
md device /dev/md0
Recovery of RAID Volumes
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
53
9 Recovery of RAID Volumes
Recovery is one of the most important aspects of using RAID. It allows rebuilding of
RAID volumes on a system when disk failure occurs without the loss of any data.
Recovery is only possible in the case of following RAID levels: 1, 5, and 10. General
recovery is possible if no more than one disk fails. However in the case of RAID 10,
recovery may be possible even if two out of four disks fail if the two failed disks are
members of two different RAID 1S. If both disks of one of the RAID 1 fails, recovery is
not possible.
9.1 Removing Failed Disk(s)
Below is the output of /proc/mdstat with an active RAID5 volume with IMSM metadata
where md127 is the IMSM container and md126 is the RAID 5 volume. The RAID 5
volume contains disks /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc, /dev/sdd, /dev/sde, /dev/sdf.
Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active (read-only) raid5 sde[4] sdd[3] sdc[2] sdb[1] sdf[0]
39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk,
algorithm 0 [5/5] [UUUUU]
md0 : inactive sdb[4](S) sdf[3](S) sde[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdd[0](S)
11285 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
When a disk fails, in this instance /dev/sde, the following is displayed in /proc/mdstat:
Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active raid5 sdf[4] sdb[3] sdc[2] sdd[1]
39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk,
algorithm 0 [5/4] [_UUUU]
md0 : inactive sdf[4](S) sde[3](S) sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S)
1045 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
The failed disk can be removed from the RAID volume by the following command:
mdadm /dev/md/Volume0 --fail detached --remove detached
or from the container by the following command:
mdadm --remove /dev/md0 /dev/sde
Recovery of RAID Volumes
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
54
9.2 Rebuilding
At this point, this RAID volume is running in degraded mode. However, it is still
operational. If there are spares disks available in the container, rebuild of the RAID
volume would automatically commence. A spare can also be manually added to start
the rebuild process:
mdadm –add /dev/md0 /dev/sdg
Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4]
md127 : active raid5 sdg[5] sdf[4] sdb[3] sdc[2] sdd[1]
39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk,
algorithm 0 [5/4] [_UUUU]
[==>..................] recovery = 11.5% (1154588/9999872)
finish=2.6min speed=54980K/sec
md0 : inactive sdg[5](S) sdf[4](S) sde[3](S) sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S)
sdb[0](S)
1254 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
Recovery of RAID Volumes
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
55
9.3 Auto Rebuild
Auto-rebuild allows a RAID volume to be automatically rebuilt when a disk fails. There
are 3 different scenarios this can happen:
1. There is a rebuild capable RAID volume with no spare disk in the
container. If one of the disks in the volume fails it enters degraded mode.
When a spare disk is added manually to the container, rebuild starts
automatically (as referenced in section 9.2 Rebuilding).
2. There is a rebuild capable RAID volume with at least one spare disk in the
container. If one of the disks in the volume fails, the spare disk is
automatically pulled in, and the rebuild starts.
3. There are two containers . One container has a spare disk and the other
one does not. If mdadm is running in monitor mode, and the appropriate
policy is configured in the mdadm.conf file, a spare disk will be moved
automatically from one container to the other if there’s a RAID volume
failure that requires a spare disk for rebuild.
For scenario number three, an example is presented below:
1. Create container ”md1” with 3 disks:
mdadm –C /dev/md1 –e imsm –n3 /dev/sda /dev/sdb /dev/sdc
2. Create RAID1 volume “Volume1” in container”md1”, disk /dev/sdc remains a
spare disk:
mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume1 –l1 –n2 /dev/sda /dev/sdb
3. Create container “md2” with 2 disks:
mdadm –C /dev/md2 –e imsm –n2 /dev/sdd /dev/sde
Recovery of RAID Volumes
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
56
4. Create RAID1 volume “Volume2” in container ”md2”, with no spare disks:
mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume2 –l1 –n2 /dev/sdd /dev/sde
Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0]
md126: active raid1 sde[1] sdd[0]
1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/2] [UU]
md2 : inactive sde[1](S) sdd[0](S)
2210 blocks super external:imsm
md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0]
1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU]
md1 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S)
3315 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
Recovery of RAID Volumes
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
57
5. Save configuration file:
mdadm –Ebs > /etc/mdadm.conf
6. Add the policy with the same domain and the same action for all disks to the
configuration file, which allows the spare to move from one container to another
for rebuild:
echo "POLICY domain=DOMAIN path=* metadata=imsm action=spare-sameslot"
>> /etc/mdadm.conf
The configuration file in /etc/mdadm.conf may look like below:
ARRAY metadata=imsm UUID=67563d6a:3d253ad0:6e649d99:01794f88 spares=1
ARRAY /dev/md/Volume2 container=67563d6a:3d253ad0:6e649d99:01794f88
member=0 UUID=76e507f1:fadb9a42:da46d784:2e2166e8
ARRAY metadata=imsm UUID=267445e7:458c89eb:bd5176ce:c37281b7
ARRAY /dev/md/Volume1 container=267445e7:458c89eb:bd5176ce:c37281b7
member=0 UUID=25025077:fba9cfab:e4ad212d:3e5fce11
POLICY domain=DOMAIN path=* metadata=imsms action=spare-same-slot
7. Make sure mdadm is in monitor mode:
mdadm --monitor --scan –daemonise
Recovery of RAID Volumes
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
58
8. Fail one of the disks in volume “Volume2”, the volume without a spare:
mdadm --fail /dev/md/Volume2 /dev/sdd
The spare disk /dev/sdc should automatically moves from the container “md1” to the
container “md2” and the rebuild of “Volume2” starts automatically:
Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0]
md126: active raid1 sdc[2] sde[1]
1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/1] [_U]
[========>............] recovery = 41.2% (432896/1048576)
finish=0.0min
speed=144298K/sec
md2 : inactive sdc[2](S) sde[1](S) sdd[0](S)
5363 blocks super external:imsm
md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0]
1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU]
md1 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S)
2210 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
Recovery of RAID Volumes
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
59
When the rebuild has completed:
Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0]
md126: active raid1 sdc[2] sde[1]
1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/2] [UU]
md2 : inactive sdc[2](S) sde[1](S) sdd[0](S)
5363 blocks super external:imsm
md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0]
1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU]
md1 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S)
2210 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
SGPIO
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
60
10 SGPIO
Serial General Purpose Input/Output (SGPIO) is a four signal bus used between a
storage controller and a backplane. The official name designated to SGPIO is
SFF-8485 by the Small Form Factor (SFF) Committee. SGPIO provides the capability
of blinking LEDs on disk arrays and storage backplanes to indicate statuses.
10.1 SGPIO Utility
Linux uses the utility SGPIO to control the LEDs on a hard disk drive bay enclosure.
The following table describes the options the SGPIO utility provides:
Table 7 SGPIO Utility Options
-h, --help Displays the help text
-V, --version Displays the utility version and AHCI SGPIO specification version
-d, --disk Disk name of LED location. i.e. sda, sdb, sdc. Can be comma delimited
list
-p, --port SATA port number of LED location. Can be used when a disk name is
no longer valid. i.e. 0, 1, 2, 4. Can be comma delimited list
-s, --status The LED status to set to: locate, fault, rebuild, off
-f, --freq The frequency of the LED blinking in Hz between 1 and 10.
For example, the following command sets sda, sdb, and sdc LEDs to fault with a
frequency of 3Hz Flash rate:
sgpio –d sda,sdb,sdc –s fault –f 3
SGPIO
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
61
10.2 Ledctl Utility
The LEDs can also be manipulated via the ledctl utility. The ledctl utility has been
verified to work with Intel® storage controllers such as the AHCI and SCU.
Below are some examples on using the ledctl utility:
To locate a single block device:
ledctl locate=/dev/sda
To locate a RAID device
ledctl locate=/dev/md127
To set a rebuild pattern for 4 block devices in a RAID:
ledctl rebuild={/sys/block/sd[a-d]}
To turn off status and failure LED for a given device:
ledctl off=/dev/sda,/dev/sdb
The ledctl utility has the command format of:
ledctl [OPTIONS] pattern_name=list_of_devices
The table below shows all the options:
Table 8 ledctl options
Parameter Usage
-c or --config= Specify path to a configuration file or override the global or default
config file. (Although the utility currently does not use a config
file).
-l or --log= Sets the path to a user specified log file. If this option is specified
the global log file /var/log/ledctl.log is not used.
-h or --help= Prints out help text and exits.
--quiet Suppress messages to stdout and stderr, but does not prevent log
to file.
-v or –version Prints out version and license information and exits.
SGPIO
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
62
The table below shows all the “patterns” that can be specified:
Pattern Name Usage
locate Turns locate LED on for given device(s) or associated empty
slot(s).
locate_off Turns locate LEDs off.
normal Turns status, failure, and locate LEDs off.
off Turns status and failure LEDs off.
ica or degraded Display “in a critical array” pattern.
rebuild or
rebuild_p
Display “rebuild” pattern.
ifa or
failed_array
Display “in a failed array” pattern.
hotspare Display “hotspare” pattern.
pfa Display “predicted failure analysis” pattern.
failure or
disk_failed
Display “failure” pattern.
SGPIO
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
63
10.3 Ledmon Service
Ledmon is a daemon service that monitors the state of MDRAID devices or a block
device. The service monitors all RAID volumes. There is no method to specify
individual volumes to monitor. Like ledctl, ledmon has only been verified with Intel®
storage controllers.
Ledmon can be run with the following options listed below:
Option Usage
-c or --configpath=
Sets the configuration file path. This overrides any other
configuration files. (Although the utility currently does not use a
config file).
-l or --log-path Sets the path to a log file. This overrides /var/log/ledmon.log.
-t or --interval= Sets the time interval in seconds between scans of the sysfs. A
minimum of 5 seconds is set.
--quiet, --error, -
--warning, --info,
--debug, --all
Specifies verbosity level of the log - 'quiet' means no logging at
all, and 'all' means to log everything. The levels are given in
order. If user specifies more than one verbose option the last
option comes into effect.
-h or --help Prints help text and exits.
-v or --version Prints version and license information, then exits.
SAS Management Protocol Utilities
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
64
11 SAS Management Protocol
Utilities
smp_utils is a set of command line utilities that are used to invoke SAS Management
Protocol (SMP) functions to monitor and manage SAS expanders. More information
about smp_utils, package contents and usage examples can be found at:
http://sg.danny.cz/sg/smp_utils.html
Below are some helpful commands that are described together with usage examples.
11.1 smp_discover
smp_discover utility sends the SMP DISCOVER Request to a SMP Target. It may be
used to check what devices are attached to the HBA or an expander.
11.1.1 Examples
Finding an HBA:
ls -l /dev/bsg/sas_host*
crw-rw---- 1 root root 253, 1 May 16 16:32 /dev/bsg/sas_host6
crw-rw---- 1 root root 253, 2 May 16 16:32 /dev/bsg/sas_host7
In this example 2 SAS Hosts were found. Numbers in sas_host* will change for
instance when unloading and loading driver module.
SAS Management Protocol Utilities
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
65
To see what is connected to the sas_host6:
smp_discover /dev/bsg/sas_host6
Discover response:
phy identifier: 0
attached device type: expander device
negotiated logical link rate: phy enabled; 3 Gbps
attached initiator: ssp=0 stp=0 smp=1 sata_host=0
attached sata port selector: 0
attached target: ssp=0 stp=0 smp=1 sata_device=0
SAS address: 0x5001e6734b8d2000
attached SAS address: 0x50000d166a80e87f
attached phy identifier: 0
programmed minimum physical link rate: not programmable
hardware minimum physical link rate: not programmable
programmed maximum physical link rate: not programmable
hardware maximum physical link rate: not programmable
phy change count: 0
virtual phy: 0
partial pathway timeout value: 0 us
routing attribute: direct
SAS Management Protocol Utilities
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
66
To probe the PHYs attached to the host controller:
smp_discover -m /dev/bsg/sas_host6
Device <5001e6734b8d2000>, expander:
phy 0:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps
phy 1:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps
phy 2:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps
phy 3:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps
In this example sas_host6 is connected to an expander device with all 4 phys. Such
configuration creates a wide port.
To see what expander is connected to sas_host6, a simple check in sysfs can be
performed:
ls /sys/class/bsg/sas_host6/device/port-6:0/
expander-6:0 phy-6:0 phy-6:1 phy-6:2 phy-6:3 power sas_port uevent
SAS Management Protocol Utilities
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
67
To see what is connected to the expander-6:0:
smp_discover -m /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0
Device <50000d166a80e87f>, expander:
phy 0:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00]
phy 1:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00]
phy 2:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00]
phy 3:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00]
phy 4:T:attached:[5000c50017ae9815:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 5:T:attached:[5000c5000051fe39:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 6:T:attached:[5000c50005f437a9:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 7:T:attached:[5000c50005f4373d:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 8:T:attached:[5000c50001cd61d1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 9:T:attached:[5000c50023c799a1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 10:T:attached:[5000c50001ab182d:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 11:T:attached:[5000c50005fba135:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 12:T:attached:[5000c5000490c705:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 13:T:attached:[5000c5000051fca9:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 14:T:attached:[5000c500076a4ab5:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 15:T:attached:[5000c50005fd6cb1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
phy 16:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:02 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps
phy 17:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:03 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps
phy 18:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:00 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps
phy 19:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:01 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps
phy 20:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00]
phy 21:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00]
phy 22:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00]
phy 23:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00]
phy 24:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87e:24 V i(SSP) t(SSP)] 3 Gbps
In this example to the expander 12 SAS disks are connected (phy4-15). Phys 16-19
are occupied by wide port (connection to HBA) and Phy24 is a virtual phy.
More information about this utility can be found in the smp_discover(8) man page.
SAS Management Protocol Utilities
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
68
11.2 smp_phy_control
smp_phy_control utility sends the PHY CONTROL request to a SMP Target. Using this
utility administrator can for instance disable the phy.
11.2.1 Examples
To disable phy:
smp_phy_control --phy=4 --op=di /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0
To enable it again:
smp_phy_control --phy=4 --op=lr /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0
More information about this utility can be found in the smp_phy_control(8) man page.
11.3 smp_rep_manufacturer
smp_rep_manufacturer utility sends the REPORT MANUFACTURER INFORMATION
request to a SMP Target.
11.3.1 Examples
smp_rep_manufacturer -vvvv /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0
smp_initiator_open: interface not recognized
Report manufacturer information request: 40 01 00 00 00 00 00 00
send_req_sgv4: fd=3, subvalue=0
send_req_sgv4: driver_status=0, transport_status=0
device_status=0, duration=0, info=0
din_resid=0, dout_resid=0
Report manufacturer response:
Expander change count: 0
SAS-1.1 format: 0
vendor identification: PMCSIERA
product identification: SXP 36x3G
product revision level: REVA
More information about this utility can be found in the smp_rep_manufacturer(8) man
page.
SAS Management Protocol Utilities
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
69
11.4 smp_rep_general
smp_rep_general utility sends the REPORT GENERAL request to a SMP Target.
11.4.1 Examples
mp_rep_general -vvvv /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0
Report general request: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
send_req_sgv4: fd=3, subvalue=0
send_req_sgv4: driver_status=0, transport_status=0
device_status=0, duration=0, info=0
din_resid=0, dout_resid=0
Report general response:
expander change count: 547
expander route indexes: 1024
long response: 0
number of phys: 25
table to table supported: 0
zone configuring: 0
self configuring: 0
STP continue AWT: 0
open reject retry supported: 0
configures others: 0
configuring: 0
externally configurable route table: 0
enclosure logical identifier
More information about this utility can be found in the smp_rep_general(8) man page.
MDRAID Sysfs Components
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
70
12 MDRAID Sysfs Components
Just like the isci driver and libsas, the MDRAID subsystem also has sysfs components
that provides information or can be used to tweak behavior and performance. All
MDRAID devices present in the system are shown in:
/sys/block/
Example:
ls -l /sys/block/md*
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 /sys/block/md126 ->
../devices/virtual/block/md126
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 /sys/block/md127 ->
../devices/virtual/block/md127
Mapping between a device number and its name can be found:
ls -l /dev/md/
total 0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 8 May 17 13:26 imsm0 -> ../md127
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 8 May 17 13:26 raid1 -> ../md126
md127 is imsm0 and md126 is raid1.
MDRAID Sysfs Components
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
71
Md devices in /sys/block are symbolic links pointing to the /sys/devices/virtual/block.
All MD Devices are in the ‘md’ subdirectory in /sys/devices/virtual/block/mdXYZ
directory. In the md directory the following contents can be found:
ls -l /sys/devices/virtual/block/md127/md
total 0
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 array_size
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_state
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 13:18 bitmap
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 chunk_size
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 component_size
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdb
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdc
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 layout
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 level
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 max_read_errors
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 metadata_version
--w------- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 new_dev
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 raid_disks
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 reshape_position
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 resync_start
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 safe_mode_delay
Since the MD device is a container, the metadata_version file will show:
cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md127/md/metadata_version
external:imsm
The directory contains subdirectories dev-sdb and dev-sdc specifying the disks that
the container is assembled from.
MDRAID Sysfs Components
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
72
The MD Volume contents look like below:
ls -l /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/
total 0
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_size
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_state
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 13:10 bitmap
--w------- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 bitmap_set_bits
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 chunk_size
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 component_size
-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 degraded
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdb
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdc
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 layout
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 level
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 max_read_errors
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 metadata_version
-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 mismatch_cnt
--w------- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 new_dev
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 raid_disks
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 rd0 -> dev-sdb
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 rd1 -> dev-sdc
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 reshape_position
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 resync_start
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 safe_mode_delay
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 suspend_hi
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 suspend_lo
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_action
-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_completed
MDRAID Sysfs Components
June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS
Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual
73
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_force_parallel
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_max
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_min
-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_speed
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_speed_max
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_speed_min
MDRAID Sysfs Components
Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012
Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US
74
Several new files are present, and they are related to the RAID Volume properties.
Base information can be read from files:
Array size
cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/array_size
1048576
Array state
cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/array_state
clean
Raid level
cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/level
raid1
Strip size
cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/chunk_size
65536
Metadata
cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/metadata_version
external:/md127/0
And this is what is shown in mdstat for the example RAID information:
cat /proc/mdstat
Personalities : [raid1]
md127 : active raid1 sdc[1] sdb[0]
1048576 blocks super external:/md127/0 [2/2] [UU]
md0 : inactive sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S)
2210 blocks super external:imsm
unused devices:
Intel® TS13A
Thermal Solution
• Installation Instructions
• Three Year Limited Warranty
Installation Notes for the
Intel® TS13A Thermal Solution
Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration
issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/
processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual
component appearance may vary.
IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that
is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be
provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the
UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main
board manufacturer to get a replacement.
IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are
partially engaged.
Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des
problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à
l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce
manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels
peut être différente.
IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant
l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère
et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP,
NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant
de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement.
IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement
avant de les mettre toutes en place.
Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die
Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel.
com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur
Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen.
WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed
Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine
angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise
bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT,
den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer
Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten.
WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor
nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden.
Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los
problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en
http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven
como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar.
¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera
unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución
térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si
su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja.
Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo.
¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador
térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados
Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os
problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support.
intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A
aparência do componente atual poderá variar.
IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada
(UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem
da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente
acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução
térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal
para obter uma reposição.
IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador
de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados.
Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i
problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http://
support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono
utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare.
IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un
Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione
termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato.
Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del
processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una
sostituzione.
IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore
termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte.
Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia
oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności
w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter
poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić.
WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy
zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora,
płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem
z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku
płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora.
Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej.
WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system
chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone.
Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в
штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой
и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support.
intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве
приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности
внешний вид компонента может отличаться.
ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа
системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена
унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP
будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно
прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать
систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке.
Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены.
ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных
болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично.
安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel.
com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣
式可能有所不同。
重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」
(UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP，
「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換
主機板。
重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺
絲。
安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors
上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示
意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。
重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前，
此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。
如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的
主板制造商联系，以进行调换。
重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。
상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel.
com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해
보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제
구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다.
중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에
부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되
며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는
경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드
제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오.
중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히
조이지 마십시오.
ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors
にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換
性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの
に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。
重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの
下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに
取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ
ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元
に交換を依頼してください。
重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締
め付けないでください。
Installation Instructions for the
Intel® TS13A Thermal Solution
Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology
using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual
test results. Results may vary.
NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty.
REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois
ans.
HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie.
NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de
tres años.
OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de
três anos.
NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre
anni.
CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun.
UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej
gwarancji.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней
ограниченной гарантии.
備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。
注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。
주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다.
備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。
หมายเหตุ: คู่มือการติดตั้งไม่ได้เป็นส่วนหนึ่งของการรับประกันแบบจํากัดระยะสามปี
Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo
hành Giới hạn Ba Năm.
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronic Information Products
(China RoHS declaration)
ӗ૱ѝᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘Ⲵ〠৺ਜ਼䟿
Hazardous Substances Table
䜘Ԧ〠
Component Name
ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘ᡆݳ㍐ Hazardous Substance
䫵
Pb
⊎
Hg
䭹
Cd
䬜ԧޝ
Cr (VI)
ཊⓤ㚄㤟
PBB
ཊⓤҼ㤟䟊
PBDE
ᮓ✝⡷
Thermal Solution ; ƻƻ ƻ ƻ ƻ
䲔䶎ਖཆ⢩࡛Ⲵḷ⌘↔ḷᘇѪ䪸ሩᡰ⎹৺ӗ૱Ⲵ⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀ḷᘇ ḀӋਟᴤᦒⲴ䴦
䜘Ԧਟ㜭Պᴹањн਼Ⲵ⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀 ֻྲ⭥⊐অݳ⁑ඇ
↔⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀ਚ䘲⭘Ҿӗ૱൘ӗ૱ѝᡰ㿴ᇊⲴᶑԦлᐕ
The Environment-Friendly Use Period (EFUP) for all enclosed products and their parts are per the symbol shown here, unless otherwise
marked. Certain field-replaceable parts may have a different EFUP (for example, battery modules) number. The Environment-Friendly
Use Period is valid only when the product is operated under the conditions defined in the product manual.
ƻ˖Indicates that this hazardous substance contained in all homogeneous materials of such component is within the limits specified
in SJ/T 11363-2006 (now replaced by GB/T 26572).
h˖ Indicates that the content of such hazardous substance in at least a homogeneous material of such component exceeds the
limits specified in SJ/T 11363-2006 (now replaced by GB/T 26572). .
This table shows where these substances may be found in the supply chain of our electronic information products, as of the date of
sale of the enclosed product. Note that some of the component types listed above may or may not be a part of the enclosed product.
ƻ˖㺘⽪䈕ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘൘䈕䜘Ԧᡰᴹ൷䍘ᶀᯉѝⲴਜ਼䟿൷൘ ⧠⭡ ਆԓ ḷ߶㿴ᇊⲴ䲀䟿㾱≲ԕлDŽ
h˖㺘⽪䈕ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘㠣ቁ൘䈕䜘ԦⲴḀа൷䍘ᶀᯉѝⲴਜ਼䟿䎵ࠪ
⧠⭡ ਆԓ ḷ߶㿴ᇊⲴ䲀䟿㾱≲DŽ
ሩ䬰ѻᰕⲴᡰӗ૱ᵜ㺘ᱮ⽪ᡁޜਨᓄ䬮Ⲵ⭥ᆀؑӗ૱ਟ㜭वਜ਼䘉Ӌ⢙䍘DŽ⌘
˖൘ᡰӗ૱ѝਟ㜭Պҏਟ㜭нՊਜ਼ᴹᡰᴹᡰࡇⲴ䜘ԦDŽ
SJ/T 11363-2006
GB/T 26572
SJ/T 11363-2006 GB/T 26572
LIMITED WARRANTY
If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply
to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view
the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers.
Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution)
in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer
system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System
Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from
defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly
available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product
was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and
for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system
containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the
subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the
warranty period, Intel, at its option, will:
REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR
REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or
replace the Product,
REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty
service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER
APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE
ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE
PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT.
WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR
OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT.
WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and
useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components
to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat
or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does
not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no
responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or
voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose.
EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY
Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known
as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited
Warranty does NOT cover:
• any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including
labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs
relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or
otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR
• damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with
electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions,
usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration,
repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR
• any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly
available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark
or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE
To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed
packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of
purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel.
To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support
(“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours
(local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center.
(See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be
prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers;
(2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on
the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand
and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need
additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.
Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be
issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions
for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to
the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel
will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid
RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated
ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and
assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees
may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold
via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region,
contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.)
Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product
or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be
shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt
of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on
receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is
subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of
the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited
Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended.
WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS
THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND
INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF
TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties
so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES
APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on
how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR
EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH
ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY
BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS
NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME,
GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND
ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM
OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN
IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states
(or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO
HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION.
ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY
SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE
FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA
AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND
THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA
PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE
AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE
REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW
SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES.
IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY
OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF
THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL.
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans
son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système
informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système
original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de
tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées
par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit
dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une
durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant
le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie
limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel
a le choix entre:
RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU
REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni
le remplacer,
REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous
garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES
ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU
NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT
QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME
INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES
PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI
LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE
SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT.
ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i)
réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii)
entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les
performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts
; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit
aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel
décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y
compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions.
ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata »,
au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande.
De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS:
• les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les
frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en
particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout
Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une
carte à circuits imprimés; OU
• les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents,
problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou
environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du
produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des
tests inappropriés; OU
• un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par
Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de
série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées.
COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE
Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage
original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre
point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel.
Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de
support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant
les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit
au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment
contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse
postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom
du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas
échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle
; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI
pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires.
Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous
recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions
pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au
centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera
aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le
paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage
original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de
dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention
pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de
garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/
Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou
consultez la page www.intel.com/support.)
Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants
neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou
remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du
produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception
par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis
aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le
délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel
remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de
remplacement.
LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE
CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT
ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT
LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À
UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE
HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne
vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET
TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE
GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente
limite ne vous soit pas applicable.
LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ
LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE
TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU
REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS
REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA
GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE
TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX
RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE
(Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES
D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS
ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION
OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU
UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ
DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible
que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS
ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT
D’AUTRES DROITS.
TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU
AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR
LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU
NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE,
AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR
LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE),
LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR.
POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI
APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES.
EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE
VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN
CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI.
BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung)
bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem
Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”)
folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist
das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung
für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden
ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen
Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht
im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch
diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit
aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen,
wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen:
das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER
das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer
Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen,
den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung
des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts
ERSTATTEN.
DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM
ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT
ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN
BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES
DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE
SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE
DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES
ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG.
WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i)
die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren;
(ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine
Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere
Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel
hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifikationen nicht getestet und
übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung
des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten
Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird.
UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata”
bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar
gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf:
• jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz
des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten
oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang
mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten
gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER
• Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich
Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer
oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden
Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen,
unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER
• alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi-
fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi
kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert
oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden.
WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN?
Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des
Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems)
setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung.
Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des
Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS
Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und
feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen
für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende
Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern;
(2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi
zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich
Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach
Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen.
Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt,
erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization,
“RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene
ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer
auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die
RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht
angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung
oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center
senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport
verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten
und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie
Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem
Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu
erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite
www.intel.com/support.)
Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder
überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder
ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem
Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach
dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel.
Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt
den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für
die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche
länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten
Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert.
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE
DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR
DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH,
SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH,
JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR
MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER
VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN.
In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss
stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss
möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN
DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten)
sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig;
daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu.
HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN
INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER
AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ
ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE
STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE
IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM
MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR
EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN,
DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER
RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE
HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL,
AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL
UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG
ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT
ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT
ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN
SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES
AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder
Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden
oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen
und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu.
DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH
STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU.
JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER
BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN
UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE
UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN
STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND
SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT
DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT
AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR
UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND
DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE
RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN.
IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND
EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
(MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE
ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN.
GARANTÍA LIMITADA
Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la
solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador
de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el
Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala
apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación,
y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a
disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del
Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un
período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación
que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto,
objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el
período de garantía, Intel, a su elección:
REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O
REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o
reemplazar el Producto,
REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del
servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada.
ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR
BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN
ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA
DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE
MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA
DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O
DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE
EL PRODUCTO.
ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la
estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del
procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento
del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de
los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador
más allá de las especificaciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la
idoneidad del procesador para un fin determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran
las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj.
ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA
Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos
como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles
previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre:
• ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso
costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en
particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier
Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a
cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O
• daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas
con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales
anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos,
descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O
• cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a
las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales
de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas,
alteradas o borradas del Producto.
CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA
Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado
en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede
contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede
contactar a Intel.
Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede
contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario
normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al
centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al
ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de
correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de
la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en
el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo
marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede
necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema.
Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio
de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”)
y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando
devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior
del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que
tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al
centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos
prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad
de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto
para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor
autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en
contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www.
intel.com/support.)
Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes
nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o
reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después
de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se
convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo
estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y
exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo
que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía
limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido.
LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA
ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA
TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN,
LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO
PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO.
Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas,
por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA
E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA
LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos
Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía
implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted.
LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD
LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA
O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA
ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EX-
CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA.
HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR
DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE
CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL
(INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE,
PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS,
Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE
CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL
SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO
ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones)
no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo
que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted.
ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED
PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA
JURISDICCIÓ.
TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA
MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS
SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA
Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA
LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO
ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA
LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA
JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES.
EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y
CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA
(CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN
EN LENGUA INGLESA.
GARANTIA LIMITADA
A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução
térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de
um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do
Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado,
estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em
conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de
três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original
lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da
data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do
Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver
conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá:
REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU
SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou
substituir o Produto,
REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica-
ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada.
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM
EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS
APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR
ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA
DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O
PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE
DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA
MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO.
AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do
sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e
outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema;
(iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados
do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas
especificações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador,
inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado
para qualquer fim em particular.
COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA
A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos
como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante
solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre:
• quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo
mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular,
quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto
soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de
circuito impresso; OU
• danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com
a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais,
utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso,
negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU
• qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações
da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação
originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas
ou obliteradas.
COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA
Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original
lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local
original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel
Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de
Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o
horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto
ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como
contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para
correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra;
(3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e
(4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma
explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais,
dependendo da natureza do problema.
Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será
emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá
instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver
o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da
embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua
o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto
devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as
tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio.
Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você
estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição
autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com
o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá
para www.intel.com/support.)
A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes
novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais
apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel,
dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O
Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O
produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e
está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante
do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o
período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado.
LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA
ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A
INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS,
INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO,
ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO,
CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não
permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser
aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA
AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL
DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações
referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser
aplicável.
LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE
A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA,
IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO,
NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS
PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO
POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO
DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS
NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO
DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES,
E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU
REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU
USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO
AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não
permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto
as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis.
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM
PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A
JURISDIÇÃO.
TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA
LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES
LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E
AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E
AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA
ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE
CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E
DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS
DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES.
NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER
OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO
DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ
PREVALECER.
GARANZIA LIMITATA
Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica)
nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer
realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema
originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti
nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche
rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di
acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente
originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer
contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto,
soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta
garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a:
RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO
SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di
riparare o sostituire il Prodotto,
RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene
richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata.
LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE
LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE
ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA
DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE
PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE
DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL
PRODOTTO.
AVVISO: La modifica della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità
del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore
o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare
un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del
sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le
sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri
componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock
e/o tensioni alterate.
APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA
Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli
errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON
copre quanto segue:
• qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i
costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare
tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato
o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato;
OVVERO
• i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con
l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali,
utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza,
alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO
• qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle
specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse,
alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di
fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto.
RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA
Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella
confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di
acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente.
Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support
(“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la
restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di
copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero
telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del
Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca
e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere
ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema.
Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza
in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del
materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando
si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel
non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato
visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo
originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre
assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero
essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale
richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione
autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione,
contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.)
Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto
con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o
sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole
dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel
all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una
garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni
o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di
fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto.
LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA
QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E
INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE
MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E
IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE
COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie
implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI
GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA
LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati
od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual
caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere.
RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA
LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA
IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO,
COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED
ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI
MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER
DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI
GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE
ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ,
DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO
PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI
MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE
QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni
stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti
o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero
non valere.
LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE
E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI
ORDINAMENTI.
OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA
GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA
DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA,
IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE
PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE
ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE
E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL
RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA
VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES.
NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA
VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE
IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE.
OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA
Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie
jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym
opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego
zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt
(„Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego
Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób,
nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie
odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3)
lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu;
w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat
liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt.
Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie
będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym,
Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania:
DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania;
LUB
DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub
wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel,
DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu
w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu
gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji.
NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK
GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH
ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH
LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ
DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU
KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ
TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ
NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY
PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB
PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT.
OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i)
obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora;
(ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować
obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego
ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel
nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w
zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada
za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania
częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia.
ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI
Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub
błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów
typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje:
• jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu,
w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych
przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych
z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest
przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty
drukowanej; LUB
• uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich
jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne,
mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie
produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa
instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB
• jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub
obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy
Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy
lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane.
ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO
Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu
(zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element
systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami
podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel.
Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie
serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym
z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w
normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić
Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru
telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki).
Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu
wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy
modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu
komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W
zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania
dodatkowych informacji.
Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach
serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału
(Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu
Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS
na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie
przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA
na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym
lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi.
Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas
transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został
sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie,
może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby
uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim
regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.)
Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany
Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony
produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim
czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu
przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt
podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest
przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów:
dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego.
W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla
wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu.
OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE
NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE
DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH
INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W
TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI
SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW,
NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU
TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach
(lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się
wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe
ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN
WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH
GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO.
PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ
ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających
kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności
gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie
może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika.
OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ
ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY
INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ
LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY,
ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA
WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO
I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W
MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI
ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE,
PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA
WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W
TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK
WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ
SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE
Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ
DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH
LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET
WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O
MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub
obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia
lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym
powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika.
NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI
SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ
POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU
SĄDOWNICZEGO.
WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ
GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ
NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH,
KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM
SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE
PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW
AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN
KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A
OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA
EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A
OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII.
W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ
NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ
STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ
NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI
ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ.
Ограниченная гарантия
«Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем
документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной
запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю
компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и
содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при
правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов
материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать
опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с
даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке
применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех)
лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие
применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение
указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется
настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным
гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению:
ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или)
программных средств; ИЛИ
ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет
отремонтировать или заменить Изделие,
ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент
предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с
настоящей Ограниченной гарантией.
НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ
ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ
ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ
ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ
СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР,
ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ
УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ
ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ,
ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ.
ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут:
(i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы
и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов
системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести
к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v)
повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила
испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него
спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора
для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с
измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения.
ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ
«Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных
дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в
настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая
Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ:
• любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая
оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в
частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого
Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного
к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ
• повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии,
проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические,
механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил
эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное
отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или
испытаний; ИЛИ
• любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с
нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с
удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными
идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный
номер).
ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ
Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного
в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной
системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено
Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно
связаться с «Интел».
Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение
гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов
«Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному
времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр
ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится
на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую
информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты
и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и
идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо,
описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание
неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю
центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация.
После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному
обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных
ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS.
При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи
на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без
номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны
отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной
или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять
на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по
перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для
которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через
авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения
страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на
страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.)
«Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие
новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от
того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее
изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после
поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в
центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия
распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей
письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на
оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто)
дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то
срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается.
ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ
НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ
НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ
ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ,
ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ
К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ
НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ
ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые
штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые
гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК
ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ
ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ.
ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ.
Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок
действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не
распространяться на вас.
ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ
ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ
ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ
РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО
ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И
ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ
ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ,
«ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ,
ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ
В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО
ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ,
ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ
ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ
ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ,
ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ
ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ
ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые
штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать
побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения
и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас.
ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ
ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ
ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ
ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ.
ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО
ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ
РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ
С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К
СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ
АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА
(КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА
ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ
(КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО
ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ
СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА
РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА.
В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ
НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ,
ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА
УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ
ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ.
有限售後保證
Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱
為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱
「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕
無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起
三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以
Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於
原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統
之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條
件，Intel 將有權決定：
利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者
以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時，
根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本
產品」。
本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任
何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電
腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧
客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。
警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器
的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv)
造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不
保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更
改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。
有限售後保證適用範圍
Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎
索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵
蓋下列幾項：
• 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導
致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板
之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者
• 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因
素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的
安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者
• 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產
品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。
如何取得售後保證服務
若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在
電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。
若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地
時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本
產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援
中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件
位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標
誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障
或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求
您提供額外的資訊。
在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中
心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客
戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外
包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的
退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶
支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的
產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付
運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中
心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。）
Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換
「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之
內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產
品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售
後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的
限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品
的「有限售後保證」期限。
售後保證限制與排除條款
本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論
明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行
交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗
示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證
僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證
適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制，
因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。
責任限制
根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅
限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補
救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據
其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不
限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換，
以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式
或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL
概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需
受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。
本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法
規，您還可能享有其他的權利。
根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭
的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為
美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除
外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦
法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。
一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵
觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。
有限质保条款
仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel
Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装
置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算
机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三
(3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合
英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装
产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计
算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而
单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换
产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三
(3) 年。
第一年有限质保
若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之
规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在
上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品
（下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月
内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明
该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换
为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次
更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而
无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第
二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款
（不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。
您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第
一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期
间内。
如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯
一的和全部的救济措施。
剩余期间有限质保
如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余
质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选
择：
通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或
以另一产品更换该产品；或
在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主
张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。
如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产
品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者
本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款
约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决
于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换
之产品）的时间。
如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的
救济措施。
警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理
器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能
下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特
尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有
关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压
的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。
有限质保的一般性条款
英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收
到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的
产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相
同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财
产。
本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本
产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期
间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机
系统，则本有限质保即告终止。
有限质保范围
本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期
届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。
英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误
差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范
围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而
引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集
成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。
本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事
故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示
之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安
装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔
适当授权的维修商不当处理。
下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭
证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包
凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日
期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号
与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。
三包凭证
您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证
据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给
您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发
票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要
求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格，
并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或
英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。
如何获得质保服务
有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根
据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届
满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还
至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节
假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客
户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理
器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备
提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭
证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在
可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英
特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。
如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还
确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中
心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上
写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产
品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中
心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服
务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通
过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有
关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系，
或访问 www.intel.com/support。）
质保限制及免责条款
本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他
质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示
或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务
惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内
有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。
赔偿责任范围
英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上
文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一
和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反
担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失
承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设
备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使
用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知
晓发生此类损害的可能性。
因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受
中华人民 共和国法律管辖。
本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。
품질 보증
Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된
감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시
스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이
정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함
도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점
으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨
터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질
적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보
증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의
선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다.
하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는
제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는
Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여
Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불
한다 .
본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어
떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원
구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니
다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으
로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다.
경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및
프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이
발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고,
(v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환
경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니
다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에
는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다.
보증의 범위
Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하
지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본
품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다.
• 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또
는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영
구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는,
• 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명
서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는
부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는,
• Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식
별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품.
품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면
(최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질
보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문
의하면 됩니다.
Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정
상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후,
지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품
해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서
비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소
및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당
되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설
명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다.
ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자
에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환
하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번
호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은
번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이
와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보
내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사
용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급
업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될
수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하
시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.)
Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는
중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은
ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발
송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다.
교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품
질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니
다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되
지 않습니다.
품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항
본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의
묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을
포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적
인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서
는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보
증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적
용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주
(또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다.
책임의 제한
본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서
명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는
품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최
대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법
이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산
의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로
그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지
않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관
하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임
을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지
않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습
니다.
본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라
서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다.
본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원
에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및
남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주
법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정
지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지
는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다.
본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우
(중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다.
製品保証
インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版
インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者
（以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ
ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう
に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され
たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の
システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年
間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に
十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保
証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか
のひとつを行います。
修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修
復する。
交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。
返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品
価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな
い場合）。
本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、
本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の
購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者
が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点
で保証期間は終了します。
警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム
とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ
ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ
ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠
を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ
ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定
目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。
製品保証の範囲
インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ
ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ
ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について
は保証していません。
• 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関
連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒
久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。
• 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品
の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト
ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。
• 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された
製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変
された、または消されている製品。
保証サービスの受け方
本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン
ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使
用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。
インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、
休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、
「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ
ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン
ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住
所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている
製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明
（該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の
内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。
ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material
Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返
品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ
ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、
パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効
な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入
当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送
料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担
となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代
理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し
ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに
お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。）
インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交
換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理
された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい
たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。
交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期
間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品
に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。
保証の制限および保証対象外
本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ
ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および
商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明
示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま
たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および
黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、
保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で
は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。
責任の限度
本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前
述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合
の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ
れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の
法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の
損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し
たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再
プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す
る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい
た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め
ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま
す。
本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また
は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。
本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ
れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南
米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア
州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー
ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地
域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま
す。
この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す
る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。
For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com
If you need further help, call:
To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686
North America 916-377-7000
Latin America
Spanish 001-916-377-0114
Portuguese 001-916-377-0180
Europe
Belgium 02-714 3182
Denmark 38-487077
Finland 9-693-79297
France 01-41-91 85 29
Germany 069-9509-6099
Holland 020-487-4562
Italy 02-696-33276
Norway 23-1620-50
Spain 91-377-8166
Sweden 08-445-1251
United Kingdom 0870-607-2439
Japan 0120-868686
Asia-Pacifi c
Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117
Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249
Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003
Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415
Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416
China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634
Malaysia 1800-80-1390
New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required.
Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC
in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine.
Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation
in the U.S. and/or other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Copyright © 2014 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
H29943-004
Intel Corporation
Attn: Corporate Quality
2200 Mission College Blvd.
Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549
USA
Marvell. Moving Forward Faster.
December 6, 2006
User Guide
Marvell RAID Utility
For Samsung
Use
Only
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of
Marvell. Marvell retains the right to make changes to this document at any time, without notice. Marvell makes
no warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, with regard to any information contained in this document,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose.
Further, Marvell does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, or other
items contained within this document.
Marvell products are not designed for use in life-support equipment or applications that would cause a
life-threatening situation if any such products failed. Do not use Marvell products in these types of equipment
or applications.
With respect to the products described herein, the user or recipient, in the absence of appropriate U.S.
government authorization, agrees:
1) Not to re-export or release any such information consisting of technology, software or source code
controlled for national security reasons by the U.S. Export Control Regulations ("EAR"), to a national of EAR
Country Groups D:1 or E:2;
2) Not to export the direct product of such technology or such software, to EAR Country Groups D:1 or E:2, if
such technology or software and direct products thereof are controlled for national security reasons by the
EAR; and,
3) In the case of technology controlled for national security reasons under the EAR where the direct product
of the technology is a complete plant or component of a plant, not to export to EAR Country Groups D:1 or E:2
the direct product of the plant or major component thereof, if such direct product is controlled for national
security reasons by the EAR, or is subject to controls under the U.S. Munitions List ("USML").
At all times hereunder, the recipient of any such information agrees that they shall be deemed to have
manually signed this document in connection with their receipt of any such information.
Copyright © 2006. Marvell International Ltd. All rights reserved. Marvell, the Marvell logo, Moving Forward
Faster, Alaska, Fastwriter, Datacom Systems on Silicon, Libertas, Link Street, NetGX, PHYAdvantage,
Prestera, Raising The Technology Bar, The Technology Within, Virtual Cable Tester, and Yukon are registered
trademarks of Marvell. Ants, AnyVoltage, Discovery, DSP Switcher, Feroceon, GalNet, GalTis, Horizon,
Marvell Makes It All Possible, RADLAN, UniMAC, and VCT are trademarks of Marvell. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
ii
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
iii
CONTENTS
1 GETTING STARTED .................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 System Requirements ....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Software Components ....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Supported RAID Levels ..................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 SETTING UP THE SOFTWARE .............................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.1 Installing the Disk Drives ................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.2 Verifying Driver Installation ............................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 Installing the Software ....................................................................................................... 1-5
2 USING THE SOFTWARE .......................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1 GUI OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................. 2-10
2.1.1 Logical Drives .................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.1.2 Physical Drives .................................................................................................................. 2-12
2.1.3 Adapters ............................................................................................................................ 2-15
2.1.4 System .............................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.2 VIEWING AND CREATING A LOGICAL DRIVE ......................................................................................... 2-17
2.3 MODIFYING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................. 2-21
2.4 DELETING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................... 2-22
2.5 REBUILDING A LOGICAL DRIVE ........................................................................................................... 2-23
2.5.1 Auto-Rebuild ..................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.5.2 Manual Rebuild ................................................................................................................. 2-23
2.6 INITIALIZING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................ 2-24
2.7 CHECKING THE INTEGRITY OF A LOGICAL DRIVE .................................................................................. 2-25
3 CONFIGURING RAID USING THE BASIC INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM (BIOS) ........................................ 3-27
3.1 ACCESSING THE BIOS ....................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.2 USING THE BIOS ............................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.2.1 Adapter .............................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.2.2 Create ............................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.2.3 Delete ................................................................................................................................ 3-33
4 SELECTING A RAID LEVEL ..................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.1 RAID 0 (STRIPING) ............................................................................................................................ 4-36
4.2 RAID 1 (MIRRORING) ........................................................................................................................ 4-37
4.3 RAID 10 (MIRRORING AND STRIPING) ................................................................................................ 4-38
4.4 COMPARING RAID LEVELS ................................................................................................................. 4-39
4.4.1 RAID 0 (striping) ................................................................................................................ 4-39
4.4.2 RAID 1 (mirroring) ............................................................................................................. 4-39
4.4.3 RAID 10 (mirroring and striping) ....................................................................................... 4-39
4.4.4 Overview of RAID Levels .................................................................................................. 4-39
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
iv
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
1-1
1 GETTING STARTED
This chapter describes how to get started with the Marvell Redundant Array of Independent
Disks (RAID) Utility, including how to access and install this utility.
The topics included in this chapter are:
Product Overview
Setting Up the Software
For Samsung
Use
Only
1-2 Getting Started
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
1.1 Product Overview
The Marvell RAID Utility (MRU) software is a web-based graphical user interface (GUI) tool
for the Marvell RAID adapter. The MRU GUI enables you to create and manage logical drives
from the physical disk drives installed in your computer. RAID technology allows you to
create logical drives based on one or more physical disk drives in combination for fault
tolerance and improved performance.
For more information about RAID technology and how to determine a RAID level for your
logical drive, see Chapter 4, Selecting a RAID Level.
Note: The terms adapter and controller are used interchangeably for the purpose of this document.
1.1.1 System Requirements
Before you begin, ensure that your computer meets the following requirements:
Operating systems: Microsoft Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005, Windows XP
Professional, Windows 2003, and Windows 2000.
Hardware: The Marvell RAID Adapter supports one PATA and a maximum of four SATA disk
drives. Ensure the SATA and PATA drives are appropriately connected. For instructions on how
to connect the SATA and the PATA drives, see Installing the Disk Drives on page 1-4.
RAID adapter/controller driver
Web service
1.1.2 Software Components
During a full installation, all of the following components, except the CLI, are automatically
installed on your computer. A custom installation requires you to select individual
components. The MRU software CD includes the following items:
Driver. The driver is automatically installed on your system during MRU installation.
Web service. The Apache server is automatically installed on your system during MRU
installation.
Marvell Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI, for only Linux users, is available with
custom installation of the software.
Note: The Linux operating system will be supported in a future release of the MRU.
Marvell RAID Utility software.
Note: The Marvell BIOS Configuration, a built-in component of the Marvell RAID controller, can create,
initialize, and delete the logical drives. For instructions about using the Marvell BIOS Configuration,
see Chapter 3, Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS).
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Getting Started 1-3
1.1.3 Supported RAID Levels
The Marvell RAID controller supports the following RAID levels:
RAID 0 (striping). In this RAID system, identical drives can read and write data in parallel to
increase performance.
RAID 1 (mirroring). In this RAID system, mirroring increases read performance through load
balancing and elevator sorting while creating a complete real-time backup of your files.
RAID 10 (mirroring/striping). In this nested RAID system, combining mirroring with striping
offers both high read/write performance and fault-tolerance.
For more information about RAID levels, see Comparing RAID Levels on page 4-39.
For Samsung
Use
Only
1-4 Getting Started
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
1.2 Setting Up the Software
This section describes how to install the disk drives and the MRU.
The topics included in this section are:
Installing the Disk Drives
Verifying Driver Installation
Installing the Software
1.2.1 Installing the Disk Drives
Before installing the MRU, ensure that you have the required number of SATA and PATA disk
drives connected to the appropriate ports on your computer’s motherboard. We recommend
installing SATA and PATA drives of similar capacity, which enhance performance.
To install the SATA and PATA disks
1. Connect one end of each data cable to the individual disk drives and connect the other end
of each data cable to the connectors either on the motherboard or on the adapter.
2. Connect power to each of the disk drives.
Note: To create the logical drives, use only drives connected to a single adapter.
The following table lists the minimum number of drives required for each RAID level.
1.2.2 Verifying Driver Installation
To run the MRU, install the driver specific to your operating system. The driver file is
automatically installed on your computer during MRU installation.
To verify the driver installation
1. On the Desktop, right-click My Computer, and then select Manage.
The Computer Management window appears.
2. In the left pane, double-click System Tools, and then double-click Device Manager.
The left pane displays a list of devices for your computer. If the driver properly installed during
the MRU installation, the right pane displays the Marvell RAID adapter under SCSI and RAID
Controllers.
RAID Level Number of Drives Required
RAID 0 Any number
RAID 1 2 only
RAID 10 4 only
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Getting Started 1-5
1.2.3 Installing the Software
This sections describes the MRU Setup Wizard windows. The recommended screen
resolution for the MRU GUI is 1024 × 768 pixels.
To install the MRU software
1. Insert the MRU CD into your computer’s CD drive.
The MRU Setup Wizard starts.
Figure 1-1 MRU Setup Wizard: Main Window
2. Click NEXT.
The Choose Components window appears, as shown in Figure 1-2, with the Full install option
pre-selected.
For Samsung
Use
Only
1-6 Getting Started
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Figure 1-2 MRU Setup Wizard: Choose Components
3. Select the options you want for custom installation.
Web Service is preselected for both Full and Custom installation. If you deselect this option,
the Apache server is not installed if the Web Service is unavailable on your computer. Web
Service is required to run the MRU software.
4. Click NEXT.
The Choose Install Location window appears, as shown in Figure 1-3, with the default
location displayed in the Destination Folder field.
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Getting Started 1-7
Figure 1-3 MRU Setup Wizard: Choose Install Location
5. Click Browse, and then select the installation location.
6. Click Install.
The installation window appears for a few seconds, indicating that installation is in progress.
Afterwards, the installation wizard appears, indicating that the software installation is now
complete, as shown in Figure 1-4.
For Samsung
Use
Only
1-8 Getting Started
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Figure 1-4 MRU Installation Wizard: Last Window
7. Click Finish.
A shortcut to the MRU software appears on the Desktop.
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
2-9
2 USING THE SOFTWARE
The Marvell RAID Utility (MRU) creates and manages logical drives on your computer by
using RAID technology. RAID allows multiple physical drives to be combined together to
create a logical drive. Logical drives can continuously protect critical data and improve
performance depending on which RAID level you choose. For more information, see
Comparing RAID Levels on page 4-39.
Although most functions pertaining to creating and managing logical drives can be performed
using the Marvell BIOS Configuration or the Marvell CLI, the MRU GUI offers additional
capabilities. The GUI is an easy-to-use customization tool for managing logical drives.
This chapter describes the options available in the MRU for creating and managing logical
drives. The topics included in this chapter are:
GUI Overview
Viewing and Creating a Logical Drive
Modifying a Logical Drive
Deleting a Logical Drive
Rebuilding a Logical Drive
Initializing a Logical Drive
Checking the Integrity of a Logical Drive
For Samsung
Use
Only
2-10 Using the Software
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
2.1 GUI Overview
The MRU GUI has a top and bottom pane, as shown in Figure 2-1. The top pane, with four
tabs, is the interactive interface. The four tabs in this pane are Logical Drives, Physical
Drives, Adapters, and System. Clicking on each tab brings up a window that lets you perform
specific tasks and view configuration details specific to that tab.
Figure 2-1 MRU Main Window
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Using the Software 2-11
The bottom pane displays the status and severity of events in the RAID system. The following
table describes the three kinds of events.
The following sections describe the items in the top pane and the options available under
each tab.
2.1.1 Logical Drives
The Logical Drives window, shown in Figure 2-2, lets you perform the following tasks:
View the existing logical drives and their configurations.
Create a new RAID.
View the properties for individual logical drives, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-2 MRU Logical Drives
Symbol Name Description
Info This is for information only.
Warning This is to notify that the user may need to take an action.
Major This is to notify that an action is urgently required.
For Samsung
Use
Only
2-12 Using the Software
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Figure 2-3 MRU Logical Drive Details
The Logical Drive Details window performs the following tasks: Delete, Modify, Restore,
Rebuild, Check integrity, and Initialize.
2.1.2 Physical Drives
The Physical Drives window displays the SATA and PATA drives on your computer and
indicates the status for each physical drive, as shown in Figure 2-4,
Note: Click LEGEND at the bottom corner for a quick overview of the drive icons.
Symbol Name
Configured
Unconfigured
Spare drive
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Using the Software 2-13
Figure 2-4 MRU All Physical Drives
Click on an individual drive to view the Physical Drive Details window, as shown in Figure 2-5.
For Samsung
Use
Only
2-14 Using the Software
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
The Physical Drive Details window displays the properties for the specific physical drive and
the available resources for creating a logical drive.
Figure 2-5 MRU Physical Drive Details
You can perform the following tasks from this window:
View the properties for each physical drive connected to the RAID controller.
Set a physical drive as a spare drive for use while rebuilding a logical drive.
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Using the Software 2-15
2.1.3 Adapters
The Adapters window, as shown in Figure 2-6, provides information about each adapter,
including the Driver Version, Vendor Device ID, Sub Vendor Device ID, Port Count,
Background Activity Rate, and Auto-Rebuild.
Note: Your computer can have a maximum of two adapters.
Figure 2-6 MRU Adapters
You can perform the following tasks from this window:
Turn the alarm on or off.
Set Auto-Rebuild on or off.
Cancel the changes and restore the configuration.
For Samsung
Use
Only
2-16 Using the Software
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
2.1.4 System
The System window, as shown in Figure 2-7, provides information about the system-level
components of the MRU software.
Figure 2-7 MRU System
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Using the Software 2-17
2.2 Viewing and Creating a Logical Drive
You can view details about an existing logical drive and create a new logical drive from the
Logical Drives window of the MRU.
To view the logical drive details
1. Start the MRU.
2. Click the Logical Drives tab, as shown in Figure 2-2, and then click the icon for the individual
logical.
The Logical Drive Details window appears, as shown in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 MRU Logical Drive Details
You can determine the status of each logical drive by its icon, which are listed in the following
table.
Symbol Name Description
Functional
logical drive
This logical drive operates at its optimal strength.
Offline logical
drive
This logical drive is not functional, either due to a disk failure or a disk being
unplugged.
For Samsung
Use
Only
2-18 Using the Software
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Note: Click LEGEND at the bottom corner for a quick overview of the logical drive types.
To create a logical drive
1. Start the MRU.
2. Click the Logical Drives tab.
3. At the upper right side of the screen, click Create New RAID.
The Create Logical Drive window appears, as shown in Figure 2-9. This window displays the
physical drives available for creating new logical drives.
Figure 2-9 MRU Create Logical Drive
Degraded
logical drive
This logical drive is no longer reliable. Therefore, you must either rebuild
the drive or delete it. If you have a degraded logical drive, the alarm goes
on. To turn off the alarm, click on the Adapters tab.
Symbol Name Description
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Using the Software 2-19
4. In the RAID Level box, select a level.
Table 2-1 lists the minimum number of drives required for each RAID level.
5. In the Adapter box, select the appropriate adapter.
6. Click on the specific SATA and PATA drives to create the RAID of your choice.
7. Click NEXT.
Note: If the combination of selected drives is not supported by the particular RAID level, an error
message appears reminding you to select the appropriate number of drives.
The second Create Logical Drive window appears, as shown in Figure 2-10, and for setting
the properties.
Table 2-1 Raid Level
RAID Level Number of Drives Required
RAID 0 Any number
RAID 1 2 only
RAID 10 4 only
For Samsung
Use
Only
2-20 Using the Software
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Figure 2-10 MRU Create Logical Drive (second window)
8. Enter the desired value in each field, and then click SUBMIT at the bottom of the screen.
Note: You have three options for initializing a logical drive: Quick, Full, and None. You can
initialize the logical drive while creating it or afterwards.
A window appears with a message about formatting the new logical drive.
9. Click OK.
The All Logical Drives window appears, displaying the new logical drive.
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Using the Software 2-21
2.3 Modifying a Logical Drive
You can change the configuration of an existing logical drive to enhance its performance.
To modify a logical drive
1. Start the MRU.
2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive.
The Logical Drive Details window appears, as shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 MRU Logical Drive Details
3. Change the properties as needed, and then click MODIFY at the top of the screen.
Note: To return the editable properties to their original values, click RESTORE.
For Samsung
Use
Only
2-22 Using the Software
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
2.4 Deleting a Logical Drive
If you want to change the size of a logical drive, you must delete that logical drive and create
a new one with the desired configuration.
To delete a logical drive
1. Start the MRU.
2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive.
The Logical Drive Details window appears.
3. Click Delete.
A message appears confirming the deletion of the logical drive.
4. Click OK.
After deleting the logical drive, the additional free space is shown in the space available on
the physical drives. Any physical drive that is not used as part of a logical drive is available
through the Windows Storage Manager.
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Using the Software 2-23
2.5 Rebuilding a Logical Drive
The MRU can rebuild the logical drive by reconstructing data from a failed drive onto one of
its spare physical drives. Rebuilding is available for logical drives created using RAID level 1
and 10, which have the capability of mirroring data.
RAID 0 excludes rebuild capabilities. Therefore, the entire stripe is lost if one of the physical
drive fails.
When a logical drive fails and is degraded, you are notified in two ways:
Triggering of the alarm. You can turned it off in the Adapters window.
Displaying the logical drive red icon with a warning symbol next to it.
You have the option to rebuild the logical drive either automatically or manually. To use the
auto-rebuild process, there must be a spare drive available. Go to the Physical Drive Details
window to set a physical drive as a spare. Any physical drive that is fully or partially
configured cannot be set as a spare drive.
2.5.1 Auto-Rebuild
If the Auto-Rebuild option is on when creating the logical drive, the rebuilding process begins
automatically if there is a degraded drive.
2.5.2 Manual Rebuild
Follow these steps to manually rebuild a logical drive:
1. Start the MRU.
2. Click the Physical Drives tab, and then select a physical drive as the target spare drive.
3. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then select the logical drive to rebuild.
4. Click REBUILD.
The Event Log pane displays the rebuilding status.
For Samsung
Use
Only
2-24 Using the Software
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
2.6 Initializing a Logical Drive
There are two methods for initializing a logical drive:
Quick initialization. Use this method if the logical drive consists one or more disk drives. This
method erases only the Master Boot Record (MBR) in all of the selected disk drives.
Full Background initialization. In this method, data synchronization occurs in the background
while the operating system continues to have access to the logical drive. Full initialization is
available for RAID 1 and RAID 10 logical drives.
Note: This option is not available in the Marvell RAID BIOS Configuration.
To initialize a logical drive
1. Start the MRU.
2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive.
3. In the Logical Drive Details window, click INITIALIZE.
The Initialize window appears, as shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 MRU Initialize Window
4. In the Initialize Options box, select an initialization method.
5. Click SUBMIT.
The Logical Drive Details window reappears and the Event Log pane displays the status of
initialization.
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Using the Software 2-25
2.7 Checking the Integrity of a Logical Drive
This feature enables the software to check and fix the data parity in the logical drives using
RAID levels 1 and 10. Checking the integrity of data on your logical drive is performed as a
housekeeping function.
Note: Perform this task when the logical drive you want to check is not performing RAID activities.
To check integrity of a logical drive
1. Start the MRU.
2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive.
The Check Integrity window appears.
3. Click CHECK INTEGRITY.
4. Select one of the following options:
Check. This option checks and reports data inconsistencies.
Check and Fix. This option checks, reports, and resolves data inconsistencies.
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
2-26 Using the Software
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
3-27
3 CONFIGURING RAID USING THE BASIC INPUT/OUTPUT
SYSTEM (BIOS)
The Marvell RAID BIOS Configuration, which is built into the Marvell RAID controller, creates
logical drives.
Note: For extended capabilities in creating and managing logical drives, run the MRU. For information
about using the MRU, see Chapter 2, Using the Software.
The topics included in this chapter are:
Accessing the BIOS
Using the BIOS
For Samsung
Use
Only
3-28 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS)
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
3.1 Accessing the BIOS
The main BIOS configuration screen displays three main functions, a set of keyboard
commands, and configuration information about the physical disk drives and the logical
drives, if any.
The functions are:
Adapter. Displays the physical drives installed on your computer.
Create. Lets the user create logical drives.
Delete. Lets the user delete an existing logical drive.
The keyboard commands are:
Arrow keys. Use the arrow keys to navigate the screens.
ENTER/SPACE. Use these keys to select an item and execute a command.
ESC. Use the escape key to go back one screen or exit the program.
The configuration information for the physical and logical drives are:
ID. This displays the identification number assigned to each logical drive by the BIOS.
Level. This displays the RAID level configuration of the logical drive.
Size. This displays the data capacity of the logical drive in Megabytes (MB).
Members. This displays the disks that are included in a logical drive.
Status. This displays one of the following logical drive conditions:
Online: The logical drive is functioning at the optimal level.
Degraded: The logical drive is functional but does not perform fault tolerance. For RAID
levels 1 and 10, the logical drive contains a drive that has stopped functioning. If set to
auto-rebuild, the logical drive rebuilds itself on the spare drive, if available on your
computer. Identify and replace the failed disk drive.
Offline: The logical drive is not functional and cannot be rebuilt. Therefore, replace the
failed drive and create a new logical drive to copy over your data.
To access the MRU through the BIOS
1. Reboot your computer.
2. Before Windows starts, press CTRL+M to enter the BIOS, as shown in Figure 3-1.
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-29
Figure 3-1 BIOS Main Screen
Adapter 1
Arrays Information:
No array is defined?
Disks Information:
ID Port Disk Name Size Speed
1
5
9
13
17
18
2
1
3
4
5
5
SATA:
SATA:
SATA:
SATA:
PATA:
PATA:
Maxtor 6L200P0
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
ST3400832A
SATA 1
SATA 1
SATA 1
SATA 1
164.6GB
164.6GB
164.6GB
164.6GB
400GB
203.9GB
UDMA-5
UDMA-6
[Adapter] [Create] [Delete]
:Navigate, ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit
For Samsung
Use
Only
3-30 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS)
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
3.2 Using the BIOS
This section describes the menus and related screens for configuring the MRU through the
BIOS.
3.2.1 Adapter
Figure 3-1 shows the main BIOS menu screen, which displays the physical drives and
related information installed on your computer.
From the Adapter screen, you can navigate to the Create and Delete screens.
3.2.2 Create
Follow these steps to create a logical drive:
1. Start the BIOS.
See Accessing the BIOS on page 3-28.
2. At the top of the screen, select the Create tab, and then press ENTER.
The Create screen appears. This screen lets you select the disk drives for the logical drive.
Figure 3-2 Select Disks to Create, Screen 1
Select from disks to create
ID Port Disk Name Size Speed
1
5
9
13
17
18
2
1
3
4
5
5
SATA:
SATA:
SATA:
SATA:
PATA:
PATA:
Maxtor 6L200P0
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
ST3400832A
SATA 1
SATA 1
SATA 1
SATA 1
164.6GB
164.6GB
164.6GB
164.6GB
400GB
203.9GB
UDMA-5
UDMA-6
NEXT
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-31
3. Select a drive, and then press ENTER.
An asterisk appears next to the selected drive.
Figure 3-3 Select Disks to Create, Screen 2
4. Select NEXT, and then press ENTER.
The Create Array screen appears, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Create Array Screen
5. View the options available by clicking in each field.
Select from disks to create
ID Port Disk Name Size Speed
1
5
9
13
17
18
2
1
3
4
5
5
SATA:
SATA:
SATA:
SATA:
PATA:
PATA:
Maxtor 6L200P0
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
ST3400832A
SATA 1
SATA 1
SATA 1
SATA 1
164.6GB
164.6GB
164.6GB
164.6GB
400GB
203.9GB
UDMA-5
UDMA-6
NEXT
*
*
Create Array
Raid level
Array Name
Disks ID
Max Size(MB)
Strip Size
:
:
:
:
:
:
NEXT
*
:
:
Capacity(MB)
Init Mode
Cache Mode
RAID0
1 5 9 13 17 18
987776
987776
64KB
No
Write Through
For Samsung
Use
Only
3-32 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS)
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
6. Enter values for the following logical drive properties:
RAID Level (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10)
Array Name
Capacity
Stripe Size (16K, 32K, 64K, 128K)
Init Mode (Initialization: None or Quick)
Cache Mode (Write Through or Write Back)
7. Select NEXT, and then press ENTER.
The BIOS main screen appears and displays the new logical drive.
Figure 3-5 Logical Drive Display
Adapter 1
Arrays Information:
Disks Information:
ID Port Disk Name Size Speed
1
5
9
13
17
18
2
1
3
4
5
5
SATA:
SATA:
SATA:
SATA:
PATA:
PATA:
Maxtor 6L200P0
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
HDT722516DLA380
ST3400832A
SATA 1
SATA 1
SATA 1
SATA 1
164.6GB
164.6GB
164.6GB
164.6GB
400GB
203.9GB
UDMA-5
UDMA-6
[Adapter] [Create] [Delete]
:Navigate, ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit
ID
1
Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members
New array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-33
3.2.3 Delete
Follow these steps to delete a logical drive:
1. Start the BIOS.
See Accessing the BIOS on page 3-28.
2. At the top of the screen, select the Delete tab, and then press Enter.
The Delete Array screen appears.
Figure 3-6 BIOS Delete, Screen 1
3. Select the logical drive to delete.
An asterisk appears next to the selected logical drive.
Figure 3-7 BIOS Delete, Screen 2
4. Select NEXT, and the press ENTER.
A message appears at the bottom of the BIOS screen about deleting the Master Boot Record
(MBR).
5. Press Y to delete the MBR.
The BIOS main screen appears and the deleted logical drive is no longer displayed.
Delete array
ID
1
Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members
new array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18
NEXT
Delete array
ID
1
Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members
new array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18
NEXT
*
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
3-34 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS)
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
4-35
4 SELECTING A RAID LEVEL
Redundant array of independent disks (RAID) is a storage technology consisting of one or
more disks working in parallel. RAID technology allows an array of physical disks to be
combined together to form a logical drive, which appears as a single storage device to the
user.
You can configure a RAID logical drive in several different ways, with each configuration
offering its own benefits. The Marvell RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10.
This chapter provides information about the properties of each RAID level and how to choose
a suitable RAID level.
The topics included in this chapter are:
RAID 0 (Striping)
RAID 1 (Mirroring)
RAID 10 (Mirroring and Striping)
Comparing RAID Levels
For Samsung
Use
Only
4-36 Selecting a RAID Level
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
4.1 RAID 0 (Striping)
RAID 0 is known as striping because data stripes of equal size on the logical drive are divided
among an even number of physical disks, as shown in Figure 4-1. Consequently, the speed
at which data is read and written is increased because data stored on multiple drives can be
read and written simultaneously. However, it is important to remember that data is divided
between multiple disk drives, so data is not recoverable if one of the physical disks fails.
Figure 4-1 RAID 0: Striping
RAID 0 is ideally suited in situations where all of the physical disk drives have the same
capacity. However, you can create a logical drive if the selected disk drives have different
capacities, but it will have a maximum capacity equal to the size of the smallest disk
multiplied by the total number of disks in the array. For example, a logical drive consisting of
two disks, an 80 Gb physical disk and a 100 Gb physical disk, can only create a logical drive
up to a maximum of 160 Gb (2 x 80 Gb).
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 8
Block 1
Block 3
Block 5
Block 7
Block 2
Block 4
Block 6
Block 8
Logical Drive
Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2
= Striping
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Selecting a RAID Level 4-37
4.2 RAID 1 (Mirroring)
RAID1 is known as mirroring because the data on the logical drive is written to a pair of
physical disks, which ensures that identical data appears on both of the physical disks. See
Figure 4-2 for more detail.
Figure 4-2 RAID 1: Mirroring
RAID 1 can increase Read performance. Data is identical on both of the physical disks, so a
read command can be sent to the disk that is not busy, rather than wait for the primary drive
to finish an in-process read. However, RAID 1 does incur a slight drop in Write performance
because both drives must be written to when sending data to the logical drive.
RAID 1 also incorporates fault-tolerance, which allows access to the data even if one
physical disk fails. In addition, if you replace the failed disk with a new physical disk, the
rebuild begins recreating the mirror set of drives, which can be accomplished while the
system continues to function normally.
Note: Mirroring is a technique used for redundancy, so it is important to remember that, for example,
two 80 Gb physical disks (a total of 160 Gb) would only store 80 Gb of original data because the
remaining 80 Gb is required to mirror the original data.
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 8
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Logical Drive
Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2
= Mirroring
For Samsung
Use
Only
4-38 Selecting a RAID Level
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
4.3 RAID 10 (Mirroring and Striping)
RAID 10 is a combination of the mirroring (RAID 1) and striping (RAID 0) techniques. At least
four physical disks (two pairs) are needed to configure a RAID 10 logical drive. Both pairs of
physical disks make separate RAID 0 stripes, and then the first RAID 0 drive is mirrored to
the second RAID 0 drive. See Figure 4-3 for more detail.
RAID 10 provides the read and write performance of RAID 0, while providing the redundancy
protection of RAID 1.
Also, in the event of a disk failure, the logical drive can rebuild itself while the system
continues to function normally.
Figure 4-3 RAID 10: Mirroring and Striping
Note: Like RAID 1, RAID 10 uses the mirroring technique for redundancy, so it is important to
remember that, for example, two 80 Gb physical disks (a total of 160 Gb) would only store 80 Gb of
original data because the remaining 80 Gb is required to mirror the original data.
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 8
Block 1
Block 3
Block 5
Block 7
Block 2
Block 4
Block 6
Block 8
Logical Drive
Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2
Striping
Block 1
Block 3
Block 5
Block 7
Block 2
Block 4
Block 6
Block 8
Physical Disk 3 Physical Disk 4
Striping Mirroring
=
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
Selecting a RAID Level 4-39
4.4 Comparing RAID Levels
Each RAID level has features that may or may not be suitable in certain situations, so it is
important to carefully consider which RAID level is best suited for a particular purpose.
4.4.1 RAID 0 (striping)
RAID 0 is simple to implement and provides increased reading and writing speed by
spreading the transfer of data across multiple channels and drives. However, RAID 0 does
not provide fault-tolerance, so all of the data is lost if one or more physical disks fail.
4.4.2 RAID 1 (mirroring)
RAID 1 is simple to implement and features automatic fault-tolerance. RAID 1 also provides
increased read performance because data can be requested in parallel. However, write
performance is decreased because two writes are required for each write command. Also,
RAID 1 uses just 50 percent of the total disk capacity.
4.4.3 RAID 10 (mirroring and striping)
RAID 10 features automatic fault-tolerance and provides increased reading and writing
speed by spreading the transfer of data across multiple channels and drives. However, RAID
10 uses just 50 percent of the total disk space and scalability is limited at a high inherent cost.
4.4.4 Overview of RAID Levels
Table 4-1 gives an overview of the features for each RAID level.
Table 4-1 RAID Features
Features RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 10
Simple implementation √ √
Improved read speed √√√
Improved write speed √ √
Fault-tolerance √ √
Efficient use of disk capacity √
Scalable √ √
Automatic rebuild √ √
Minimum number of drives 2 2 4
For Samsung
Use
Only
Marvell RAID Utility User Guide
4-40 Selecting a RAID Level
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Worldwide Corporate Offices
Marvell Semiconductor, Inc.
5488 Marvell Lane
Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA
Tel: 1.408.222.2500
Fax: 1.408.752.9028
Marvell Asia Pte, Ltd.
151 Lorong Chuan, #02-05
New Tech Park, Singapore 556741
Tel: 65.6756.1600
Fax: 65.6756.7600
Marvell Japan K.K.
Shinjuku Center Bldg. 44F
1-25-1, Nishi-Shinjuku, Shinjuku-ku
Tokyo 163-0644, Japan
Tel: 81.3.5324.0355
Fax: 81.3.5324.0354
Marvell Semiconductor Israel, Ltd.
6 Hamada Street
Mordot HaCarmel Industrial Park
Yokneam 20692, Israel
Tel: 972.4.909.1500
Fax: 972.4.909.1501
Marvell Semiconductor Korea, Ltd.
Rm. 1603, Korea Trade Center 159-1
Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Ku
Seoul, Korea 135-729
Tel: 82.2.551-6070-6079
Fax: 82.2.551.6080
Radlan Computer Communications, Ltd.
Atidim Technological Park, Bldg. #4
P O Box 58179
Tel Aviv 61580, Israel
Tel: 972.3.645.8555
Fax: 972.3.645.8544
Worldwide Sales Offices
Western US
Marvell
5488 Marvell Lane
Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA
Tel: 1.408.222.2500
Fax: 1.408.752.9028
Sales Fax: 1.408.752.9029
Central US
Marvell
9600 North MoPac Drive, Suite #215
Austin, TX 78759, USA
Tel: 1.512.343.0593
Fax: 1.512.340.9970
Eastern US/Canada
Marvell
Parlee Office Park
1 Meeting House Road, Suite 1
Chelmsford, MA 01824 , USA
Tel: 1.978.250.0588
Fax: 1.978.250.0589
Europe
Marvell
c/o Harts CA
3 Churchgates
Church Lane
Berkhamsted
Hertfordshire, HP4 2UB
United Kingdom
Tel: 44.1442.263341
Fax: 44.1442.211543
Israel
Marvell
6 Hamada Street
Mordot HaCarmel Industrial Park
Yokneam 20692, Israel
Tel: 972.4.909.1500
Fax: 972.4.909.1501
China
Marvell
10J, No. 1800, Zhong Shan West Road
Shanghai, PRC 200235
Tel: 86.21.6440.1350
Fax: 86.21.6440.1705
Marvell
Rm. 1102/1103, Jintai Fudi Mansion
#9 An Ning Zhuang West Rd.
Qing He, Haidian District
Beijing, PRC 100085
Tel: 86.10.8274.3831
Fax: 86.10.8274.3830
Japan
Marvell
Shinjuku Center Bldg. 44F
1-25-1, Nishi-Shinjuku, Shinjuku-ku
Tokyo 163-0644, Japan
Tel: 81.3.5324.0355
Fax: 81.3.5324.0354
Taiwan
Marvell
2Fl., No.1, Alley 20, Lane 407, Sec. 2
Ti-Ding Blvd., Nei Hu District
Taipei, Taiwan, 114, R.O.C
Tel: 886.2.8177.7071
Fax: 886.2.8752.5707
Korea
Marvell
Rm. 1603, Korea Trade Center 159-1
Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Ku
Seoul, Korea 135-729
Tel: 82.2.551-6070-6079
Fax: 82.2.551.6080
Marvell Semiconductor, Inc.
5488 Marvell Lane
Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA
Tel: 1.408.222.2500
Fax: 1.408.752.9028
www.marvell.com
For more information, visit our website at:
www.marvell.com
英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器
用户指南
ii
修订记录
修订版 修订记录 日期
-001 《英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南》第一版 2006 年 5 月
如果台式机主板上贴有 FCC 合格声明标志，则适用以下声明：
FCC 合格声明
本设备符合联邦规章法案 (FCC) 第 15 部分的要求。其操作符合以下两个条件：(1) 本设备不会产生有害干扰；而且，
(2) 本设备必须承受任何接收到的干扰，包括可能引起不良操作的干扰。
若您对本产品的电磁兼容性性能有任何疑问，请联络：
Intel Corporation
5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway
Hillsboro, OR 97124
1-800-628-8686
本设备已经过测试，符合联邦规章法案 (FCC) 第 15 部分对 B 类数字设备的限制要求。这些限制旨在提供合理的保护措施，
以防止在居住区安装本设备时可能产生的有害干扰。本设备将产生、使用并可能辐射无线电射频能。如果未按说明安装和使用
本设备，可能会对无线电通信造成有害干扰。然而，在特定条件下的正确安装并不保证不会产生此类干扰。如果本设备确实对
无线电通信或电视接收产生了有害干扰（通过关闭和打开本设备可判定有无干扰产生），用户可采取以下一种或几种措施消除
干扰：
• 改变接收天线的方向或位置。
• 增大本设备与接收设备之间的距离。
• 将本设备和接收设备分别连接到归属于不同电路的电源插座中。
• 咨询经销商或经验丰富的无线电／电视技术人员，以寻求帮助。
未经英特尔公司明确许可，若对本设备作出任何修改或改动，用户可能丧失操作本设备的权利。
本设备经测试，符合家用或商用环境下的 FCC 标准。
加拿大通信部 (Canadian Department of Communications) 符合标准声明
本数字设备未超过对无线电噪声辐射的 B 类限制，此限制是加拿大通信部颁布的《无线电干扰规则》(Radio Interference
Regulations) 中对数字设备的限制性规定。
Le présent appareil numerique német pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux
appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le broullage radioélectrique édicté par
le ministére des Communications du Canada.
iii
免责声明
本文档提供有关英特尔® 产品的信息。本文档并未授予任何知识产权的许可，并未以明示或暗示，或以禁止反言或其它方式
授予任何知识产权许可。除英特尔在其产品的销售条款和条件中声明的责任之外，英特尔概不承担任何其它责任。并且，
英特尔对英特尔产品的销售和／或使用不作任何明示或暗示的担保，包括对产品的特定用途适用性、适销性或对任何专利权、
版权或其它知识产权的侵权责任等，均不作担保。Intel 产品并非设计用于医疗、救生、维生、关键控制、安全系统或核能
设施等用途。英特尔可能随时对产品规格及产品描述作出修改，恕不另行通知。
本文档所含的所有信息和软件均以其“原始状况”向客户提供。英特尔公司对本文档的使用及其所含的软件和信息不承担任何
明示或暗示担保和责任，并且对本文档或软件可能含有的任何错误亦概不承担任何责任，与此同时，英特尔不承诺对本文档所
含的信息或软件进行更新。英特尔保留随时对本文档或软件进行修订的权利，恕不另行通知。有关特定 Linux* 版本的支持，
请与经销商联系、查询。
英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器随带的某些软件可能是由第三方提供的，而非英特尔（“第三方软件”）。您对第三方软件
的使用权受此类组件随供的许可协议的管辖。英特尔不以任何方式对此类第三方软件作任何担保，并且对您对第三方软件的
使用概不承担任何责任。有关特定支持，请与第三方软件经销商联系、查询。
本文档及其所述软件是经过许可而提供的，因此对它的使用或复制需满足相应的许可条件。本手册所含信息仅供参考，并随时
予以修订，恕不另行通知，因此不得认为是英特尔作出的承诺。英特尔公司对本文档或本文档提及的任何软件可能存在的任何
错误或不准确概不承担任何责任或义务。
除非此类许可允许，否则未经英特尔公司以书面形式表示明确同意，不得以任何方式或通过任何手段对本文档的任何部分进行
复制、在检索系统中存储或传送。
英特尔是英特尔公司或其子公司在美国及其它国家的商标或注册商标。
* 其它名称和品牌分别为其相应所有者的财产。
版权所有 © 2006 年，英特尔公司。保留所有权利。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
iv
v
前言
本《用户指南》提供有关英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器的安装、功能与特性、故障诊断与排除及规范要求
等信息。
文档结构
本《用户指南》包括以下各章内容：
1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡：提供有关安装本 PCI 电话适配卡的指导
2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器：提供有关如何安装本 PCI 电话适配软件的指导
3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话：提供有关使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话的指导
4 高级功能：描述 PCI 电话适配器的高级功能
5 故障诊断与排除：提供有关 PCI 电话适配器故障诊断与排除的信息
A 符合标准与规章：提供有关安全规范和 EMC 认证及产品认证等信息
体例
本文档采用如下体例：
注意
注意提醒用户如何避免损坏硬件或丢失数据。
注释
注释提示用户对重要信息引起重视。
术语
下表列出了本指南中常用的一些术语及其说明。
术语 说明
hook flash
（转接）
短暂（一秒半）挂断电话的动作。此项操作通常用作执行服务的信号，如转接呼叫。
softphone 允许您从计算机或计算设备拨打互联网语音 (Voice over Internet Protocol, VoIP)
电话的程序。互联网电话服务提供商通常在其服务中提供 softphone 应用程序。
VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol（互联网语音）的首字母缩写，允许以数字方式在
互联网上发送语音信息。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
vi
系统要求
• 以下英特尔® 台式机主板之一：
D945GNT/D945GCZ/D945GTP/D945GPM/D945GBO/D945PLNM/D915PDT/D101GGC/
D102GGC2/D865GSA
• 以下操作系统之一：
⎯ Microsoft Windows* XP Professional
⎯ Microsoft Windows XP Home
包装盒内容
• 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配卡
• Intel® Express Installer CD-ROM（英特尔® 快速安装程序光盘）
• 半高 PCI 支架
• 注意事项标签
• 《参考指南》
vii
目录
1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 .............................................................. 9
电话适配器操作注意事项 ............................................................................................9
安装电话适配器硬件................................................................................................10
将电话适配器连接到电话机上 ....................................................................................11
2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器 ........................................................... 13
在Microsoft Windows XP 环境中安装电话适配器 ..........................................................13
电话适配器国别／地区设置 .......................................................................................14
在 Windows* XP 环境中卸载电话适配器 .....................................................................16
卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序........................................................................................16
3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话....................................................................... 17
对于 Skype* 用户 .................................................................................................17
4 高级功能.................................................................................................. 19
呼叫方 ID 功能 .....................................................................................................19
按国家的呼叫等待和电话会议呼叫功能 .........................................................................19
5 故障诊断与排除 ......................................................................................... 21
电话适配器误插到了墙壁电话插座中 ............................................................................21
SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）在挂起状态不工作 ...........................................21
拨打电话时听不到拨号音 ..........................................................................................21
与 Skype 相关的问题 .............................................................................................22
A 符合标准与规章 ......................................................................................... 25
欧盟符合标准声明 ..................................................................................................25
产品生态声明........................................................................................................26
电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章...........................................................................................27
产品认证 .............................................................................................................28
表
1. 无铅卡标志 .....................................................................................................26
2. EMC（电磁兼容性）规章....................................................................................27
3. 产品认证标志 ..................................................................................................28
4. 服务提供商认证 ...............................................................................................29
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
viii
9
1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡
注意
静电放电 (ESD) 会损坏 PCI 电话适配卡组件。请在防静电工作台上安装本 PCI 卡。如果没有防静电工作台
可用，应佩戴防静电腕带或在对卡进行操作前触摸一下防静电包装袋。
电话适配器操作注意事项
本电话适配卡会因静电而被损坏。请遵守以下各项说明，以最大程度地减小电话适配器因静电放电而被损坏的
危险性。
1. 开始操作之前，首先将安装电话适配器所需的各种物品摆放在手边。在房间内来回走动取用工具会导致
静电累加。
2. 对电话适配器进行操作期间，应始终保持身体与计算机的金属部分或其电源系统相接触。触摸一下计算机
可放掉任何累加的静电。
3. 只准握持电话适配卡的顶部边缘和支架部分。切勿触及卡边缘上的连接器或裸露的线路。
4. 切勿将电话适配器放置在任何金属表面上。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
10
安装电话适配器硬件
要安装 PCI 电话适配卡，请：
1. 关闭计算机的电源并拔下交流电源电缆。拆下箱盖。
2. 找到某个尚未占用的 PCI 插槽的位置。
3. 如有必要，拆下该尚未占用插槽上的盖板。将螺丝存放好。
4. 将电话适配卡插入 PCI 插槽。插入卡期间您可能需要用力推压，以确保插接牢固。
5. 重新上好盖板螺丝。
OM19432
安装英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配卡
11
将电话适配器连接到电话机上
注意
切勿将英特尔 600SM 电话适配卡直接连接到墙壁电话插座中。当切断电话适配器与墙壁电话插座的连接且
计算机重新启动后，电话适配器方可正常工作。只当将电话适配器连接到模拟电话机上时，电话适配器方可
正常发挥作用。
OM19433
1. 将普通电话机连接到电话适配卡背面板上的 RJ-11 插孔中，如下图所示。
OM19434
RJ-11
2. 重新连接好计算机的交流电源电缆。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
12
13
2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器
在 Microsoft Windows XP 环境中安装电话适配器
要安装电话适配器驱动程序，请：
1. 打开计算机电源。
2. 当屏幕上出现 New Hardware Wizard（新硬件向导）窗口时，请单击 Cancel（取消）。
3. 将 Intel Express Installer CD（英特尔快速安装程序光盘）放入计算机的 CD-ROM 驱动器。
4. 当屏幕上出现 Intel Express Installer（英特尔快速安装程序）窗口时，请接受默认设置并单击
Install Now（立即开始安装）。
5. 按屏幕上显示的安装消息执行安装。
6. 当电话适配器驱动程序安装完毕后，计算机将自动重新启动。
7. 当成功完成该软件的安装后，主菜单将显示最终状态
注释
安装程序将自动将您当地的互联网语音 (Voice over Internet Protocol, VOIP) 服务提供商的图标安装到您的
计算机上。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
14
电话适配器国别／地区设置
要更改您的电话适配器的国别／地区设置，请按以下步骤操作：
1. 打开 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器），双击 Sound, video and game
controllers（声音、视频和游戏控制器），然后双击 Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter
（Intel® 600SM PCI 电话适配器），进入 Properties（属性）对话框。
设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器
15
2. 在 Properties（属性）对话框中，单击 Country/region（国别／地区）选项卡。该选项卡提供对可选
国家名称菜单的访问，此将指示驱动程序采用国家特定的信号规范。选择恰当的国别／地区，然后单击
OK（确定）。
欲获取使用 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
16
在 Windows* XP 环境中卸载电话适配器
要在 Windows XP 环境中卸载调制解调器，请：
1. 打开 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器），双击 Sound, video and game
controllers（声音、视频和游戏控制器），右键单击 Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter
（Intel® 600SM PCI 电话适配器），然后选择 Uninstall（卸载）。
2. 按屏幕上显示的卸载说明操作。
欲获取使用 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。
注释
不安装电话适配器驱动程序，电话适配器将不起作用。
卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序
要卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序，请：
1. 在 Windows Control Panel（控制面板）中，打开 Add or Remove Programs（添加或删除程序）
实用程序，选择 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序），然后单击 Change/Remove
（更改／删除）。
2. 按屏幕上显示的卸载说明操作。
欲获取使用 Add or Remove Programs（添加或删除程序）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。
17
3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话
要使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话，请：
• 参阅您的 softphone 服务提供的说明。取决于您的 softphone 服务，使用电话适配器拨打电话的说明
可能有所不同。
• 确保您的 softphone 应用程序正处于运行状态。
注释
电话适配器不支持拨号调制解调器连接或传真传输。
对于 Skype* 用户
当您首次运行 Skype 时，屏幕上将出现一个请求允许电话适配器使用 Skype 的对话框。 重要说明！您必须
选择 “Allow this program to use Skype”（允许该程序使用 Skype），然后单击 OK（确定），
以使用电话适配器通过 Skype 拨打电话。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
18
SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）弹出菜单
当您完成电话适配器软件的安装后，系统任务栏上将显示如下 SoftPhone Agent
（SoftPhone 代理程序）图标。
右键单击 softphone 代理程序图标，可查看显示 Skype 状态的弹出菜单，借此您可请求
SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）是否在系统启动时运行，并允许您退出
SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）。
注释
要使用 PCI 电话适配器通过 Skype 拨打电话，那么 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）
则必须在系统任务栏上处于运行状态。
拨号说明
• 要在美国拨打本地或长途电话，请拨 1 + 区号 + 七位电话号码 + #。
• 要在美国以外的国家拨打本地或长途电话，请拨国家代码 + 区号 + 电话号码 + #。
• 要拨打国际电话，您必须按如下方法拨号：国家前缀 + 国家代码 + 区号 + 电话号码 + #。
要拨打 Skype 对 Skype 电话，只需为 Skype 联系人分配一个两位快速拨号，然后在连接到 PCI 电话适配器
的模拟电话机上拨打该号码即可。
注释
有关最新说明，请查阅 Skype 网站。
19
4 高级功能
英特尔® 600M PCI 电话适配器支持多项高级功能，如呼叫方 ID（I 类和 II 类）、呼叫等待和电话会议
呼叫等。
呼叫方 ID 功能
I 类呼叫方 ID 允许您在呼叫方 ID 屏幕上查看拨入呼叫的电话号码。而 II 类呼叫方 ID 则允许您在通话期间
查看拨入呼叫的电话号码。如果您已使用 softphone 应用程序创建了联系人名单，那么当您接到某个联系人
的呼叫时，您则可在呼叫方 ID 屏幕上查看该联系人的姓名。
按国家的呼叫等待和电话会议呼叫功能
注释
术语 “hook flash”（转接）是指通过按 “Flash”（闪挂）按钮或电话机的话筒挂叉而短暂（一秒半）挂断
电话。
对于除英国、法国和德国以外的所有国家
基本呼叫等待
要挂起当前的呼叫而接听拨入的呼叫，请：
1. 执行 hook flash（转接）操作。第一个呼叫则被挂起，进而接通第二个拨入呼叫。
2. 要重新接通第一个呼叫，请再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。
基本电话会议
要在三部和三部以上电话机间建立电话会议呼叫：
1. 请拨打会议的第一部电话。
2. 当接通第一部电话后，执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。
3. 请拨打会议的第二部电话。接通后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时，全部三部电话均已相互
接通。
4. 要添加下一部电话，请重复执行如上各步。
电话会议呼叫期间的呼叫等待
电话会议呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法与普通电话呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法相同。如果您处于电话会议
呼叫期间，当有呼叫拨入时，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，使电话会议呼叫挂起，而接通拨入的呼叫。
当完成拨入呼叫的通话后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作，则被重新接入原先的电话会议呼叫。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
20
英国、法国和德国
在英国、法国和德国使用高级呼叫功能的动作主要有三种。具体如下：
功能 操作
挂断通话 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 1
转至另一个呼叫 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 2
将呼叫接入会议 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 3
当使用这些功能时，您必须在执行 hook flash（转接）操作后等待拨号音。当听到拨号音后，您可按电话键盘
上相应的呼叫控制数字键。不按呼叫控制数字键将取消该过程。但在某些情况下，执行 hook flash（转接）
操作已足以对呼叫等待事件作出应答或开始一项新的呼叫。如果电话会议呼叫已建立完毕，那么“挂断通话”
和“转至另一个呼叫”功能只可用于其它拨入或拨出的呼叫。
基本呼叫等待
要挂起当前的呼叫而应答拨入的呼叫，请：
1. 执行 hook flash（转接）操作。第一个呼叫则被挂起，进而接通第二个拨入呼叫。
2. 要重新接通原来的电话呼叫，请首先执行 hook flash（转接）操作。然后，当听到拨号音时，
按数字键 2，此时您便重新接通了原来的电话呼叫。执行如上相同的步骤便可接回第二个呼叫方。
3. 要建立包含所有三方的电话会议呼叫，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音，然后按数字键 3。
4. 要挂断当前的通话并转至呼叫挂起状态，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音，然后
按数字键 1。
基本电话会议
要在三部和三部以上电话机间建立电话会议呼叫，请：
1. 拨打会议的第一部电话。
2. 当接通第一部电话后，执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。
3. 请拨打会议的第二部电话。接通后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。
按数字键 3 将第二部电话添加到会议中。此时，全部三部电话均已相互接通。
4. 要添加下一部电话，请重复执行如上各步。
电话会议呼叫期间的呼叫等待
电话会议呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法与普通单机电话呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法相同。如果您处于电话会
议呼叫期间，当有呼叫拨入时，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，使电话会议呼叫挂起，而接通拨入的呼叫。
一旦接通拨入呼叫，请再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。按数字键 2 便重新接通电话会议
呼叫，与此同时，拨入的呼叫则被置于挂起状态。如果您希望将该拨入呼叫添加到当前的会议中，请执行
hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。然后按数字键 3，拨入的呼叫便被添加到会议中。如果您希望挂断
拨入呼叫，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。按数字键 1，拨入的呼叫便被挂断，且您将同时
重新接通电话会议呼叫。
21
5 故障诊断与排除
电话适配器误插到了墙壁电话插座中
如果您将电话适配器连接到了墙壁电话插座上，请执行如下各步：
1. 关闭计算机电源。
2. 从墙壁电话插座上拔下电话适配器并将其连接到普通电话机上（有关详细说明，请参阅第 11 页）。
3. 打开计算机电源。
SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）在挂起状态不工作
如果在 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）运行期间试图将计算机置于挂起状态〈例如待机或
睡眠〉，或者如果计算机因不活动超时而进入挂起状态，那么将显示一条挂起将禁用 softphone 服务的
消息，然后问您是否继续。计算机处于挂起状态期间，您将无法使用电话适配器接听或拨打电话。
拨打电话时听不到拨号音
如果 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）未处于运行状态，或者如果 softphone 应用程序未与您的
VoIP 服务提供商建立有效连接，那么您的电话适配器则不生成拨号音。如果当您拿起话筒时听不到拨号音，
那么请尝试以下各项故障诊断步骤，期间每完成一步，请检查一次拨号音：
1. 确保 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）以及 softphone 应用程序均处于运行状态。
2. 确保 softphone 应用程序已与您的 VoIP 服务提供商建立有效连接。
3. 确保电话适配卡已连接到电话机上。
4. 拔下电话机和电话适配器的电话线，然后再重新插接一次。
5. 在电话适配器和电话机之间换用一条新的电话线（RJ-11 规格电话线）。
6. 检查并确保 PCI 电话适配卡已正确地连接到计算机上且连接牢固。否则，请重新插接 PCI 电话适配卡
（有关详细说明，请参阅第 9 页）。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
22
与 Skype 相关的问题
Skype 不允许 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）使用 Skype
如果出现如下弹出消息：“Request to access Skype was denied. Please check Skype Options and
restart the SoftPhone Agent”（请求访问 Skype 被拒绝。请检查 Skype Options（Skype 选项）
并重新启动 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）），那么说明 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone
代理程序）已被 Skype 阻止。请执行如下各步，以从被阻止程序列表中删除 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone
代理程序）：
注释
取决于您所使用的 Skype，以下窗口可能有所不同。
1. 在 Skype 主菜单中，单击 Tools（工具），然后从下拉菜单中选择 Options（选项）。
2. 在 Options（选项）窗口中，单击 Manage other programs' access to Skype（管理其它
程序对 Skype 的访问）。
故障诊断与排除
23
3. 选择 IADAPT32.EXE（如下所示），单击 Change（更改），然后单击 OK（确定）。
4. 当下面的窗口出现时，选择 Allow this program to use Skype（允许本程序使用 Skype），
然后单击 OK（确定）。
至此，您便可以通过您的电话适配器使用 Skype 了。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
24
25
A 符合标准与规章
本附录包括英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器符合的以下规范、规章和标准信息：
• 欧盟符合标准声明
• 产品生态声明
• 电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章
• 产品认证
欧盟符合标准声明
我们，即英特尔公司，基于独立承担责任的原则在此声明，本英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器产品符合
获得 CE 标志认证的所有适用标准和基本要求，并符合欧盟委员会规章 89/336/EEC（电磁兼容性规章）
和 73/23/EEC（安全／低电压规章）的要求。
本产品上贴有 CE 标志，表示符合欧盟所有成员国的规章要求，可不受任何限制地在欧盟各国销售。
本产品符合欧盟规章 89/336/EEC 和 73/23/EEC 的规定和要求。
This product follows the provisions of the European Directives 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC.
Čeština Tento výrobek odpovídá požadavkům evropských směrnic 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC.
Dansk Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med det europæiske direktiv 89/336/EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Dutch Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 89/336/EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Eesti Antud toode vastab Euroopa direktiivides 89/336/EEC ja 73/23/EEC kehtestatud nõuetele.
Suomi Tämä tuote noudattaa EU-direktiivin 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC määräyksiä.
Français Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Européenne 89/336/EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Deutsch Dieses Produkt entspricht den Bestimmungen der Europäischen Richtlinie 89/336/EEC
& 73/23/EEC.
Ελληνικά Το παρόν προϊόν ακολουθεί τις διατάξεις των Ευρωπαϊκών Οδηγιών 89/336/ΕΟΚ και
73/23/ΕΟΚ.
Magyar E termék megfelel a 89/336/EEC és 73/23/EEC Európai Irányelv előírásainak.
Icelandic Þessi vara stenst reglugerð Evrópska Efnahags Bandalagsins númer 89/336/ EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Italiano Questo prodotto è conforme alla Direttiva Europea 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC.
Latviešu Šis produkts atbilst Eiropas Direktīvu 89/336/EEC un 73/23/EEC noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šis produktas atitinka Europos direktyvų 89/336/EEC ir 73/23/EEC nuostatas.
Malti Dan il-prodott hu konformi mal-provvedimenti tad-Direttivi Ewropej 89/336/EEC u
73/23/EEC.
Norsk Dette produktet er i henhold til bestemmelsene i det europeiske direktivet 89/336/ EEC
& 73/23/EEC.
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
26
Polski Niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z postanowieniami Dyrektyw Unii Europejskiej
89/336/EWG i 73/23/EWG.
Portuguese Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Européia 89/336/EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Español Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC.
Slovensky Tento produkt je v súlade s ustanoveniami európskych direktív 89/336/EEC a
73/23/EEC.
Slovenščina Izdelek je skladen z določbami evropskih direktiv 89/336/EGS in 73/23/EGS.
Svenska Denna produkt har tillverkats i enlighet med EG-direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC.
Türkçe Bu ürün, Avrupa Birliği’nin 89/336/EEC ve 73/23/EEC yönergelerine uyar.
产品生态声明
无铅 PCI 卡
本 PCI 卡不含铅成分，而本卡上所采用的某些独立组件却含有少量的铅成分，但这些铅成分是确保组件发挥其
性能和／或可靠性所必需的。本 PCI 卡属于“无铅二级互连”(Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect) 产品。
本 PCI 卡的基层以及连接 PCI 卡和组件（二级连接）的焊料均不含铅成分。表 1 列出了贴于卡上的各种
“无铅二级互连”(Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect) 标志及其标识文字。
表 1. 无铅卡标志
说明 标志
无铅二级互连产品：此符号用于
标识 PCI 卡的基层以及连接 PCI
卡和组件（二级连接）的焊料中铅
(Pb) 含量水平不高于其重量的
0.1% (1000 ppm) 的电气和电子
组件及部件。 或
或
符合标准与规章
27
电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器若以正确方式安装于兼容的主机系统中，将符合表 2 所列的所有 EMC
（电磁兼容性）规章。
表 2. EMC（电磁兼容性）规章
规章 标题
FCC B 类 Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 2 and 15,
Subpart B, Radio Frequency Devices（联邦规章法案第 47 条第 2
和第 15 部分的 B 子部分，射频设备）。（美国）
ICES-003（B 类） Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus
（可引起干扰的设备标准，数字设备）。（加拿大）
EN55022: 1998 年
（B 类）
Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Interference
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment
（对信息技术设备无线电干扰特性的限制和测量方法）。（欧盟）
EN55024: 1998 年 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics
Limits and methods of measurement（信息技术设备 – 抗扰性特性的
限制和测量方法）。（欧盟）
AS/NZS CISPR22
（B 类）
Australian Communications Authority, Standard for
Electromagnetic Compatibility（澳大利亚通信管理局电磁兼容性标准）。
（澳大利亚和新西兰）
CISPR 22，第 3 版
（B 类）
Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Disturbance
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment（对信息技术
设备无线电干扰特性的限制和测量方法）。（国际）
CISPR 24: 1997 年 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics –
Limits and Methods of Measurement（信息技术设备 – 抗扰性特性 –
限制和测量方法）。（国际）
VCCI（B 类） Voluntary Control for Interference by Information Technology
Equipment（信息技术设备民间干扰控制）。（日本）
日本声明的译文：依照信息技术设备民间干扰控制委员会 (VCCI) 标准，本设备属于 B 类产品。在居住
环境下，如果在无线电或电视接收机附近使用本设备，将可能产生无线电干扰。应按照产品手册中的说明
安装和使用本设备。
韩国 B 类设备声明译文：此设备属于家用设备，经验证符合 EMC（电磁兼容性）的有关要求。您可在居住
环境和其它非居住环境下使用本设备。
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
28
产品认证
台式机主板级认证标志
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器上贴有如下产品认证标志：
表 3. 产品认证标志
说明 标志
UL 美国／加拿大共同认可组件标志。包括英特尔台式机主板的相关 UL
文件号：E210882。
B 类设备 FCC 合格声明徽标；包括英特尔名称和 600SM 型号。
CE 标志。声明符合欧盟 (EU) EMC 规章 (89/336/EEC) 和低电压规章
(73/23/EEC)。
澳大利亚通信管理局 (ACA) C 勾号标志。包括与其相邻的英特尔供应商代码
N-232。
日本 VCCI（民间干扰控制委员会）合格标志。
韩国 MIC（信息和通信部）认证标志。包括与其相邻的 MIC 认证编号：
CPU-600SM。
有关 MIC 认证的信息，请访问以下站点
http://support.intel.com/support/motherboards/desktop/600SM
台湾 BSMI（标准计量与检验局）标志。包括与其相邻的英特尔公司代号
D33025。
印刷电路板制造商认可标志。包括独特效果的 UL 认证制造商徽标和易燃性
等级号（位于焊接一侧）。
V-0
符合标准与规章
29
服务提供商认证
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器上贴有如下服务提供商认证标志：
表 4. 服务提供商认证
说明 标志
Skype 认证标志。
英特尔 600SM 电话适配器已取得 Skype 认证*
*免责声明：本认证仅适用于英特尔 600SM PCI 电话
适配卡，因此不适用于系统或其它组件的认证。有关详情，
请查阅 http://www.skype.com/partners/hardware/
certified_guidelines.html
英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南
30
Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter
User’s Guide
Order Number: D61185-001US
ii
Revision History
Revision Revision History Date
-001 First release of the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide May 2006
If an FCC declaration of conformity marking is present on the board, the following statement applies:
FCC Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For questions related to the EMC performance of this product, contact:
Intel Corporation
5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway
Hillsboro, OR 97124
1-800-628-8686
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit other than the one to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved by Intel Corporation could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tested to comply with FCC standards for home or office use.
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set
out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le présent appareil numerique német pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux
appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le broullage radioélectrique édicté par
le ministére des Communications du Canada.
iii
Disclaimer
Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel® products. No license, express or implied,
by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided
in Intel’s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products, Intel assumes no liability whatsoever, and Intel
disclaims any express or implied warranty, relating to sale and/or use of Intel products including liability or
warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent,
copyright or other intellectual property right. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving,
life sustaining, critical control or safety systems, or in nuclear facility applications. Intel may make changes
to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice.
All information and software contained herein is provided "AS IS" to Intel customers. Intel Corporation
disclaims all express or implied warranties and liabilities for the use of this document, the software and the
information contained herein, and assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this
document or the software, nor does Intel make a commitment to update the information or software
contained herein. Intel reserves the right to make changes to this document or software at any time,
without notice. Please contact the distribution vendor for specific Linux* version support.
Some of the software included with the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter may be provided by third parties
other than Intel (“Third Party Software”). Your rights to use the Third Party Software are governed by the
license agreements that accompany such components. Intel does not warrant such Third Party Software in
any way and assumes no liability for your use of the Third Party Software. Please contact the distribution
vendor of the Third Party Software for specific support.
This document as well as the software described in it are furnished under license and may only be used or
copied in accordance with the terms of the license. The information in this manual is furnished for
informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment
by Intel Corporation. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies
that may appear in this document or any software that may be provided in association with this document.
Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the express written consent of Intel
Corporation.
Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and
other countries.
* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Copyright © 2006. Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
iv
v
Preface
This User’s Guide provides information about installation, features, troubleshooting, and
regulatory requirements for the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter.
Document Organization
The chapters in this User’s Guide are arranged as follows:
1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card: instructions on how to install the PCI
phone adapter card
2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter: instructions on how to install the PCI phone
adapter software
3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter: instructions on how to make a call using the
PCI phone adapter
4 Advanced Features: description of the advanced features of the PCI phone adapter
5 Troubleshooting: troubleshooting information for the PCI phone adapter
A Regulatory Compliance: safety and EMC regulations, and product certification
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this manual:
CAUTION
Cautions warn the user about how to prevent damage to hardware or loss of data.
NOTE
Notes call attention to important information.
Terminology
The table below gives descriptions of some common terms used in this guide.
Term Description
hook flash The act of hanging up the telephone for a short period of time (one-half
second). This operation is often used as a signal to perform services, such as
transferring a call.
softphone A program that allows you to make Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
telephone calls from your computer or computing device. Internet telephony
providers typically include a softphone application along with their service.
VoIP The acronym for Voice over Internet Protocol, which allows voice information
to be sent digitally over the Internet.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
vi
System Requirements
• One of the following Intel® Desktop Boards:
D945GNT/D945GCZ/D945GTP/D945GPM/D945GBO/D945PLNM/D915PDT/D101GGC/
D102GGC2/D865GSA
• One of the following operating systems:
⎯ Microsoft Windows* XP Professional
⎯ Microsoft Windows XP Home
Box Contents
• Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card
• Intel® Express Installer CD-ROM
• Half-height PCI bracket
• Caution label
• Reference Guide
vii
Contents
1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card
Phone Adapter Handling Precautions........................................................................9
Installing the Phone Adapter Hardware ..................................................................10
Connecting the Phone Adapter to the Telephone ..................................................... 11
2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter
Installing the Phone Adapter Drivers in Microsoft Windows XP...................................13
Phone Adapter Country/Region Settings .................................................................14
Uninstalling the Phone Adapter in Windows* XP ......................................................16
Uninstalling the SoftPhone Agent ..........................................................................16
3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter
For Skype* Users ................................................................................................17
4 Advanced Features
Caller ID Features ...............................................................................................19
Call Waiting and Conference Call Features by Locale ................................................19
5 Troubleshooting
The phone adapter was plugged into a telephone wall jack by mistake....................... 21
SoftPhone Agent will not function in a suspend state ...............................................21
No dial tone heard when placing a call ...................................................................21
Skype-related Issues ...........................................................................................22
A Regulatory Compliance
European Union Declaration of Conformity Statement ..............................................25
Product Ecology Statement...................................................................................26
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Regulations ....................................................27
Product Certifications...........................................................................................28
Tables
1. Lead-Free Board Markings ..............................................................................26
2. EMC Regulations............................................................................................27
3. Product Certification Markings .........................................................................28
4. Service Provider Certification ..........................................................................28
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
viii
9
1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone
Adapter Card
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the PCI Phone Adapter Card components. Install the
PCI card at an ESD-controlled workstation. If such a workstation is not available, wear an
antistatic wrist strap or touch the surface of the antistatic package before handling the card.
Phone Adapter Handling Precautions
This phone adapter card can be damaged by static electricity. Follow these instructions to
minimize the risk of damaging the phone adapter with electrostatic discharge:
1. Place everything you need to install the phone adapter close at hand before starting.
Moving around the room to get tools causes static electricity to build up.
2. Stay in physical contact with a metal portion of the computer or the computer's power
supply while handling the phone adapter. Touching the computer will discharge any built-up
static electricity.
3. Handle the phone adapter card by its top edge and bracket only. Do not touch the edge
connectors or the exposed circuitry.
4. Do not place the phone adapter on any metal surface.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
10
Installing the Phone Adapter Hardware
To install the PCI Phone Adapter card:
1. Turn off the computer and unplug the AC power cord. Remove the cover.
2. Locate an unused PCI slot.
3. If necessary, remove the coverplate from the open slot. Save the screw.
4. Insert the phone adapter card into the PCI slot. You may have to push firmly to insert the
card.
5. Replace the coverplate screw.
OM19432
Installing the Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card
11
Connecting the Phone Adapter to the Telephone
CAUTION
Do not directly connect the Intel 600SM Phone Adapter card to a telephone wall jack. The
phone adapter will not function properly until it is disconnected from the telephone wall jack and
the computer is rebooted. The phone adapter will only function properly when connected to an
analog phone.
OM19433
1. Connect a standard telephone to the RJ-11 jack on the back panel of the phone adapter
card, as shown below.
OM19434
RJ-11
2. Reconnect the computer’s AC power cord.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
12
13
2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter
Installing the Phone Adapter Drivers in
Microsoft Windows XP
To install your phone adapter drivers:
1. Turn on the computer.
2. When the New Hardware Wizard appears, click Cancel.
3. Place the Intel Express Installer CD into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
4. When the Intel Express Installer window appears, accept the default settings and click
Install Now.
5. Follow the installation messages that appear.
6. The computer will automatically reboot after installing the phone adapter drivers.
7. After successful installation of the software, the main menu shows the final status.
NOTE
The installation procedure will automatically install icons on your computer for your regional
Voice over Internet Protocol (VOIP) service providers.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
14
Phone Adapter Country/Region Settings
To change the country/region settings for your phone adapter, do the following:
1. Open Windows Device Manager, double-click Sound, video and game controllers, and
then right-click Intel(R) 600SM PCI Phone Adapter to access the Properties dialog box.
Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter
15
2. From the Properties dialog box, click the Country/region tab. This tab provides access to a
menu of selectable country names, which will indicate to the driver to use a country-specific
signaling profile. Select the appropriate country/region and click OK.
For help with using Windows Device Manager, refer to your Windows help system.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
16
Uninstalling the Phone Adapter in Windows* XP
To uninstall the modem in Windows XP:
1. Open Windows Device Manager, double-click Sound, video and game controllers, rightclick
Intel(R) 600SM PCI Phone Adapter, and then select Uninstall.
2. Follow the uninstall instructions that appear.
For help with using Windows Device Manager, refer to your Windows help system.
NOTE
The phone adapter will not function without the phone adapter driver installed.
Uninstalling the SoftPhone Agent
To uninstall the SoftPhone Agent:
1. From the Windows Control Panel, open the Add or Remove Programs utility, select
SoftPhone Agent, and then click Change/Remove.
2. Follow the uninstall instructions that appear.
For help with using Add or Remove Programs, refer to your Windows help system.
17
3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter
To make a call using the PCI phone adapter:
• Refer to the instructions provided by your softphone service. Instructions for making calls
using the phone adapter may vary depending on your softphone service.
• Make sure that your softphone application is running.
NOTE
The phone adapter does not support dialup modem connectivity or fax transmission.
For Skype* Users
When you first run Skype, a dialog box will appear asking permission to allow the phone adapter
to use Skype. IMPORTANT! You MUST select “Allow this program to use Skype” and
then click OK in order to make Skype calls using the phone adapter.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
18
The SoftPhone Agent Pop-up Menu
Once you have installed the phone adapter software, the system tray will display the following
icon for the SoftPhone Agent.
Right-click the softphone agent icon to view a popup menu which displays the status of Skype,
allows you to request whether the SoftPhone Agent will run at startup, and allows you to exit
the SoftPhone Agent.
NOTE
The SoftPhone Agent must be running in the system tray in order make Skype phone calls using
the PCI phone adapter.
Dialing Instructions
• To make a local or long-distance phone call in the U.S.A., dial 1 + area code + seven-digit
phone number + #.
• To make a local or long-distance phone call outside the U.S.A., dial country code + area
code + phone number + #.
• To make international phone calls, you must dial the number as follows: 011 or 00 +
country code + area code + phone number + #.
To make Skype-to-Skype calls, simply assign a two-digit speed-dial number to a Skype contact,
and then dial that number on an analog phone connected to the PCI phone adapter.
NOTE
For the most current instructions, refer to the Skype website.
19
4 Advanced Features
The Intel® 600M PCI Phone Adapter supports a number of advanced features including Caller ID
(Type I and Type II), Call Waiting, and Conference Calling.
Caller ID Features
Type I Caller ID allows you to view the phone number of an incoming call on the Caller ID
screen. Type II Caller ID allows you to view the phone number of an incoming call while you are
on an existing call. If you have created a contact list using your softphone application and you
receive a call from a contact, then you will be able to view the name of that contact on the
Caller ID screen.
Call Waiting and Conference Call Features by Locale
NOTE
The term “hook flash” means to hang up the phone briefly (one-half second) by pressing the
“Flash” button or the hook of the phone.
For all countries except the United Kingdom, France, and Germany
Basic Call Waiting
To answer an incoming call while keeping an existing call on hold:
1. Perform a hook flash. The first call will be placed on hold and you will be connected to the
second incoming call.
2. To reconnect to the first call, perform another hook flash.
Basic Call Conference
To create a conference call between three or more phones:
1. Make a call to the first phone of the conference.
2. Once you are connected to the first phone, perform a hook flash. You will now hear a dial
tone.
3. Dial the second phone of the conference. Once connected, perform another hook flash. At
this point, all three phones will be in the call.
4. To add another phone to the call, perform the above steps again.
Call Waiting while in a Conference Call
Call waiting while in a conference call works the same way that it does in a regular phone call.
When a call comes in while you are in a conference call, perform a hook flash to put the
conference call on hold and connect the incoming call. Once the incoming call is complete,
perform another hook flash to be reconnected to the conference call.
The United Kingdom, France, and Germany
In the United Kingdom, France, and Germany, there are three main actions used for advanced
calling features. They are as follows:
Feature Action
Drop Active Call Hook flash, then press 1
Switch to another call Hook flash, then press 2
Connect calls to a conference Hook flash, then press 3
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
20
When using these features, you must wait for a dial tone after performing a hook flash. Once
you hear a dial tone, you may press the appropriate call control number on your phone keypad.
Failure to press a call control number will cancel the process. In some cases, performing a hook
flash will be enough to answer a call waiting event or to initiate a new call. If a conference call
has been established, the "Drop Active Call" and "Switch to another call" features can only be
used on additional incoming or outgoing calls.
Basic Call Waiting
To answer an incoming call, while keeping an existing call on hold:
1. Perform a hook flash. The first call will be placed on hold and you will be connected to the
second incoming call.
2. To reconnect to the original phone call, first perform a hook flash. Then, once you hear a
dial tone, press 2 and you will be reconnected to the original phone call. The same
procedure can be used to switch back to the second caller.
3. To establish a conference call involving all three parties, perform a hook flash, wait for a dial
tone, and then press 3.
4. To drop the current call and switch to the call on-hold, perform a hook flash, wait for a dial
tone, and then press 1.
Basic Call Conference
To create a conference call between three or more phones:
1. Make a call to the first phone of the conference.
2. Once you’re connected to the first phone, perform a hook flash. You will now hear a dial
tone.
3. Dial the second phone of the conference. Once connected, perform another hook flash. You
will now hear a dial tone. Press 3 to add the second phone to the conference. At this point,
all three phones will be in the call.
4. To add another phone to the call, perform the above steps again.
Call Waiting while in a Conference Call
Call waiting while in a conference works the same way that it does in a standard single phone
call. When a call comes in while you are in a conference call, perform a hook flash to put the
conference call on hold and connect the incoming call. Once connected to the incoming call,
perform another hook flash, and listen for the dial tone. Press 2 to be reconnected to the
conference call, with the incoming call put on hold. If you’d like to add the incoming call to the
current conference, perform a hook flash and wait for a dial tone. Then press 3 and the
incoming call will be added to the conference. If you’d like to drop the incoming call, perform a
hook flash and wait for a dial tone. Press 1 and the incoming call will be dropped and you will
be reconnected to the conference call.
21
5 Troubleshooting
The phone adapter was plugged into a telephone wall jack
by mistake
If you connected the phone adapter to a telephone wall jack, do the following:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Disconnect the phone adapter from the telephone wall jack and connect it to a standard
telephone (for detailed instructions, see page 11).
3. Turn on the computer.
SoftPhone Agent will not function in a suspend state
If you attempt to place your computer into a suspend state, such as standby or hibernate, or if
the computer attempts it via an inactivity timeout while the SoftPhone Agent is running, a
message will appear indicating that suspending will disable your softphone service, and then ask
if you want to continue. You will not be able to receive calls or dial out using your phone
adapter while your computer is in a suspend state.
No dial tone heard when placing a call
If the SoftPhone Agent is not running, or if your softphone application does not have an active
connection to your VoIP service provider, then your phone adapter will not generate a dial tone.
If you do not hear a dial tone after picking up the phone, try the following troubleshooting steps,
and recheck the dial tone after each step:
1. Ensure that the SoftPhone Agent and your softphone application are running.
2. Ensure that your softphone application has an active connection to your VoIP service
provider.
3. Ensure that the phone adapter card is connected to the telephone.
4. Disconnect and reconnect the telephone line to the telephone and to the phone adapter.
5. Install a new telephone line (RJ-11 cable) between the phone adapter and the telephone.
6. Check to make sure the PCI phone adapter card is seated correctly in your computer. If
not, reseat the PCI phone adapter card (for detailed instructions, see page 9).
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
22
Skype-related Issues
Skype does not allow the SoftPhone Agent to use Skype If you see the following popup message, “Request to access Skype was denied. Please check
Skype Options and restart the SoftPhone Agent” then the SoftPhone Agent has been blocked by
Skype. Perform the following steps to remove the SoftPhone Agent from the list of blocked
programs:
NOTE
The following windows may differ depending the version of Skype you are using.
1. From the Skype main menu, click Tools, and then select Options from the pull-down menu.
2. From the Options window, click Manage other programs' access to Skype.
Troubleshooting
23
3. Select IADAPT32.EXE (as shown below), click Change, and then click OK.
4. When the following window appears, select Allow this program to use Skype, and then
click OK.
You will now be able to use Skype with your phone adapter.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
24
25
A Regulatory Compliance
This appendix contains the following regulatory compliance information for Intel 600SM PCI
Phone Adapter:
• European Union Declaration of Conformity statement
• Product Ecology statement
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations
• Product certifications
European Union Declaration of Conformity Statement
We, Intel Corporation, declare under our sole responsibility that the product Intel 600SM PCI
Phone Adapter is in conformity with all applicable essential requirements necessary for CE
marking, following the provisions of the European Council Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
and Council Directive 73/23/EEC (Safety/Low Voltage Directive).
The product is properly CE marked demonstrating this conformity and is for distribution within
all member states of the EU with no restrictions.
This product follows the provisions of the European Directives 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC.
Čeština Tento výrobek odpovídá požadavkům evropských směrnic 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC.
Dansk Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med det europæiske direktiv 89/336/EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Dutch Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 89/336/EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Eesti Antud toode vastab Euroopa direktiivides 89/336/EEC ja 73/23/EEC kehtestatud
nõuetele.
Suomi Tämä tuote noudattaa EU-direktiivin 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC määräyksiä.
Français Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Européenne 89/336/EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Deutsch Dieses Produkt entspricht den Bestimmungen der Europäischen Richtlinie 89/336/EEC
& 73/23/EEC.
Ελληνικά Το παρόν προϊόν ακολουθεί τις διατάξεις των Ευρωπαϊκών Οδηγιών 89/336/ΕΟΚ και
73/23/ΕΟΚ.
Magyar E termék megfelel a 89/336/EEC és 73/23/EEC Európai Irányelv előírásainak.
Icelandic Þessi vara stenst reglugerð Evrópska Efnahags Bandalagsins númer 89/336/ EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Italiano Questo prodotto è conforme alla Direttiva Europea 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC.
Latviešu Šis produkts atbilst Eiropas Direktīvu 89/336/EEC un 73/23/EEC noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šis produktas atitinka Europos direktyvų 89/336/EEC ir 73/23/EEC nuostatas.
Malti Dan il-prodott hu konformi mal-provvedimenti tad-Direttivi Ewropej 89/336/EEC u
73/23/EEC.
Norsk Dette produktet er i henhold til bestemmelsene i det europeiske direktivet 89/336/ EEC
& 73/23/EEC.
Polski Niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z postanowieniami Dyrektyw Unii Europejskiej
89/336/EWG i 73/23/EWG.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
26
Portuguese Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Européia 89/336/EEC &
73/23/EEC.
Español Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC.
Slovensky Tento produkt je v súlade s ustanoveniami európskych direktív 89/336/EEC a
73/23/EEC.
Slovenščina Izdelek je skladen z določbami evropskih direktiv 89/336/EGS in 73/23/EGS.
Svenska Denna produkt har tillverkats i enlighet med EG-direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC.
Türkçe Bu ürün, Avrupa Birliği’nin 89/336/EEC ve 73/23/EEC yönergelerine uyar.
Product Ecology Statement
Lead-Free PCI Card
This PCI card is lead-free although certain discrete components used on the board contain a
small amount of lead which is necessary for component performance and/or reliability. This PCI
card is referred to as “Lead-free second level interconnect.” The PCI card substrate and the
solder connections from the PCI card to the components (second-level connections) are all leadfree.
Table 1 shows the various forms of the “Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect” mark as it
appears on the board and accompanying collateral.
Table 1. Lead-Free Board Markings
Description Mark
Lead-Free 2nd Level
Interconnect: This symbol
is used to identify electrical
and electronic assemblies and
components in which the lead
(Pb) concentration level in the
PCI card substrate and the
solder connections from the
PCI card to the components
(second-level interconnect) is
not greater than 0.1% by
weight (1000 ppm).
or
or
Regulatory Compliance
27
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Regulations
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter complies with the EMC regulations stated in Table 2 when
correctly installed in a compatible host system.
Table 2. EMC Regulations
Regulation Title
FCC Class B Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 2 and 15,
Subpart B, Radio Frequency Devices. (USA)
ICES-003 (Class B) Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus.
(Canada)
EN55022: 1998
(Class B)
Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Interference
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment. (European
Union)
EN55024: 1998 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics
Limits and methods of measurement. (European Union)
AS/NZS CISPR22
(Class B)
Australian Communications Authority, Standard for
Electromagnetic Compatibility. (Australia and New Zealand)
CISPR 22, 3rd Edition,
(Class B)
Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Disturbance
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.
(International)
CISPR 24: 1997 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics –
Limits and Methods of Measurement. (International)
VCCI (Class B) Voluntary Control for Interference by Information Technology
Equipment (Japan)
Japanese Kanji statement translation: This is a Class B product based on the standard of the
Voluntary Control Council for Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If
this is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio
interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual.
Korean Class B statement translation: This is household equipment that is certified to comply
with EMC requirements. You may use this equipment in residential environments and other
non-residential environments.
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide
28
Product Certifications
Board-Level Certification Markings
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter has the following product certification markings:
Table 3. Product Certification Markings
Description Mark
UL joint US/Canada Recognized Component mark. Includes adjacent
UL file number for Intel desktop boards: E210882.
FCC Declaration of Conformity logo mark for Class B equipment.
Includes Intel name and 600SM model designation.
CE mark. Declaring compliance to European Union (EU) EMC
directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage directive (73/23/EEC).
Australian Communications Authority (ACA) C-tick mark. Includes
adjacent Intel supplier code number, N-232.
Japan VCCI (Voluntary Control Council for Interference) mark.
S. Korea MIC (Ministry of Information and Communication) mark.
Includes adjacent MIC certification number: CPU-600SM.
For information about MIC certification, go to
http://support.intel.com/support/motherboards/desktop/600SM
Taiwan BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspections)
mark. Includes adjacent Intel company number, D33025.
Printed wiring board manufacturer’s recognition mark. Consists of a
unique UL recognized manufacturer’s logo, along with a flammability
rating (solder side).
V-0
Service Provider Certification
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter has the following service provider certification:
Table 4. Service Provider Certification
Description Mark
Skype certification mark.
Intel 600SM Phone Adapter is Skype Certified*
*Disclaimer: This certification applies only to the
Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter card, and cannot be
used to certify a system or other components. For
more details, please see
http://www.skype.com/partners/hardware/
certified_guidelines.html
Boxed Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M Installation Notes
Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on
the World Wide Web.
Avant d’effectuer l’installation du processeur, veuillez prendre en compte les indications d’installation
explicitées dans les notes d’installation disponibles sur le Web
Prima di installare il processore, prendere in considerazione i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di
installazione disponibili su World Wide Web.
Vor der Installation des Prozessors sollten die Hinweise zur Integration beachtet werden, die im
Installationshandbuch (im Internet verfügbar) zu finden sind.
Antes de instalar el procesador, tenga en cuenta las consideraciones de integración que se encuentran en las
notas de instalación disponibles en la World Wide Web.
Antes de instalar o processador, leve em consideração os problemas de integração encontrados nas notas sobre
a instalação, disponíveis na World Wide Web.
http://support.intel.com/support/processors
1. Obtain access to your processor socket by using the documentation provided by your original equipment
manufacturer.
Accédez à la prise du processeur en suivant les instructions données dans la documentation fournie par le
fabricant de votre équipement original.
Per accedere alla presa del processore, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale
dell’apparecchio.
Legen Sie die Fassung des Prozessors frei. Anleitungen dazu finden Sie in der Dokumentation des
Originalgeräteherstellers.
Con la ayuda de la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo, obtenga acceso al
zócalo del procesador.
Consulte a documentação fornecida pelo fabricante original do equipamento para saber como obter acesso
ao soquete do processador.
2. Find and remove the cooling solution if it prevents you from accessing the processor socket. See the
documentation provided by the original equipment manufacturer for more information.
Repérez, puis retirez la solution de refroidissement si elle vous empêche d’atteindre la prise du processeur.
Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, référez-vous à la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre
équipement original.
Individuare e rimuovere la soluzione di raffreddamento qualora impedisca l’accesso alla presa del processore.
Per maggiori informazioni, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale
dell’apparecchio.
Sollte die Kühlflüssigkeit den Zugriff zur Fassung des Prozessors verhindern, ist sie zu entfernen. Weitere
Anleitungen finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers.
Si la solución refrigerante no le permite acceder al zócalo del procesador, sáquela. Para obtener más información,
consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo.
Encontre e remova o dispositivo de resfriamento se ele evitar o acesso ao soquete do processador. Consulte
a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para obter mais informações.
Open (O) Locked (L)
478-pin
micro-FCPGA
To install the processor, use a screwdriver to disengage (open) the socket actuator.
Pour installer le processeur, désenclenchez (ouvrez) l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis.
Per installare il processore, staccare (aprire) il dispositivo di azionamento della presa utilizzando un cacciavite.
Um den Prozessor installieren zu können, muß zuerst mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der
Fassung geöffnet werden.
Para instalar el procesador, desactive (abra) el disparador del zócalo con un destornillador.
Para instalar o processador, utilize uma chave de fenda para desengatar (abrir) o atuador do soquete.
3. Figure A
Pin A1
Using Figure B, place the processor into the socket. Align the processor’s pin A1 with the arrow on the microFCPGA
socket. If the processor does not drop completely into the socket, turn the actuator until the processor
drops completely in.
En vous aidant de la figure B, mettez le processeur dans la prise. Placez la broche A1 du processeur dans le
prolongement de la flèche de la prise micro-FCPGA. Si le processeur ne s’enfonce pas complètement dans la
prise, tournez l’actionneur jusqu’à ce que le processeur s’enfonce complètement.
Osservando la figura B, inserire il processore nella presa. Allineare il piedino del processore A1 con la freccia
che si trova sulla presa micro-FCPGA. Se non si riesce ad inserire completamente il processore nella presa,
girare il dispositivo di azionamento sino a quando il processore non viene completamente inserito.
4. Figure B
NOTE: For installation only in systems supporting
a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M.
Den Prozessor in die Fassung einsetzen wie in Abbildung B veranschaulicht. Dabei sollte der Pin A1 des
Prozessors mit dem auf der Mikro-FCPGA Fassung abgebildeten Pfeil ausgerichtet werden. Läßt sich der
Prozessor nicht ganz in die Fassung einsetzen, die Spannvorrichtung solange drehen, bis der Prozessor sicher
in der Fassung sitzt.
Usando la Figura B como guía, coloque el procesador dentro del zócalo. Alinee el pin A1 del procesador con
la flecha del zócalo del micro-FCPGA. Si el procesador no encaja perfectamente dentro del zócalo, gire el
disparador hasta que el procesador quede bien colocado.
Consultando a Figura B, coloque o processador no soquete. Alinhe o pino A1 do processador com a seta do
micro-soquete FCPGA. Se o processador não entrar completamente no soquete, gire o atuador até que o
processador entre completamente.
5. While gently holding the processor down with your finger, secure the processor in the socket by closing the
socket actuator with a screwdriver (see figure A). For updated installation information, see
http://support.intel.com/support/processors
Tout en appuyant doucement sur le processeur avec votre doigt, assurez-vous qu’il est bien en place dans la
prise en fermant l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis (voir figure A). Pour obtenir des informations
d’installation mises à jour, consultez : http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Mantenere fermo il processore esercitando una leggera pressione con il dito e nel frattempo fissare il processore
nella presa chiudendo il dispositivo di azionamento della presa con un cacciavite (vedi fig. A). Per informazioni
più aggiornate relative all’installazione, consultare il sito: http://support.intel.com/support Den
Prozessor vorsichtig nach unten gedrückt halten und mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der
Fassung festdrehen (siehe Abbildung A). Aktualisierte Informationen zur Installation finden Sie unter:
http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Sujetando el procesador con un dedo, fije el procesador en el zócalo cerrando el disparador con un destornillador
(Figura A). Para obtener información de instalación actualizada, consulte: http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Pressione levemente o processador para baixo com o dedo, ao mesmo tempo que afixa o processador no
soquete fechando o atuador com uma chave de fenda (veja a Figura A). Para obter informações atualizadas
sobre instalação, consulte a página: http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
6. Re-attach the cooling system and re-assemble the system per the installation manual provided by the original
equipment manufacturer. Note: Your system may require special voltage and speed settings. Consult your
original equipment manufacturer’s documentation to determine the correct settings.
Remettez le système de refroidissement en place et rassemblez le système en suivant les instructions données
dans le manuel d’installation fourni par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Remarque : Il se peut que
votre système nécessite des réglages spéciaux de tension et de vitesse. Consultez la documentation fournie par
le fabricant de votre équipement original pour déterminer les réglages corrects.
Fissare nuovamente il sistema di raffreddamento e riassemblare il sistema per l’installazione manuale fornita
dal fornitore dell’apparecchio. Nota: per il sistema in dotazione potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare una tensione
speciale e particolari impostazioni di velocità. Per determinare le impostazioni corrette, consultare la documentazione
fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio.
Das Kühlsystem wieder anbringen und gemäß den Anweisungen des vom Originalgerätehersteller mitgelieferten
Installationshandbuchs wieder zusammensetzen. Hinweis: Ihr System erfordert unter Umständen spezielle
Spannungs- und Geschwindigkeitseinstellungen. Angaben zur korrekten Einstellung dieser Größen sind in der
Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers zu finden.
Vuelva a acoplar el sistema refrigerante y a armar el sistema según el manual de instrucciones suministrado por
el fabricante original del equipo. Nota: Es posible que su sistema tenga requisitos de voltaje y velocidad especiales.
Para determinar cuáles son los valores correctos, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante
original del equipo.
Recoloque o dispositivo de resfriamento e monte o sistema de acordo com o manual de instalação fornecido
pelo fabricante original do equipamento. Lembre-se: o sistema pode necessitar de ajustes específicos de voltagem
e velocidade. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para determinar os ajustes
corretos.
Notes
www.intel.com
support.intel.com
1-916-377-7000
07:00-17:00
U.S. Pacific Time
Monday–Friday
To obtain warranty
service in the U.S.
and Canada 1-800-628-8686
América Latina 916-377-0114
(en Español)
Brazil 916-377-0180
(en Portuguese)
Monday–Friday 09:00-18:00
For English and European
customers not listed below
+44 (0) 870 607 2439
Francais +33 (0) 141 91 85 29
Deutsch +49 (0) 69 9509 6099
Italiano +39 (0) 2 696 33276
Monday–Friday 0830-16:00 CET
For the latest support offerings,
please see support.intel.com
Asia-Pacific/English Support
Pakistan* 63-2-636-8415
Hours: 0900-1400
India** 000-6517, 830-3634
Hours: 0900-1500
Vietnam* 63-2-636-8416
Indonesia 803-65-7249
Thailand 1-800-6310003
Hours 09:00-1600
Hong Kong 852-2844-4456
Philippines 1-800-1-651-0117
Singapore 65-831-1311
Malaysia 1-800-80-1390
Hours: 0900-1700
Australia 1-800-649-931
Hours: 1000-1700
New Zealand 0-800-444-365
Hours: 1100-1700
Asia-Pacific/Korean Support
Korea 822-7672-595
Hours: 0900-1700
Asia-Pacific/Mandarin Support
PRC 800-820-1100
Taiwan 2-718-9915
Hours: 0900-1700
Japan support.intel.co.jp
0120-868686
Hours: 0900-1700
*IDD Long Distance into the Philippines
**Manual toll-free. When dialing from
India need to use phone with IDD
facility.
Copyright © 2002 Intel Corporation
* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other Countries.
Order Number A82732-001
Printed in USA
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Home Edition* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition*
Intel® RTS2011AC
Thermal Solution
• Installation Instructions
• Three Year Limited Warranty
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 1 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 1 6/18/2012 1:08:08 PM /18/2012 1:08:08 PM
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 2 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 2 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM
Installation Notes for the
Intel® RTS2011AC Thermal Solution
Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration
issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/
processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual
component appearance may vary.
IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that
is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be
provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the
UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main
board manufacturer to get a replacement.
IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are
partially engaged.
Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des
problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à
l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce
manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels
peut être différente.
IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant
l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère
et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP,
NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant
de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement.
IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement
avant de les mettre toutes en place.
Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die
Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel.
com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur
Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen.
WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed
Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine
angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise
bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT,
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 3 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 3 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM
den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer
Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten.
WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor
nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden.
Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los
problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en
http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven
como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar.
¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera
unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución
térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si
su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja.
Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo.
¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador
térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados
Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os
problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support.
intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A
aparência do componente atual poderá variar.
IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada
(UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem
da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente
acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução
térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal
para obter uma reposição.
IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador
de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados.
Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i
problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http://
support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono
utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare.
IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un
Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 4 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 4 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM
termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato.
Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del
processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una
sostituzione.
IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore
termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte.
Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia
oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności
w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter
poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić.
WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy
zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora,
płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem
z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku
płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora.
Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej.
WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system
chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone.
Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в
штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой
и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support.
intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве
приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности
внешний вид компонента может отличаться.
ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа
системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена
унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP
будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно
прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать
систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке.
Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены.
ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных
болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 5 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 5 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM
安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel.
com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣
式可能有所不同。
重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」
(UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP，
「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換
主機板。
重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺
絲。
安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors
上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示
意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。
重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前，
此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。
如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的
主板制造商联系，以进行调换。
重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。
상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel.
com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해
보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제
구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다.
중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에
부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되
며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는
경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드
제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오.
중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히
조이지 마십시오.
ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors
にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換
性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 6 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 6 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM
に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。
重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの
下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに
取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ
ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元
に交換を依頼してください。
重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締
め付けないでください。
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 7 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 7 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM
Installation Instructions for the
Intel® RTS2011AC Thermal Solution
Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology
using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual
test results. Results may vary.
NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty.
REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois
ans.
HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie.
NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de
tres años.
OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de
três anos.
NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre
anni.
CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun.
UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej
gwarancji.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней
ограниченной гарантии.
備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。
注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。
주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다.
備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。
หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี
Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo
hành Giới hạn Ba Năm.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 8 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 8 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 9 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 9 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 10 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 10 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 11 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 11 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 12 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 12 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 13 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 13 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM
LIMITED WARRANTY
If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply
to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view
the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers.
Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution)
in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer
system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System
Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from
defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly
available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product
was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and
for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system
containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the
subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the
warranty period, Intel, at its option, will:
REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR
REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or
replace the Product,
REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty
service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER
APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE
ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE
PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT.
WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR
OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT.
WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and
useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components
to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat
or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does
not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no
responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or
voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose.
EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY
Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known
as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 14 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 14 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
Warranty does NOT cover:
• any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including
labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs
relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or
otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR
• damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with
electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions,
usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration,
repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR
• any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly
available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark
or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE
To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed
packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of
purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel.
To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support
(“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours
(local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center.
(See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be
prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers;
(2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on
the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand
and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need
additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.
Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be
issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions
for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to
the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel
will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid
RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated
ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and
assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees
may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold
via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region,
contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.)
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 15 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 15 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product
or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be
shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt
of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on
receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is
subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of
the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited
Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended.
WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS
THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND
INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF
TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties
so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES
APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on
how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR
EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH
ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY
BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS
NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME,
GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND
ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM
OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN
IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states
(or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO
HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 16 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 16 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY
SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE
FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA
AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND
THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA
PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE
AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE
REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW
SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES.
IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY
OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF
THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL.
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans
son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système
informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système
original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de
tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées
par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit
dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une
durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant
le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie
limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel
a le choix entre:
RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU
REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni
le remplacer,
REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous
garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES
ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU
NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT
QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME
INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES
PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 17 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 17 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE
SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT.
ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i)
réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii)
entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les
performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts
; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit
aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel
décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y
compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions.
ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata »,
au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande.
De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS:
• les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les
frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en
particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout
Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une
carte à circuits imprimés; OU
• les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents,
problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou
environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du
produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des
tests inappropriés; OU
• un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par
Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de
série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées.
COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE
Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage
original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre
point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel.
Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de
support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant
les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit
au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 18 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 18 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse
postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom
du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas
échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle
; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI
pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires.
Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous
recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions
pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au
centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera
aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le
paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage
original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de
dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention
pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de
garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/
Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou
consultez la page www.intel.com/support.)
Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants
neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou
remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du
produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception
par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis
aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le
délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel
remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de
remplacement.
LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE
CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT
ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT
LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À
UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE
HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne
vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET
TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE
GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 19 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 19 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente
limite ne vous soit pas applicable.
LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ
LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE
TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU
REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS
REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA
GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE
TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX
RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE
(Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES
D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS
ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION
OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU
UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ
DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible
que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS
ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT
D’AUTRES DROITS.
TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU
AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR
LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU
NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE,
AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR
LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE),
LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR.
POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI
APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES.
EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE
VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN
CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 20 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 20 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung)
bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem
Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”)
folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist
das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung
für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden
ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen
Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht
im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch
diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit
aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen,
wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen:
das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER
das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer
Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen,
den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung
des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts
ERSTATTEN.
DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM
ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT
ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN
BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES
DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE
SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE
DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES
ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG.
WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i)
die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren;
(ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine
Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere
Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel
hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und
übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung
des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten
Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 21 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 21 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata”
bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar
gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf:
• jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz
des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten
oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang
mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten
gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER
• Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich
Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer
oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden
Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen,
unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER
• alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi-
fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi
kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert
oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden.
WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN?
Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des
Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems)
setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung.
Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des
Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS
Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und
feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen
für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende
Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern;
(2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi
zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich
Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach
Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen.
Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt,
erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization,
“RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 22 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 22 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer
auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die
RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht
angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung
oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center
senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport
verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten
und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie
Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem
Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu
erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite
www.intel.com/support.)
Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder
überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder
ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem
Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach
dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel.
Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt
den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für
die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche
länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten
Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert.
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE
DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR
DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH,
SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH,
JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR
MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER
VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN.
In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss
stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss
möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN
DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten)
sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig;
daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 23 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 23 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN
INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER
AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ
ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE
STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE
IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM
MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR
EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN,
DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER
RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE
HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL,
AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL
UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG
ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT
ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT
ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN
SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES
AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder
Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden
oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen
und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu.
DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH
STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU.
JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER
BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN
UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE
UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN
STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND
SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT
DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT
AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR
UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND
DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE
RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN.
IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND
EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 24 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 24 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
(MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE
ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN.
GARANTÍA LIMITADA
Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la
solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador
de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el
Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala
apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación,
y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a
disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del
Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un
período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación
que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto,
objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el
período de garantía, Intel, a su elección:
REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O
REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o
reemplazar el Producto,
REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del
servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada.
ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR
BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN
ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA
DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE
MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA
DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O
DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE
EL PRODUCTO.
ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la
estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del
procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento
del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de
los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador
más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la
idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran
las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 25 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 25 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA
Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos
como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles
previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre:
• ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso
costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en
particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier
Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a
cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O
• daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas
con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales
anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos,
descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O
• cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a
las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales
de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas,
alteradas o borradas del Producto.
CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA
Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado
en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede
contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede
contactar a Intel.
Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede
contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario
normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al
centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al
ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de
correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de
la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en
el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo
marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede
necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema.
Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio
de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”)
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 26 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 26 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando
devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior
del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que
tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al
centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos
prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad
de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto
para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor
autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en
contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www.
intel.com/support.)
Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes
nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o
reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después
de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se
convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo
estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y
exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo
que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía
limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido.
LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA
ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA
TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN,
LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO
PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO.
Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas,
por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA
E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA
LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos
Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía
implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted.
LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD
LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA
O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA
ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd
27 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 27 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA.
HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR
DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE
CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL
(INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE,
PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS,
Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE
CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL
SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO
ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones)
no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo
que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted.
ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED
PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA
JURISDICCIÓ.
TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA
MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS
SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA
Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA
LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO
ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA
LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA
JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES.
EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y
CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA
(CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN
EN LENGUA INGLESA.
GARANTIA LIMITADA
A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução
térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de
um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do
Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado,
estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em
conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de
três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original
lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 28 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 28 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do
Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver
conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá:
REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU
SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou
substituir o Produto,
REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica-
ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada.
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM
EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS
APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR
ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA
DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O
PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE
DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA
MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO.
AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do
sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e
outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema;
(iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados
do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas
especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador,
inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado
para qualquer fi m em particular.
COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA
A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos
como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante
solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre:
• quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo
mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular,
quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto
soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de
circuito impresso; OU
• danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com
a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais,
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 29 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 29 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso,
negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU
• qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações
da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação
originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas
ou obliteradas.
COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA
Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original
lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local
original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel
Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de
Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o
horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto
ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como
contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para
correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra;
(3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e
(4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma
explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais,
dependendo da natureza do problema.
Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será
emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá
instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver
o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da
embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua
o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto
devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as
tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio.
Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você
estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição
autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com
o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá
para www.intel.com/support.)
A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes
novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 30 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 30 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel,
dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O
Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O
produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e
está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante
do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o
período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado.
LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA
ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A
INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS,
INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO,
ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO,
CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não
permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser
aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA
AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL
DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações
referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser
aplicável.
LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE
A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA,
IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO,
NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS
PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO
POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO
DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS
NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO
DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES,
E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU
REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU
USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO
AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não
permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto
as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 31 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 31 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM
PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A
JURISDIÇÃO.
TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA
LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES
LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E
AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E
AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA
ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE
CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E
DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS
DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES.
NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER
OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO
DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ
PREVALECER.
GARANZIA LIMITATA
Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica)
nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer
realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema
originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti
nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche
rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di
acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente
originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer
contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto,
soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta
garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a:
RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO
SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di
riparare o sostituire il Prodotto,
RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene
richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata.
LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE
LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 32 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 32 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA
DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE
PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE
DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL
PRODOTTO.
AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità
del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore
o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare
un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del
sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le
sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri
componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock
e/o tensioni alterate.
APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA
Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli
errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON
copre quanto segue:
• qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i
costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare
tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato
o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato;
OVVERO
• i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con
l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali,
utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza,
alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO
• qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle
specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse,
alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di
fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto.
RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA
Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella
confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di
acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 33 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 33 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support
(“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la
restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di
copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero
telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del
Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca
e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere
ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema.
Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza
in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del
materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando
si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel
non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato
visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo
originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre
assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero
essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale
richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione
autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione,
contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.)
Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto
con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o
sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole
dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel
all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una
garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni
o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di
fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto.
LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA
QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E
INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE
MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E
IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE
COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie
implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI
GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 34 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 34 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati
od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual
caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere.
RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA
LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA
IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO,
COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED
ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI
MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER
DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI
GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE
ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ,
DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO
PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI
MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE
QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni
stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti
o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero
non valere.
LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE
E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI
ORDINAMENTI.
OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA
GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA
DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA,
IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE
PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE
ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE
E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL
RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA
VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES.
NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA
VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE
IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 35 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 35 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA
Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie
jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym
opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego
zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt
(„Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego
Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób,
nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie
odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3)
lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu;
w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat
liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt.
Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie
będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym,
Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania:
DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania;
LUB
DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub
wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel,
DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu
w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu
gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji.
NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK
GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH
ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH
LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ
DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU
KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ
TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ
NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY
PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB
PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT.
OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i)
obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora;
(ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować
obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 36 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 36 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel
nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w
zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada
za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania
częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia.
ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI
Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub
błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów
typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje:
• jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu,
w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych
przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych
z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest
przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty
drukowanej; LUB
• uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich
jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne,
mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie
produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa
instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB
• jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub
obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy
Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy
lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane.
ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO
Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu
(zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element
systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami
podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel.
Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie
serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym
z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w
normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić
Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru
telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki).
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 37 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 37 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu
wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy
modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu
komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W
zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania
dodatkowych informacji.
Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach
serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału
(Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu
Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS
na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie
przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA
na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym
lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi.
Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas
transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został
sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie,
może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby
uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim
regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.)
Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany
Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony
produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim
czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu
przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt
podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest
przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów:
dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego.
W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla
wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu.
OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE
NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE
DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH
INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W
TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI
SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW,
NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 38 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 38 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach
(lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się
wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe
ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN
WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH
GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO.
PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ
ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających
kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności
gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie
może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika.
OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ
ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY
INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ
LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY,
ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA
WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO
I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W
MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI
ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE,
PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA
WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W
TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK
WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ
SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE
Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ
DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH
LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET
WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O
MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub
obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia
lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym
powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika.
NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI
SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ
POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU
SĄDOWNICZEGO.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 39 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 39 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ
GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ
NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH,
KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM
SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE
PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW
AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN
KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A
OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA
EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A
OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII.
W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ
NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ
STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ
NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI
ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ.
Ограниченная гарантия
«Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем
документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной
запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю
компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и
содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при
правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов
материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать
опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с
даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке
применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех)
лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие
применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение
указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется
настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным
гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению:
ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или)
программных средств; ИЛИ
ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет
отремонтировать или заменить Изделие,
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 40 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 40 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент
предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с
настоящей Ограниченной гарантией.
НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ
ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ
ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ
ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ
СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР,
ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ
УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ
ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ,
ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ.
ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут:
(i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы
и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов
системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести
к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v)
повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила
испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него
спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора
для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с
измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения.
ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ
«Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных
дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в
настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая
Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ:
• любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая
оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в
частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого
Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного
к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ
• повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии,
проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические,
механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 41 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 41 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM
эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное
отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или
испытаний; ИЛИ
• любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с
нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с
удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными
идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный
номер).
ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ
Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного
в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной
системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено
Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно
связаться с «Интел».
Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение
гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов
«Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному
времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр
ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится
на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую
информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты
и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и
идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо,
описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание
неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю
центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация.
После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному
обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных
ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS.
При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи
на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без
номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны
отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной
или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять
на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по
перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для
которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через
авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 42 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 42 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на
страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.)
«Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие
новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от
того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее
изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после
поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в
центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия
распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей
письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на
оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто)
дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то
срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается.
ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ
НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ
НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ
ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ,
ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ
К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ
НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ
ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые
штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые
гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК
ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ
ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ.
ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ.
Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок
действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не
распространяться на вас.
ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ
ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ
ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ
РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО
ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И
ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ
ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ,
«ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ,
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 43 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 43 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ
В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО
ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ,
ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ
ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ
ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ,
ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ
ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ
ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые
штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать
побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения
и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас.
ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ
ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ
ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ
ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ.
ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО
ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ
РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ
С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К
СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ
АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА
(КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА
ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ
(КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО
ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ
СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА
РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА.
В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ
НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ,
ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА
УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ
ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 44 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 44 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
有限售後保證
Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱
為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱
「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕
無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起
三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以
Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於
原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統
之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條
件，Intel 將有權決定：
利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者
以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時，
根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本
產品」。
本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任
何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電
腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧
客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。
警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器
的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv)
造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不
保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更
改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。
有限售後保證適用範圍
Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎
索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵
蓋下列幾項：
• 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導
致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板
之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者
• 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因
素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的
安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 45 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 45 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
• 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產
品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。
如何取得售後保證服務
若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在
電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。
若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地
時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本
產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援
中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件
位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標
誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障
或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求
您提供額外的資訊。
在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中
心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客
戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外
包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的
退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶
支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的
產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付
運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中
心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。）
Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換
「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之
內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產
品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售
後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的
限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品
的「有限售後保證」期限。
售後保證限制與排除條款
本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論
明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行
交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗
示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 46 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 46 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證
適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制，
因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。
責任限制
根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅
限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補
救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據
其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不
限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換，
以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式
或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL
概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需
受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。
本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法
規，您還可能享有其他的權利。
根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭
的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為
美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除
外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦
法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。
一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵
觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。
有限质保条款
仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel
Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装
置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算
机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三
(3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合
英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装
产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计
算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 47 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 47 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换
产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三
(3) 年。
第一年有限质保
若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之
规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在
上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品
（下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月
内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明
该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换
为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次
更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而
无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第
二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款
（不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。
您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第
一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期
间内。
如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯
一的和全部的救济措施。
剩余期间有限质保
如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余
质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选
择：
通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或
以另一产品更换该产品；或
在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主
张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。
如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产
品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者
本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款
约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 48 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 48 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换
之产品）的时间。
如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的
救济措施。
警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理
器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能
下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特
尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有
关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压
的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。
有限质保的一般性条款
英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收
到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的
产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相
同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财
产。
本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本
产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期
间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机
系统，则本有限质保即告终止。
有限质保范围
本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期
届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。
英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误
差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范
围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而
引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集
成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。
本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事
故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示
之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 49 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 49 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔
适当授权的维修商不当处理。
下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭
证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包
凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日
期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号
与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。
三包凭证
您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证
据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给
您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发
票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要
求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格，
并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或
英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。
如何获得质保服务
有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根
据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届
满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还
至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节
假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客
户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理
器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备
提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭
证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在
可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英
特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。
如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还
确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中
心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上
写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产
品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中
心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服
务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 50 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 50 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有
关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系，
或访问 www.intel.com/support。）
质保限制及免责条款
本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他
质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示
或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务
惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内
有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。
赔偿责任范围
英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上
文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一
和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反
担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失
承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设
备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使
用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知
晓发生此类损害的可能性。
因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受
中华人民 共和国法律管辖。
本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。
품질 보증
Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된
감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시
스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이
정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함
도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점
으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨
터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질
적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 51 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 51 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM
증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의
선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다.
하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는
제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는
Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여
Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불
한다 .
본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어
떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원
구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니
다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으
로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다.
경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및
프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이
발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고,
(v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환
경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니
다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에
는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다.
보증의 범위
Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하
지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본
품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다.
• 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또
는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영
구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는,
• 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명
서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는
부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는,
• Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식
별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 52 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 52 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면
(최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질
보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문
의하면 됩니다.
Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정
상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후,
지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품
해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서
비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소
및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당
되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설
명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다.
ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자
에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환
하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번
호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은
번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이
와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보
내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사
용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급
업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될
수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하
시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.)
Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는
중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은
ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발
송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다.
교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품
질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니
다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되
지 않습니다.
품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항
본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의
묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 53 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 53 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적
인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서
는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보
증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적
용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주
(또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다.
책임의 제한
본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서
명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는
품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최
대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법
이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산
의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로
그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지
않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관
하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임
을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지
않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습
니다.
본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라
서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다.
본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원
에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및
남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주
법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정
지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지
는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다.
본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우
(중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다.
製品保証
インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版
インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者
（以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 54 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 54 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう
に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され
たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の
システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年
間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に
十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保
証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか
のひとつを行います。
修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修
復する。
交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。
返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品
価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな
い場合）。
本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、
本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の
購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者
が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点
で保証期間は終了します。
警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム
とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ
ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ
ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠
を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ
ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定
目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。
製品保証の範囲
インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ
ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ
ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について
は保証していません。
• 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関
連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒
久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 55 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 55 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
• 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品
の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト
ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。
• 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された
製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変
された、または消されている製品。
保証サービスの受け方
本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン
ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使
用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。
インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、
休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、
「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ
ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン
ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住
所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている
製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明
（該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の
内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。
ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material
Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返
品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ
ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、
パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効
な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入
当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送
料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担
となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代
理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し
ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに
お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。）
インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交
換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 56 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 56 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい
たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。
交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期
間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品
に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。
保証の制限および保証対象外
本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ
ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および
商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明
示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま
たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および
黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、
保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で
は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。
責任の限度
本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前
述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合
の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ
れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の
法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の
損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し
たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再
プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す
る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい
た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め
ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま
す。
本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また
は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。
本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ
れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南
米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 57 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 57 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー
ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地
域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま
す。
この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す
る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 58 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 58 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com
If you need further help, call:
To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686
North America 916-377-7000
Latin America
Spanish 001-916-377-0114
Portuguese 001-916-377-0180
Europe
Belgium 02-714 3182
Denmark 38-487077
Finland 9-693-79297
France 01-41-91 85 29
Germany 069-9509-6099
Holland 020-487-4562
Italy 02-696-33276
Norway 23-1620-50
Spain 91-377-8166
Sweden 08-445-1251
United Kingdom 0870-607-2439
Japan 0120-868686
Asia-Pacifi c
Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117
Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249
Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003
Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415
Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416
China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634
Malaysia 1800-80-1390
New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required.
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 59 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 59 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC
in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine.
Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation
in the U.S. and/or other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
G33557-003
Intel Corporation
Attn: Corporate Quality
2200 Mission College Blvd.
Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549
USA
G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 60 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 60 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM
Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid
Cooling Solution
• Installation Instructions
• Three Year Limited Warranty
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 1 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 1 6/18/2012 1:29:58 PM /18/2012 1:29:58 PM
Installation Notes for the
Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid Cooling Solution
Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration
issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/
processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual
component appearance may vary.
IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that
is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be
provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the
UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main
board manufacturer to get a replacement.
IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are
partially engaged.
Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des
problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à
l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce
manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels
peut être différente.
IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant
l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère
et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP,
NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant
de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement.
IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement
avant de les mettre toutes en place.
Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die
Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel.
com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur
Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen.
WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed
Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine
angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise
bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT,
den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer
Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 2 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 2 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM
WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor
nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden.
Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los
problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en
http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven
como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar.
¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera
unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución
térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si
su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja.
Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo.
¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador
térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados
Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os
problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support.
intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A
aparência do componente atual poderá variar.
IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada
(UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem
da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente
acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução
térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal
para obter uma reposição.
IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador
de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados.
Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i
problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http://
support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono
utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare.
IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un
Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione
termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato.
Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del
processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una
sostituzione.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 3 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 3 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM
IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore
termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte.
Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia
oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności
w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors.
Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter
poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić.
WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy
zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora,
płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem
z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku
płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora.
Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej.
WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system
chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone.
Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в
штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой
и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support.
intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве
приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности
внешний вид компонента может отличаться.
ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа
системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена
унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP
будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно
прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать
систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке.
Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены.
ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных
болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично.
安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel.
com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣
式可能有所不同。
重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」
(UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP，
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 4 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 4 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM
「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換
主機板。
重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺
絲。
安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors
上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示
意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。
重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前，
此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。
如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的
主板制造商联系，以进行调换。
重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。
상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel.
com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해
보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제
구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다.
중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에
부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되
며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는
경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드
제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오.
중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히
조이지 마십시오.
ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors
にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換
性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの
に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。
重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの
下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに
取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ
ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元
に交換を依頼してください。
重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締
め付けないでください。
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 5 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 5 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM
Installation Instructions for the
Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid Cooling Solution
Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology
using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual
test results. Results may vary.
NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty.
REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois
ans.
HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie.
NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de
tres años.
OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de
três anos.
NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre
anni.
CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun.
UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej
gwarancji.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней
ограниченной гарантии.
備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。
注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。
주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다.
備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。
หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี
Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo
hành Giới hạn Ba Năm.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 6 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 6 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM
Instructions Video at:
http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-032999.htm
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 7 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 7 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 8 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 8 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
LGA 2011
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 9 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 9 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 10 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 10 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 11 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 11 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 12 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 12 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 13 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 13 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 14 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 14 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 15 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 15 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 16 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 16 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 17 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 17 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 18 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 18 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
LGA 1155/56, LGA 1366
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 19 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 19 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 20 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 20 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 21 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 21 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 22 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 22 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 23 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 23 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 24 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 24 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 25 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 25 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 26 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 26 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 27 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 27 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 28 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 28 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 29 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 29 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 30 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 30 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 31 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 31 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 32 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 32 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 33 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 33 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 34 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 34 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
Fan Confi guration B
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 35 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 35 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/integration
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 36 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 36 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 37 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 37 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
LIMITED WARRANTY
If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply
to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view
the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers.
Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution)
in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer
system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System
Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from
defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly
available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product
was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and
for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system
containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the
subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the
warranty period, Intel, at its option, will:
REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR
REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or
replace the Product,
REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty
service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER
APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE
ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE
PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT.
WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR
OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT.
WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and
useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components
to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat
or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does
not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no
responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or
voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose.
EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY
Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known
as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 38 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 38 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
Warranty does NOT cover:
• any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including
labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs
relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or
otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR
• damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with
electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions,
usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration,
repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR
• any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly
available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark
or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE
To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed
packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase
in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel.To request warranty
service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your
region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding
holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information
regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1)
your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase;
(3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable,
a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation
of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you
depending on the nature of the problem.
Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be
issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions
for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to
the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel
will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid
RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated
ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and
assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees
may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold
via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region,
contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.)
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 39 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 39 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product
or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be
shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt
of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on
receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is
subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of
the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited
Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended.
WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS
THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND
INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF
TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties
so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES
APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on
how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR
EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH
ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY
BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS
NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME,
GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND
ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM
OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN
IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states
(or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO
HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 40 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 40 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY
SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE
FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA
AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND
THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA
PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE
AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE
REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW
SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES.
IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY
OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF
THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL.
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans
son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système
informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système
original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de
tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par
Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son
emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois
(3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour
un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas
conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre:
RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU
REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni
le remplacer,
REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous
garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT
PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL,
AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS
EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI
COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU
PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL
VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE
QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 41 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 41 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM
ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i)
réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii)
entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les
performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts
; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit
aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel
décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y
compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions.
ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata »,
au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande.
De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS:
• les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les
frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en
particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout
Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une
carte à circuits imprimés; OU
• les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents,
problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou
environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du
produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des
tests inappropriés; OU
• un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par
Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de
série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées.
COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE
Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage
original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre
point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel.
Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de
support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant
les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit
au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment
contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 42 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 42 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom
du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas
échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle
; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI
pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires.
Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous
recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions
pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au
centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera
aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le
paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage
original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de
dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention
pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de
garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/
Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou
consultez la page www.intel.com/support.)
Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants
neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou
remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du
produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception
par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis
aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le
délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel
remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de
remplacement.
LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE
CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT
ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT
LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À
UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE
HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne
vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET
TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE
GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 43 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 43 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente
limite ne vous soit pas applicable.
LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ
LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE
TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU
REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS
REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA
GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE
TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX
RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE
(Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES
D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS
ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION
OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU
UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ
DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible
que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS
ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT
D’AUTRES DROITS.
TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU
AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR
LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU
NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE,
AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR
LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE),
LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR.
POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI
APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES.
EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE
VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN
CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 44 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 44 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung)
bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem
Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”)
folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist
das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung
für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden
ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen
Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht
im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch
diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit
aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen,
wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen:
das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER
das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer
Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen,
den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung
des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts
ERSTATTEN.
DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM
ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT
ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN
BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES
DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE
SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE
DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES
ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG.
WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i)
die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren;
(ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine
Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere
Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel
hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und
übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung
des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten
Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 45 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 45 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata”
bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar
gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf:
• jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz
des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten
oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang
mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten
gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER
• Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich
Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer
oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden
Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen,
unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER
• alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi-
fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi
kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert
oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden.
WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN?
Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des
Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems)
setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung.
Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des
Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS
Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und
feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen
für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende
Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern;
(2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi
zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich
Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach
Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen.
Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt,
erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization,
“RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 46 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 46 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer
auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die
RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht
angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung
oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center
senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport
verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten
und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie
Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem
Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu
erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite
www.intel.com/support.)
Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder
überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder
ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem
Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach
dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel.
Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt
den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für
die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche
länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten
Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert.
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE
DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR
DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH,
SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH,
JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR
MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER
VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN.
In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss
stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss
möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN
DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten)
sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig;
daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 47 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 47 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN
INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER
AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ
ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE
STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE
IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM
MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR
EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN,
DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER
RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE
HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL,
AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL
UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG
ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT
ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT
ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN
SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES
AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder
Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden
oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen
und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu.
DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH
STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU.
JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER
BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN
UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE
UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN
STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND
SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT
DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT
AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR
UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND
DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE
RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN.
IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND
EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 48 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 48 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
(MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE
ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN.
GARANTÍA LIMITADA
Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la
solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador
de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el
Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala
apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación,
y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a
disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del
Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un
período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación
que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto,
objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el
período de garantía, Intel, a su elección:
REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O
REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o
reemplazar el Producto,
REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del
servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada.
ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR
BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN
ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA
DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE
MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA
DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O
DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE
EL PRODUCTO.
ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la
estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del
procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento
del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de
los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador
más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la
idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran
las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 49 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 49 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA
Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos
como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles
previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre:
• ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso
costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en
particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier
Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a
cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O
• daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas
con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales
anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos,
descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O
• cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a
las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales
de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas,
alteradas o borradas del Producto.
CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA
Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado
en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede
contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede
contactar a Intel.
Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede
contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario
normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al
centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al
ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de
correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de
la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en
el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo
marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede
necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema.
Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio
de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”)
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 50 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 50 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando
devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior
del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que
tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al
centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos
prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad
de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto
para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor
autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en
contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www.
intel.com/support.)
Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes
nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o
reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después
de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se
convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo
estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y
exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo
que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía
limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido.
LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA
ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA
TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN,
LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO
PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO.
Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas,
por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA
E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA
LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos
Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía
implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted.
LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD
LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA
O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA
ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd
51 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 51 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA.
HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR
DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE
CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL
(INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE,
PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS,
Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE
CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL
SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO
ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones)
no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo
que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted.
ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED
PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA
JURISDICCIÓ.
TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA
MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS
SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA
Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA
LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO
ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA
LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA
JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES.
EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y
CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA
(CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN
EN LENGUA INGLESA.
GARANTIA LIMITADA
A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução
térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de
um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do
Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado,
estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em
conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de
três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original
lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 52 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 52 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do
Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver
conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá:
REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU
SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou
substituir o Produto,
REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica-
ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada.
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM
EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS
APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR
ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA
DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O
PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE
DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA
MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO.
AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do
sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e
outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema;
(iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados
do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas
especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador,
inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado
para qualquer fi m em particular.
COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA
A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos
como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante
solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre:
• quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo
mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular,
quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto
soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de
circuito impresso; OU
• danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com
a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais,
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 53 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 53 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso,
negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU
• qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações
da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação
originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas
ou obliteradas.
COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA
Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original
lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local
original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel
Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de
Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o
horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto
ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como
contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para
correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra;
(3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e
(4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma
explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais,
dependendo da natureza do problema.
Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será
emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá
instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver
o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da
embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua
o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto
devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as
tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio.
Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você
estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição
autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com
o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá
para www.intel.com/support.)
A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes
novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 54 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 54 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel,
dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O
Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O
produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e
está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante
do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o
período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado.
LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA
ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A
INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS,
INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO,
ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO,
CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não
permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser
aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA
AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL
DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações
referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser
aplicável.
LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE
A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA,
IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO,
NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS
PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO
POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO
DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS
NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO
DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES,
E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU
REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU
USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO
AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não
permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto
as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 55 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 55 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM
PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A
JURISDIÇÃO.
TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA
LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES
LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E
AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E
AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA
ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE
CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E
DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS
DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES.
NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER
OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO
DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ
PREVALECER.
GARANZIA LIMITATA
Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica)
nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer
realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema
originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti
nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche
rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di
acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente
originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer
contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto,
soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta
garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a:
RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO
SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di
riparare o sostituire il Prodotto,
RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene
richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata.
LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE
LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 56 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 56 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA
DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE
PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE
DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL
PRODOTTO.
AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità
del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore
o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare
un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del
sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le
sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri
componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock
e/o tensioni alterate.
APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA
Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli
errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON
copre quanto segue:
• qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i
costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare
tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato
o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato;
OVVERO
• i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con
l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali,
utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza,
alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO
• qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle
specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse,
alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di
fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto.
RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA
Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella
confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di
acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 57 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 57 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support
(“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la
restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di
copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero
telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del
Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca
e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere
ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema.
Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza
in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del
materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando
si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel
non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato
visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo
originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre
assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero
essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale
richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione
autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione,
contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.)
Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto
con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o
sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole
dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel
all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una
garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni
o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di
fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto.
LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA
QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E
INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE
MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E
IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE
COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie
implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI
GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 58 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 58 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati
od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual
caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere.
RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA
LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA
IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO,
COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED
ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI
MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER
DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI
GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE
ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ,
DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO
PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI
MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE
QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni
stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti
o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero
non valere.
LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE
E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI
ORDINAMENTI.
OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA
GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA
DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA,
IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE
PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE
ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE
E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL
RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA
VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES.
NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA
VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE
IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 59 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 59 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA
Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie
jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym
opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego
zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt
(„Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego
Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób,
nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie
odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3)
lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu;
w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat
liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt.
Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie
będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym,
Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania:
DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania;
LUB
DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub
wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel,
DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu
w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu
gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji.
NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK
GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH
ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH
LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ
DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU
KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ
TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ
NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY
PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB
PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT.
OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i)
obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora;
(ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować
obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 60 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 60 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel
nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w
zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada
za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania
częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia.
ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI
Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub
błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów
typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje:
• jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu,
w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych
przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych
z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest
przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty
drukowanej; LUB
• uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich
jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne,
mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie
produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa
instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB
• jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub
obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy
Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy
lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane.
ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO
Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu
(zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element
systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami
podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel.
Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie
serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym
z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w
normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić
Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru
telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki).
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 61 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 61 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu
wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy
modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu
komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W
zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania
dodatkowych informacji.
Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach
serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału
(Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu
Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS
na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie
przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA
na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym
lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi.
Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas
transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został
sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie,
może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby
uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim
regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.)
Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany
Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony
produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim
czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu
przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt
podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest
przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów:
dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego.
W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla
wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu.
OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE
NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE
DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH
INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W
TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI
SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW,
NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 62 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 62 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach
(lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się
wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe
ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN
WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH
GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO.
PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ
ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających
kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności
gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie
może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika.
OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ
ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY
INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ
LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY,
ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA
WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO
I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W
MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI
ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE,
PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA
WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W
TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK
WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ
SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE
Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ
DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH
LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET
WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O
MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub
obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia
lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym
powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika.
NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI
SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ
POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU
SĄDOWNICZEGO.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 63 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 63 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ
GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ
NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH,
KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM
SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE
PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW
AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN
KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A
OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA
EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A
OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII.
W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ
NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ
STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ
NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI
ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ.
Ограниченная гарантия
«Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем
документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной
запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю
компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и
содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при
правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов
материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать
опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с
даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке
применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех)
лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие
применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение
указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется
настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным
гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению:
ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или)
программных средств; ИЛИ
ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет
отремонтировать или заменить Изделие,
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 64 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 64 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент
предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с
настоящей Ограниченной гарантией.
НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ
ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ
ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ
ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ
СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР,
ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ
УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ
ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ,
ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ.
ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут:
(i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы
и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов
системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести
к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v)
повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила
испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него
спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора
для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с
измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения.
ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ
«Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных
дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в
настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая
Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ:
• любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая
оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в
частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого
Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного
к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ
• повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии,
проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические,
механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 65 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 65 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное
отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или
испытаний; ИЛИ
• любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с
нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с
удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными
идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный
номер).
ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ
Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного
в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной
системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено
Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно
связаться с «Интел».
Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение
гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов
«Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному
времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр
ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится
на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую
информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты
и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и
идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо,
описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание
неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю
центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация.
После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному
обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных
ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS.
При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи
на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без
номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны
отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной
или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять
на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по
перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для
которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через
авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 66 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 66 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на
страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.)
«Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие
новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от
того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее
изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после
поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в
центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия
распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей
письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на
оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто)
дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то
срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается.
ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ
НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ
НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ
ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ,
ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ
К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ
НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ
ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые
штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые
гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК
ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ
ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ.
ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ.
Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок
действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не
распространяться на вас.
ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ
ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ
ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ
РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО
ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И
ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ
ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ,
«ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ,
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 67 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 67 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM
ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ
В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО
ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ,
ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ
ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ
ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ,
ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ
ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ
ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые
штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать
побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения
и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас.
ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ
ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ
ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ
ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ.
ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО
ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ
РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ
С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К
СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ
АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА
(КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА
ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ
(КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО
ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ
СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА
РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА.
В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ
НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ,
ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА
УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ
ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 68 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 68 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM
有限售後保證
Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱
為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱
「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕
無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起
三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以
Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於
原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統
之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條
件，Intel 將有權決定：
利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者
以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時，
根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本
產品」。
本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任
何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電
腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧
客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。
警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器
的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv)
造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不
保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更
改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。
有限售後保證適用範圍
Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎
索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵
蓋下列幾項：
• 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導
致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板
之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者
• 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因
素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的
安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 69 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 69 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM
• 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產
品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。
如何取得售後保證服務
若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在
電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。
若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地
時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本
產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援
中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件
位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標
誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障
或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求
您提供額外的資訊。
在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中
心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客
戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外
包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的
退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶
支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的
產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付
運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中
心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。）
Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換
「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之
內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產
品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售
後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的
限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品
的「有限售後保證」期限。
售後保證限制與排除條款
本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論
明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行
交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗
示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 70 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 70 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM
僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證
適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制，
因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。
責任限制
根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅
限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補
救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據
其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不
限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換，
以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式
或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL
概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需
受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。
本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法
規，您還可能享有其他的權利。
根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭
的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為
美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除
外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦
法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。
一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵
觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。
有限质保条款
仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel
Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装
置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算
机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三
(3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合
英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装
产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计
算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 71 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 71 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM
单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换
产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三
(3) 年。
第一年有限质保
若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之
规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在
上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品
（下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月
内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明
该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换
为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次
更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而
无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第
二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款
（不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。
您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第
一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期
间内。
如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯
一的和全部的救济措施。
剩余期间有限质保
如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余
质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选
择：
通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或
以另一产品更换该产品；或
在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主
张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。
如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产
品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者
本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款
约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 72 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 72 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM
于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换
之产品）的时间。
如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的
救济措施。
警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理
器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能
下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特
尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有
关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压
的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。
有限质保的一般性条款
英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收
到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的
产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相
同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财
产。
本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本
产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期
间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机
系统，则本有限质保即告终止。
有限质保范围
本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期
届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。
英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误
差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范
围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而
引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集
成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。
本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事
故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示
之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 73 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 73 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM
装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔
适当授权的维修商不当处理。
下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭
证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包
凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日
期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号
与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。
三包凭证
您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证
据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给
您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发
票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要
求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格，
并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或
英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。
如何获得质保服务
有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根
据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届
满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还
至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节
假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客
户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理
器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备
提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭
证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在
可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英
特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。
如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还
确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中
心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上
写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产
品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中
心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服
务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 74 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 74 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM
过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有
关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系，
或访问 www.intel.com/support。）
质保限制及免责条款
本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他
质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示
或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务
惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内
有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。
赔偿责任范围
英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上
文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一
和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反
担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失
承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设
备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使
用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知
晓发生此类损害的可能性。
因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受
中华人民 共和国法律管辖。
本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。
품질 보증
Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된
감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시
스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이
정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함
도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점
으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨
터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질
적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 75 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 75 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM
증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의
선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다.
하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는
제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는
Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여
Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불
한다 .
본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어
떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원
구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니
다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으
로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다.
경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및
프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이
발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고,
(v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환
경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니
다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에
는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다.
보증의 범위
Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하
지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본
품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다.
• 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또
는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영
구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는,
• 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명
서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는
부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는,
• Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식
별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 76 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 76 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면
(최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질
보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문
의하면 됩니다.
Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정
상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후,
지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품
해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서
비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소
및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당
되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설
명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다.
ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자
에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환
하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번
호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은
번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이
와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보
내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사
용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급
업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될
수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하
시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.)
Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는
중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은
ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발
송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다.
교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품
질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니
다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되
지 않습니다.
품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항
본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의
묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 77 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 77 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적
인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서
는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보
증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적
용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주
(또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다.
책임의 제한
본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서
명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는
품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최
대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법
이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산
의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로
그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지
않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관
하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임
을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지
않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습
니다.
본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라
서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다.
본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원
에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및
남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주
법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정
지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지
는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다.
본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우
(중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다.
製品保証
インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版
インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者
（以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 78 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 78 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう
に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され
たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の
システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年
間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に
十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保
証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか
のひとつを行います。
修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修
復する。
交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。
返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品
価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな
い場合）。
本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、
本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の
購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者
が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点
で保証期間は終了します。
警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム
とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ
ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ
ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠
を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ
ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定
目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。
製品保証の範囲
インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ
ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ
ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について
は保証していません。
• 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関
連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒
久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 79 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 79 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
• 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品
の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト
ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。
• 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された
製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変
された、または消されている製品。
保証サービスの受け方
本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン
ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使
用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。
インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、
休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、
「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ
ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン
ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住
所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている
製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明
（該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の
内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。
ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material
Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返
品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ
ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、
パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効
な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入
当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送
料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担
となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代
理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し
ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに
お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。）
インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交
換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 80 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 80 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい
たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。
交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期
間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品
に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。
保証の制限および保証対象外
本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ
ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および
商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明
示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま
たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および
黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、
保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で
は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。
責任の限度
本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前
述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合
の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ
れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の
法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の
損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し
たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再
プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す
る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい
た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め
ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま
す。
本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また
は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。
本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ
れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南
米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 81 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 81 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー
ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地
域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま
す。
この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す
る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 82 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 82 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com
If you need further help, call:
To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686
North America 916-377-7000
Latin America
Spanish 001-916-377-0114
Portuguese 001-916-377-0180
Europe
Belgium 02-714 3182
Denmark 38-487077
Finland 9-693-79297
France 01-41-91 85 29
Germany 069-9509-6099
Holland 020-487-4562
Italy 02-696-33276
Norway 23-1620-50
Spain 91-377-8166
Sweden 08-445-1251
United Kingdom 0870-607-2439
Japan 0120-868686
Asia-Pacifi c
Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117
Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249
Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003
Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415
Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416
China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634
Malaysia 1800-80-1390
New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required.
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 83 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 83 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation
in the U.S. and/or other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
G33559-004
Intel Corporation
Attn: Corporate Quality
2200 Mission College Blvd.
Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549
USA
G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 84 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 84 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM
Boxed Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor Installation Notes
Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation
notes available on the World Wide Web.
The heatsink may have thermal interface material attached to the bottom as shown in
Fig. 1. (Be careful not to damage the thermal interface material.) If not, use the enclosed
syringe and apply all of the thermal interface material to the top of the processor as
shown in Fig. 2.
Fig. 1
mPGA478B
Fig. 2
Install the processor retention mechanism (A) following the motherboard
manufacturer’s installation instructions. Open the socket handle (B). Install the
processor by carefully aligning the pins to the socket (C). Close the socket handle (D).
B
A C
D
Connect the processor fan cable connector (H) to the motherboard header.
H
Align the heatsink and clip assembly with the retention mechanism and place it on the
processor. The heatsink is symmetrical. With the clip levers in the up position (E),
push down on all four clip frame corners to secure to the retention mechanism hooks
(F). Close the clip levers (G) (levers require force to be completely closed).
G 1
2
E
F
Copyright Intel Corporation 2001
Part Number A66630-001
First Edition August 2001
Intel® Thermal Solution
HTS1155LP
• Installation Instructions
• Three Year Limited Warranty
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 1 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 1 6/18/2012 2:53:47 PM /18/2012 2:53:47 PM
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 2 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 2 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM
Intel® Thermal Solution HTS1155LP
Installation Notes
Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration
issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/
processors. The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is to
be attached under the main board prior to installing the motherboard inside the chassis.
This UBP will be provided in the box with the thermal solution. Images in this manual are
only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary.
IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are
partially engaged.
Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique contenus dans la boîte, veuillez
tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnés dans les notes d’installation
disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Une Unifi ed Back
Plate (UBP) doit être fi xée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique
du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie dans la boîte avec la solution thermique. Les
images fi gurant dans ce manuel ne sont que des illustrations. L’apparence réelle des
composants peut être différente.
IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement
avant de les mettre toutes en place.
Informieren Sie sich vor der Installation des Boxed-Kühlers und des Prozessors über die
Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel.
com/support/processors fi nden. Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche
Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor dem Einbau der Hauptplatine im Chassis
unter der Hauptplatine angebracht werden muss. Diese UBP wird in der Box mit dem
Kühler geliefert. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das
tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen.
WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor
nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden.
Antes de instalar el procesador y la solución térmica en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas
de integración descritos en las notas para la instalación que están disponibles en
http://support.intel.com/support/processors. La solución térmica del procesador requiere
una placa posterior unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes de
instalar la placa madre dentro del chasis. Esta UBP se suministra en la caja con la solución
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 3 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 3 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM
térmica. Las imágenes de este manual solo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real del
componente puede variar.
¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador
térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados
Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os
problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support.
intel.com/support/processors. A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca
unifi cada (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP) esteja acoplada embaixo da placa principal
antes que a placa mãe seja instalada no gabinete. A UBP é fornecida na caixa junto com
a solução térmica. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do
componente atual poderá variar.
IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador
de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados.
Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i
problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione di sponibili all’indirizzo http://
support.intel.com/support/processors. La soluzione termica del processore necessita di
una Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) collegata sotto la scheda madre prima che questa venga
installata nello chassis. L’UBP è inclusa nella confezione della soluzione termica. Le immagini
riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo.
L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare.
IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore
termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte.
Przed zainstalowaniem dostarczonej w pudełku chłodnicy prosimy uwzględnić
kwestie dotyczące integracji opisane w uwagach dostępnych na stronie http://
support.intel.com/support/processors. Chłodnica wymaga przymocowania
ujednoliconej tylnej płyty (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP) pod płytą główną przed
zainstalowaniem płyty głównej wewnątrz obudowy. Płyta UBP zostanie
dostarczona razem z chłodnicą. Ilustracje zamieszczone w tej instrukcji są
przybliżone. Rzeczywisty wygląd komponentów może być odmienny.
WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system
chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone.
Перед установкой поставляемой в штучной упаковке системы
охлаждения и процессора внимательно изучите вопросы интеграции,
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 4 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 4 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM
указанные в замечаниях по установке, которые можно найти по
адресу http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Система охлаждения
процессора требует, чтобы унифицированная пластина крепления (UBP)
была установлена под материнской платой до установки материнской
платы в корпус. UBP будет предоставлена в упаковке вместе с системой
охлаждения. Изображения в данном руководстве представлены только
в качестве иллюстраций. В действительности внешний вид компонентов
может быть иным.
ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных
болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично.
在安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器之前，請先至此網站 http://support.intel.com/
support/processors 參考安裝注意事項中有關整合的問題。主機板裝入機殼前，
需先使用「一体式背板」(UBP) 將處理器散熱解決方案固定在主機板下方。UBP
隨附於散熱解決方案之外盒中。本手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際組件的樣式可
能有所不同。
重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺
絲。
在安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请首先考虑站点 http://support.intel.
com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成问题。向机箱内安装主
板之前，要求使用一体式背板 (UBP)，将处理器散热解决方案连接到主板的下
面。UBP 将随包装盒与散热解决方案一起 提供。本手册所含图示仅用于示意目
的。组件的实际外观可能有所不同。
重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。
상자에 포장된 서멀 솔루션과 프로세서를 설치하기 전에, http://support.intel.com/
support/processors에서 제공되는 설치 지침을 참조해서 설치 작업의 문제점을 고
려하십시오. 프로세서 서멀 솔루션을 사용하려면 마더보드를 섀시 내부에 설치
하기 전에 메인 보드 하단에Unifi ed Back Plate(UBP)가 장착되어 있어야 합니다. 이
UBP는 서멀 솔루션과 함께 상자에 동봉되어 있습니다. 본 설명서의 그림은 설명
목적으로만 제공되는 것입니다. 실제 부품 모양은 다를 수 있습니다.
중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히
조이지 마십시오.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 5 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 5 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM
ボックス版サーマル・ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors
にあるインストール・ノートに記述されている互換
性の問題を確認してください。プロセッサー・サーマル・ソリューションの要件とし
て、マウントする前にメインボードの下に Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付ける必
要があります。この UBP はサーマル・ソリューションに同梱されています。このマ
ニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なものに過ぎず、実際のコンポーネントの外観
は異なる場合があります。
重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締
め付けないでください。
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 6 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 6 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM
Installation Instructions for the
Intel® Thermal Solution HTS1155LP
Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology
using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual
test results. Results may vary.
NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty.
REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois
ans.
HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie.
NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de
tres años.
OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de
três anos.
NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre
anni.
CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun.
UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej
gwarancji.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней
ограниченной гарантии.
備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。
注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。
주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다.
備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。
หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี
Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo
hành Giới hạn Ba Năm.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 7 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 7 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM
Make sure the thermal interface material is applied to the top of the CPU Integrated
Heat Spreader prior to installation of the heatsink as shown in Step 7. Installation
confi gurations may vary. The actual confi guration is defi ned by the chassis design.
N'oubliez pas d'appliquer la pâte thermique sur le répartiteur de chaleur intégré au CPU
avant d’installer le dissipateur thermique comme indiqué à l'étape 7. Les confi gurations
d'installation peuvent différer. La confi guration réelle dépend de la conception du châssis.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass vor der Installation des Kühlkörpers, wie in Schritt 7 gezeigt,
die Wärmeleitpaste auf das Wärmeverteilblech (Integrated Heat Spreader – IHS) der
CPU aufgebracht wird. Die Installationsanordnungen können variieren. Die tatsächliche
Anordnung wird durch den Aufbau des Chassis vorgegeben.
Antes de instalar el disipador térmico como se muestra en el Paso 7, asegúrese de aplicar
el material de interfaz térmica en la parte superior del difusor de calor integrado a la CPU.
La manera de realizar la instalación puede variar y dependerá del diseño del chasis.
Certifi que-se de que o material de interface térmica seja aplicado na parte superior
do Difusor de Calor Integrado da CPU antes de instalar o dissipador de calor conforme
mostrado no passo 7. As confi gurações de instalação poderão variar. A confi guração fi nal
depende do design do gabinete.
Prima dell’installazione del dissipatore di calore integrato (IHS, Integrated Heat Spreader)
della CPU assicurarsi che nella parte superiore di questo venga applicata la pasta
termoconduttiva, come mostrato nel passaggio 7. Le confi gurazioni di installazione
potrebbero variare. La confi gurazione effettiva dipende dalla struttura dello chassis.
Przed zainstalowaniem radiatora należy pokryć materiałem termoizolacyjnym
górną rozpraszającą ciepło powierzchnię procesora, jak pokazano
w czynności 7. Konfi guracja może być rozmaita i zależy od konstrukcji płyty
montażowej.
Перед установкой радиатора убедитесь в том, что на поверхность
интегрированного теплоотвода процессора нанесен специальный
теплопроводящий состав, как показано на иллюстрации к Шагу
7. Конфигурация устанавливаемых элементов может отличаться.
Конкретная конфигурация определяется конструкцией корпуса.
如步驟 7 所示，安裝處理器散熱器之前，確定先將熱介面材料塗在 CPU 整合
式均熱片的 上方。安裝配置可能視實際情形有所不同。 實際配置應依機殼設
計而調整。
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 8 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 8 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM
请确保在安装散热器之前，事先将热界面材料施加到集成式 CPU 散热片的顶
部，如第 7 步 所示。安装配置可能有所不同。 实际配置由机箱设计决定。
단계 7의 그림과 같이 방열기를 설치하기 전에 CPU 통합형 방열판의 상단
에 열 전달제를 바르십시오. 설치 구성은 다양할 수 있습니다. 실제 구성
은 섀시 설계에 따라 결정됩니다.
ステップ 7 に示すようにヒートシンクを取り付ける前に、CPUのインテグレーテッ
ド・ヒートスプレッダーの上に必ずサーマル・インターフェース・マテリアルを塗布
してください。構造は異なることがあります。 実際の構造はシャーシの設計に
左右されます。
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 9 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 9 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 10 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 10 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
1
2
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 11 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 11 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM
3
4
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 12 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 12 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM
5
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 13 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 13 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM
6
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 14 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 14 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM
7
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 15 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 15 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM
A. Partially tighten the screws
A. Serrez partiellement les vis
A. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben leicht an
A. Ajuste un poco los tornillos
A. Aperte parcialmente os parafusos
A. Serrare parzialmente le viti
A. Dokręcić śruby do pierwszego oporu
A. Наживите винты
A. 螺絲稍微鎖緊
A. 略微拧紧螺丝
A. 나사를 약간 조입니다
A. ねじを途中まで締めます
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 16 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 16 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM
8
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
M2.5 * 0.45
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 17 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 17 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM
B. Move the heat exchanger to close the gap to the blower
B. Déplacez l'échangeur thermique de façon à l’accoler au
ventilateur
B. Verschieben Sie den Wärmetauscher, um die Lücke zum Lüfter
zu schließen
B. Mueva el intercambiador de calor para acercarlo al ventilador
B. Coloque o trocador de calor em posição adjacente à ventoinha
B. Spostare lo scambiatore di calore in modo da colmare lo spazio
verso il soffi atore
B. Przesunąć wymiennik ciepła, aby zakryć szczelinę do
dmuchawy
B. Прижмите теплообменник к вентилятору, устранив
зазор
B. 將散熱模組移近風扇些
B. 移动热交换器，使其靠近鼓风机
B. 열 교환기를 움직여서 송풍기와의 간격을 줄입니다
B. ヒート・エクスチェンジを動かしてブロアーとの隙間をなく
すようにします
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 18 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 18 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM
9
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 19 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 19 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM
C. Fully tighten the screws
C. Serrez complètement les vis
C. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben vollständig fest
C. Ajuste completamente los tornillos
C. Aperte completamente os parafusos
C. Stringere completamente le viti
C. Całkowicie dokręcić śruby
C. Полностью затяните винты
C. 螺絲完全鎖緊
C. 完全拧紧螺丝
C. 나사를 완전히 조입니다
C. ねじを完全に締め付けます
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 20 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 20 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM
10
11
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 21 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 21 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM
D. Plug in the fan cable connector
D. Connectez le câble du ventilateur
D. Stecken Sie den Steckverbinder des Gebläsekabels ein
D. Enchufe el conector del cable del ventilador
D. Ligue o conector do cabo do ventilador
D. Collegare il connettore del cavo della ventola
D. Podłączyć kabel zasilania wentylatora
D. Подсоедините разъем кабеля вентилятора
D. 連接風扇線電源接頭
D. 插入风扇电缆连接器
D. 팬 케이블 커넥터를 꽂습니다
D. ファンケーブル・コネクターに接続します
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 22 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 22 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM
12
http://www.intel.com/go/aio
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 23 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 23 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 24 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 24 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM
LIMITED WARRANTY
If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply
to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view
the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers.
Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution)
in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer
system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System
Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from
defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly
available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product
was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and
for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system
containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the
subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the
warranty period, Intel, at its option, will:
REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR
REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or
replace the Product,
REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty
service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER
APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE
ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE
PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT.
WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR
OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT.
WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and
useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components
to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat
or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does
not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no
responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or
voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose.
EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY
Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known
as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 25 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 25 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
Warranty does NOT cover:
• any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including
labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs
relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or
otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR
• damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with
electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions,
usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration,
repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR
• any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly
available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark
or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE
To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed
packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of
purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel.
To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support
(“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours
(local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center.
(See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be
prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers;
(2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on
the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand
and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need
additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.
Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be
issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions
for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to
the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel
will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid
RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated
ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and
assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees
may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold
via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region,
contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.)
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 26 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 26 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product
or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be
shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt
of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on
receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is
subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of
the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited
Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended.
WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS
THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL
DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF
TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties
so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES
APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on
how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR
EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH
ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY
BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS
NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME,
GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND
ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM
OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN
IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states
(or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO
HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 27 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 27 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY
SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE
FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA
AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND
THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA
PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE
AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE
REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW
SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES.
IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY
OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF
THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL.
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans
son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système
informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système
original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de
tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées
par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit
dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une
durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant
le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie
limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel
a le choix entre:
RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU
REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni
le remplacer,
REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous
garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES
ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU
NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT
QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME
INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES
PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 28 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 28 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE
SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT.
ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i)
réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii)
entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les
performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ;
et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement
le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline
toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris
en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions.
ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata »,
au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande.
De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS:
• les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les
frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en
particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout
Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une
carte à circuits imprimés; OU
• les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents,
problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou
environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du
produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des
tests inappropriés; OU
• un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par
Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de
série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées.
COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE
Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage
original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre
point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel.
Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de
support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 29 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 29 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit
au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment
contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse
postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom
du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas
échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle
; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI
pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires.
Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous
recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions
pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au
centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera
aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le
paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage
original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de
dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention
pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de
garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/
Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou
consultez la page www.intel.com/support.)
Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants
neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou
remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du
produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception
par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis
aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le
délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel
remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de
remplacement.
LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE
CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT
ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT
LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À
UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE
HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne
vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 30 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 30 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE
GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente
limite ne vous soit pas applicable.
LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ
LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE
TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU
REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS
REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA
GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE
TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX
RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE
(Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES
D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS
ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION
OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU
UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ
DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent
toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible
que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS
ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT
D’AUTRES DROITS.
TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU
AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR
LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU
NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE,
AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR
LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE),
LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR.
POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI
APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES.
EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE
VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN
CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 31 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 31 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung)
bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem
Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”)
folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist
das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung
für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden
ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen
Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht
im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch
diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit
aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen,
wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen:
das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER
das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer
Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen,
den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung
des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts
ERSTATTEN.
DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM
ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT
ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN
BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES
DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE
SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE
DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES
ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG.
WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i)
die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren;
(ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine
Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere
Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel
hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und
übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung
des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten
Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 32 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 32 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata”
bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar
gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf:
• jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz
des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten
oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang
mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten
gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER
• Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich
Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer
oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden
Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen,
unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER
• alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi-
fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi
kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert
oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden.
WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN?
Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des
Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems)
setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung.
Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des
Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS
Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und
feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen
für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende
Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern;
(2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi
zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich
Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach
Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen.
Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt,
erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization,
“RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 33 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 33 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer
auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die
RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht
angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung
oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center
senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport
verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten
und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie
Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem
Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu
erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite
www.intel.com/support.)
Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder
überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder
ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem
Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach
dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel.
Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt
den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für
die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche
länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten
Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert.
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE
DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR
DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH,
SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH,
JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR
MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER
VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN.
In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss
stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss
möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN
GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN
DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten)
sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig;
daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 34 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 34 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN
INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER
AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ
ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE
STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE
IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM
MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR
EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN,
DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER
RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE
HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL,
AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL
UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG
ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT
ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT
ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN
SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES
AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder
Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden
oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen
und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu.
DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH
STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU.
JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER
BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN
UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE
UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN
STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND
SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT
DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT
AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR
UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND
DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE
RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN.
IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND
EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 35 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 35 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
(MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE
ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN.
GARANTÍA LIMITADA
Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la
solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador
de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el
Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala
apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación,
y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a
disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del
Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un
período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación
que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto,
objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el
período de garantía, Intel, a su elección:
REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O
REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o
reemplazar el Producto,
REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del
servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada.
ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR
BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN
ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA
DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE
MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA
DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O
DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE
EL PRODUCTO.
ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la
estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del
procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento
del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de
los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador
más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la
idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran
las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 36 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 36 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA
Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos
como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles
previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre:
• ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso
costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en
particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier
Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a
cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O
• daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas
con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales
anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos,
descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O
• cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a
las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales
de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas,
alteradas o borradas del Producto.
CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA
Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado
en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede
contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede
contactar a Intel.
Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede
contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario
normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al
centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al
ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de
correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de
la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en
el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo
marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede
necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema.
Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio
de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”)
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 37 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 37 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando
devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior
del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que
tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al
centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos
prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad
de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto
para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor
autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en
contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www.
intel.com/support.)
Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes
nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o
reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después
de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se
convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo
estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y
exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo
que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía
limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido.
LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA
ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA
TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN,
LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO
PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO.
Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas,
por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA
E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA
LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos
Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía
implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted.
LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD
LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA
O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA
ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd
38 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 38 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA.
HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR
DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE
CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL
(INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE,
PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS,
Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE
CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL
SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO
ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones)
no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo
que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted.
ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED
PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA
JURISDICCIÓ.
TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA
MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS
SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA
Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA
LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO
ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA
LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA
JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES.
EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y
CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA
(CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN
EN LENGUA INGLESA.
GARANTIA LIMITADA
A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução
térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de
um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do
Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado,
estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em
conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de
três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original
lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 39 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 39 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do
Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver
conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá:
REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU
SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou
substituir o Produto,
REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica-
ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada.
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM
EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS
APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR
ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA
DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O
PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE
DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA
MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO.
AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do
sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e
outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema;
(iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados
do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas
especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador,
inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado
para qualquer fi m em particular.
COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA
A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos
como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante
solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre:
• quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo
mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular,
quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto
soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de
circuito impresso; OU
• danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com
a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais,
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 40 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 40 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso,
negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU
• qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações
da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação
originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas
ou obliteradas.
COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA
Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original
lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local
original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel
Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de
Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o
horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto
ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como
contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para
correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra;
(3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e
(4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma
explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais,
dependendo da natureza do problema.
Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será
emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá
instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver
o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da
embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua
o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto
devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as
tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio.
Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você
estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição
autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com
o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá
para www.intel.com/support.)
A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes
novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 41 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 41 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel,
dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O
Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O
produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e
está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante
do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o
período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado.
LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA
ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A
INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS,
INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO,
ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO,
CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não
permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser
aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA
AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL
DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações
referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser
aplicável.
LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE
A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA,
IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO,
NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS
PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO
POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO
DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS
NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO
DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES,
E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU
REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU
USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO
AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não
permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto
as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 42 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 42 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM
PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A
JURISDIÇÃO.
TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA
LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES
LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E
AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E
AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA
ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE
CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E
DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS
DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES.
NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER
OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO
DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ
PREVALECER.
GARANZIA LIMITATA
Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica)
nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer
realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema
originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti
nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche
rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di
acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente
originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer
contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto,
soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta
garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a:
RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO
SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di
riparare o sostituire il Prodotto,
RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene
richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata.
LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE
LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 43 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 43 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA
DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE
PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE
DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL
PRODOTTO.
AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità
del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore
o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare
un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del
sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le
sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri
componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock
e/o tensioni alterate.
APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA
Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli
errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON
copre quanto segue:
• qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i
costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare
tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato
o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato;
OVVERO
• i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con
l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali,
utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza,
alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO
• qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle
specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse,
alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di
fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto.
RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA
Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella
confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di
acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 44 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 44 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support
(“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la
restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di
copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero
telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del
Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca
e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere
ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema.
Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza
in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del
materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando
si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel
non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato
visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo
originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre
assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero
essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale
richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione
autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione,
contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.)
Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto
con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o
sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole
dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel
all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una
garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni
o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di
fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto.
LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA
QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E
INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE
MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E
IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE
COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie
implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI
GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 45 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 45 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati
od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual
caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere.
RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA
LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA
IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO,
COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED
ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI
MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER
DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI
GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE
ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ,
DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO
PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI
MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE
QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni
stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti
o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero
non valere.
LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE
E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI
ORDINAMENTI.
OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA
GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA
DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA,
IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE
PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE
ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE
E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL
RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA
VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES.
NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA
VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE
IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 46 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 46 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA
Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie
jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym
opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego
zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt
(„Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego
Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób,
nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie
odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3)
lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu;
w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat
liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt.
Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie
będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym,
Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania:
DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania;
LUB
DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub
wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel,
DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu
w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu
gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji.
NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK
GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH
ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH
LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ
DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU
KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ
TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ
NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY
PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB
PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT.
OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i)
obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora;
(ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować
obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 47 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 47 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel
nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w
zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada
za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania
częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia.
ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI
Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub
błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów
typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje:
• jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu,
w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych
przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych
z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest
przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty
drukowanej; LUB
• uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich
jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne,
mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie
produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa
instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB
• jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub
obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy
Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy
lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane.
ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO
Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu
(zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element
systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami
podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel.
Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie
serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym
z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w
normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić
Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru
telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki).
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 48 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 48 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu
wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy
modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu
komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W
zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania
dodatkowych informacji.
Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach
serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału
(Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu
Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS
na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie
przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA
na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym
lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi.
Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas
transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został
sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie,
może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby
uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim
regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.)
Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany
Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony
produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim
czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu
przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt
podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest
przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów:
dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego.
W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla
wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu.
OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE
NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE
DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH
INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W
TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI
SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW,
NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 49 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 49 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach
(lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się
wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe
ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN
WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH
GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO.
PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ
ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających
kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności
gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie
może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika.
OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ
ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY
INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ
LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY,
ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA
WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO
I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W
MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI
ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE,
PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA
WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W
TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK
WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ
SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE
Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ
DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH
LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET
WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O
MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub
obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia
lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym
powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika.
NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI
SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ
POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU
SĄDOWNICZEGO.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 50 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 50 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ
GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ
NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH,
KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM
SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE
PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW
AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN
KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A
OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA
EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A
OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII.
W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ
NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ
STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ
NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI
ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ.
Ограниченная гарантия
«Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем
документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной
запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю
компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и
содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при
правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов
материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать
опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с
даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке
применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех)
лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие
применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение
указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется
настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным
гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению:
ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или)
программных средств; ИЛИ
ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет
отремонтировать или заменить Изделие,
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 51 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 51 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент
предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с
настоящей Ограниченной гарантией.
НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ
ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ
ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ
ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ
СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР,
ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ
УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ
ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ,
ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ.
ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут:
(i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы
и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов
системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести
к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v)
повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила
испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него
спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора
для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с
измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения.
ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ
«Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных
дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в
настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая
Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ:
• любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая
оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в
частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого
Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного
к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ
• повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии,
проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические,
механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 52 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 52 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM
эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное
отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или
испытаний; ИЛИ
• любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с
нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с
удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными
идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный
номер).
ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ
Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного
в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной
системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено
Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно
связаться с «Интел».
Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение
гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов
«Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному
времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр
ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится
на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую
информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты
и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и
идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо,
описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание
неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю
центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация.
После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному
обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных
ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS.
При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи
на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без
номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны
отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной
или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять
на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по
перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для
которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через
авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 53 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 53 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на
страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.)
«Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие
новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от
того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее
изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после
поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в
центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия
распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей
письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на
оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто)
дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то
срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается.
ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ
НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ
НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ
ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ,
ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ
К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ
НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ
ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые
штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые
гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК
ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ
ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ.
ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ.
Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия
подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться
на вас.
ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ
ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ
ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ
РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО
ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И
ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ
ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ,
«ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ,
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 54 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 54 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В
РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ
ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО,
УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ
ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ
ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ
ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ
ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ),
ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О
ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции)
не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные
убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не
распространяться на вас.
ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ
ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ
ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ
ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ.
ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО
ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ
РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ
С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К
СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ
АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА
(КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА
ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ
(КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО
ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ
СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА
РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С
ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА.
В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ
НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ,
ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА
УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ
ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 55 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 55 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
有限售後保證
Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱
為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱
「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕
無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起
三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以
Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於
原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統
之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條
件，Intel 將有權決定：
利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者
以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時，
根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本
產品」。
本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任
何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電
腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧
客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。
警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器
的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv)
造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不
保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更
改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。
有限售後保證適用範圍
Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎
索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵
蓋下列幾項：
• 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導
致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板
之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者
• 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因
素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的
安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 56 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 56 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
• 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產
品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。
如何取得售後保證服務
若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在
電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。
若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地
時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本
產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援
中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件
位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標
誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障
或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求
您提供額外的資訊。
在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中
心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客
戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外
包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的
退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶
支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的
產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付
運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中
心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。）
Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換
「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之
內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產
品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售
後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的
限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品
的「有限售後保證」期限。
售後保證限制與排除條款
本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論
明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行
交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗
示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 57 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 57 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證
適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制，
因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。
責任限制
根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅
限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補
救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據
其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不
限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換，
以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式
或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL
概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需
受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。
本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法
規，您還可能享有其他的權利。
根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭
的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為
美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除
外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦
法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。
一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵
觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。
有限质保条款
仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel
Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装
置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算
机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三
(3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合
英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装
产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计
算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 58 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 58 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换
产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三
(3) 年。
第一年有限质保
若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之
规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在
上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品
（下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月
内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明
该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换
为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次
更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而
无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第
二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款
（不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。
您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第
一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期
间内。
如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯
一的和全部的救济措施。
剩余期间有限质保
如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余
质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选
择：
通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或
以另一产品更换该产品；或
在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主
张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。
如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产
品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者
本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款
约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 59 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 59 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换
之产品）的时间。
如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的
救济措施。
警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理
器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能
下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特
尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有
关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压
的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。
有限质保的一般性条款
英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收
到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的
产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相
同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财
产。
本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本
产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期
间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机
系统，则本有限质保即告终止。
有限质保范围
本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期
届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。
英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误
差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范
围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而
引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集
成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。
本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事
故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示
之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 60 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 60 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔
适当授权的维修商不当处理。
下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭
证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包
凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日
期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号
与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。
三包凭证
您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证
据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给
您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发
票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要
求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格，
并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或
英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。
如何获得质保服务
有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根
据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届
满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还
至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节
假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客
户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理
器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备
提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭
证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在
可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英
特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。
如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还
确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中
心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上
写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产
品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中
心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服
务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 61 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 61 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM
过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有
关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系，
或访问 www.intel.com/support。）
质保限制及免责条款
本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他
质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示
或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务
惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内
有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。
赔偿责任范围
英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上
文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一
和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反
担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失
承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设
备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使
用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知
晓发生此类损害的可能性。
因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受
中华人民 共和国法律管辖。
本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。
품질 보증
Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된
감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시
스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이
정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함
도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점
으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨
터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질
적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 62 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 62 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의
선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다.
하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는
제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는
Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여
Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불
한다 .
본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어
떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원
구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니
다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으
로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다.
경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및
프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이
발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고,
(v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환
경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니
다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에
는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다.
보증의 범위
Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하
지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본
품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다.
• 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또
는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영
구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는,
• 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명
서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는
부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는,
• Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식
별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 63 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 63 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면
(최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질
보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문
의하면 됩니다.
Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정
상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후,
지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품
해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서
비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소
및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당
되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설
명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다.
ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자
에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환
하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번
호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은
번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이
와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보
내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사
용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급
업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될
수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하
시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.)
Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는
중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은
ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발
송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다.
교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품
질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니
다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되
지 않습니다.
품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항
본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의
묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 64 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 64 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적
인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서
는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보
증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적
용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주
(또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다.
책임의 제한
본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서
명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는
품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최
대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법
이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산
의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로
그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지
않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관
하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임
을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지
않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습
니다.
본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라
서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다.
본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원
에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및
남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주
법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정
지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지
는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다.
본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우
(중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다.
製品保証
インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版
インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者
（以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 65 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 65 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう
に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され
たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の
システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年
間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に
十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保
証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか
のひとつを行います。
修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修
復する。
交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。
返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品
価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな
い場合）。
本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、
本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の
購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者
が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点
で保証期間は終了します。
警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム
とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ
ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ
ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠
を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ
ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定
目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。
製品保証の範囲
インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ
ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ
ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について
は保証していません。
• 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関
連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒
久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 66 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 66 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
• 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品
の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト
ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。
• 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された
製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変
された、または消されている製品。
保証サービスの受け方
本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン
ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使
用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。
インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、
休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、
「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ
ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン
ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住
所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている
製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明
（該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の
内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。
ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material
Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返
品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ
ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、
パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効
な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入
当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送
料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担
となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代
理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し
ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに
お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。）
インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交
換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 67 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 67 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい
たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。
交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期
間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品
に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。
保証の制限および保証対象外
本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ
ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および
商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明
示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま
たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および
黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、
保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で
は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。
責任の限度
本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前
述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合
の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ
れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の
法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の
損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し
たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再
プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す
る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい
た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め
ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま
す。
本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また
は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。
本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ
れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南
米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 68 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 68 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー
ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地
域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま
す。
この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す
る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 69 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 69 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 70 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 70 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com
If you need further help, call:
To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686
North America 916-377-7000
Latin America
Spanish 001-916-377-0114
Portuguese 001-916-377-0180
Europe
Belgium 02-714 3182
Denmark 38-487077
Finland 9-693-79297
France 01-41-91 85 29
Germany 069-9509-6099
Holland 020-487-4562
Italy 02-696-33276
Norway 23-1620-50
Spain 91-377-8166
Sweden 08-445-1251
United Kingdom 0870-607-2439
Japan 0120-868686
Asia-Pacifi c
Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117
Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249
Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003
Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415
Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416
China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634
Malaysia 1800-80-1390
New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required.
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 71 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 71 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM
Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC
in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine.
Intel, the Intel logo, and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S.
and/or other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
G36426-002
Intel Corporation
Attn: Corporate Quality
2200 Mission College Blvd.
Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549
USA
G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 72 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 72 6/18/2012 2:54:50 PM /18/2012 2:54:50 PM
80-00142-01 Rev. A
Embedded MegaRAID®
Software
USER’S
GUIDE
November 2006
Version 2.0
ii
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
This document contains proprietary information of LSI Logic Corporation. The
information contained herein is not to be used by or disclosed to third parties
without the express written permission of an officer of LSI Logic Corporation.
Document 80-00142-01 Rev. A, Version 2.0 (November 2006)
This document describes version 1.0 of LSI Logic Corporation’s Embedded
MegaRAID Software and will remain the official reference source for all
revisions/releases of this product until rescinded by an update.
LSI Logic Corporation reserves the right to make changes to any products herein
at any time without notice. LSI Logic does not assume any responsibility or
liability arising out of the application or use of any product described herein,
except as expressly agreed to in writing by LSI Logic; nor does the purchase or
use of a product from LSI Logic convey a license under any patent rights,
copyrights, trademark rights, or any other of the intellectual property rights of
LSI Logic or third parties.
Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
LSI Logic, the LSI Logic logo design, MegaRAID, and MegaRAID Storage
Manager are trademarks or registered trademarks of LSI Logic Corporation.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Pentium is a
registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other brand and product names
may be trademarks of their respective companies.
CD
To receive product literature, visit us at http://www.lsilogic.com.
For a current list of our distributors, sales offices, and design resource
centers, view our web page located at
http://www.lsilogic.com/contacts/index.html
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide iii
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Preface
This document explains how to use the MegaRAID Storage Manager™
software, the MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility (CU), and the
MegaCLI utility to configure, monitor, and maintain RAID storage
configurations with LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID Software.
Audience
This document assumes that you are familiar with RAID storage
configurations and configuration utilities. The people who benefit from
this book are network administrators who need to create storage
configurations with LSI Embedded MegaRAID Software.
Organization
This document has the following chapters and appendixes:
• Chapter 1, Overview, provides an overview of Embedded
MegaRAID Software features and an overview of RAID levels.
• Chapter 2, Driver Installation, explains how to install the Embedded
MegaRAID Software drivers for Microsoft Windows and Linux.
• Chapter 3, MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility, explains how to
use the MegaRAID BIOS CU to create storage configurations.
• Chapter 4, MegaCLI Command Tool, explains how to use the
MegaCLI command line utility to create storage configurations.
• Chapter 5, MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and
Installation, introduces the main features of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager software and explains how to install it.
iv Preface
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
• Chapter 6, MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus,
describes the layout of the Embedded MegaRAID Software window
and lists the available menu options.
• Chapter 7, Configuration, describes how to use the Embedded
MegaRAID Software to create storage configurations, save
configurations, and apply saved configurations to a controller.
• Chapter 8, Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices,
explains how the Embedded MegaRAID Software monitors the
status of storage configurations and devices and displays information
about them.
• Chapter 9, Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations,
describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager software maintenance
functions for virtual disks and other storage devices.
• Appendix A, Events and Messages, provides descriptions of the
Embedded MegaRAID Software events.
Conventions
The following is a list of notational conventions used throughout
this manual:
Notation Example Meaning and Use
Courier typeface .nwk file Names of commands, files, and directories are shown in Courier
typeface.
Bold typeface fd1sp In a command line, keywords are shown in bold, non-italic
typeface. Enter them exactly as shown.
Italics module In command lines and names italics indicate user variables.
Italicized text must be replaced with appropriate user-specified
items. Enter items of the type called for, using lowercase.
Italic underscore full_pathname When an underscore appears in an italicized string, enter a
user-supplied item of the type called for with no spaces.
Initial capital letters Undo
Edit
Apply
Names of menu commands, options, check buttons, text buttons,
options buttons, text boxes, list boxes, and so on, are
shown in text with initial capital lettering to avoid misreading.
These elements may appear on your screen in all lowercase.
Brackets [version] You may, but need not, select one item enclosed within brackets.
Do not enter the brackets.
Bar les | les.out2 You may select one (but not more than one) item from a list
separated by bars. Do not enter the bar.
Preface v
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: Notes contain supplementary information that can have an
effect on system performance.
Caution: Cautions are notifications that an action has the potential to
adversely affect equipment operation, system performance,
or data integrity.
Revision History
Braces {property | -all} You must select one (but not more than one) item enclosed
within braces. Do not enter the braces.
Ellipses option... In command formats, elements preceding ellipses may be
repeated any number of times. Do not enter the ellipses. In
menu items, if an ellipsis appears in an item, clicking that item
brings up a dialog box.
Semicolon, and other
punctuation
Use as shown in the text.
Notation Example Meaning and Use
Document
Number
Date
Revision Remarks
80-00142-01 Rev. A November 2006
Version 2.0
Added RAID 5 information to the document. Updated MegaCLI
commands.
DB15-000356-00 July 2006
Version 1.0
Initial release of this document.
vi Preface
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide vii
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Contents
Chapter 1
Overview
1.1 Embedded MegaRAID Software Features 1-1
1.1.1 Driver Features 1-1
1.1.2 BIOS Features 1-2
1.1.3 Ctrl-M Configuration Utility Features 1-3
1.1.4 Manageability/Disk Console Features 1-4
1.2 RAID Overview 1-4
1.2.1 RAID 0 Description 1-6
1.2.2 RAID 1 Description 1-7
1.2.3 RAID 5 Description 1-7
1.2.4 RAID 10 Description 1-9
Chapter 2
Driver Installation
2.1 Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation 2-1
2.1.1 Updating the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver 2-2
2.1.2 Confirming the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver
Installation 2-2
2.2 Linux Driver Installation 2-3
2.2.1 Obtaining the Driver Image File 2-3
2.2.2 Preparing the Installation Disk(s) for Linux 2-3
2.2.3 Installing the Red Hat Linux Driver on a New System
2-5
2.2.4 Updating the Red Hat Linux Driver (Generic) 2-5
2.2.5 Installing the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Driver 2-8
viii Contents
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3
MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
3.1 Performing a Quick Configuration 3-2
3.2 Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-2
3.2.1 Starting the MegaRAID BIOS CU 3-3
3.2.2 Using Easy Configuration 3-4
3.2.3 Using New Configuration and View/Add Configuration
3-5
3.2.4 Creating a Global Hotspare Drive 3-7
3.2.5 Initializing Logical Drives 3-8
3.3 Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies
3-10
3.4 Rebuilding a Drive 3-11
3.5 Hot Plug Support 3-12
3.6 Checking Data Consistency 3-13
3.7 Viewing and Changing Device Properties 3-14
3.7.1 Viewing and Changing Adapter Properties 3-15
3.7.2 Viewing and Changing Logical Drive Properties 3-16
3.7.3 Viewing Physical Drive Properties 3-16
3.8 Forcing Drives Online or Offline 3-16
3.9 Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive 3-17
3.10 Deleting a Logical Drive 3-17
3.11 Clearing a Storage Configuration 3-17
Chapter 4
MegaCLI Command Tool
4.1 MegaCLI CT Overview 4-2
4.2 Exception Handling 4-2
4.3 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions 4-3
4.4 Adapter Commands 4-5
4.4.1 Display Adapter Information 4-5
4.4.2 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild 4-5
4.4.3 Set Adapter Properties 4-6
4.4.4 Display Specified Adapter Properties 4-6
4.4.5 Display Adapter Time 4-7
4.4.6 Set Factory Defaults 4-7
4.5 BIOS Commands 4-7
Contents ix
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.5.1 Set or Display Bootable Logical Drive ID 4-7
4.5.2 Set BIOS Options 4-8
4.6 Event Log Commands 4-8
4.6.1 Manage the Event Log Entries 4-8
4.7 Configuration Commands 4-9
4.7.1 Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration 4-9
4.7.2 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 4-10
4.7.3 Add RAID 10 Configuration 4-11
4.7.4 Clear Existing Configuration 4-12
4.7.5 Display Existing Configuration 4-12
4.7.6 Save Adapter Configuration 4-12
4.7.7 Restore Configuration Data from File 4-13
4.7.8 Delete Logical Drive(s) 4-13
4.7.9 Display Free Space 4-13
4.8 Logical Drive Commands 4-14
4.8.1 Display Logical Drive Information 4-14
4.8.2 Display Logical Drive Disk Cache Settings 4-14
4.8.3 Manage Logical Drive Initialization 4-14
4.8.4 Manage Consistency Check 4-15
4.8.5 View Ongoing Background Initialization 4-15
4.8.6 Display Logical Drive and Physical Drive Information
4-16
4.8.7 Display Number of Logical Drives 4-17
4.9 Physical Drive Commands 4-17
4.9.1 Display Physical Disk Drive Information 4-17
4.9.2 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online 4-17
4.9.3 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline 4-18
4.9.4 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good
4-18
4.9.5 Manage Global Hotspares 4-18
4.9.6 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive 4-18
4.9.7 Locate Physical Disk Drive(s) and Activate LED 4-19
4.9.8 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic
Rebuild 4-19
4.9.9 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal
4-20
4.9.10 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives 4-20
4.9.11 Display List of Physical Drives 4-20
x Contents
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.10 Miscellaneous Commands 4-21
4.10.1 Display MegaCLI Version 4-21
4.10.2 Display MegaCLI Help 4-21
Chapter 5
MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation
5.1 Overview 5-1
5.1.1 Creating Storage Configurations 5-1
5.1.2 Monitoring Storage Devices 5-2
5.1.3 Maintaining Storage Configurations 5-2
5.2 Hardware and Software Requirements 5-2
5.3 Installation 5-3
5.3.1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software on
Microsoft Windows 5-3
5.3.2 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for
Linux 5-6
5.3.3 Linux Error Messages 5-7
Chapter 6
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
6.1 Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software 6-1
6.2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-4
6.2.1 Physical/Logical View Panel 6-5
6.2.2 Properties/Operations/Graphical View Panel 6-6
6.2.3 Event Log Panel 6-6
6.2.4 Menu Bar 6-7
Chapter 7
Configuration
7.1 Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-2
7.1.1 Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters 7-3
7.1.2 Using Auto Configuration 7-4
7.1.3 Using Guided Configuration 7-5
7.1.4 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0 7-8
7.1.5 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1 7-10
7.1.6 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10 7-12
7.2 Adding Hotspare Disks 7-13
Contents xi
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.3 Changing Adjustable Task Rates 7-14
7.4 Changing Virtual Disk Properties 7-15
7.5 Deleting a Virtual Disk 7-15
7.6 Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk 7-16
7.7 Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller 7-16
7.8 Adding a Saved Storage Configuration 7-17
Chapter 8
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
8.1 Monitoring System Events 8-1
8.2 Monitoring Controllers 8-2
8.3 Monitoring Disk Drives 8-3
8.4 Monitoring Virtual Disks 8-5
8.5 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes 8-7
Chapter 9
Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations
9.1 Initializing a Virtual Disk 9-1
9.2 Running a Consistency Check 9-2
9.3 Rebuilding a Drive 9-2
9.4 Making a Drive Offline 9-3
Appendix A
Events and Messages
Customer Feedback
xii Contents
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
xiii
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figures
1.1 RAID 0 Array Example with Two Disk Drives 1-6
1.2 RAID 1 Array 1-7
1.3 RAID 5 Array 1-8
1.4 RAID 10 Array 1-9
3.1 Configuration Utility Main Menu 3-3
3.2 Logical Drive Configuration Screen 3-5
3.3 Logical Drive Submenu 3-9
5.1 Customer Information Screen 5-4
5.2 Setup Type Screen 5-5
6.1 Select Server Window 6-2
6.2 Server Login Window 6-3
6.3 Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-4
7.1 First Configuration Wizard Screen 7-2
7.2 Auto Configuration Screen 7-4
7.3 First Guided Configuration Screen 7-6
7.4 Second Guided Configuration Screen 7-7
7.5 First Manual Configuration Screen 7-8
7.6 Manual Configuration – Defining a Virtual Disk 7-9
7.7 Manual Configuration – Adding a Hotspare 7-11
8.1 Controller Information 8-2
8.2 Physical Drive Information 8-4
8.3 Virtual Disk Properties 8-6
8.4 Group Show Progress Window 8-7
xiv
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
xv
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Tables
4.1 Conventions 4-3
4.2 Display Adapter Information 4-5
4.3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild 4-5
4.4 Set Adapter Properties 4-6
4.5 Display Specified Adapter Properties 4-6
4.6 Display Adapter Time 4-7
4.7 Set Factory Defaults 4-7
4.8 Bootable Logical Drive ID 4-7
4.9 Set BIOS Options 4-8
4.10 Event Log Management 4-8
4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration 4-9
4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 4-10
4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration 4-11
4.14 Clear Existing Configuration 4-12
4.15 Display Existing Configuration 4-12
4.16 Save Adapter Configuration 4-12
4.17 Restore Configuration Data from File 4-13
4.18 Delete Logical Drives 4-13
4.19 Display Free Space 4-13
4.20 Display Logical Drive Information 4-14
4.21 Display Logical Drive Cache Settings 4-14
4.22 Manage Logical Drive Initialization 4-15
4.23 Manage Consistency Check 4-15
4.24 View Ongoing Background Initialization 4-16
4.25 Display Logical Drive and Physical Disk Drive Information 4-16
4.26 Display Number of Logical Drives 4-17
4.27 Display Physical Disk Drive Information 4-17
4.28 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online 4-17
4.29 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline 4-18
4.30 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good 4-18
4.31 Manage Hotspares 4-18
4.32 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive 4-19
4.33 Locate Physical Disk Drive and Flash LED 4-19
4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start
Automatic Rebuild 4-19
4.35 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal 4-20
xvi
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.36 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives 4-20
4.37 Display List of Physical Drives 4-20
4.38 Display MegaCLI Version 4-21
4.39 Display MegaCLI Help 4-21
A.1 Event Error Levels A-1
A.2 Event Messages A-2
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 1-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1
Overview
This manual explains the features of the Embedded MegaRAID®
Software. It includes instructions for using the MegaRAID BIOS
Configuration Utility, the MegaCLI command line utility, and the
MegaRAID Storage Manager™ software. You can use these three
utilities to create storage configurations on physical disk drives controlled
by Embedded MegaRAID Software. The manual also includes
instructions for installing the Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers in
Microsoft Windows and Linux systems.
This chapter contains the following sections:
• Section 1.1, “Embedded MegaRAID Software Features”
• Section 1.2, “RAID Overview”
1.1 Embedded MegaRAID Software Features
The Embedded MegaRAID Software supports up to eight SAS or SATA
ports, depending on the hardware platform. This provides a cost-effective
way to achieve higher transfer rates and reliability.
The following sections list the features of the driver, BIOS, the Ctrl-M
Configuration Utility, and the disk management features.
1.1.1 Driver Features
The Embedded MegaRAID Software driver supports the following
features:
• Support for 48-bit LBA
• Support for drive roaming
• Support for logical drives larger than 2 terabytes
1-2 Overview
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
• Support for migration path from Embedded MegaRAID Software to
MegaRAID SAS/SATA hardware (this requires support from
hardware RAID)
• Automatic resumption of rebuilding, Check Consistency, full
initialization, and background initialization
• Online mirror rebuilding
• Support for auto rebuild
• Check Consistency for RAID 1 and RAID 5
• Global hotspare support
• Soft Bad Block Management (SBBM) support
• Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10
• Support for up to 8 physical drives and eight logical drives
• Stripe size of 64 Kbytes only
• Support for Disk Coercion, with options None, 128Mbytes, 1Gbyte
• Hot Plug support (drive insertion and removal)
• Support for array cache setting (a RAID 10 volume is considered as
a single array, though it might have 2, 3, or 4 spans)
• Support for random deletion of logical drives
• Error logging and notification
• Support for Windows 2000 SP4, Windows XP, Windows 2003, &
Windows Vista
• Support for Red Hat, SuSE for 2.4 & 2.6 kernels
1.1.2 BIOS Features
The Embedded MegaRAID Software BIOS has the following features:
• Support for Interrupt 13 and Enhanced Disk Drive Specification
• Support for Int19h
• Option ROM size of 64 Kbytes
• Support for BIOS Boot Specification (BBS) (If available in system
BIOS, this allows the user to select the controller from which to boot.)
• Support for power-on self test (POST)
Embedded MegaRAID Software Features 1-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
• Support for Post Memory Management (PMM): Specification v1.01,
November 21, 1997
• Industry-standard EBDA
• POST and run-time BIOS support for device insertion and removal
• Support for Stop On Error during boot-up
The following features are supported by the BIOS and the Ctrl-M
Configuration Utility:
• Automatic resumption of rebuilding, Check Consistency, full
initialization, and background initialization (BGI)
• Global hotspare support
• Soft Bad Block Management (SBBM) support
• Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10
• Support for auto rebuild
• Support for up to eight physical drives and eight logical drives
• Stripe size of 64 Kbytes only
• Support for Disk Coercion, with options None, 128 Mbytes, and
1 Gbyte
1.1.3 Ctrl-M Configuration Utility Features
The Ctrl-M Configuration Utility supports the following features:
• Ability to select a logical drive as boot device (by default, logical
drive 0 is the boot drive)
• Support to disable/enable BIOS boot support
• Hot Auto Rebuild (during a hot plug event or when the user forces
the physical drive offline)
• Hot Plug support (drive insertion and removal)
• Support for array cache setting (RAID 10 volume is considered as a
single array, though it may have 2, 3, or 4 spans)
• Support for >2 terabyte logical drives
• Support for random deletion of logical drives
1-4 Overview
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
1.1.4 Manageability/Disk Console Features
The following features are available to manage the logical and physical
disks in the system:
• Configuration information display (in MegaRAID BIOS Configuration
Utility and MegaRAID Storage Manager software)
• Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10
• Online mirror rebuilding
• Online consistency checks
• Array management software
• Error logging and notification
• Support for hot device insertion and removal
• Automatic resume of rebuilding on restart
• Support for manual rebuild
• Ability to create up to eight logical drives per configuration
• Auto-configuration support of newly added physical drive
• Support for global hotspares
• Support for disk coercion
• Array initialization support (fast and normal)
• Logical drive availability immediately after creation
• Supported stripe size of 64 Kbytes only
1.2 RAID Overview
This section provides a brief overview of the types of RAID configurations
that Embedded MegaRAID Software supports.
The first step in creating a RAID storage configuration is to configure
physical disk drives in arrays. As defined for Embedded MegaRAID
Software, an array is a group of one to eight physical disks that is seen
by the host computer system as one large disk drive, or logical drive.
Only one RAID level can be assigned to each array.
• A RAID 0 array consists of one to eight physical drives.
RAID Overview 1-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
• A RAID 1 array consists of two physical drives.
• A RAID 5 array consists of three to eight drives.
• A RAID 10 array consists of four, six, or eight drives.
Note: Some hardware configurations do not support eight disk
drives. So depending on the hardware, the actual maximum
number of drives for RAID 0, RAID 5 and RAID 10 arrays
can be fewer than eight.
Important: LSI recommends that you not use both SAS and SATA
drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in
this way could cause decreased performance and
decreased Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF).
You can use either of these three strategies when creating RAID arrays
and logical drives:
• Maximize Fault Tolerance: You can maximize fault tolerance to
protect against loss of data by creating a RAID 1 array with mirroring.
All data is written to the primary disk in the array and is also written
(mirrored) to a second disk.
• Maximize Logical Drive Performance: You can maximize logical
drive performance by creating a RAID 0 array with striping. Data is
broken into segments and can be simultaneously written to or read
from several different stripes on several different disks in the array.
RAID 10 arrays combine both striping and mirroring to provide high
data transfer rates and data redundancy.
• Maximizing Storage Capacity: You can maximize storage capacity
when selecting a RAID level. Striping alone (RAID 0) requires less
storage space than mirrored data (RAID 1) or distributed parity
(RAID 5). RAID 5, which provides redundancy for one drive failure
without duplicating the contents of entire disk drives, requires less
space then RAID 1.
1-6 Overview
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
1.2.1 RAID 0 Description
RAID 0 provides disk striping across all disk drives in the array. RAID 0
does not provide any data redundancy, but does offer the best
performance of any RAID level. RAID 0 breaks up data into smaller
segments, and then stripes the data segments across each drive in the
array. The size of each data segment is determined by the stripe size,
which is 64 Kbytes.
Note: It is possible to create each disk as a single-drive RAID 0
array. However, spanning across single drive RAID 0 arrays
is not supported.
By breaking up a large file into smaller segments, Embedded MegaRAID
Software can use both SAS/SATA drives to read or write the file faster.
This makes RAID 0 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but
do not require fault tolerance.
Figure 1.1 shows a RAID 0 array with two disk drives.
Figure 1.1 RAID 0 Array Example with Two Disk Drives
Uses Provides high data throughput, especially for large files; any
environment that does not require fault tolerance
Strong Points Provides increased data throughput for large files; no capacity
loss penalty for parity
Weak Points Does not provide fault tolerance; all data lost if any drive fails
Drives One to eight
Segment 1
Segment 3
Segment 5
Segment 2
Segment 4
Segment 6
Segment 7 Segment 8
RAID Overview 1-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
1.2.2 RAID 1 Description
RAID 1 duplicates all data from one drive to a second drive. RAID 1
provides complete data redundancy, but at the cost of doubling the
required data storage capacity.
Figure 1.2 shows a RAID 1 array.
Figure 1.2 RAID 1 Array
1.2.3 RAID 5 Description
Note: If you do not have a MegaRAID SAS 8208ELP RAID
controller or a MegaRAID SAS 8208XLP RAID controller,
you might need to install a key, either iButton or TSOC, to
enable RAID 5. The key you need depends on your
supplier. Contact your supplier for more information.
RAID 5 includes disk striping at the block level and parity. Parity is the
data’s property of being odd or even, and parity checking is used to
detect errors in the data. In RAID 5, the parity information is distributed
to all drives. RAID 5 is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small
input/output (I/O) transactions simultaneously.
Uses Databases or any other mission critical environment that
requires fault tolerance
Strong Points Provides complete data redundancy; RAID 1 is ideal for any
application that requires fault tolerance
Weak Points Requires twice as many hard drives; performance is impaired
during drive rebuilds
Drives Two
Segment 1
Segment 2
Segment 3
Segment 1 Duplicated
Segment 2 Duplicated
Segment 3 Duplicated
Segment 4 Segment 4 Duplicated
1-8 Overview
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
RAID 5 addresses the bottleneck issue for random I/O operations.
Because each drive contains both data and parity, numerous writes can
take place concurrently.
Figure 1.3 shows a RAID 5 array with six disk drives.
Figure 1.3 RAID 5 Array
Uses Provides high data throughput. Use RAID 5 for transaction
processing applications because each drive can read and
write independently. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses
the parity drive to recreate all missing information. Use also for
office automation and online customer service that requires
fault tolerance. Use for any application that has high read
request rates but low write request rates.
Strong Points Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good
performance in most environments. Provides redundancy with
lowest loss of capacity.
Weak Points Not well suited to tasks requiring lot of small writes. Suffers
more impact if no drive cache is used (clustering). Disk drive
performance will be reduced if a drive is being rebuilt or a
background initialization is in progress. Environments with few
processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead
is not offset by the performance gains in handling
simultaneous processes.
Drives Three to eight
Segment 1
Segment 7
Segment 2
Segment 8
Segment 3
Segment 9
Segment 4
Segment 10
Segment 5
Parity (6-10)
Parity (11–15)
Parity (1-5)
Segment 6
Note: Parity is distributed across all drives in the array.
Segment 13 Segment 14 Segment 15 Segment 11 Segment 12
Segment 19
Segment 25
Segment 20
Segment 23
Segment 18
Segment 21
Segment 16
Segment 22
Segment 17
Parity (21-25)
Parity (26–30)
Parity (16-20)
Segment 24
Segment 26 Segment 27 Segment 29 Segment 28 Segment 30
RAID Overview 1-9
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
1.2.4 RAID 10 Description
RAID 10, a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0, has mirrored drives. It
breaks up data into smaller blocks, then stripes the blocks of data to
each RAID 1 RAID set. Each RAID 1 RAID set then duplicates its data
to its other drive. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size
parameter, which is 64 Kbytes. RAID 10 can sustain one drive failure in
each array while maintaining data integrity.
Figure 1.4 shows a RAID 10 array with four disk drives.
Figure 1.4 RAID 10 Array
Uses Works best for data storage that must have 100% redundancy
of RAID 1 (mirrored arrays) and that also needs the enhanced
I/O performance of RAID 0 (striped arrays); RAID 10 works
well for medium-sized databases or any environment that
requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate to
medium capacity
Strong Points Provides both high data transfer rates and complete data
redundancy
Weak Points Requires twice as many drives
Drives Four, six, or eight
RAID 1
Disk 1 Disk 4 Disk 2 Disk 3
RAID 1
RAID 0
Segment 1
Segment 3
Segment 5
Segment 1
Segment 3
Segment 5
Segment 2
Segment 4
Segment 6
Segment 2
Segment 4
Segment 6
1-10 Overview
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 2-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2
Driver Installation
This chapter explains how to install the Embedded MegaRAID Software
drivers for the Windows 2000, Windows 2003, Windows XP, Red Hat
Linux, and SuSE Linux operating systems.
Note: No driver installation is required for DOS. The ROM BIOS
contains the low-level driver that is required for MS-DOS.
The chapter contains the following sections:
• Section 2.1, “Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation”
• Section 2.2, “Linux Driver Installation”
2.1 Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation
Perform the following steps to install the Embedded MegaRAID Software
driver for Windows 2000, Windows 2003, or Windows XP.
1. Boot the system with the Windows Boot Installation CD or diskette.
The following message appears:
Setup is inspecting your computers hardware
configuration.
2. When the next prompt appears, press F6 to install the RAID/SCSI
adapter driver.
3. When installation prompts for a key after copying some files, press
S to add the SATA RAID driver.
You are prompted for the floppy diskette that contains the LSI
Embedded MegaRAID Software driver.
4. Insert the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver diskette and press
Enter.
2-2 Driver Installation
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
5. Scroll down the list and select the appropriate driver for the Windows
version installed on your system, then click OK.
6. Continue with the normal installation procedure.
2.1.1 Updating the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver
Perform the following steps to update the Embedded MegaRAID
Software driver for Windows 2000/2003/XP or to install this driver on an
existing system booted from a standard IDE drive.
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
2. Double-click System, click the Hardware tab, and then click Device
Manager.
Device Manager starts.
3. In Device Manager, double-click SCSI and RAID Controllers, rightclick
the device for which you are installing the driver, and then click
Properties.
4. On the Driver tab, click Update Driver to open the Update Device
Driver wizard, and then follow the wizard instructions to update the
driver.
2.1.2 Confirming the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation
Perform the following steps to confirm that the Embedded MegaRAID
Software driver for Windows 2000/2003/XP is installed properly.
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
2. Double-click System, click the Hardware tab, and then click Device
Manager.
Device Manager starts.
3. In Device Manager, double-click SCSI and RAID Controllers, rightclick
the device for which you are installing the driver, and then click
Properties.
4. On the Driver tab, click Driver Details and verify that the driver
information is correct.
Linux Driver Installation 2-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
2.2 Linux Driver Installation
This section explains how to make fresh installations of the Embedded
MegaRAID Software driver for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3.0 and 4.0 and
SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9.
2.2.1 Obtaining the Driver Image File
The Linux driver is offered in the form of a driver update disk. The
required file is dud-[driver version].img, which is the driver
update disk for the Embedded MegaRAID Software stack.
You can obtain the latest driver files from the Download Center on the
LSI web site at: http://www.lsilogic.com.
2.2.2 Preparing the Installation Disk(s) for Linux
This section describes how to prepare the Linux installation disk(s) from
the driver image files, using either the Windows or Linux operating
systems.
2.2.2.1 Preparing Installation Disks with the Windows Operating System
Under Windows, you can use the rawrite floppy image writer utility to
create disk images from image files. The image writer can be
downloaded from the Internet. Perform the following steps to build
installation diskettes.
1. Copy the driver update disk image dud-[driver version].img
and the file rawrite.exe to a directory.
2. Confirm that the files are in the selected directory.
3. If necessary, use this command to change the filename of the driver
update disk to a name with fewer than eight characters:
copy dud-[driver version].img dud.img.
4. Open the DOS Command Prompt and navigate to the directory
where rawrite.exe is located.
5. Type the following command to create the installation diskette:
rawrite
2-4 Driver Installation
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Then press Enter.
You are prompted to enter the name of the boot image file.
6. Type the following:
dud.img
Press Enter.
You are prompted for the target drive diskette.
7. Insert a floppy diskette into the floppy drive and type:
A:
Then press Enter.
8. Press Enter again to start copying the file to the diskette.
9. After the command prompt returns and the floppy disk drive LED
goes out, remove the diskette.
10. Label the diskette with the image name.
2.2.2.2 Preparing Installation Disks with the Linux Operating System
Under Red Hat Linux and SuSE Linux, you can use a driver diskette
utility to create disk images from image files. Perform the following steps
to create the driver update disk:
1. Copy the driver update disk image dud-[driver version].img
to a Linux system.
2. Insert a blank floppy diskette into the floppy drive.
3. Confirm that the files are in the selected directory.
4. Create the driver update diskette using the following command:
dd if=dud-[driver version].img of=/dev/fd0
5. After the command prompt returns and the floppy disk drive LED
goes out, remove the diskette.
6. Label the diskette with the image name.
Linux Driver Installation 2-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
2.2.3 Installing the Red Hat Linux Driver on a New System
This section describes the fresh installation of the Red Hat Enterprise
Linux 3.0 or 4.0 device driver on systems with the Embedded MegaRAID
Software stack. After you prepare the installation disks with the driver
image, perform the following steps to install the driver on a new system.
1. Boot to CD-ROM (Disk 1).
The Red Hat introductory screen appears.
2. Type the following at the boot prompt:
linux dd
3. Press Enter.
The prompt asks whether you have a driver disk.
4. Use the arrow key to select Yes, then press Enter.
5. Select fd0 to indicate you have a floppy diskette with the driver on it.
6. Insert the floppy diskette in the A:/ drive and press Enter.
The installer locates and loads the driver for your device. The
following message appears:
Loading megasr driver...
The prompt at the next screen asks whether you have another driver.
7. Follow the Red Hat Linux installation procedure to complete the
installation.
8. Reboot the system.
2.2.4 Updating the Red Hat Linux Driver (Generic)
Perform the following steps to update the Red Hat Linux driver or to
install the Red Hat Linux driver in an existing system booted from a
standard SAS/SATA drive or systems with the Embedded Software RAID
stack.
1. Create a RAID array on the controller using the Embedded SATA
RAID Setup Utility.
2. Boot the system with the Red Hat Linux Installation CD from the
primary controller or disk.
The Red Hat introductory screen appears.
2-6 Driver Installation
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
3. Mount the driver update diskette (DUD) using the following
command:
#mount /dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy
4. Unzip the modules.cgz file that is on the DUD to get driver images
for different Red Hat operating systems:
#mkdir -p /home/megasr
#cd /home/megasr
#cp /mnt/floppy/modules.cgz .
#gunizip -S .cgz modules.cgz
This generates a new file named modules:
#cpio -ivd < modules
This provides the following driver images:
{,smp,
BOOT }/megasr.o
5. Update the Megasr driver module for the required kernels using the
following commands:
#cd /home/megasr
If the /lib/modules//update/ directory is
present, use the following command:
# cp /megasr.[o/ko]
/lib/modules//update/megasr.[o/ko]
If the /lib/modules//update/ directory is
not present, use the following command:
# cp /megasr.[o/ko]
/lib/modules/
/kernel/drivers/scsi/megasr.[o/ko]
6. Create a Megasr driver entry in the configuration file. The Red Hat
configuration file is /etc/modules.conf.
If the Megasr entry is not present in /etc/modules.conf, add the
following line:
alias scsi_hostadapter megasr
If the ahci SCSI driver entry (located on the following paragraph) is
present in /etc/modules.conf, remove it. It must be removed
because otherwise the ahci driver would take control of the RAID
Linux Driver Installation 2-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
controller without checking the subsystem device or Vendor ID. The
ahci SCSI driver entry is the following:
alias scsi_hostadapter ahci
7. Create a new initrd image for the required kernel.
Red Hat installation uses the mk_initrd command to create an initrd
image. The following command creates an initrd image for the
smp kernel in the boot directory. See the
mk_initrd man page for more information. The command is:
#mkinitrd /boot/initrdsmp.img.new
smp
8. Modify the lilo.conf/grub.conf file by adding newly created
initrd(s) as new entries in the /etc/lilo.conf file.
The suggested method is to copy an existing lilo entry in the file and
paste it as a new one. Then modify its kernel image name, initrd
image name, and label name.
Sample Lilo Entry
image=/boot/vmlinux-smp label=linuxnew
initrd=/boot/initrd-smp.img.new
read-only appended=root=LABEL=/ ”
Sample Grub Entry
title Red Hat Linux ( with Megasr
driver)
root (hd0,0)
kernel /vmlinuz- ro root=LABEL=/
initrd /initrd-.img.new
9. Update the boot loader. If the boot loader is Lilo, run the lilo
command to update the boot loader. The lilo command is:
#lilo
10. Reboot the system to the new boot loader entry.
2-8 Driver Installation
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
2.2.5 Installing the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Driver
This section describes the fresh installation of the SuSE Linux Enterprise
Server 9 driver on a system with the Embedded MegaRAID Software
stack. Prepare installation disks with the driver image, then perform the
following steps to install the driver.
1. Create a RAID array using the MegaRAID BIOS Configuration utility.
(See Chapter 3, “MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility.”)
2. Boot the system using the SLES Disk.
3. When the first screen appears, press F6 and select Installation on
the menu.
You are prompted for the diskette.
4. Insert the driver update diskette in the A:/ drive and press Enter.
5. Press OK. The following message appears:
LSI Soft RAID Driver Updates added.
6. At the menu, select the driver update medium and press the Back
button.
7. Continue the installation process and complete it.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 3-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3
MegaRAID BIOS
Configuration Utility
The MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility (CU) is used to configure disk
arrays and logical drives and to do other configuration tasks in a pre-boot
environment. This chapter has the following sections:
• Section 3.1, “Performing a Quick Configuration”
• Section 3.2, “Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives”
• Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead
Policies”
• Section 3.4, “Rebuilding a Drive”
• Section 3.5, “Hot Plug Support”
• Section 3.6, “Checking Data Consistency”
• Section 3.7, “Viewing and Changing Device Properties”
• Section 3.8, “Forcing Drives Online or Offline”
• Section 3.9, “Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive”
• Section 3.10, “Deleting a Logical Drive”
• Section 3.11, “Clearing a Storage Configuration”
3-2 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
3.1 Performing a Quick Configuration
This section provides high level instructions for quickly configuring arrays
and logical drives with the MegaRAID BIOS CU. These instructions are
intended for users that are familiar with configuration utilities and tools.
Refer to Section 3.2, “Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives,” for detailed
configuration instructions. To ensure the best performance, select the
optimal RAID level for the logical drive you create. (For an explanation
of RAID levels, see Chapter 1, “Overview.”)
Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA
drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in
this way could cause decreased performance, an increased
error count, and decreased MTBF.
Perform the following steps to configure arrays and logical drives using
the MegaRAID BIOS CU:
1. Boot the system.
2. Start the MegaRAID BIOS CU by pressing Ctrl+M.
3. Select Configure from the Management Menu.
4. Select a configuration method from the Configuration menu (Easy
Configuration, New Configuration, or View/Add Configuration).
5. Create arrays using the available physical drives.
6. Define the logical drive(s) using the space in the arrays.
7. Initialize the new logical drive(s).
3.2 Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives
This section provides detailed instructions for configuring arrays and
logical drives with the MegaRAID BIOS CU. LSI recommends that you
use drives with the same capacity when you create a storage
configuration. If you use drives with different capacities in one array, the
CU limits each drive to the capacity of the smallest drive.
The number of physical drives in a specific array determines the possible
RAID levels that you can implement with the array.
Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
• RAID 0 requires from one to eight physical drives.
• RAID 1 requires two physical drives.
• RAID 5 required three to eight physical drives.
• RAID 10 requires four, six, or eight physical drives.
3.2.1 Starting the MegaRAID BIOS CU
Follow these steps to start the MegaRAID BIOS CU:
1. During boot-up, wait for the following message to appear on the
screen:
Press Ctrl-M to run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
2. When you see this message, hold down the Ctrl key while pressing
the M key.
The main menu for the Configuration Utility appears, as shown in
Figure 3.1.
Figure 3.1 Configuration Utility Main Menu
Note: When you start the MegaRAID BIOS CU by pressing Ctrl-M
the Configuration Manager Module of the BIOS allocates
three segments of memory using either PMM or
conventional memory: these are the Destination Segment,
Scratch Segment, and Read Write Buffer Segment. If the
three segments are not available the BIOS hooks INT19h
and loads the CU at the fixed segments 5000:0
3-4 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
(Destination Segment), 6000:0 (Scratch Segment) and
7000:0 (Read Write Buffer Segment) after POST.
3.2.2 Using Easy Configuration
When you select the Easy Configuration option, the CU creates one or
more arrays from the available physical drives and configures each array
as a single logical drive. If logical drives have already been configured,
the CU does not change their configuration. Follow these steps to create
a logical drive using Easy Configuration:
1. Select Configuration→ Easy Configuration from the Management
Menu. A list of available (READY) physical drives appears.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the physical drives to include in the
array.
3. Press the spacebar to add each selected physical drive to the new
array.
When you select a physical drive, its status changes from READY to
ONLIN A[array number]-[drive number]. For example,
ONLIN A00-01 means array 0, disk drive 1.
4. To create a global hotspare drive, highlight a READY disk drive and
press F4. Then select Yes from the pop-up menu.
5. To define multiple arrays, select all the drives you want for the first
array, then press Enter to start selecting drives for the second array,
and so on.
6. When you have selected drives for all desired arrays, press F10.
7. Press the spacebar to select an array.
The Logical Drive Configuration screen appears, as shown in
Figure 3.2. This screen shows the logical drive number, RAID level,
logical drive size, number of stripes in the physical array, stripe size,
and state of the logical drive.
Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.2 Logical Drive Configuration Screen
8. Highlight RAID and press Enter.
The available RAID levels for the current logical drive are displayed.
9. Select a RAID level for the logical drive and press Enter.
10. (Optional) Change the drive’s default Write Cache and Read Ahead
policies (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and
Read Ahead Policies”).
11. When you have finished defining the current logical drive, select
Accept and press Enter.
12. Save the configuration when prompted, and press any key to return
to the Management Menu.
13. Initialize the new logical drive(s). (See Section 3.2.5, “Initializing
Logical Drives,” for detailed instructions.)
3.2.3 Using New Configuration and View/Add Configuration
When you select the New Configuration menu option, the CU deletes the
existing arrays and logical drives and replaces them with the new
configuration that you specify. The View/Add Configuration menu option
lets you view the existing configuration or add to the existing
configuration, if possible.
Caution: If you want to keep the existing data on the storage
configuration, use View/Add Configuration instead of New
Configuration.
3-6 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Follow these steps to configure a disk array using the New Configuration
or View/Add Configuration option:
1. Select Configuration→ New Configuration or Configuration→
View/Add Configuration from the Management Menu. If you
selected New Configuration, select Yes to proceed. (This confirms
that you are erasing the existing storage configuration.)
The CU displays an array selection window.
Note: The existing storage configuration will be erased only if you
save the newly created configuration at the end of the
process. It you do not save the new configuration, the CU
will restore the previously existing configuration.
2. Use the arrow keys to select physical drives for the new array.
3. Press the spacebar to add each selected physical drive to the new
array.
When you select a drive, its status changes from READY to ONLIN
A[array number]-[drive number]. For example, ONLIN
A00-01 means array 0, disk drive 1.
4. To create a global hotspare drive, highlight a READY disk drive and
press F4. Then select Yes from the pop-up menu.
Make sure the capacity of the hotspare drive is equal to or larger
than the capacity of the disks in the array and that it is the same type
of drive (SAS or SATA).
Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is
SAS and the failed drive is SATA, or vice versa. After the
rebuild is completed, however, LSI recommends that you
replace the new array member with a drive of the same
type.
5. To define multiple arrays, select all the drives you want for the first
array, then press Enter to start selecting drives for the second array,
and so on.
6. When you have selected drives for all desired arrays, press F10.
7. Press the spacebar to select an array, if needed.
8. Highlight RAID and press Enter.
Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
A list of the available RAID levels for the current logical drive
appears.
9. Select a RAID level for the logical drive and press Enter.
10. (Optional) Set the logical drive size by highlighting Size and pressing
Enter.
The minimum valid logical drive size is 64 Mbytes. An error message
will appear if you try to create a logical drive that is smaller than
64 Mbytes. By default, all the available space in the array is assigned
to the current logical drive. For RAID 10 arrays, only one logical drive
can be defined for the entire array.
11. (Optional) Change the disks’s default Write Cache and Read Ahead
policies (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and
Read Ahead Policies”).
12. When you have finished defining the current logical drive, select
Accept and press Enter.
13. Configure additional logical drives on the same array, if desired. If
you have created more than one array, configure a logical drive on
the second array.
14. Save the configuration when prompted, and press any key to return
to the Management Menu.
15. Initialize the new logical drive(s). (See Section 3.2.5, “Initializing
Logical Drives,” for detailed instructions.)
3.2.4 Creating a Global Hotspare Drive
The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to create global hotspare drives
(dedicated hotspare drives are not supported). A hotspare drive can
automatically replace a failed drive in a redundant RAID 1, RAID 5, or
RAID 10 array, to protect against data loss.
Important: When you select disk drive for a global hotspare, be sure
it is the same type of drive (either SAS or SATA) as the
drives in the arrays that it will protect. LSI recommends that
you do not combine SAS and SATA drives in the same
array.
3-8 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
You can create a hotspare when you are configuring a new storage
configuration, as described in the previous sections. To add a hotspare
drive to an existing redundant storage configuration, follow these steps:
1. Select Objects from the Management Menu.
2. Select Physical Drive. A list of physical drives appears.
3. Select an unconfigured drive or Ready drive from the list, and press
Enter.
4. When the Physical Drive Property menu appears, select Make Hot
Spare and press Enter.
5. Select Yes from the pop-up menu to create the hotspare drive.
Note: To remove a hotspare drive, perform steps 1 and 2 above,
select the HOTSP disk, press Enter, select Force Offline,
and press Enter. The status of the drive changes to
READY, and it can then be used in another new array.
3.2.5 Initializing Logical Drives
Caution: When you initialize a logical drive all existing data on the
logical drive is erased.
This section explains the two methods of initializing a logical drive with
the MegaRAID BIOS CU. If the Fast Init property is enabled, fast
initialization will be used. In fast initialization, the MegaRAID BIOS CU
quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the new
logical drive. If the Fast Init property is not enabled, the MegaRAID BIOS
CU performs a complete initialization on the logical drive. This may take
a long time if the physical disk drives are large.
(First Initialization Method) Follow these steps to initialize a logical
drive using the Initialize menu.
1. On the Management Menu, select Initialize.
2. Use the spacebar to highlight the logical drive to initialize.
The logical drive name is highlighted in yellow. To deselect it,
highlight the logical drive and press the spacebar again.
3. Press F10.
4. Select Yes at the prompt and press Enter to begin the initialization.
Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-9
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
A graph shows the progress of the initialization until it is complete.
5. After the initialization is complete, press Esc to return to previous
menus.
If you press Esc while initialization is in progress, the following
options appear:
– Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter:
Management Menu→ Objects→ Adapter→ AutoResume.)
The initialization is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage
of the initialization already completed. If AutoResume is enabled,
and if Fast Init is not enabled, the initialization resumes where it
left off when you restart it, instead of starting over from 0 percent.
– Continue: The initialization continues normally.
– Abort: The initialization is completely aborted. If you restart
initialization, it begins at 0 percent.
(Second Initialization Method) Follow these steps to initialize a logical
drive using the Objects menu.
1. From the Management Menu, select Objects→ Logical Drive, as
shown in Figure 3.3.
A list of configured logical drives appears.
Figure 3.3 Logical Drive Submenu
2. Select a logical drive, if there is more than one configured, and press
Enter.
3. Select Initialize from the submenu and press Enter.
3-10 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4. Select Yes at the prompt and press Enter.
The CU displays a bar graph showing the initialization progress.
5. When initialization completes, press Esc to return to the previous
menu.
If you press Esc while initialization is in progress, the Stop, Continue,
and Abort options are available, as explained earlier in this section.
3.3 Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead
Policies
You can use the MegaRAID BIOS CU to set the hard disk drive Write
Cache and Read Ahead settings. Any read or write cache policy changes
apply to all logical drives on an array. In other words, if two logical drives
are defined on a single array and you change the Read Ahead setting
on one logical drive, the change will also apply to the other logical drive
on the array.
The Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead policies can be set to On or Off.
• When the disk Write Cache is On, a write transaction is considered
to be complete when all the data has been written to the disk cache.
When disk Write Cache is Off, the write transaction is complete only
when the data has been written to the disk.
• When disk Read Ahead is On, extra data is read sequentially ahead
of the data that is actually requested and is stored in a cache. If the
additional read-ahead data is then requested, it can be read faster
from the cache than from the disk directly.
Note: When the disk Write Cache is On, there is a danger that
data could be lost if the power fails before the cached data
is written to disk.
Follow these steps to view or change the logical drive Write Cache or
Read Ahead settings:
1. From the Management Menu, select Objects→ Logical Drive→
Logical Drive n→ View/Update Parameters.
2. Use the arrow key to move the cursor to Disk WC or Read Ahead
and press Enter.
Rebuilding a Drive 3-11
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
3. Use the arrow key to select Off or On for Disk WC (DWC) or Read
Ahead.
4. When you see the prompt Change DWC or Change Read Ahead, use
the arrow key to select Off or On, then press Enter to change the
cache setting.
The settings are changed for all logical drives defined on the array.
3.4 Rebuilding a Drive
The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to rebuild a drive of a redundant
array if the array has a failed drive. If the failed drive is still good (that
is, if the drive is physically present and its size is greater than or equal
to the defined size of the array) it will be rebuilt. If the drive is small, an
error message will appear and the MegaRAID BIOS CU will not allow the
drive to be rebuilt. A rebuild cannot be started on a failed drive if its size
is even 1 byte smaller than the defined size of the array.
Follow these steps to rebuild a drive:
1. Select Rebuild from the Management Menu.
2. When the list of drives appears, highlight the FAIL drive that you
want to rebuild and press the Spacebar to select it.
3. After selecting the physical drive, press F10 and select Yes at the
confirmation prompt.
The rebuild process begins, and a graph shows the progress of the
rebuild until it is complete. Although the CU changes the disk drive
state to Rebuild at this point, the change does not appear on the
screen while the rebuild is in progress. If the CU detects a media
error on the source drive during rebuild, it initiates a sector read for
that block. If the sector read fails, the CU adds entries to the Soft
Bad Block Management (SBBM) table, writes this table to the target
drive, and displays an error message. Additional error messages are
displayed if the SBBM table is 80% full or 100% full. If the SBBM
table is completely full, the rebuild operation is aborted, and the drive
is marked as FAIL.
3-12 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4. When rebuild is complete, the CU displays the message:
Rebuilding of Drive X Completed Successfully. Press Esc.
(X = the ID of the rebuilt drive.)
5. Press Esc to display the Management Menu.
The state of the rebuilt disk drive changes from FAIL to ONLIN.
If you press Esc while the rebuild is running, the following options
display:
• Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter:
Management Menu -> Objects -> Adapter -> AutoResume.)
The rebuild is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage of the
rebuild already completed. If AutoResume is enabled, the rebuild
resumes where it left off when you restart it, instead of starting over
from 0 percent.
• Continue: The rebuild continues normally.
• Abort: The rebuild is completely aborted and the disk drive remains
in the FAIL state. If you restart the rebuild, it begins at 0 percent.
3.5 Hot Plug Support
The MegaRAID BIOS CU supports hot plugging of disk drives. The
following hot plug message will appear when you insert or remove a disk
drive: A Drive Has Been Inserted/Removed. Configuration
Updated. Press ESC... After you press Esc the inserted or removed
drive will be reflected in the list of drives that appears in the configuration
utility.
Obviously, you should not insert or remove a drive while you are defining
a new logical drive or while an initialization or other process is running.
The following bullets describe how the CU handles hot plugging when
various actions occur:
• If the Physical Drive window or one of the Configuration windows is
open when you insert or remove a drive, the window will close when
the hot plug message appears.
Checking Data Consistency 3-13
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
• CU menus such as Select Boot Drive, Select Adapter, and Logical
Drive menus will completely or partially close when a drive is inserted
or removed.
• If a Rebuild is in progress when you insert or remove a drive, the CU
will first display the message Rebuilding Of Drive Not Complete!
Press Esc.. followed by the hot plug message. If the Rebuild was
not affected by this hot plug event, it will continue to rebuild from
where it left off, provided that Auto Resume is enabled; otherwise,
Rebuild will start over from the beginning. If the rebuilding array was
affected by the hot plug event, the Rebuild will abort and the array
status will change based on the hot plug operation.
• If an Initialization is in progress when you insert or remove a drive,
the CU will display the message Initialization of Array Not
Complete! Press ESC.. followed by the hot plug message.
• If a consistency check is in progress when you insert or remove a
drive, the CU will display the message CC Not Completed! Press
ESC.. followed by the hot plug message.
3.6 Checking Data Consistency
The Check Consistency feature can be used on RAID 1, RAID 5, or
RAID 10 logical drives to verify the consistency of the data on the
physical drives. The MegaRAID BIOS CU automatically corrects any
differences found in the data when a consistency check is run.
Follow these steps to check consistency:
1. On the Management Menu select Check Consistency and press
Enter.
A list of configured logical drives is displayed.
2. Highlight a logical drive with the arrow keys.
3. Press the spacebar to select the logical drive to check for
consistency.
Note: If you select a RAID 0 logical drive, a message appears
stating that a Check Consistency cannot be performed. To
continue, deselect the logical drive, highlight a redundant
logical drive, and press the spacebar again.
3-14 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4. Press F10.
5. At the prompt, select Yes to start the Check Consistency process
and press Enter. A graph shows the progress of the Check
Consistency operation until it is complete.
If the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds any data inconsistencies while
comparing the source and target drives, it fixes the inconsistency by
writing the source data to the target drive. When this happens, the
following message appears at the bottom of the screen:
The Data on the Drives is inconsistent. Repair done!
If the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds a media error on the source drive,
it pops up a dialog box with this message:
Error in Reading Sectors! Proceed Anyway (Y/N)?
If you press Y, the program skips the bad block and continues. If you
press N, the program aborts the consistency check. The same
message appears if the program finds a hard media error on the
target drive.
If you press Esc while a Check Consistency is running, the following
options are displayed:
• Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter:
Management Menu→ Objects→ Adapter→ AutoResume.) The
Check Consistency is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage of
the task already completed. If AutoResume is enabled, the Check
Consistency resumes where it left off when you restart it, instead of
starting over from 0 percent.
• Continue: The Check Consistency continues normally.
• Abort: The Check Consistency is completely aborted. If you restart
it, it begins at 0 percent.
3.7 Viewing and Changing Device Properties
The MegaRAID BIOS CU allows you to view properties for adapters,
logical drives, and physical drives. You can also change some properties
for adapters and logical drives.
Viewing and Changing Device Properties 3-15
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
3.7.1 Viewing and Changing Adapter Properties
To view or change adapter properties, follow these steps:
1. On the Management Menu, select Objects→ Adapter.
2. Select an adapter from the list. The following list of adapter
properties appears:
3. If you want to change the value of a property, highlight it and press
Enter.
4. Select or type a different value for the property and press Enter.
5. When you are finished, press Esc until you return to the
Management Menu.
Property Options Default
Rebuild Rate 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30
Chk Const Rate 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30
FGI Rate (Foreground
initialization rate)
0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30
BGI Rate (Background
initialization rate)
0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30
Disk WC (Disk Write
Cache)
Off, On Off (Write
Through
enabled)
Read Ahead On, Off On
BIOS State Enable, Disable Enable
Stop On Error No, Yes No
Fast Init Enable, Disable Enable
Auto Rebuild On, Off On
Auto Resume Enable, Disable
When Enabled, you can stop a
consistency check, rebuild, or
initialization and resume it later where it
left off, instead of aborting it and starting
over.
Enable
Disk Coercion1
1. The Disk Coercion property can be accessed only when no configuration is
present for the adapter. Otherwise, an error message will appear.
None, 128MB, 1GB 1GB
3-16 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
3.7.2 Viewing and Changing Logical Drive Properties
To view or change logical drive properties, follow these steps:
1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Logical Drive.
2. Select View/Update Parameters.
The only logical drive properties you can change are Disk WC (Disk
Write Cache) and Read Ahead (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard
Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies”). The other properties
are view-only.
3.7.3 Viewing Physical Drive Properties
To view physical drive properties, follow these steps:
1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Physical Drive.
2. Highlight a physical drive on the list that appears and press Enter.
3. Select Drive Properties from the menu.
The drive properties are Device Type (Disk), Capacity, Product ID,
and Revision No. These properties are view-only.
3.8 Forcing Drives Online or Offline
The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to force drives online or offline.
You may want to force a drive of a redundant array offline so that a
hotspare drive will automatically replace it. An auto rebuild will begin
immediately if the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds a valid hotspare drive to
replace the offline drive.
You may need to force a drive online if it has gone offline due to a power
failure. The MegaRAID BIOS CU will not allow a drive to be forced online
if its size is smaller than the defined size of the array.
To force a drive online or offline, follow these steps:
1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Physical Drive.
2. Highlight a physical drive that is a member of an array and press
Enter.
Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive 3-17
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
3. Select Force Offline or Force Online from the menu.
If the drive was online, its status changes to FAIL. If it was offline, its
status changes to ONLIN.
3.9 Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive
The default boot logical drive is LD 0. If you change the boot drive to
another logical drive, the BIOS and the CU will preserve this change.
However, if you delete the new boot logical drive, you must be sure to
configure another logical drive for booting. The MegaRAID BIOS CU will
not automatically select a different boot logical drive.
Follow these steps to configure a bootable logical drive:
1. On the Management Menu, select Configure -> Select Boot Drive.
2. Select a logical drive from the list to be the designated boot drive.
3.10 Deleting a Logical Drive
Caution: Before you delete a logical drive, be sure to back up all the
data you want to keep.
The MegaRAID BIOS CU allows you to delete any single logical drive
defined in the configuration (sometimes referred to as random deletion).
To delete a specified logical drive, follow these steps:
1. Select Objects -> Logical Drive.
2. Highlight the logical drive that you want to delete and press Delete.
3. Select Yes when the confirmation message appears.
3.11 Clearing a Storage Configuration
Caution: Before you clear a storage configuration, be sure to back
up all the data you want to keep.
3-18 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
To clear a storage configuration, follow these steps:
1. On the Management Menu, select Configure →Clear
Configuration.
2. When the message appears, select Yes to confirm.
All logical drives are deleted from the configuration.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 4-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
MegaCLI Command
Tool
The MegaCLI Command Tool (CT) is a command line interface
application that you can use to configure and maintain storage
configurations created with Embedded MegaRAID Software.
Note: The MegaCLI CT utility runs in the Microsoft® Windows®
and Linux® environments. For DOS, the utility is called
MegaDCLI CT and it supports a subset of the full command
set.
This chapter has the following sections:
• Section 4.1, “MegaCLI CT Overview”
• Section 4.2, “Exception Handling”
• Section 4.3, “Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions”
• Section 4.4, “Adapter Commands”
• Section 4.5, “BIOS Commands”
• Section 4.6, “Event Log Commands”
• Section 4.7, “Configuration Commands”
• Section 4.8, “Logical Drive Commands”
• Section 4.9, “Physical Drive Commands”
• Section 4.10, “Miscellaneous Commands”
4-2 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.1 MegaCLI CT Overview
MegaCLI CT and MegaDCLI CT are command line interface applications
you can use to configure and manage storage configurations under
Embedded MegaRAID Software. You can use these command tools to
perform the following tasks:
• Configure logical drives and create configurations on the adapter
• Display the configuration on the adapter
• Display and change logical drive’s properties on the adapter
• Display and change physical drive’s properties on the adapter
• Display and change adapter properties
• Load a configuration to the adapter from a file
• Save an adapter configuration to a file
• Start or stop rebuild, consistency check, and initialization
• Suspend and display an ongoing background initialization
• Display relevant user messages on the console or write them to the
log file
• Work in silent mode, if selected (no messages are displayed on the
console)
• Display adapter inventory data in a single command
• Customize output strings
• Exit with predefined success or failure exit codes
• Set some predefined environment variables, such as number of
adapters and number of logical drives after the execution of CT
• Display help on how to use the command line options of CT
4.2 Exception Handling
MegaCLI CT exits with exit code 0 for all successful operations. In case
of failure, it exits with exit code 1 to 255, depending on the failure
conditions. For example, assume that a rebuild is started on three
physical drives. MegaCLI CT successfully starts rebuilding the first drive
Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions 4-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
but fails to start rebuilding the second drive. If this happens, MegaCLI
CT will not attempt to start rebuilding the third drive; instead, it will exit
with an error exit code. In this case, the error code will be
EXIT_ERR_START_RBLD. So even if the command was partially
successful, an error code is still generated.
Some operations such as GetNumberOfAdapters or
GetNumberofLogicaldrives return with the actual number of adapters
or logical drives. These return values are special cases and do not reflect
any error conditions based on the return code, which in these cases
contains meaningful values.
4.3 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions
Some commands let you specify multiple values. You can enter
commands for a single adapter (-aN), multiple selected adapters
(-a0,1,2) or all adapters (-aALL). This is denoted as -aN|
-a0,1,2|-aALL in the command line syntax used in this chapter.
Table 4.1 lists all of the conventions used in the command line options.
Table 4.1 Conventions
Convention Description
CmdTool Specifies the command line interface used. Type either MegaCLI
CT under Microsoft Windows and Linux, or MegaDCLI CT under
DOS.
| Specifies “or,” meaning you can choose between options.
-aN N specifies the adapter number for the command.
-a0,1,2 Specifies the command is for adapters 0, 1, and 2. You can
select two or more adapters in this manner.
-aALL Specifies the command is for all adapters.
-Lx x specifies the logical drive number for the command.
-L0,1,2 Specifies the command is for logical drives 0, 1, and 2. You can
select two or more logical drives in this manner.
-Lall Specifies the command is for all logical drives.
{ } Indicates that the parameter is optional.
4-4 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
You can specify the -Silent command line option for all possible
functions of the MegaCLI CT. If you enter this option at the command
line, no messages are displayed on the screen.
Some MegaCLI CT commands that are supported in hardware RAID
configurations are not supported under Embedded MegaRAID Software.
These include the following:
• Adapter Cache Flush (-AdpCacheFlush)
• Set Adapter Properties: Only the RebuildRate, BgiRate, CCRate,
and CoercionMode properties are supported
• Get Adapter Properties: Only the RebuildRate, BgiRate, CCRate,
and CoercionMode properties are supported
• Cluster Enable is not supported
• Set Adapter Time (-AdpSetTime)
• Patrol Read (-AdpPR, -AdpPRSetDelay)
• Battery Backup commands (-AdpBbuCmd)
• Foreign configuration (-CfgForeign)
• Logical Drive Reconstruction (-LDRecon)
• Set Logical Drive Properties (-LDSetProp)
• Display Enclosure Information (-EncInfo)
• Mark Configured Physical Disk Drive as Missing (-PDMarkMissing)
• Display List of Missing Physical Disk Drives (-PDGetMissing)
• Flashing the firmware (-AdpFWFlash, -AdpM0Flash)
• Diagnostics (-AdpDiag, -AdpBatTest, -AdpNVRAM)
The following sections describe the MegaCLI CT commands.
Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software utility does not
support Write Policy, Read Policy, or I/O Policy. Software
RAID only support enabling and disabling the hard disk
drive’s write cache and read-ahead functions.
Note: MegaCLI CT for Embedded MegaRAID Software does not
support the concept of disk enclosures, except for a default
Enclosure 0 (E0). Some of the commands support an
Adapter Commands 4-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
E0:Sn syntax that enables you to specify a disk drive in a
particular “slot” in this default enclosure.
4.4 Adapter Commands
You can use the commands in this section to set or display properties
related to the adapter(s).
Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers function as
virtual “adapters” or “controllers.” Because the drivers are
not actual hardware components, some of the adapter
parameters do not apply to them.
4.4.1 Display Adapter Information
Use the command in Table 4.2 to display information on adapter
parameters such as the number of logical drives and initiator ID.
4.4.2 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild
Use the command in Table 4.3 to turn automatic rebuild on or off for the
selected adapter(s). If you have configured hotspares and enabled
automatic rebuild, the RAID adapter automatically tries to use them to
rebuild failed disks. Automatic rebuild also controls whether a rebuild will
start when a drive that was part of the array is reinserted.
Table 4.2 Display Adapter Information
Syntax CmdTool –AdpAllInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays parameters on the selected adapter(s). Displayed information includes
initiator ID, current status of auto rebuild, alarm, number of logical drives, rebuild
rate, bus number/device number, present RAM, SAS settings, serial number of the
board, and SAS address.
MegaCLI CT does not support display of the firmware version or BIOS version, as
the driver does not support it.
Table 4.3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild
Syntax CmdTool –AdpAutoRbld -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Enables or disables automatic rebuild on the selected adapter(s).
The -Dsply option shows the status of the automatic rebuild state.
4-6 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.4.3 Set Adapter Properties
This command sets the properties on the selected adapter(s). For
example, for {RebuildRate -val}, you can enter a value between 0
percent and 100 percent. (The rebuild rate is the percentage of the
compute cycles dedicated to rebuilding failed drives.) At 0 percent, the
rebuild is done only if the system is not doing anything else. At 100
percent, the rebuild has a higher priority than any other system activity.
The default rebuild rate of 30 percent is recommended.
Use the command in Table 4.4 to display or set adapter properties.
4.4.4 Display Specified Adapter Properties
Use the command in Table 4.5 to display specified properties on the
selected adapter(s).
Table 4.4 Set Adapter Properties
Syntax CmdTool –AdpSetProp {RebuildRate -val} | {BgiRate –val}|{CCRate –val}|
{CoercionMode –val} -aN|-a0,1,2| -aALL
Description Sets the properties on the selected adapter(s). The possible settings are:
• RebuildRate: Rebuild rate. Values: 0 to 100.
• BgiRate: Background initilization rate. Values: 0 to 100.
• CCRate: Consistency check rate. Values: 0 to 100.
• CoercionMode: Drive capacity Coercion mode. Values: 0 = None; 1 = 128 Mbytes;
2 = 1 Gbyte. You can set the Coercion mode only when there is no existing
configuration on the adapter.
Table 4.5 Display Specified Adapter Properties
Syntax CmdTool –AdpGetProp RebuildRate | BgiRate | CCRate | CoercionMode
-aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays the properties of the selected adapter(s).
BIOS Commands 4-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.4.5 Display Adapter Time
Use the command in Table 4.5 to display the current time and date of the
selected adapter.
4.4.6 Set Factory Defaults
Use the command in Table 4.7 to set the factory defaults on the selected
adapter(s).
4.5 BIOS Commands
You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for
BIOS-related options.
4.5.1 Set or Display Bootable Logical Drive ID
Use the command in Table 4.8 to set or display the ID of the bootable
logical drive.
Note: This option does not write a boot sector to the logical drive.
The operating system will not load if the boot sector is
incorrect.
Table 4.6 Display Adapter Time
Syntax CmdTool –AdpGetTime -aN
Description Displays the selected adapter’s time in yyyymmdd HH:mm:ss format.
Table 4.7 Set Factory Defaults
Syntax CmdTool -AdpFacDefSet -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Sets the factory defaults on the selected adapter(s). You cannot set the factory
defaults if the adapter already has a configuration defined on it.
Table 4.8 Bootable Logical Drive ID
Syntax CmdTool –AdpBootDrive {-Set –LDID} | -Get -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description • -Set: Sets the logical drive as bootable so that during the next reboot, the BIOS
will look for a boot sector in the specified logical drive.
• -Get: Displays the bootable logical drive ID.
4-8 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.5.2 Set BIOS Options
Use the command in Table 4.9 to set the options for the BIOS status.
4.6 Event Log Commands
4.6.1 Manage the Event Log Entries
Use the command in Table 4.10 to manage the event entries in the event
log for the selected adapter(s).
Table 4.9 Set BIOS Options
Syntax CmdTool –AdpBIOS -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply| SOE | BE -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Sets BIOS options. The following are the settings you can select on a single adapter,
multiple adapters, or all adapters:
• -Enbl, -Dsbl, -Dsply: Enables, disables or displays the BIOS status on
selected adapter(s).
• -SOE: Stops on BIOS errors during POST for selected adapter(s). When set to
-SOE, the BIOS stops in case of a problem with the configuration. This gives you
the option to enter the configuration utility to resolve the problem. This is available
only when you enable the BIOS status.
• -BE: Bypasses BIOS errors during POST. This is available only when you enable
the BIOS status.
Table 4.10 Event Log Management
Syntax CmdTool –AdpEventLog –GetEventlogInfo |{–GetEvents | GetSinceShutdown|
GetSinceReboot | IncludeDeleted | {GetLatest } –f }
|Clear -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Configuration Commands 4-9
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.7 Configuration Commands
You can use the commands in this section to create storage
configurations.
4.7.1 Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration
Use the command in Table 4.11 to add a RAID level 0, 1, or 5
configuration to the existing configuration on the selected adapter. For
RAID level 10, see Section 4.7.3, “Add RAID 10 Configuration.”
Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA
drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in
this way could cause decreased performance, an increased
error count, and decreased MTBF.
Description The RAID driver maintains a volatile circular list of 100 events, which is deleted at
reboot. The following command options are available:
• -GetEventlogInfo: Displays overall event information such as total number of
events, newest sequence number, oldest sequence number, shutdown sequence
number, reboot sequence number, and clear sequence number.
• -GetEvents: Gets event log entry details. The information shown consists of the
total number of entries available at the firmware side since the last clear and
details of each error log entry. Start_entry specifies the initial event log entry
when displaying the log.
• -GetSinceShutdown: Displays all the events since last adapter shutdown.
• -GetSinceReboot: Displays all the events since last adapter reboot.
• -IncludeDeleted: Displays all events, including deleted events.
• -GetLatest: Displays the latest number of events, if it exists. The event data is
written to the file in reverse order.
• -Clear: Clears the event log for the selected adapter(s).
Table 4.10 Event Log Management (Cont.)
Table 4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration
Syntax CmdTool –CfgLDAdd -R0|-R1|-R5[E0:Sn] [ -szXXXXXXXX [-szYYYYYYYY
[...]]] [-strpszM] [-Hsp[E5:S5,...]] [–afterLdX] -aN
4-10 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.7.2 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0
Use the command in Table 4.12 to configure each physical disk in
Unconfigured-Good state as RAID 0.
Note: The MegaCLI CT does not support spanning across these
single-drive RAID 0 configurations.
Description Adds a RAID level 0, 1 or 5 configuration to a specified adapter. Even if no
configuration is present, you have the option to write the configuration to the adapter.
• –Rx[E0:Sn]: Used to specify RAID level and physical drive enclosure/slot
numbers for an array.
• –strpszM:: Used (optionally) to specify a stripe size. You can set the stripe size
to 64 Kbytes.
• –Hsp[Ex:Sx,…]: Used to create a global hotspare, with physical drive
enclosure/slot numbers specified. This option cannot be used to create dedicated
hotspares.
• –szXXXX:: Used to specify the size of a logical drive, where XXXX is a decimal
number of Mbytes. However, the actual size of the logical drive may be smaller,
because the driver requires the number of blocks from physical drives in each
logical drive to be aligned to the stripe size. This option can also be used to
create a configuration on the free space available in the array.
• -AfterLdX:: Used to specify which free slot should be used (optional). By default,
MegaCLI CT uses the first free slot available in the array. This option has no
meaning if the array is not already used for configuration.
Table 4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration (Cont.)
Table 4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0
Syntax CmdTool –CfgEachDskRAID0 [{WT | WB }] [{NORA | RA | ADRA}] [{Direct
| Cached}] [{-strpszM} -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Configuration Commands 4-11
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.7.3 Add RAID 10 Configuration
Use the command in Table 4.13 to add a RAID 10 configuration to the
existing configuration on the selected adapter. For RAID levels 0, 1 or 5,
see Section 4.7.1, “Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration.”
Description Configures each physical disk in Unconfigured-Good state as RAID 0 on this
controller.
The options {WT |WB} {NORA | RA | ADRA} {Direct | Cached} must be entered
in the sequence that is shown.
• WT : Used to select Write-through caching, in which a write transaction is
considered to be complete when all the data has been written to the disk cache.
• WB : Used to select Write-back caching, in which the write transaction is complete
only when the data has been written to the disk.
• NORA : Used to select Normal Read Ahead caching, which specifies that the
controller reads only the requested data and does not read ahead for the current
logical drive.
• RA : Used to select Read Ahead caching, which specifies that data is read
sequentially ahead of the data that is actually requested and is stored in a cache.
If the additional read-ahead data is then requested, it can be read faster from the
cache than from the disk directly. Read-Ahead supplies sequential data faster, but
is not as effective when accessing random data.
• ADRA : Used to select Adaptive Read Ahead, which specifies that the controller
begins using Read Ahead caching if the two most recent disk accesses occurred
in sequential sectors. If all read requests are random, the algorithm reverts to No
Read Ahead; however, all requests are still evaluated for possible sequential
operation.
If you select Read Ahead, there is a danger that data could be lost if the power
fails before the cached data is written to disk.
• Direct : Used to specify that the controller does not buffer reads in cache
memory. Data is transferred to cache and the host concurrently. If the same data
block is read again, it comes from cache memory.
• Cached : Used to specify that the controller buffers all reads in cache memory.
• {-strpszM} : Used to specify the size of the segments written to each drive in the
configuration. You can set the stripe size to 64 Kbytes.
Table 4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 (Cont.)
Table 4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration
Syntax CmdTool –CfgSpanAdd -R10| –Array0[E0:Sn] –Array1[E0:Sn] [...] [{WT |
WB}] [{NORA | RA | ADRA}] [{Direct | Cached}] [{-strpszM}] -aN
4-12 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.7.4 Clear Existing Configuration
Use the command in Table 4.14 to clear the existing storage
configuration on the selected adapter(s).
4.7.5 Display Existing Configuration
Use the command in Table 4.15 to display the logical drive and physical
disk drive information for the configuration on the selected adapter(s).
This command also provides information about the remaining
unconfigured space.
4.7.6 Save Adapter Configuration
Use the command in Table 4.16 to save the configuration for the selected
adapter(s) to the given filename.
Description Creates a RAID level 10 (spanned) configuration from the specified arrays. Even if
no configuration is present, you must use this option to write the configuration to the
adapter.
Multiple arrays are specified using the –ArrayX[E0:Sn,...] option. (Note that X
starts from 0, not 1.) All the arrays must have the same number of physical drives.
At least two arrays must be provided. The options {WT |WB} {NORA | RA | ADRA}
{Direct | Cached} must be entered in the sequence that is shown.
Table 4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration (Cont.)
Table 4.14 Clear Existing Configuration
Syntax CmdTool –CfgClr -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Clears the existing storage configuration.
Table 4.15 Display Existing Configuration
Syntax CmdTool -CfgDsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays the existing configuration on the selected adapter(s), which includes the
logical drive and component physical drive related details.
Table 4.16 Save Adapter Configuration
Syntax CmdTool –CfgSave –fFileName -aN
Description Saves the configuration for the selected adapter(s) to the given filename, in binary
format. The command also stores the controller properties structure in the file.
Configuration Commands 4-13
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.7.7 Restore Configuration Data from File
Use the command in Table 4.17 to read the configuration from the file
and load it on the selected adapter(s). You can restore the read/write
properties and RAID configuration using hotspares.
4.7.8 Delete Logical Drive(s)
Use the command in Table 4.18 to delete one or more logical drives on
the selected adapter(s).
4.7.9 Display Free Space
Use the command in Table 4.19 to display the free space that is available
to use for configuration on the selected adapter(s).
Table 4.17 Restore Configuration Data from File
Syntax CmdTool –CfgRestore –fFileName -aN
Description Reads the configuration from the file and loads it on the adapter. MegaCLI can store
or restore all read and write adapter properties, all read and write properties for
logical drives, and the RAID configuration including hotspares.
Note the following:
The -CfgSave option stores the configuration data and adapter properties in the file.
Configuration data has only the device ID and sequence number information of the
physical drives used in the configuration. The CfgRestore option will fail if the same
device IDs of the physical drives are not present.
Table 4.18 Delete Logical Drives
Syntax CmdTool –CfgLDDel–Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Deletes one logical drive, multiple logical drives, or all the selected logical drives on
selected adapter(s).
Table 4.19 Display Free Space
Syntax CmdTool –CfgFreeSpaceInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays all the free space available for configuration on the selected adapter(s). The
information includes the number of disk groups, the number of spans in each disk
group, the number of free space slots in each disk group, the start block, and the
size (in both blocks and megabytes) of each free space slot.
4-14 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.8 Logical Drive Commands
You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the
logical drives and to perform actions on them.
4.8.1 Display Logical Drive Information
Use the command in Table 4.20 to display information about logical
drives on the selected adapter(s).
4.8.2 Display Logical Drive Disk Cache Settings
Use the command in Table 4.21 to display the disk cache settings for the
logical drive(s) on the selected adapter(s).
4.8.3 Manage Logical Drive Initialization
Use the command in Table 4.22 to manage initialization of the logical
drive(s) on the selected adapter(s).
Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS
driver starts the initialization process when this command is
issued. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the
MegaCLI CT just marks the drives for initialization. The
initialization actually starts when the driver loads.
Table 4.20 Display Logical Drive Information
Syntax CmdTool –LDInfo –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays information about the logical drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). This
information includes the name, RAID level, RAID level qualifier, size in megabytes,
state, stripe size, number of drives, and span depth. Also displays activity progress,
if any, including initialization, background initialization, and consistency check.
Table 4.21 Display Logical Drive Cache Settings
Syntax CmdTool –LDGetProp -DskCache -Lx|-L0,1,2| -Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays the disk cache settings of the logical drive(s):
-DskCache: Displays physical disk cache policy.
Logical Drive Commands 4-15
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.8.4 Manage Consistency Check
Use the command in Table 4.23 to manage a data consistency check
(CC) on the logical drives for the selected adapter(s).
Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS
driver starts the consistency check when this command is
issued. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the
MegaCLI CT just marks the drives as needing a
consistency check. The consistency check actually starts
when the driver loads.
4.8.5 View Ongoing Background Initialization
Use the command in Table 4.24 to view ongoing background initialization
of the selected logical drives, after the -LDInit command has been
issued to start the initialization. This function completes only when all
Table 4.22 Manage Logical Drive Initialization
Syntax CmdTool –LDInit –Start [Fast | Full] |-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply
-Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Allows you to select the following actions for logical drive initialization:
• -Start: Starts the initialization (writing 0s) on the logical drive(s) and displays
the progress (this is optional). The fast initialization option initializes the first
100 Mbytes on the logical drive. The full option allows you to initialize the entire
logical drive.
• -Abort: Aborts the ongoing initialization on the LD(s).
• -ShowProg: Displays the snapshot of the ongoing initialization, if any.
• -ProgDsply: Displays the progress of the ongoing initialization until at least one
initialization is completed or a key is pressed.
Table 4.23 Manage Consistency Check
Syntax CmdTool –LDCC –Start|-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall
-aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Allows you to select the following actions for a data consistency check:
• -Start: Starts a CC on the logical drive(s), then displays the progress (optional)
and time remaining.
• -Abort: Aborts an ongoing CC on the logical drive(s).
• -ShowProg: Displays a snapshot of an ongoing CC.
• -ProgDsply: Displays ongoing CC progress until at least one CC is completed
or a key is pressed.
4-16 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
background initialization processes complete or the user presses a key
to exit.
Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS
driver starts initializing the logical drives when the -LDInit
command is issued. You can then issue this -LDBI
command to monitor the initialization progress. In DOS,
however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just
marks the drives for initialization. The initialization actually
starts when the driver loads.
4.8.6 Display Logical Drive and Physical Drive Information
Use the command in Table 4.25 to display information about the logical
drives and physical disk drives for the selected adapter(s), such as the
number of logical drives, RAID level, and physical disk drive size.
Table 4.24 View Ongoing Background Initialization
Syntax CmdTool –LDBI -Enbl|-Dsbl|-GetSetting|-ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx|
-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays ongoing background initialization of the selected logical drives. This function
completes only when all background initialization processes complete or the user
presses a key to exit.
• -Enbl, -Dsbl: Enables or disables the background initialization on the given
adapter(s).
• -ProgDsply: Allows the user to view ongoing background initialization until all
background initialization processes complete or the user presses a key to exit.
• -ShowProg: Displays current progress value.
• -GetSetting: Displays current background initialization setting (enabled or
disabled).
Table 4.25 Display Logical Drive and Physical Disk Drive Information
Syntax CmdTool –LDPDInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays information about the logical drive(s) and physical disk drive(s) on the
selected adapter(s). Displays information including the number of logical drives, the
RAID level of the logical drives, and physical drive size information, which includes
raw size, coerced size, uncoerced size, and the SAS address.
Physical Drive Commands 4-17
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.8.7 Display Number of Logical Drives
Use the command in Table 4.26 to display the number of logical drives
attached to the adapter.
4.9 Physical Drive Commands
You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the
physical disk drives and perform actions on them.
4.9.1 Display Physical Disk Drive Information
Use the command in Table 4.27 to display information about the physical
disk drives on the selected adapter(s).
4.9.2 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online
Use the command in Table 4.28 to set the state of a physical disk drive
to Online. In an online state, the physical drive is working normally and
is a part of a configured logical drive.
Table 4.26 Display Number of Logical Drives
Syntax CmdTool –LDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays the number of logical drives attached to the adapter. The return value is the
number of logical drives.
Table 4.27 Display Physical Disk Drive Information
Syntax CmdTool –PDInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....]
Description Provides information about the physical disk drives connected to the enclosure and
adapter slot. The information includes the drive type, drive size, serial number, and
firmware version. For SAS devices, this includes additional information such as the
SAS address of the drive.
Table 4.28 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online
Syntax CmdTool –PDOnline -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Changes the physical disk drive state to Online.
4-18 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.9.3 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline
Use the command in Table 4.29 to set the state of a physical disk drive
to Offline. In the offline state, the logical drive is not available to the
adapter.
4.9.4 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good
Use the command in Table 4.30 to set the state of a physical disk drive
from Unconfigured-Bad to Unconfigured-Good.
4.9.5 Manage Global Hotspares
Use the command in Table 4.31 to manage the configuration and
assignment of global hotspares. Make sure the capacity of the hotspare
drive is equal to or larger than the capacity of the disks in the array and
that it is the same type of drive (SAS or SATA).
Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is
SAS and the array drives are SATA, or vice versa. Once
the rebuild is completed, LSI recommends that you replace
the new array member with a drive of the same type.
4.9.6 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive
Use the command in Table 4.32 to start or stop a rebuild on a physical
disk drive and display the rebuild progress. When a physical disk in an
Table 4.29 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline
Syntax CmdTool –PDOffline -PhysDrv[E0:S....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Changes the physical disk drive state to Offline.
Table 4.30 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good
Syntax CmdTool –PDMakeGood -PhysDrv[E0:Sn...] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Changes the physical disk drive state from Unconfigured-Bad to Unconfigured-Good.
Table 4.31 Manage Hotspares
Syntax CmdTool –PDHSP {–Set} -Rmv -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description • -Set: Changes the physical disk drive state to hotspare for the enclosure.
• -Rmv: Changes the physical drive state to ready (removes the hotspare).
Physical Drive Commands 4-19
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
array fails, you can rebuild the physical disk by recreating the data that
was stored on the physical disk before it failed.
Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS
driver starts the rebuild when this command is issued. In
DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT
just marks the drives for rebuild. The rebuild actually starts
when the driver loads.
4.9.7 Locate Physical Disk Drive(s) and Activate LED
Use the command in Table 4.33 to locate physical disk drive(s) by
flashing the physical disk activity LED.
4.9.8 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild
Use the command in Table 4.34 to replace a configured physical disk
drive and start an automatic rebuild of the drive.
Table 4.32 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive
Syntax CmdTool –PDRbld –Start |-Stop|-ShowProg |-ProgDsply –PhysDrv
[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Manages a physical disk rebuild or displays the rebuild progress on one or more
adapters. The physical disk must meet the size requirements before it can be rebuilt,
and it must be part of an array:
• -Start: Starts a rebuild on the selected physical drive(s) and displays the rebuild
progress (optional).
• -Stop: Stops an ongoing rebuild on the selected physical drive(s).
• -ShowProg: Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the
rebuild. This option is useful for running the application through scripts.
• -ProgDsply: Displays the ongoing rebuild progress until at least one initialization
is completed or a key is pressed.
Table 4.33 Locate Physical Disk Drive and Flash LED
Syntax CmdTool –PDLocate –PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Locates the physical disk drive(s) for the selected adapter(s) and flashes the disk
activity LED.
Table 4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild
Syntax CmdTool –PDReplaceMissing –PhysDrv[E0:Sn] –ArrayX –RowY -aN
4-20 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.9.9 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal
Use the command in Table 4.35 to prepare an unconfigured physical disk
drive(s) for removal from the selected adapter(s).
4.9.10 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives
Use the command in Table 4.36 to display the total number of physical
disk drives attached to an adapter. Drives can be attached directly or
through enclosures.
4.9.11 Display List of Physical Drives
Use the command in Table 4.37 to display a list of the physical drives
connected to the selected adapter(s).
Description Replaces the configured physical disk drives, then starts an automatic rebuild. The
specified arrayIndex and row must be a missing drive.
Table 4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild (Cont.)
Table 4.35 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal
Syntax CmdTool –PDPrpRmv [-Undo] –PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Prepares unconfigured physical drive(s) for removal. The drive is spun down, and
the drive state is set to unaffiliated, which marks it as offline even though it is not a
part of configuration.
The -Undo option undoes this operation, and the firmware marks this physical disk
as Unconfigured-Good.
Table 4.36 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives
Syntax CmdTool –PDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description Displays the total number of physical disk drives attached to an adapter. The return
value is the number of physical disk drives.
Table 4.37 Display List of Physical Drives
Syntax CmdTool –PDList –aN|-a0,1..|-aAll
Description Displays information about all physical disk drives connected to the selected
adapter(s). This includes information such as the drive type, size, serial number, and
firmware version. For SAS devices, this includes additional information such as the
SAS address.
Miscellaneous Commands 4-21
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.10 Miscellaneous Commands
The commands in this section are used to display various information.
4.10.1 Display MegaCLI Version
Use the command in Table 4.38 to display the version number of the
MegaCLI utility.
4.10.2 Display MegaCLI Help
Use the command in Table 4.39 to display help information for the
MegaCLI utility.
Table 4.38 Display MegaCLI Version
Syntax CmdTool –v
Description Displays the version number of the MegaCLI utility.
Table 4.39 Display MegaCLI Help
Syntax CmdTool –h|–Help|?
Description Displays help for the MegaCLI utility.
4-22 MegaCLI Command Tool
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 5-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
MegaRAID Storage Manager
Software Overview and
Installation
MegaRAID Storage Manager software is a configuration and monitoring
utility used with the Embedded MegaRAID Software. This chapter
provides a brief overview of the MegaRAID Storage Manager software
and explains how to install it on the supported operating systems. This
chapter has the following sections:
• Section 5.1, “Overview”
• Section 5.2, “Hardware and Software Requirements”
• Section 5.3, “Installation”
5.1 Overview
MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to configure, monitor,
and maintain storage configurations created under Embedded
MegaRAID Software. The MegaRAID Storage Manager graphical user
interface (GUI) makes it easy for you to create and manage storage
configurations.
Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software can be used to
manage a wide range of MegaRAID controllers. Some
MegaRAID Storage Manager software features are not
applicable for Embedded MegaRAID Software.
5.1.1 Creating Storage Configurations
MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to easily configure
the controllers, disk drives, and virtual disks on your workstation or
server. The Configuration Wizard greatly simplifies the process of
creating arrays and virtual disks.
5-2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
You can use the Configuration Wizard Auto Configuration mode to
automatically create the best possible configuration with the available
hardware. You can use the Guided Configuration mode, which asks you
a few brief questions about the configuration, and then creates it for you.
Or you can use the Manual Configuration mode, which gives you
complete control over all aspects of the storage configuration.
5.1.2 Monitoring Storage Devices
MegaRAID Storage Manager software displays the status of virtual disks,
physical disks, and other storage devices on the workstation or server
that you are monitoring. System errors and events are recorded in an
event log file and are displayed on the screen. Special device icons
appear on the screen to notify you of disk failures and other events that
require immediate attention.
5.1.3 Maintaining Storage Configurations
You can use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform system
maintenance tasks such as running consistency checks on arrays that
support redundancy.
5.2 Hardware and Software Requirements
The hardware requirements for MegaRAID Storage Manager software
are as follows:
• PC-compatible computer with an IA-32 (32-bit) Intel Architecture
processor or an EM64T (64-bit) processor and at least 128 Mbytes
of system memory
Note: LSI Logic recommends that you use at least 1 Gbyte of
system memory.
• Hard disk drive with at least 50 Mbytes available free space
The supported operating systems for the MegaRAID Storage Manager
software are as follows:
• Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows Server 2003, and
Microsoft Windows XP
Installation 5-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
• Red Hat Linux 3.0 or 4.0
• SUSE SLES 9, with latest updates and service packs
Refer to your server documentation and to the operating system
documentation for more information on hardware and operating system
requirements.
5.3 Installation
This section explains how to install (or reinstall) MegaRAID Storage
Manager software on your workstation or server for the supported
operating systems: Microsoft Windows, Red Hat Linux, and SUSE Linux.
5.3.1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software on Microsoft
Windows
Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager
software on a system running Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft
Windows Server 2003, or Microsoft Windows XP:
1. Insert the MegaRAID Storage Manager software installation CD in
the CD-ROM drive.
If necessary, find and double-click the setup.exe file to start the
installation program.
2. When the Welcome screen appears, click Next.
If MegaRAID Storage Manager software is already installed on this
system, the Program Maintenance screen appears. Read the screen
text and select Modify, Repair, or Remove.
3. When the next screen appears, read and accept the user license,
and click Next.
The Customer Information screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.1.
5-4 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 5.1 Customer Information Screen
4. Enter your user name and organization name. In the bottom part of
the screen, select an installation option:
– If you select All users, any user with administrative privileges
can use this version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software to
view or change storage configurations.
– If you select Only for current user, the MegaRAID Storage
Manager shortcuts and associated icons will be available only to
the user with this user name.
5. Click Next to continue.
6. On the next screen, accept the default Destination Folder, or click
Change to select a different destination folder. Click Next to
continue.
The Setup Type screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.2.
Installation 5-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 5.2 Setup Type Screen
7. Select one of the Setup options. The options are fully explained in
the screen text.
– Normally, you would select Complete if you are installing
MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a server.
– Select Client if you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager
software on a PC that will be used to view and configure servers
over a network.
– Select Server to install only those components required for
remote server management.
– Select StandAlone if you will use MegaRAID Storage Manager
software to create and manage storage configurations on a
standalone workstation.
8. Click Next to proceed.
9. Click Install to install the program.
10. Click Finish when the final Configuration Wizard screen appears.
If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers, and if
there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local
subnet (that is, servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage
Manager software), you cannot connect to a remote server unless you
5-6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
first edit the startupui.bat file. Specifically, you must add the IP
address of the remote server to the end of the startupui.bat file.
For example, to connect to a remote framework on server 192.168.0.10,
add the IP address to the end of startupui.bat as shown in this
example:
start JRE\bin\javaw -classpath .;GUI.jar GUI.VivaldiStartupDialog
ajsgyqkj=71244 192.168.0.10
Be sure to include a space in front of the IP address, as shown in the
example.
5.3.2 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Linux
Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager
software on a system running Red Hat Linux or SUSE Linux:
1. Copy the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file to a temporary
folder.
2. Untar the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file using the
following command:
tar -zxvf MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz
A new disk directory is created.
3. Go to the new disk directory.
4. In the disk directory, find and read the readme.txt file.
5. To start the installation, enter the following command:
./install.sh
If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers, and if
there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local
subnet (that is, servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage
Manager software), you cannot connect to a remote server unless you
first edit the startupui.sh file. Specifically, you must add the IP address
of the remote server to the end of the startupui.sh file.
For example, to connect to a remote framework on server 192.168.0.10,
add the IP address to startupui.sh as shown in this example:
start JRE\bin\javaw -classpath .;GUI.jar GUI.VivaldiStartupDialog
ajsgyqkj=71244 192.168.0.10
Installation 5-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Be sure to include a space in front of the IP address, as shown in the
example.
5.3.3 Linux Error Messages
One or more of the following messages may appear while you are
installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Linux system:
• More than one copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software has
been installed.
This message indicates that the user has installed more than one
copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software. (This can be done by
using the rpm-force command to install the rpm file directly, which
is not recommended, instead of using the install.sh file.) In such
cases, the user must uninstall all the rpm files manually before
installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software with the procedure
listed previously.
• The version is already installed.
This message indicates that the version of MegaRAID Storage
Manager software you are trying to install is already installed on the
system.
• The installed version is newer.
This message indicates that a version of MegaRAID Storage
Manager software is already installed on the system, and it is a
newer version than the version you are trying to install.
• Exiting installation.
This is the message that appears when the installation is complete.
• RPM installation failed.
This message indicates that the installation failed for some reason.
Additional message text explains the cause of the failure.
5-8 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 6-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
MegaRAID Storage Manager
Window and Menus
This chapter explains how to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software
and describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and menus. This
chapter has the following sections:
• Section 6.1, “Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software”
• Section 6.2, “MegaRAID Storage Manager Window”
6.1 Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software
Follow these steps to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software and
view the main window:
1. Start the program using the method required for your operating
system environment:
– To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Microsoft
Windows system, select Start -> Programs -> MegaRAID
Storage Manager -> StartupUI, or double-click the MegaRAID
Storage Manager shortcut on the desktop.
Note: If a warning appears stating that Windows Firewall has
blocked some features of the program, click Unblock to
allow MegaRAID Storage Manager software to start. (The
Windows Firewall sometimes blocks the operation of
programs that use Java.)
– To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Red Hat
Linux system, select Applications -> System Tools ->
MegaRAID Storage Manager StartupUI.
– To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a SUSE
SLES 9 system, select Start -> System -> More Programs ->
MegaRAID Storage Manager.
6-2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
When the program starts, the Select Server window appears, as
shown in Figure 6.1.
Figure 6.1 Select Server Window
If the circle in the server icon is yellow instead of green, it means
that the server is running in a degraded state—for example, because
a disk drive used in a virtual disk has failed. If the circle is red, the
storage configuration in the server has failed.
Note: To access servers on a different subnet, type in the box at
the bottom of the screen the IP address of a server in the
desired subnet where MegaRAID Storage Manager
software is running, and click Update. If you check the
Connect to remote Framework box, you can also access
a standalone installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager
software, if it has a network connection.
2. Double-click the icon of the server that you want to access. The
Server Login window appears, as shown in Figure 6.2.
Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software 6-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 6.2 Server Login Window
3. Select an access mode from the drop-down menu.
– Select Full Access if you need to both view the current
configuration and change the configuration.
– Select View Only if you need to only view and monitor the
configuration.
4. Enter your user name and password, and click Login.
Note: If the computer is networked, this is the login to the
computer itself, not the network login.
You must enter the root/administrator user name and password to
use Full Access mode. If your user name and password are correct
for the Login mode you have chosen, the main MegaRAID Storage
Manager window appears.
6-4 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
6.2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
This section describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, which
is shown in Figure 6.3.
Figure 6.3 Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
The following topics describe the panels and menu options that appear
in this window.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
6.2.1 Physical/Logical View Panel
The left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays either
the Physical view or the Logical view of the system and the devices in it,
depending on which tab is selected.
• The Physical view shows the hierarchy of physical devices in the
system. At the top of the hierarchy is the system itself. One or more
controllers are installed in the system. Each controller has one or
more ports. Disk drives and other devices are attached to the ports.
• The Logical view shows the hierarchy of controllers, virtual disks, and
disk groups that are defined on the system. (Physical drives also
appear in the Logical view, so you can see which physical drives are
used by each virtual disk.)
The following icons in the left panel represent the controllers, disk drives,
and other devices:
• System
• Controller
• Port
• Array
• Virtual disk
• Physical drive
A red circle to the right of an icon indicates that the device has failed.
For example, this icon indicates that a physical drive has failed: .
A yellow circle to the right of an icon indicates that a device is running
in a degraded state. For example, this icon indicates that a virtual disk is
running in a degraded state because a disk drive has failed: .
6-6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
6.2.2 Properties/Operations/Graphical View Panel
The right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window has either
two or three tabs, depending on what kind of device is selected in the
left panel.
• The Properties tab displays information about the selected device.
For example, if a controller icon is selected in the left panel, the
Properties tab lists information such as the controller name and the
device port count. For more information, see Section 8.2, “Monitoring
Controllers,” Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk Drives,” and Section 8.4,
“Monitoring Virtual Disks.”
• The Operations tab lists the operations that can be performed on the
device that is selected in the left panel. Some types of devices, such
as arrays and ports, do not have operations associated with them.
For more information, see Chapter 9, “Maintaining and Managing
Storage Configurations.”
• The Graphical View tab can be selected in the right panel if a
physical drive or virtual disk is selected in the left panel. In graphical
view, the device’s storage capacity is color coded according to the
legend shown on the screen. For example, on a physical drive
configured space is blue, available space is white, and reserved
space is red. For more information, see Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk
Drives,” and Section 8.4, “Monitoring Virtual Disks.”
6.2.3 Event Log Panel
The lower part of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays the
system event log entries, as shown in Figure 6.3. New event log entries
appear during the session. Each entry has a timestamp and date, an
error level indicating the severity of the event, and a brief description of
the event.
For more information about the event log, see Section 8.1, “Monitoring
System Events.” For more information about the event log entries, see
Appendix A, “Events and Messages.”
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
6.2.4 Menu Bar
Here are brief descriptions of the main selections on the MegaRAID
Storage Manager menu bar. Specific menu options are described in
more detail in Chapters 7, 8, and 9 of this manual.
6.2.4.1 File Menu
The File menu has an Exit option for exiting from the MegaRAID Storage
Manager software. It also has a Rescan option for updating the display
in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. (Rescan is seldom required;
the display normally updates automatically.)
6.2.4.2 Operations Menu
The Operations menu is available when a controller, physical drive, or
logical drive is selected in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. The
Operations menu options vary depending on what type of device is
selected in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window.
The options also vary depending on the current state of the selected
device. For example, if you select an offline physical drive, the Make
Drive Online option appears in the Operations menu.
You can also view the Operations selections on the main window on the
Operations tab in the right panel. If an operation requires user inputs
before it can be executed, it appears in the Operations tab but not in the
Operations menu. A device-specific Operations menu pops up if you
right-click a device icon in the left panel.
An Advanced Operations submenu is also available. This is where you
access the Configuration Wizard and other configuration-related
commands. To access this menu, select Operations -> Advanced
Operations.
6.2.4.3 Group Operations Menu
The Group Operations menu options include Check Consistency,
Initialize, and Show Progress.
6-8 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
6.2.4.4 Log Menu
The Log menu includes options for saving and clearing the message log.
For more information, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.”
6.2.4.5 Help Menu
On the Help menu you can select Help -> Help to view the MegaRAID
Storage Manager software online help file. You can select Help -> About
to view version information for the MegaRAID Storage Manager software.
Note: When you use the MegaRAID Storage Manager software
online help, you may see a warning message that Internet
Explorer has restricted the file from showing active content.
If this warning appears, click on the active content warning
bar and enable the active content.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 7-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Configuration
You use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to create and modify
storage configurations. RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 storage
configurations are supported.
Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA
drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in
this way could cause unpredictable behavior, decreased
performance, an increased error count, and decreased
MTBF.
Note: You cannot create or modify a storage configuration unless
you are logged on to a server with administrator privileges.
This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software
to perform the following configuration tasks:
• Section 7.1, “Creating a New Storage Configuration”
• Section 7.2, “Adding Hotspare Disks”
• Section 7.3, “Changing Adjustable Task Rates”
• Section 7.4, “Changing Virtual Disk Properties”
• Section 7.5, “Deleting a Virtual Disk”
• Section 7.6, “Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk”
• Section 7.7, “Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller”
• Section 7.8, “Adding a Saved Storage Configuration”
7-2 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.1 Creating a New Storage Configuration
You can use the MegaRAID Storage Manager Configuration Wizard to
create new storage configurations. To open the MegaRAID Storage
Manager Configuration Wizard, select a controller in the left panel of the
MegaRAID Storage Manager window and then select Operations ->
Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Configuration Wizard.
Figure 7.1 shows the first Configuration Wizard screen.
Figure 7.1 First Configuration Wizard Screen
The menu lists three configuration modes:
• Auto Configuration automatically creates an optimal configuration
from the available disk drives.
• Manual Configuration gives you the greatest level of control in
creating a new virtual disk.
Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
• Guided Configuration asks you a few simple questions about what
kind of configuration you want and then automatically creates it from
the available disk drives.
Note: You can use Auto, Guided, or Manual mode to create a
RAID 0, or RAID 1 configuration. To create a RAID 10
configuration, you must use the Manual Configuration
mode.
The following subsections explain how to use the Configuration Wizard
to create storage configurations:
• Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters”
• Section 7.1.2, “Using Auto Configuration”
• Section 7.1.3, “Using Guided Configuration”
• Section 7.1.4, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0”
• Section 7.1.5, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1”
• Section 7.1.6, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10”
7.1.1 Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters
This section describes the Virtual Disk Parameters that you can set when
you use the Guided Configuration or Manual Configuration modes of the
Configuration Wizard. You should change these parameters only if you
have a specific reason for doing so. It is usually best to leave them at
their default settings.
• Stripe Size: A stripe size of 64 Kbytes is supported.
• Disk Cache Policy: Select a cache setting for this disk: Unchanged,
Enabled, or Disabled.
• Init State:
– No Initialization: The new configuration is not initialized and the
existing data on the disks is not overwritten.
– Fast Initialization: MegaRAID Storage Manager software quickly
writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the new
virtual disk.
– Full Initialization: A complete initialization is done on the new
configuration. This may take a long time if the disks are large.
7-4 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.1.2 Using Auto Configuration
Auto Configuration is the quickest and simplest way to create a new
storage configuration. When you select Auto Configuration mode on the
first Configuration Wizard screen, the Configuration Wizard creates the
best configuration possible using the available physical disks.
Figure 7.2 shows the Auto Configuration screen.
Figure 7.2 Auto Configuration Screen
Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in Auto
Configuration mode:
1. Select a redundancy option from the drop-down menu at the bottom
of the Auto Configuration window:
– No Redundancy: The new configuration will have no data
redundancy (RAID 0). If a physical disk in the configuration fails,
all data will be lost.
Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
– With Redundancy: The new configuration will have data
redundancy via mirrored data (RAID 1). If a physical disk fails,
data is still protected.
2. Select an initialization option from the drop-down menu at the bottom
of the window:
– No Initialization: The new configuration is not initialized, and the
existing data on the disks is not overwritten.
– Fast Initialization: MegaRAID Storage Manager software
quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the
new virtual disk.
– Full Initialization: A complete initialization is done on the new
configuration. This may take a long time if the disks are large.
3. (Optional) Click Modify if you want to switch to Manual Configuration
mode so you can modify the suggested Auto Configuration.
When you click Modify, the Virtual Disk Creation screen appears.
Select the new virtual disk, and click Reclaim. Then select the new
array from the Arrays with Free Space list, and change the virtual
disk parameters as needed.
4. Click Finish. The new storage configuration will be created and
initialized (unless you selected No Initialization).
7.1.3 Using Guided Configuration
Guided Configuration provides an easy way to create a new storage
configuration. Based on the information that is provided, the
Configuration Wizard uses the available disk drives to create an optimal
storage configuration.
Figure 7.3 shows the first screen that appears when you select Guided
Configuration.
7-6 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 7.3 First Guided Configuration Screen
Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in Guided
Configuration mode:
1. Select a redundancy option at the top of the Guided Configuration
window:
– Redundancy Only: Create a configuration only if redundancy
(RAID 1) is possible.
– Redundancy when possible: Create a redundant configuration
if possible. Otherwise, create a non-redundant configuration.
– No Redundancy: Create a non-redundant configuration.
2. Choose whether you want to use existing arrays in the new virtual
disk. The options are:
– Use Existing Arrays Only
– Don’t Use Existing Arrays
– Use Existing and New Arrays
The first and third options are disabled if there are no available
existing arrays.
Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
3. Select a maximum number of virtual disks to be created. The
Configuration Wizard may not be able to create as many virtual disks
as you want, depending on the current configuration and the number
of virtual disks that have already been created.
4. Click Next to continue to the next window, as shown in Figure 7.4.
Figure 7.4 Second Guided Configuration Screen
5. Change the default volume parameters in this window, if needed.
In the top section of the window you can specify the number of virtual
disks to create. You can also choose to use less than the full
capacity of this array for the virtual disk(s). (You could do this to
leave capacity available for other virtual disks that you create later.)
To learn about the Stripe Size and other virtual disk parameters, see
Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters,” page 7-3.
6. Click Next to continue to the next window.
7. Check the configuration that you have just defined. If it is acceptable,
click Finish. If you want to change something, click Back to return
to the previous windows.
7-8 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.1.4 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0
Follow these steps to create a RAID 0 storage configuration using the
Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard.
Figure 7.5 shows the first screen that appears when you select Manual
Configuration.
Figure 7.5 First Manual Configuration Screen
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, select two or more
available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to
move the selected drives to the right panel.
Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software will not allow you to
select the disk drive on which the operating system is
installed or any other drives that are already part of a
configuration.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 0 array.
Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-9
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: To remove a single drive from a proposed new array, select
the drive icon in the right panel and click the Left Arrow
button.
3. Click Next.
The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in
Figure 7.6.
Figure 7.6 Manual Configuration – Defining a Virtual Disk
The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new array that you just
defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could
be used for a new configuration.
4. From the Arrays with Free Space menu, select the array to use for
the new virtual disk.
5. In the right panel, select RAID 0 as the RAID level.
6. (Optional) Set Size (in MB) to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual disk.
7. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For
more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk
Parameters.”
7-10 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
8. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk.
Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk
that you just defined.
9. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step.
The Virtual Disk Summary window appears.
10. Review the configuration shown in the Virtual Disk Summary window.
If you want to change something, click Back and change the
configuration parameters.
11. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
7.1.5 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1
Follow these steps to create a RAID 1 storage configuration using the
Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard:
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select
two available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to
move the selected drives to the right panel.
Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software will not allow you to
select the disk drive on which the operating system is
installed or any other drives that are already part of a
configuration.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 1 array.
3. To add a hotspare to an array, select an available drive in the left
panel. Select the array from the drop-down menu, and click Add
Hotspare To, as shown in Figure 7.7.
Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-11
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 7.7 Manual Configuration – Adding a Hotspare
4. To remove a hotspare from an array, select it in the right panel and
click Remove HotSpare.
5. Click Next.
The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in
Figure 7.6.
The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new array(s) that you just
defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could
be used for a new configuration.
6. Select the array to use for the new virtual disk.
7. In the right panel, select RAID 1 as the RAID level.
8. (Optional) Set Size (in MB) to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual disk.
9. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For
more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk
Parameters.”
10. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk.
7-12 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk
that you just defined.
11. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step.
The Virtual Disk Summary window appears.
12. Review the configuration shown in the window. If you want to change
something, click Back and change the configuration parameters.
13. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
7.1.6 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10
Follow these steps to create a RAID 10 storage configuration using the
Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard:
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select
two available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to
move the selected drives to the right panel.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for a new RAID 1 array.
3. Select two more drives for a second RAID 1 array, and click Accept.
4. To add a hotspare, select an available drive in the left panel. Select
the array from the drop-down menu, and click Add Hotspare To, as
shown in Figure 7.7.
5. To remove a hotspare from an array, select it in the right panel and
click Remove HotSpare.
6. Click Next.
The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in
Figure 7.6.
The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new arrays that you just
defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could
be used for a new configuration.
7. In the left panel, select the two RAID 1 arrays from the menu.
8. In the right panel, select RAID 10 as the RAID level.
For a RAID 10 array, the entire capacity of the array is automatically
used for the new virtual disk. You cannot define another virtual disk
on this array.
Adding Hotspare Disks 7-13
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
9. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For
more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk
Parameters.”
10. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk.
Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk
that you just defined.
11. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step.
The Virtual Disk Summary window appears.
12. Review the configuration shown in the window. If you want to change
something, click Back and change the configuration parameters.
13. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
7.2 Adding Hotspare Disks
Hotspares are disk drives that are available to automatically replace
failed drives in a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 virtual disk. Only global
hotspares are supported for Embedded MegaRAID Software.
To add a global hotspare disk, follow these steps:
1. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, rightclick
the icon of any unused disk drive.
2. Select Make Global Hotspare.
Make sure the capacity of the hotspare drive is equal to or larger
than the capacity of the disks in the array and that it is the same type
of drive (SAS or SATA).
Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is
SAS and the array drives are SATA, or vice versa. Once
the rebuilt is completed, LSI recommends that you replace
the new array member with a drive of the same type.
7-14 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.3 Changing Adjustable Task Rates
Follow these steps if you need to change the adjustable rates for rebuilds
and other system tasks that run in the background:
Note: LSI recommends that you leave the adjustable task rates at
their default settings to achieve the best system
performance. If you raise the task rates above the defaults,
foreground tasks will run more slowly and it may seem that
the system is not responding. If you lower the task rates
below the defaults, rebuilds and other background tasks
may run very slowly and may not complete within a
reasonable time. If you decide to change the values, record
the original default value here so you can restore them
later, if necessary:
Rebuild Rate: ____________
Background Initialization (BGI) Rate: ____________
Check Consistency Rate: ____________
1. Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID
Storage Manager window, and select a controller icon.
2. In the right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select
the Operations tab, and select Set Adjustable Task Rates.
The task rates appear in the right panel.
3. Enter changes, as needed, to the task rates for Rebuild Rate,
Background Initialization (BGI) Rate (for fast initialization), and Check
Consistency Rate (for consistency checks). Each task rate can be
set from 0 to 100. The higher the number, the faster the activity will
run in the background, possibly impacting other system tasks.
4. Click Go to accept the new task rates.
5. When the warning message appears, click OK to confirm that you
want to change the task rates.
Changing Virtual Disk Properties 7-15
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.4 Changing Virtual Disk Properties
You can change a virtual disk’s Read Policy, Write Policy, and other
properties at any time after the virtual disk is created. To do this, follow
these steps:
1. Select a virtual disk icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. In the right panel, select the Properties tab, and then select Set
Virtual Disk Properties.
A list of Virtual Disk Properties appears in the right panel.
3. Change the virtual disk properties as needed in the right panel. For
information on these properties, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding
Virtual Disk Parameters,” page 7-3.
Note: Only the Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead functions are
supported in Embedded MegaRAID Software.
4. Click Go to accept the changes.
7.5 Deleting a Virtual Disk
Caution: Be sure to back up the data on the virtual disk before you
delete it. Be sure that the operating system is not installed
on this virtual disk.
You can delete virtual disks to rearrange the storage space. To delete a
virtual disk, follow these steps:
1. Back up all user data that is on the virtual disk you intend to delete.
2. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select
the Logical tab, and click the icon of the virtual disk you want to
delete.
3. In the right panel, select the Operations tab, and select Delete
Virtual Disk.
4. Click Go.
5. When the warning message appears, click Yes to confirm that you
want to delete the virtual disk.
7-16 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.6 Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk
You can save an existing controller configuration to a file so you can
apply it to another controller. To save a configuration file, follow these
steps:
1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations ->
Configuration -> Save Configuration.
The Save dialog box appears.
3. In the Save dialog box, type a name for the configuration file, or
accept the default name (hostname.cfg).
4. Click Save to save the configuration file.
7.7 Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller
You can use the Add New Configuration option to add a new storage
configuration while keeping the existing configuration. Alternatively, you
can clear the existing storage configuration from a controller and then
create a totally new configuration or load a previously saved
configuration file.
Caution: Before you clear a configuration, be sure to save any data
that you want to keep. Clearing a configuration deletes all
data from the disks of the existing configuration. Be sure
that the operating system is not installed on this
configuration.
To clear a configuration from a controller, follow these steps:
1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations ->
Configuration -> Clear Configuration.
A Warning message appears.
3. Click Yes to clear the configuration or No to cancel the operation.
Adding a Saved Storage Configuration 7-17
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.8 Adding a Saved Storage Configuration
When you replace a controller, or when you want to duplicate an existing
storage configuration on a new controller, you can add a saved
configuration to the controller.
Caution: When you add a saved configuration to a replacement
controller, be sure that the number and size of the physical
disks connected to the controller are exactly the same as
when the configuration was saved.
To add a saved configuration, follow these steps:
1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations ->
Configuration -> Add Saved Configuration.
A Warning message appears.
3. Click Yes.
4. When the Open dialog box appears, select the configuration file, and
click Open.
5. View the configuration detail, then select Apply.
6. Confirm the new configuration when prompted.
7-18 Configuration
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 8-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Monitoring System Events and
Storage Devices
The MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to monitor the
status of disk drives, virtual disks, and other storage devices. This
chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to
perform the following monitoring tasks:
• Section 8.1, “Monitoring System Events”
• Section 8.2, “Monitoring Controllers”
• Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk Drives”
• Section 8.4, “Monitoring Virtual Disks”
• Section 8.5, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes”
8.1 Monitoring System Events
MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and
performance of all controllers in the system and the storage devices
connected to them. When an event occurs (such as the creation of a new
virtual disk or the removal of a physical drive) an event message appears
in the log displayed at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager
window.
Each event in the log includes an error level (Information, Warning,
Caution, Fatal, or Dead) a date and timestamp, and a brief description.
(For a list of all events, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.”)
The Log menu has three options:
• Save Log: Saves the current log to a file.
• Clear Log: Clears the current log information.
• Load Log: Enables you to load a different log file.
8-2 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
8.2 Monitoring Controllers
Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers act as virtual
“controllers.” Because these are not actual hardware
storage controllers installed in the computer system, some
of the controller properties shown in the screen below do
not apply to them.
When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the
status of all controllers in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window. If the controller is operating normally, the controller
icon looks like this: . If the controller has failed, a small red circle
appears to the right of the icon. (See Section 6.2.1, “Physical/Logical
View Panel” for a complete list of device icons.)
To display complete controller information, click a controller icon in the
left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the
Properties tab in the right panel. Figure 8.1 shows the Controller
Information window.
Figure 8.1 Controller Information
Monitoring Disk Drives 8-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Most of the information on this screen is self-explanatory. Note the
following:
• The Rebuild Rate, Consistency Check Rate, and BGI Rate
(background initialization) are all user selectable. For more
information, see Section 7.3, “Changing Adjustable Task Rates,”
page 7-14.
• The BBU Present field indicates whether a battery backup unit is
installed.
The Alarm Present and Alarm Enabled fields indicate whether the
controller has an alarm to alert the user with an audible tone when there
is an error or problem on the controller. There are options on the
controller Properties tab for silencing or disabling the alarm.
8.3 Monitoring Disk Drives
When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the
status of all physical disk drives in the left panel of the MegaRAID
Storage Manager window. If the disk drive is operating normally, its icon
looks like this: . If the disk drive has failed, a small red circle appears
to the right of the icon, like this: . (See Section 6.2.1,
“Physical/Logical View Panel” for a complete list of device icons.)
To display complete disk drive information, click a disk drive icon in the
left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the
Properties tab in the right panel.
Figure 8.2 shows the Properties panel for a physical drive.
8-4 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 8.2 Physical Drive Information
The information on this panel is self-explanatory. There are no userselectable
properties for physical devices. Icons for other storage
devices such as CD-ROM drives and DAT drives may also appear in the
left panel.
The next release of Embedded MegaRAID Software will enable you to
identify which physical drive is represented by a disk icon on the left by
blinking the drive’s LED. (This will work only for drives that are in a disk
enclosure.) The procedure for doing this is as follows:
1. Click the physical disk icon in the left panel.
2. Click the Operations tab in the right panel.
3. Select Locate Physical Drive, and click Go.
The LED on the physical disk drive in the enclosure starts blinking to
show its location.
4. To stop the disk drive light from blinking, select Stop Locating
Physical Drive, and click Go.
Monitoring Virtual Disks 8-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
To display a graphical view of a disk drive, click on a drive icon in the
left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the
Graphical View tab. In Graphical View, the drive’s storage capacity is
color coded according to the legend shown on the screen: configured
space is blue, available space is white, and reserved space is red. When
you select a virtual disk from the drop-down menu, the disk space used
by that virtual disk is displayed in green.
8.4 Monitoring Virtual Disks
When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the
status of all virtual disks. If a virtual disk is operating normally, the icon
looks like this: . If the virtual disk is running in Degraded mode (for
example, if a physical disk has failed) a small yellow circle appears to
the right of the icon: .
When the Logical tab is selected, the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window shows which physical disks are used by each virtual
disk. The same physical disk can be used by multiple virtual disks.
To display complete virtual disk information, click the Logical tab in the
left panel, click on a virtual disk icon in the left panel, and click the
Properties tab in the right panel. Figure 8.3 shows the Properties panel
for a virtual disk.
8-6 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 8.3 Virtual Disk Properties
The RAID level, stripe size, and access policy of the virtual disk are set
when it is configured.
Note: You can change the read policy, write policy, and other
virtual disk properties by selecting Operations->Set Virtual
Disk Properties.
The next release of Embedded MegaRAID Software will enable you to
identify which physical drives are used in a virtual disk by blinking the
drive LEDs. (This will work only for drives that are in a disk enclosure.)
The procedure for doing this is as follows:
1. Click the virtual disk icon in the left panel.
2. Click the Operations tab in the right panel.
3. Select Locate Virtual Disk, and click Go.
The LEDs on the physical disk drives in the virtual disk start blinking
(except for hotspare drives).
4. To stop the LEDs from blinking, select Stop Locating Virtual Disk,
and click Go.
Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes 8-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
To display a graphical view of a virtual disk, click on a virtual disk icon in
the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the
Graphical View tab. In Graphical View, the disk group (array) used for
this virtual disk is shaded blue to show how much of the disk group
capacity is used by this virtual disk. If part of the disk group is shaded
white, this indicates that some of the capacity is used by another virtual
disk. In a RAID 10 configuration, two disk groups are used by one virtual
disk.
8.5 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes
MegaRAID Storage Manager software allows you to monitor the progress
of rebuilds and other lengthy processes in the Group Show Progress
window. Open this window, shown in Figure 8.4 by selecting Group
Operations->Show Progress on the menu bar.
Figure 8.4 Group Show Progress Window
8-8 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Operations on virtual disks appear in the left panel of the Group Show
Progress window, and operations on physical drives appear in the right
panel. The following operations appear in this window:
• Background or foreground initialization of a virtual disk
• Rebuild (see Section 9.3, “Rebuilding a Drive”)
• Consistency check (see Section 9.2, “Running a Consistency
Check”)
To abort an ongoing process, click the Abort button next to the status
indicator. Click Abort All to abort all ongoing processes. Click Close to
close the window.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 9-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 9
Maintaining and Managing
Storage Configurations
This section explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software
to maintain and manage storage configurations. This chapter explains
how to perform the following tasks:
• Section 9.1, “Initializing a Virtual Disk”
• Section 9.2, “Running a Consistency Check”
• Section 9.3, “Rebuilding a Drive”
• Section 9.4, “Making a Drive Offline”
9.1 Initializing a Virtual Disk
To initialize a virtual disk after completing the configuration process,
follow these steps:
1. Select the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window, and click the icon of the virtual disk that you want
to initialize.
2. Select Group Operations->Initialize.
The Group Initialize dialog box appears.
3. Select the virtual disk(s) to initialize.
Caution: Initialization erases all data on the virtual disk. Be sure to
back up any data you want to keep before you initialize. Be
sure the operating system is not installed on the virtual disk
you are initializing.
4. Select the Fast Initialization check box if you want to use this
option. If you leave the box unchecked, MegaRAID Storage Manager
software will run a Full Initialization on the virtual disk. (For more
9-2 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk
Parameters.”)
5. Click Start to begin the initialization.
You can monitor the progress of the initialization. See Section 8.5,
“Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” for more information.
9.2 Running a Consistency Check
You should periodically run a consistency check on fault-tolerant virtual
disks. It is especially important to do this if you suspect that the virtual
disk consistency data may be corrupted. Be sure to back up the data
before running a consistency check, if you think the consistency data
may be corrupted.
To run a consistency check, follow these steps:
1. Select Group Operations->Check Consistency.
The Group Consistency Check window appears.
2. Select the virtual disks that you want to check, or click Select All to
select all virtual disks.
3. Click Start to begin.
You can monitor the progress of the consistency check. See
Section 8.5, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” for more
information.
Note: You can also run a consistency check by selecting the
virtual disk icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window and selecting the option on the Operation
tab in the right panel.
9.3 Rebuilding a Drive
If a single drive in a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 virtual disk fails, the
system is protected from data loss. The failed drive must be replaced,
and the drive’s data must be rebuilt on a new drive to restore the system
to fault tolerance. (You can choose to rebuild the data on the failed drive
Making a Drive Offline 9-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
if the drive is still operational.) If hotspare disks are available, the failed
drive is rebuilt automatically without any user intervention.
If a drive has failed, a red circle appears to the right of the disk drive
icon: . A small yellow circle appears to the right of the icon of the
virtual disk that uses this physical disk: . This indicates that the
virtual disk is in a degraded state; the data is still safe, but data could be
lost if another drive fails.
Follow these steps if you need to rebuild a physical drive:
1. Right-click the icon of the failed drive, and select Rebuild.
2. Click Yes when the warning message appears. If the drive is still
good, a rebuild will start.
You can monitor the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show
Progress window by selecting Group Operations->Show Progress.
If the drive cannot be rebuilt, an error message appears. Continue
with the next step.
3. Shut down the system, disconnect the power cord, and open the
computer case.
4. Replace the failed disk drive with a new drive of equal capacity.
5. Close the computer case, reconnect the power cord, and restart the
computer.
6. Restart the MegaRAID Storage Manager software.
When the new drive spins up, the drive icon changes back to normal
status, and the rebuild process begins automatically. You can monitor
the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show Progress window by
selecting Group Operations->Show Progress.
9.4 Making a Drive Offline
If a disk drive is currently part of a redundant configuration and you want
to use it in another configuration, you can use MegaRAID Storage
Manager commands to remove the disk drive from the first configuration.
When you do this, all data on that drive is lost.
9-4 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
To remove the disk drive from the configuration without harming the data
on the virtual disk, follow these steps:
1. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, rightclick
the icon of a disk drive in a redundant virtual disk.
2. Select Make drive offline from the pop-up menu. The disk drive
status changes to Offline.
3. Select File->Rescan. The disk drive status remains as Offline. At
this point, the data on this disk drive is no longer valid.
4. If necessary, create a hotspare disk for the virtual disk from which
you removed the disk drive. (See Section 7.2, “Adding Hotspare
Disks.”)
When a hotspare is available, the data on the virtual disk will be
rebuilt. You can now use the removed disk for another configuration.
Caution: If MegaRAID Storage Manager software detects that a disk
drive in a virtual disk has failed, it makes the drive Offline.
If this happens, you must remove the disk drive and replace
it. You cannot make the drive usable for another
configuration by using the Rescan command.
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide A-1
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Appendix A
Events and Messages
This appendix lists the MegaRAID Storage Manager software events that
may appear in the event log.
MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and
performance of all controllers in the workstation and the devices attached
to them. When an event occurs, such as the start of an initialization, an
event message appears in the log at the bottom of the MegaRAID
Storage Manager window.
Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software can be used to
manage a wide range of MegaRAID controllers. Some of
the events and messages listed in this appendix are not
applicable to Embedded MegaRAID Software.
Each message that appears in the event log has an error level that
indicates the severity of the event, as shown in Table A.1.
Table A.2 lists all of the MegaRAID Storage Manager software event
messages. The event message descriptions include placeholders for
specific values that are determined when the event is generated. Some
of the error messages are relevant only for hardware RAID.
Table A.1 Event Error Levels
Error Level Meaning
Information Informational message; no user action is necessary.
Warning Some component may be close to a failure point.
Caution A component has failed, but the system has not lost data.
Fatal A component has failed, and data loss has occurred or will
occur.
Dead A catastrophic error has occurred, and the controller has died.
This event is seen only after the controller has been restarted.
A-2 Events and Messages
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2 Event Messages
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
0x0000 0 Information Firmware initialization started (PCI ID %04x/%04x/%04x/%04x)
0x0001 1 Information Firmware version %s
0x0002 2 Fatal Unable to recover cache data from TBBU
0x0003 3 Information Cache data recovered from TBBU successfully
0x0004 4 Information Configuration cleared
0x0005 5 Warning Cluster down; communication with peer lost
0x0006 6 Information %s ownership changed from %02x to %02x
0x0007 7 Information Alarm disabled by user
0x0008 8 Information Alarm enabled by user
0x0009 9 Information Background initialization rate changed to %d%%
0x000a 10 Fatal Controller cache discarded due to memory/battery problems
0x000b 11 Fatal Unable to recover cache data due to configuration mismatch
0x000c 12 Information Cache data recovered successfully
0x000d 13 Fatal Controller cache discarded due to firmware version incompatibility
0x000e 14 Information Consistency Check rate changed to %d%%
0x000f 15 Dead Fatal firmware error: %s
0x0010 16 Information Factory defaults restored
0x0011 17 Information Flash downloaded image corrupt
0x0012 18 Caution Flash erase error
0x0013 19 Caution Flash timeout during erase
0x0014 20 Caution Flash error
0x0015 21 Information Flashing image: %s
0x0016 22 Information Flash of new firmware image(s) complete
0x0017 23 Caution Flash programming error
0x0018 24 Caution Flash timeout during programming
0x0019 25 Caution Flash chip type unknown
0x001a 26 Caution Flash command set unknown
0x001b 27 Caution Flash verify failure
0x001c 28 Information Flush rate changed to %d seconds
0x001d 29 Information Hibernate command received from host
(Sheet 1 of 9)
A-3
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
0x001e 30 Information Event log cleared
0x001f 31 Information Event log wrapped
0x0020 32 Dead Multi-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s)
0x0021 33 Warning Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s)
0x0022 34 Dead Not enough controller memory
0x0023 35 Information Patrol Read complete
0x0024 36 Information Patrol Read paused
0x0025 37 Information Patrol Read Rate changed to %d%%
0x0026 38 Information Patrol Read resumed
0x0027 39 Information Patrol Read started
0x0028 40 Information Rebuild rate changed to %d%%
0x0029 41 Information Reconstruction rate changed to %d%%
0x002a 42 Information Shutdown command received from host
0x002b 43 Information Test event: %s
0x002c 44 Information Time established as %s; (%d seconds since power on)
0x002d 45 Information User entered firmware debugger
0x002e 46 Warning Background Initialization aborted on %s
0x002f 47 Warning Background Initialization corrected medium error (%s at %lx
0x0030 48 Information Background Initialization completed on %s
0x0031 49 Fatal Background Initialization corrected medium error (%s at %lx, %s at
%lx)
0x0032 50 Fatal Background Initialization detected uncorrectable double medium
errors (%s at %lx on %s)
0x0033 51 Caution Background Initialization failed on %s
0x0034 52 Progress Background Initialization progress on %s is %s
0x0035 53 Information Background Initialization started on %s
0x0036 54 Information Policy change on %s from %s to %s
0x0038 56 Warning Consistency Check aborted on %s
0x0039 57 Warning Consistency Check corrected medium error (%s at %lx, %s at %lx)
0x003a 58 Information Consistency Check done on %s
0x003b 59 Information Consistency Check done with corrections on %s, (corrections=%d)
Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.)
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
(Sheet 2 of 9)
A-4 Events and Messages
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
0x003c 60 Fatal Consistency Check detected uncorrectable double medium errors
(%s at %lx on %s)
0x003d 61 Caution Consistency Check failed on %s
0x003e 62 Fatal Consistency Check failed with uncorrectable data on %s
0x003f 63 Warning Consistency Check found inconsistent parity on %s at strip %lx
0x0040 64 Warning Consistency Check inconsistency logging disabled on %s (too
many inconsistencies)
0x0041 65 Progress Consistency Check progress on %s is %s
0x0042 66 Information Consistency Check started on %s
0x0043 67 Warning Initialization aborted on %s
0x0044 68 Caution Initialization failed on %s
0x0045 69 Progress Initialization progress on %s is %s
0x0046 70 Information Fast initialization started on %s
0x0047 71 Information Full initialization started on %s
0x0048 72 Information Initialization complete on %s
0x0049 73 Information Properties updated to %s (from %s)
0x004a 74 Information Reconstruction complete on %s
0x004b 75 Fatal Reconstruction of %s stopped due to unrecoverable errors
0x004c 76 Fatal Reconstruct detected uncorrectable double medium errors (%s at
%lx on %s at %lx)
0x004d 77 Progress Reconstruction progress on %s is %s
0x004e 78 Information Reconstruction resumed on %s
0x004f 79 Fatal Reconstruction resume of %s failed due to configuration mismatch
0x0050 80 Information Reconstructing started on %s
0x0051 81 Information State change on %s from %s to %s
0x0052 82 Information Clear aborted on %s
0x0053 83 Caution Clear failed on %s (Error %02x)
0x0054 84 Progress Clear progress on %s is %s
0x0055 85 Information Clear started on %s
0x0056 86 Information Clear completed on %s
0x0057 87 Warning Error on %s (Error %02x)
Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.)
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
(Sheet 3 of 9)
A-5
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
0x0058 88 Information Format complete on %s
0x0059 89 Information Format started on %s
0x005a 90 Caution Hot Spare SMART polling failed on %s (Error %02x)
0x005b 91 Information Inserted: %s
0x005c 92 Warning %s is not supported
0x005d 93 Warning Patrol Read corrected medium error on %s at %lx
0x005e 94 Progress Patrol Read progress on %s is %s
0x005f 95 Fatal Patrol Read found an uncorrectable medium error on %s at %lx
0x0060 96 Caution Predictive failure: %s
0x0061 97 Fatal Puncturing bad block on %s at %lx
0x0062 98 Information Rebuild aborted by user on %s
0x0063 99 Information Rebuild complete on %s
0x0064 100 Information Rebuild complete on %s
0x0065 101 Caution Rebuild failed on %s due to source drive error
0x0066 102 Caution Rebuild failed on %s due to target drive error
0x0067 103 Progress Rebuild progress on %s is %s
0x0068 104 Information Rebuild resumed on %s
0x0069 105 Information Rebuild started on %s
0x006a 106 Information Rebuild automatically started on %s
0x006b 107 Caution Rebuild stopped on %s due to loss of cluster ownership
0x006c 108 Fatal Reassign write operation failed on %s at %lx
0x006d 109 Fatal Unrecoverable medium error during rebuild on %s at %lx
0x006e 110 Information Corrected medium error during recovery on %s at %lx
0x006f 111 Fatal Unrecoverable medium error during recovery on %s at %lx
0x0070 112 Information Removed: %s
0x0071 113 Warning Unexpected sense: %s, CDB%s, Sense: %s
0x0072 114 Information State change on %s from %s to %s
0x0073 115 Information State change by user on %s from %s to %s
0x0074 116 Warning Redundant path to %s broken
0x0075 117 Information Redundant path to %s restored
Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.)
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
(Sheet 4 of 9)
A-6 Events and Messages
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
0x0076 118 Information Dedicated Hot Spare PD %s no longer useful due to deleted array
0x0077 119 Caution SAS topology error: Loop detected
0x0078 120 Caution SAS topology error: Unaddressable device
0x0079 121 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple ports to the same SAS address
0x007a 122 Caution SAS topology error: Expander error
0x007b 123 Caution SAS topology error: SMP timeout
0x007c 124 Caution SAS topology error: Out of route entries
0x007d 125 Caution SAS topology error: Index not found
0x007e 126 Caution SAS topology error: SMP function failed
0x007f 127 Caution SAS topology error: SMP CRC error
0x0080 128 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple subtractive
0x0081 129 Caution SAS topology error: Table to table
0x0082 130 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple paths
0x0083 131 Fatal Unable to access device %s
0x0084 132 Information Dedicated Hot Spare created on %s (%s)
0x0085 133 Information Dedicated Hot Spare %s (%s) disabled
0x0086 134 Caution Dedicated Hot Spare %s no longer useful for all arrays
0x0087 135 Information Global Hot Spare created on %s (%s)
0x0088 136 Information Global Hot Spare %s (%s) disabled
0x0089 137 Caution Global Hot Spare %s does not cover all arrays
0x008a 138 Information Created %s
0x008b 139 Information Deleted %s
0x008c 140 Information Marking %s inconsistent due to active writes at shutdown
0x008d 141 Information Battery Present
0x008e 142 Warning Battery Not Present
0x008f 143 Information New Battery Detected
0x0090 144 Information Battery has been replaced
0x0091 145 Caution Battery temperature is high
0x0092 146 Warning Battery voltage low
0x0093 147 Information Battery started charging
Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.)
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
(Sheet 5 of 9)
A-7
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
0x0094 148 Information Battery is discharging
0x0095 149 Information Battery temperature is normal
0x0096 150 Fatal Battery needs replacement - SOH Bad
0x0097 151 Information Battery relearn started
0x0098 152 Information Battery relearn in progress
0x0099 153 Information Battery relearn completed
0x009a 154 Caution Battery relearn timed out
0x009b 155 Information Battery relearn pending: Battery is under charge
0x009c 156 Information Battery relearn postponed
0x009d 157 Information Battery relearn will start in 4 days
0x009e 158 Information Battery relearn will start in 2 day
0x009f 159 Information Battery relearn will start in 1 day
0x00a0 160 Information Battery relearn will start in 5 hours
0x00a1 161 Information Battery removed
0x00a2 162 Information Current capacity of the battery is below threshold
0x00a3 163 Information Current capacity of the battery is above threshold
0x00a4 164 Information Enclosure (SES) discovered on %s
0x00a5 165 Information Enclosure (SAFTE) discovered on %s
0x00a6 166 Caution Enclosure %s communication lost
0x00a7 167 Information Enclosure %s communication restored
0x00a8 168 Caution Enclosure %s fan %d failed
0x00a9 169 Information Enclosure %s fan %d inserted
0x00aa 170 Caution Enclosure %s fan %d removed
0x00ab 171 Caution Enclosure %s power supply %d failed
0x00ac 172 Information Enclosure %s power supply %d inserted
0x00ad 173 Caution Enclosure %s power supply %d removed
0x00ae 174 Caution Enclosure %s EMM %d failed
0x00af 175 Information Enclosure %s EMM %d inserted
0x00b0 176 Caution Enclosure %s EMM %d removed
0x00b1 177 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d below warning threshold
Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.)
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
(Sheet 6 of 9)
A-8 Events and Messages
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
0x00b2 178 Caution Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d below error threshold
0x00b3 179 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d above warning threshold
0x00b4 180 Caution Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d above error threshold
0x00b5 181 Caution Enclosure %s shutdown
0x00b6 182 Warning Enclosure %s not supported; too many enclosures connected to
port
0x00b7 183 Caution Enclosure %s firmware mismatch (EMM %d)
0x00b8 184 Warning Enclosure %s sensor %d bad
0x00b9 185 Caution Enclosure %s phy bad for slot %d
0x00ba 186 Caution Enclosure %s is unstable
0x00bb 187 Caution Enclosure %s hardware error
0x00bc 188 Caution Enclosure %s not responding
0x00bd 189 Information SAS/SATA mixing not supported in enclosure; %s disabled
0x00be 190 Information Enclosure (SES) hotplug on %s was detected, but is not supported
0x00bf 191 Information Clustering enabled
0x00c0 192 Information Clustering disabled
0x00c1 193 Information PD too small to be used for auto-rebuild on %s
0x00c2 194 Information BBU enabled; changing WT virtual disks to WB
0x00c3 195 Warning BBU disabled; changing WB virtual disks to WT
0x00c4 196 Warning Bad block table on %s is 80% full
0x00c5 197 Fatal Bad block table on %s is full; unable to log block %lx
0x00c6 198 Information Consistency Check Aborted Due to Ownership Loss on %s
0x00c7 199 Information Background Initialization (BGI) Aborted Due to Ownership Loss on
%s
0x00c8 200 Caution Battery/charger problems detected; SOH Bad
0x00c9 201 Warning Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); warning
threshold exceeded
0x00ca 202 Caution Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); critical
threshold exceeded
0x00cb 203 Caution Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); further
reporting disabled
0x00cc 204 Caution Enclosure %s Power supply %d switched off
Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.)
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
(Sheet 7 of 9)
A-9
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
0x00cd 205 Information Enclosure %s Power supply %d switched on
0x00ce 206 Caution Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable removed
0x00cf 207 Information Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable inserted
0x00d0 208 Information Enclosure %s Fan %d returned to normal
0x00d1 209 Information BBU Retention test was initiated on previous boot
0x00d2 210 Information BBU Retention test passed
0x00d3 211 Caution BBU Retention test failed!
0x00d4 212 Information NVRAM Retention test was initiated on previous boot
0x00d5 213 Information NVRAM Retention test passed
0x00d6 214 Caution NVRAM Retention test failed!
0x00d7 215 Information %s test completed %d passes successfully
0x00d8 216 Caution %s test FAILED on %d pass. Fail data: errorOffset=%x
goodData=%x badData=%x
0x00d9 217 Information Self check diagnostics completed
0x00da 218 Information Foreign Configuration Detected
0x00db 219 Information Foreign Configuration Imported
0x00dc 220 Information Foreign Configuration Cleared
0x00dd 221 Warning NVRAM is corrupt; reinitializing
0x00de 222 Warning NVRAM mismatch occurred
0x00df 223 Warning SAS wide port %d lost link on PHY %d
0x00e0 224 Information SAS wide port %d restored link on PHY %d
0x00e1 225 Warning SAS port %d, PHY %d has exceeded the allowed error rate
0x00e2 226 Warning Bad block reassigned on %s at %lx to %lx
0x00e3 227 Information Controller Hot Plug detected
0x00e4 228 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d differential detected
0x00e5 229 Information Disk test cannot start. No qualifying disks found
0x00e6 230 Information Time duration provided by host is not sufficient for self check
0x00e7 231 Information Marked Missing for %s on array %d row %d
0x00e8 232 Information Replaced Missing as %s on array %d row %d
0x00e9 233 Information Enclosure %s Temperature %d returned to normal
0x00ea 234 Information Enclosure %s Firmware download in progress
Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.)
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
(Sheet 8 of 9)
A-10 Events and Messages
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
0x00eb 235 Warning Enclosure %s Firmware download failed
0x00ec 236 Warning %s is not a certified drive
0x00ed 237 Information Dirty cache data discarded by user
0x00ee 238 Information PDs missing from configuration at boot
0x00ef 239 Information VDs missing drives and will go offline at boot: %s
0x00f0 240 Information VDs missing at boot: %s
0x00f1 241 Information Previous configuration completely missing at boot
0x00f2 242 Information Battery charge complete
0x00f3 243 Information Enclosure %s fan %d speed changed
0x00f4 244 Information Dedicated spare %s imported as global due to missing arrays
0x00f5 245 Information %s rebuild not possible as SAS/SATA is not supported in an array
0x00f6 246 Information SEP %s has been rebooted as a part of enclosure firmware
download. SEP will be unavailable until this process completes.
0x00f7 247 Information Inserted: %s Info: %s
0x00f8 248 Information Removed: %s Info: %s
0x00f9 249 Information %s is now OPTIMAL
0x00fa 250 Warning %s is now PARTIALLY DEGRADED
0x00fb 251 Caution %s is now DEGRADED
0x00fc 252 Fatal %s is now OFFLINE
0x00fd 253 Warning Battery requires reconditioning; please initiate a LEARN cycle
0x00fe 254 Warning VD %s disabled because RAID-5 is not supported by this RAID key
0x00ff 255 Warning VD %s disabled because RAID-6 is not supported by this controller
0x0100 256 Warning VD %s disabled because SAS drives are not supported by this
RAID key
Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.)
Number
(Hex)
Number
(Decimal) Type Event Text
(Sheet 9 of 9)
Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide
Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Customer Feedback
We would appreciate your feedback on this document. Please copy the
following page, add your comments, and fax it to us at the number
shown.
If appropriate, please also fax copies of any marked-up pages from this
document.
Important: Please include your name, phone number, fax number, and
company address so that we may contact you directly for
clarification or additional information.
Thank you for your help in improving the quality of our documents.
Reader’s Comments
Fax your comments to: LSI Logic Corporation
Technical Publications
M/S AF-198
Fax: 408.433.4333
Please tell us how you rate this document: Embedded MegaRAID Software
User’s Guide. Place a check mark in the appropriate blank for each
category.
What could we do to improve this document?
If you found errors in this document, please specify the error and page
number. If appropriate, please fax a marked-up copy of the page(s).
Please complete the information below so that we may contact you
directly for clarification or additional information.
Excellent Good Average Fair Poor
Completeness of information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Clarity of information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Ease of finding information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Technical content ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Usefulness of examples and
illustrations
____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overall manual ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Name Date
Telephone
Title
Company Name
Street
City, State, Zip
Department Mail Stop
Fax
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 1
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015
Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes
12 August 2014
Table of Contents
1 Introduction............................................................................................................................3
1.1 Changes since Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 SP1 (New in Intel® Parallel
Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition)...........................................................................................4
1.2 Product Contents............................................................................................................4
1.3 System Requirements ....................................................................................................5
1.3.1 Visual Studio 2008* is Not Supported .....................................................................6
1.3.2 Windows XP* is Not Supported...............................................................................6
1.4 Documentation ...............................................................................................................6
1.4.1 Documentation on Creating Windows-based Applications on the Web ..................6
1.4.2 Documentation Viewing Issue with Microsoft Internet Explorer* 10 and Windows
Server* 2012..........................................................................................................................7
1.5 Optimization Notice ........................................................................................................7
1.6 Samples..........................................................................................................................7
1.7 Japanese Language Support .........................................................................................7
1.8 Technical Support...........................................................................................................8
2 Installation..............................................................................................................................8
2.1 Pre-Installation Steps .....................................................................................................8
2.1.1 Install Prerequisite Software....................................................................................8
2.2 Installation of Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS)........................8
2.3 Online Installer................................................................................................................9
2.3.1 Storing Online Installer Download Content .............................................................9
2.4 Installation ......................................................................................................................9
2.4.1 Reboot After Install Recommended ........................................................................9
2.4.2 Cluster Installation.................................................................................................10
2.4.3 Using a License Server .........................................................................................10
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 2
2.4.4 Additional Steps to Install Documentation for Microsoft Visual Studio 2010*........10
2.5 Intel® Software Manager..............................................................................................10
2.6 Changing, Updating and Removing the Product ..........................................................10
2.7 Silent Install and Uninstall ............................................................................................11
2.7.1 Support of Non-Interactive Custom Installation.....................................................11
2.8 Installation Folders .......................................................................................................12
2.9 Known Installation Issues and changes .......................................................................13
3 Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler.............................................................................................13
3.1 Compatibility .................................................................................................................14
3.1.1 Stack Alignment Change for REAL(16) and COMPLEX(16) Datatypes (12.0) .....14
3.1.2 Static Form of the Intel® OpenMP* Library is No Longer Provided ......................14
3.1.3 Fortran Expression Evaluator................................................................................14
3.2 New and Changed Compiler Features .........................................................................15
3.2.1 Features from Fortran 2003 ..................................................................................15
3.2.2 Features from Fortran 2008 ..................................................................................15
3.2.3 Features from OpenMP* .......................................................................................15
3.2.4 New and Changed Directives................................................................................16
3.2.5 Other Features ......................................................................................................16
3.2.6 Coarrays (13.0) .....................................................................................................17
3.2.7 ATTRIBUTES ALIGN for component of derived type (13.0.1) ..............................17
3.2.8 Change in File Buffering Behavior (13.1) ..............................................................17
3.2.9 Static Analysis has been deprecated ....................................................................18
3.2.10 New run-time routines to get Fortran library version numbers ..............................18
3.3 New and Changed Compiler Options ...........................................................................18
3.3.1 New and Changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran
Windows*.............................................................................................................................18
3.4 Visual Studio Integration Changes ...............................................................................20
3.4.1 DLL Libraries Default in New Projects (14.0) ........................................................20
3.4.2 Parallel Build Option (13.1) ...................................................................................21
3.4.3 Improved source code navigation in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE .........................21
3.4.4 Changes in Optimization Report Options support in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE.21
3.4.5 Changes in Online Help format in Microsoft Visual Studio* ..................................21
3.5 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................21
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 3
3.5.1 Command-Line Diagnostic Issue for Filenames with Japanese Characters .........21
3.5.2 Debugging might fail when only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013 is installed ...21
3.5.3 Debugging mixed language programs with Fortran does not work .......................22
3.5.4 Update for Windows 7 causes LNK1123 error when building Visual Studio 2010
projects 22
3.5.5 Certain uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types are not yet
fully implemented.................................................................................................................23
3.6 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, 2012 and 2013 Notes....................................................23
3.6.1 Configuring Microsoft Visual C++ to Reference Intel® Fortran Run-Time Libraries
23
3.6.2 Adjusting Project Dependencies ...........................................................................24
3.6.3 Showing Documentation Issue with Visual Studio 2012 and Windows Server*
2012 and Windows Server* 2008 ........................................................................................25
3.7 Fortran 2003 and Fortran 2008 Feature Summary.......................................................25
4 Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC
Architecture)................................................................................................................................26
4.1 Features .......................................................................................................................26
4.2 Using the Intel® Debugger Extension ..........................................................................26
4.3 Documentation .............................................................................................................26
4.4 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................26
5 Intel® Math Kernel Library ...................................................................................................28
5.1 What's New in Intel MKL 11.2.......................................................................................28
5.2 Notes ............................................................................................................................31
5.3 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................32
5.4 Attributions....................................................................................................................32
6 Disclaimer and Legal Information ........................................................................................32
1 Introduction
This document describes how to install the product, provides a summary of new and changed
product features and includes notes about features and problems not described in the product
documentation. For the most current update to these release notes, see the release notes
posted at the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center where you
downloaded this product.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 4
Due to the nature of this comprehensive integrated software development tools solution,
different Intel® Parallel Studio XE Composer Edition components may be covered by different
licenses. Please see the licenses included in the distribution as well as the Disclaimer and Legal
Information section of these release notes for details.
1.1 Changes since Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 SP1 (New in Intel®
Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition)
Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler updated to version 15.0
o New Optimization Report interface, structure, and options (users of existing
options /Qopt-report, /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qpar-report are
strongly encouraged to consult the Intel Compiler User’s Guide for additional
details)
New IDE integration for optimization reports showing report information integrated with
source with hyperlinking to relevant areas. See the User’s Guide for details.
Additional OpenMP* 4.0 support
Create custom install packages with the online installer
Enable threadsafe profile generation with PGO
New INTEL_PROF_DYN_PREFIX environment variable to add custom prefix to PGO
.dyn filenames
Static Analysis is deprecated
Windows XP* not supported
Microsoft Visual Studio 2008* not supported
Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® MIC Architecture updated to version 7.7-8.0
Intel® Math Kernel Library updated to version 11.2
Corrections to reported problems
1.2 Product Contents
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* initial release includes
the following components:
Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler XE 15.0 for building applications that run on IA-32 and
Intel® 64 architecture systems
Intel® Math Kernel Library 11.2
Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC
Architecture)
Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) for debugging Fortran applications with Microsoft
Visual Studio*
Integration into Microsoft* development environments
Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* Shell and Libraries (not included with Evaluation licenses)
Sample programs
On-disk documentation
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 5
1.3 System Requirements
For an explanation of architecture names, see Intel® Architecture Platform Terminology
A PC based on an IA-32 or Intel® 64 architecture processor supporting the Intel®
Streaming SIMD Extensions 2 (Intel® SSE2) instructions (Intel® Pentium® 4 processor
or later, or compatible non-Intel processor
o For the best experience, a multi-core or multi-processor system is recommended
2GB RAM (4GB recommended)
4GB free disk space required for all product features and all architectures
For Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture)
development/testing:
o Intel® Xeon Phi™ processor
o Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS)
o Debugging of offload code requires Microsoft Visual Studio* 2012 or 2013
Microsoft Windows 7*, Microsoft Windows 8*, Microsoft Windows 8.1*, Microsoft
Windows Server 2012*, Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2* (IA-32 only), Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 (R2 SP1) or Microsoft Windows HPC Server 2008* (embedded
editions not supported)
o Microsoft Windows Server 2008 or Windows HPC Server 2008 requires Microsoft
Visual Studio 2013* or Visual Studio 2012* or Visual Studio 2010* or Visual
Studio 2010* Shell.
o On Microsoft Windows 8, Microsoft Windows 8.1, and Microsoft Windows Server
2012, the product installs into the “Desktop” environment. Development of
“Windows 8* UI” applications is not supported.
To use the Microsoft Visual Studio development environment or command-line tools to
build IA-32 or Intel® 64 architecture applications, one of:
o Microsoft Visual Studio 2013* Professional Edition or higher, with C++
component installed
o Microsoft Visual Studio 2012* Professional Edition or higher, with C++
component installed
o Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* Professional Edition or higher, with C++
component installed
o Intel® Visual Fortran development environment based on Microsoft Visual Studio
2010 Shell (included with some license types of Intel® Fortran Compiler) [1]
To use command-line tools only to build IA-32 architecture applications, one of:
o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2013 for Windows Desktop*
o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2012 for Windows Desktop*
o Microsoft Visual C++ 2010* Express Edition [2]
To use command-line tools only to build Intel® 64 architecture applications, one of:
o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2013 for Windows Desktop*
o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2012 for Windows Desktop*
o Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit for Windows 8.1*
o Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit for Windows 8*
To read the on-disk documentation, Adobe Reader* 7.0 or later
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 6
Notes:
1. Intel® Visual Fortran development environment based on Microsoft Visual Studio 2010*
Shell is included with Academic and Commercial licenses for Intel® Parallel Studio XE
2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. It is not included with Evaluation
licenses. This development environment provides everything necessary to edit, build and
debug Fortran applications. Some features of the full Visual Studio product are not
included, such as:
Resource Editor (see ResEdit* (http://www.resedit.net/), a third-party tool, for a
substitute)
Automated conversion of Compaq* Visual Fortran projects
Microsoft language tools such as Visual C++* or Visual Basic*
2. Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Express Edition will coexist with the Intel® Visual Fortran
Composer XE 2015 installation of Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell. Note that the C++
and Fortran development environments will be separate.
3. The default for Intel® Visual Fortran is to build IA-32 architecture applications that
require a processor supporting the Intel® SSE2 instructions. A compiler option is
available to generate code that will run on any IA-32 architecture processor. Note,
however, that applications calling Intel® MKL require a processor supporting the Intel®
SSE2 instructions.
4. Applications can be run on the same Windows versions as specified above for
development. Applications may also run on non-embedded 32-bit versions of Microsoft
Windows earlier than Windows 7, though Intel does not test these for compatibility. Your
application may depend on a Windows API routine not present in older versions of
Windows. You are responsible for testing application compatibility. You may need to
copy certain run-time DLLs onto the target system to run your application.
1.3.1 Visual Studio 2008* is Not Supported
Support has been removed for installation and use with Visual Studio 2008. Intel recommends
migrating to a newer version of Visual Studio*.
1.3.2 Windows XP* is Not Supported
Support has been removed for installation and use on Windows XP. Intel recommends
migrating to a newer version of these operating systems.
1.4 Documentation
Product documentation can be found in the Documentation folder as shown under Installation
Folders.
1.4.1 Documentation on Creating Windows-based Applications on the Web
Documentation on using QuickWin, dialogs and the Windows API is available from the Intel
Software Documentation Library: See Using Intel® Visual Fortran to Create and Build
Windows*-based Applications (PDF)
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 7
1.4.2 Documentation Viewing Issue with Microsoft Internet Explorer* 10 and Windows
Server* 2012
If on Windows Server 2012 you find that you cannot display help or documentation from within
Internet Explorer 10, modifying a security setting for Microsoft Internet Explorer usually corrects
the problem. From Tools > Internet Options > Security, add “about:internet” to the list of trusted
sites. Optionally, you can remove “about:internet” from the list of trusted sites after you finish
viewing the documentation.
1.5 Optimization Notice
Optimization Notice
Intel’s compilers may or may not optimize to the same degree for non-Intel microprocessors for
optimizations that are not unique to Intel microprocessors. These optimizations include SSE2,
SSE3, and SSSE3 instruction sets and other optimizations. Intel does not guarantee the
availability, functionality, or effectiveness of any optimization on microprocessors not
manufactured by Intel. Microprocessor-dependent optimizations in this product are intended for
use with Intel microprocessors. Certain optimizations not specific to Intel microarchitecture are
reserved for Intel microprocessors. Please refer to the applicable product User and Reference
Guides for more information regarding the specific instruction sets covered by this notice.
Notice revision #20110804
1.6 Samples
Samples for each product component can be found in the Samples folder as shown under
Installation Folders.
1.7 Japanese Language Support
Intel compilers provide support for Japanese language users when the combined JapaneseEnglish
installation is used. Error messages, visual development environment dialogs and some
documentation are provided in Japanese in addition to English. By default, the language of error
messages and dialogs matches that of your operating system language selection. Japaneselanguage
documentation can be found in the ja_JP subdirectory for documentation and
samples.
Japanese language support will be available in an update on or after the release of Intel®
Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows.
If you wish to use Japanese-language support on an English-language operating system, or
English-language support on a Japanese-language operating system, you will find instructions
at Changing Language Setting to see English on a Japanese OS Environment or Vice Versa on
Windows.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 8
1.8 Technical Support
If you did not register your compiler during installation, please do so at the Intel® Software
Development Products Registration Center. Registration entitles you to free technical support,
product updates and upgrades for the duration of the support term.
For information about how to find Technical Support, Product Updates, User Forums, FAQs, tips
and tricks, and other support information, please visit
http://www.intel.com/software/products/support/
Note: If your distributor provides technical support for this product, please contact them for
support rather than Intel.
2 Installation
2.1 Pre-Installation Steps
2.1.1 Install Prerequisite Software
If you will be installing the included Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell, additional Microsoft
software may be required to be installed before beginning the installation of Intel® Parallel
Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*.
Microsoft .NET 4.0 Framework* is required. If you do not already have this installed, you can
download the installer:
.NET 4.0 Framework 32-bit and 64-bit
If you are installing on Windows 8.1*, Windows 8*, Windows 7* or Windows Server 2008, the
installation of the Shell will attempt to download and install .NET Framework 4.0 automatically if
it is not already present. If this fails, the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for
Fortran Windows* install will fail with a message that may not indicate the exact problem. If you
find that the installation of the Shell fails, please download .NET 4.0 Framework from the above
link and try again.
If you are installing Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* from
the full product downloadable that includes Visual Studio 2010 Shell, it will try to install Visual
Studio 2010 Shell if you do not already have Visual Studio 2010 installed. If you do not want
Visual Studio 2010 Shell to install, you can choose a Custom install and deselect it, or choose
the “_novsshell.exe” downloadable installer.
2.2 Installation of Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS)
The Intel® Manycore Platform System Software (Intel® MPSS) should be installed only if you
plan to build applications that target an Intel® Xeon Phi™ coprocessor. Intel® MPSS may be
installed before or after installing the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for
Fortran Windows* product.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 9
Using the latest version of Intel® MPSS available is recommended. It is available from the
Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center at http://registrationcenter.intel.com
as part of your Intel® Parallel Studio XE for Windows* registration. Refer to the Intel® MPSS
documentation for the necessary steps to install the user space and kernel drivers.
2.3 Online Installer
The default electronic installation package now consists of a smaller installation package that
dynamically downloads and then installs packages selected to be installed. This requires a
working internet connection and potentially a proxy setting if you are behind an internet proxy.
Full packages are provided alongside where you download this online install package if a
working internet connection is not available. The online installer may be downloaded and saved
as an executable file which can then be launched from the command line.
2.3.1 Storing Online Installer Download Content
The online installer stores the downloaded content in the form-factor of the standard install
package which can then be copied and reused offline on other systems. The default download
location is \intel\downloads. This location may be changed with the online
installer command line option “--download-dir [FOLDER]”. The online installer also supports a
download only mode which allows the user to create a package without installation. This mode
is enabled with the “--download-only” command line option.
2.4 Installation
The installation of the product requires a valid license file or serial number. If you are evaluating
the product, you can also choose the “Evaluate this product (no serial number required)” option
during installation.
After downloading the product, double-click on the executable file (.EXE) to begin installation.
Note that there are several different downloadable files available, each providing different
combinations of components. Please read the download web page carefully to determine which
file is appropriate for you.
You do not need to uninstall previous versions or updates before installing a newer version –
the new version will coexist with the older versions. If you want to remove older versions, you
may do so before or after installing the newer one.
Register your serial number at the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center
for access to product updates and previous versions.
2.4.1 Reboot After Install Recommended
Installation of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* adds to
the system PATH environment variable the folders containing the compiler run-time DLLs (but
not those of Intel® Math Kernel Library). On some systems, if the length of the PATH value is
between 2048 and 4096 characters, command line operations may fail until the system is
rebooted. Intel recommends a reboot after the first install of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015
Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 10
2.4.2 Cluster Installation
If Microsoft Compute Cluster Pack* is present, and the installation detects that the installing
system is a member of a cluster, the product will be installed on all visible nodes of the cluster
when a “Full” installation is requested. If a “Custom” installation is requested, you will be given
the option to install on the current node only.
2.4.3 Using a License Server
If you have purchased a “floating” license, see Licensing: Setting Up the Client for a Floating
License. This article also provides a source for the Intel® License Manager for FLEXlm* product
that can be installed on any of a wide variety of systems.
2.4.4 Additional Steps to Install Documentation for Microsoft Visual Studio 2010*
When installing Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* on a
system with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 for the first time, you will be asked to initialize the
“Local Store” for documentation for Visual Studio 2010 if it was not done before. The "Help
Library Manager" will register the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran
Windows* help documentation within Visual Studio 2010. Please follow the instructions of the
"Help Library Manager" installation wizard to install the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015
Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* help documentation for Visual Studio 2010.
This step is only needed once. When you install Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer
Edition for Fortran Windows* updates in the future, you will not be required to re-register the
documentation through the “Help Library Manager”.
For more information, see http://msdn.microsoft.com/enus/subscriptions/dd264831(v=vs.100).aspx
or search on microsoft.com for “Help Library
Manager”.
2.5 Intel® Software Manager
The installation provides the Intel® Software Manager to provide a simplified delivery
mechanism for product updates and provide current license status and news on all installed
Intel® software products.
You can also volunteer to provide Intel anonymous usage information about these products to
help guide future product design. This option, the Intel® Software Improvement Program, is not
enabled by default – you can opt-in during installation or at a later time, and may opt-out at any
time. For more information please see Intel® Software Improvement Program.
2.6 Changing, Updating and Removing the Product
Use the Windows Control Panel “Add or Remove Products” or “Programs and Features” applet
to change which product components are installed or to remove the product. Depending on
which product you installed, the entry will be one of the following:
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Windows*
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Professional Edition for Windows*
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 11
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Professional Edition for Fortran Windows*
If you also installed Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell as part of the compiler install, the
following additional entries may be present:
Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell (Integrated) - ENU
Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Files for Intel Visual Fortran
Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Remote Debugger – ENU
The entries for Visual Studio Shell, Files and Remote Debugger should not be removed unless
you want to completely remove the product.
When installing an updated version of the product, you do not need to remove the older version
first. The first time you install an update, you will have the choice to replace the older version or
to keep both the older and newer versions on the system. This choice is remembered for future
updates. In Microsoft Visual Studio you can select which specific compiler version to use
through the Tools > Options > Intel Composer XE > Visual Fortran Compiler dialog. Compiler
versions older than 13.0 (Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2011) are not available to be
selected through Visual Studio. All installed versions can be used from the command line.
If you remove a newer version of the product you may have to reinstall the integrations into
Microsoft Visual Studio from the older version.
2.7 Silent Install and Uninstall
For information on how to install and uninstall the compiler in an automated fashion, please see
Intel® Compilers for Windows* Silent Installation Guide.
2.7.1 Support of Non-Interactive Custom Installation
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 supports the saving of user install choices during an ‘interactive’
install in a configuration file that can then be used for silent installs. This configuration file is
created when the following option is used from the command line install:
--duplicate=config_file_name: it specifies the configuration file name. If the full
path name is specified, “--download-dir” is ignored and the installable package will
be created under the same directory as the configuration file.
--download-dir=dir_name: optional, it specifies where the configuration file will be
created. If this option is omitted, the installation package and the configuration file will be
created under the default download directory:
%Program Files%\Intel\Download\
For example:
w_fcompxe_online_2015.0.0XX.exe --duplicate=ic15_install_config.ini
--download-dir "C:\temp\custom_pkg_ic15"
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 12
The configuration file and installable package will be created under
“C:\temp\custom_pkg_ic15”.
2.8 Installation Folders
The installation folder arrangement is shown in the diagram below. Not all folders will be present
in a given installation. The system environment variable IFORT_COMPILER15 can be used to
locate the most recently installed Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran
Windows*.
C:\Program Files\Intel\Composer XE 2015
o bin
ia32
ia32_intel64
intel64
intel64_mic
sourcechecker
o compiler
include
ia32
intel64
mic
lib
ia32
intel64
mic
o debugger
o Documentation
o mkl
benchmarks
bin
examples
include
interfaces
lib
tests
tools
o redist
o Samples
Where the folders under bin, include and lib are used as follows:
ia32: Files used to build applications that run on IA-32
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 13
intel64: Files used to build applications that run on Intel® 64
ia32_intel64: Compilers that run on IA-32 to build applications that run on Intel®64
If you are installing on a system with a non-English language version of Windows, the name of
the Program Files folder may be different. On Intel® 64 architecture systems, the folder
name is Program Files (X86) or the equivalent.
By default, updates of a given version will replace the existing directory contents. When the first
update is installed, the user is given the option of having the new update installed alongside the
previous installation, keeping both on the system. If this is done, the top-level folder name for
the older update is changed to Composer XE 2015.nnn where nnn is the update number.
2.9 Known Installation Issues and changes
Remote offline activation via a code has been removed. Use of a license file or a license
manager remain as options for alternative activation.
When installing “Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*”
on a system which has “Intel(R) C++ Composer XE 2013 SP1 Update 2” installed you
may get the following error in Visual Studio: “Could not load file or assembly
‘Intel.Misc.Utilities’ or one of its dependencies. The system cannot find the file
specified.”.
This is due to an issue in “Intel(R) C++ Composer XE 2013 SP1 Update 2”, which was
fixed in subsequent releases. This can be resolved by installing “Intel(R) C++ Composer
XE 2013 SP1 Update 3” or “Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for C++
Windows*”.
3 Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler
This section summarizes changes, new features and late-breaking news about the Intel® Visual
Fortran Compiler.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 14
3.1 Compatibility
In general, object code and modules compiled with earlier versions of Intel Fortran Compiler
(8.0 and later) may be used in a build with version 15.0. Exceptions include:
Sources that use the CLASS keyword to declare polymorphic variables and which were
built with a compiler version earlier than 12.0 must be recompiled.
Objects built with the multi-file interprocedural optimization (/Qipo) option must be
recompiled.
Objects that use the REAL(16) , REAL*16, COMPLEX(16) or COMPLEX*32 datatypes
and which were compiled with versions earlier than 12.0 must be recompiled.
Objects built for the Intel® 64 architecture with a compiler version earlier than 10.0 and
that have module variables must be recompiled. If non-Fortran sources reference these
variables, the external names may need to be changed to remove an incorrect leading
underscore.
Modules that specified an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive outside of a derived type
declaration and were compiled with versions earlier than 11.0 must be recompiled. The
compiler will notify you if this issue is encountered.
Modules that specified an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive inside a derived type
declaration cannot be used by compilers older than 13.0.1.
3.1.1 Stack Alignment Change for REAL(16) and COMPLEX(16) Datatypes (12.0)
In previous releases, when a REAL(16) or COMPLEX(16) (REAL*16 or COMPLEX*32) item
was passed by value, the stack address was aligned at 4 bytes. For improved performance,
compiler versions 12.0 and later align such items at 16 bytes and expect received arguments to
be aligned on 16-byte boundaries.
This change primarily affects compiler-generated calls to library routines that do computations
on REAL(16) values, including intrinsics. If you have code compiled with earlier versions and
link it with the version 13 libraries, or have an application linked to the shared version of the Intel
run-time libraries, it may give incorrect results.
In order to avoid errors, you must recompile all Fortran sources that use the REAL(16) and
COMPLEX(16) datatypes.
3.1.2 Static Form of the Intel® OpenMP* Library is No Longer Provided
The static form of the Intel® OpenMP* library, libiomp5mt.lib, is no longer provided, and the
/Qopenmp-link:static command line option is no longer supported. Please replace all
references to libiomp5mt.lib with libiomp5md.lib, the DLL import library. This change also
implies that applications using OpenMP will need to have the Intel® compiler redistributables
installed if deployed on a system where an Intel® compiler is not also present. See
Redistributable Libraries for Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE for more information.
3.1.3 Fortran Expression Evaluator
Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) is a plug-in for Microsoft Visual Studio* that is installed with
Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler. It extends the standard debugger in Microsoft Visual Studio* IDE
by handling Fortran expressions. There is no other change in usability.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 15
3.2 New and Changed Compiler Features
Some language features may not yet be described in the compiler documentation. Please refer
to the Fortran 2003 Standard (PDF)) and Fortran 2008 Standard (PDF) if necessary.
3.2.1 Features from Fortran 2003
Parameterized Derived Types
3.2.2 Features from Fortran 2008
BLOCK construct
intrinsic subroutine EXECUTE_COMMAND_LINE
3.2.3 Features from OpenMP*
The following directives, clauses and procedures, from OpenMP 4.0, are supported by the
compiler. Some of these features were supported in Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013
Update 3 based on a preliminary specification, some keywords supported earlier (DECLARE
TARGET MIRROR, DECLARE TARGET LINKABLE, MAPTO, MAPFROM, SCRATCH) are no
longer supported, and some syntax has changed its meaning since the earlier specification.
For more information, see the compiler documentation or the link to the OpenMP Specification
above.
SIMD Directives:
OMP SIMD
OMP DECLARE SIMD
OMP DO SIMD
OMP PARALLEL DO SIMD
Coprocessor Directives:
OMP TARGET DATA
OMP TARGET
OMP TARGET UPDATE
OMP DECLARE TARGET
Other Directives:
OMP PARALLEL PROC_BIND
OMP TASKGROUP
OMP CANCEL
OMP CANCELLATION POINT
Clauses:
MAP
DEPEND
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 16
Procedures:
OMP_GET_DEVICE_NUM
OMP_GET_PROC_BIND
OMP_SET_DEVICE_NUM
3.2.3.1 KMP_PLACE_THREADS Environment Variable (13.1.0)
This environment variable allows the user to simplify the specification of the number of cores
and threads per core used by an OpenMP application, as an alternative to writing explicit affinity
settings or a process affinity mask.
3.2.3.2 KMP_DYNAMIC_MODE Environment Variable Support for “asat” Deprecated
Support for “asat” (automatic self-allocating threads) by the environment variable
KMP_DYNAMIC_MODE is now deprecated, and will be removed in a future release.
3.2.4 New and Changed Directives
The following compiler directives are new or changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015
Composer Edition– please see the documentation for details:
ATTRIBUTES OPTIMIZATION_PARAMETER INLINE-MAX-TOTAL-SIZE=N
ATTRIBUTES OPTIMIZATION_PARAMETER INLINE-MAX-PER-ROUTINE=N
3.2.4.1 ATTRIBUTES STDCALL now allowed with BIND(C)
As of compiler version 15.0, the ATTRIBUTES STDCALL directive may be specified for an
interoperable procedure (a procedure whose declaration includes the BIND(C) language binding
attribute.) This combination has the following effects for Windows* applications targeting IA-32
architecture:
The calling mechanism is changed to STDCALL, which affects how the stack is cleaned
up on procedure exit
The external name from the BIND attribute is suffixed with “@n”, where n is the number
of bytes to be removed from the stack on return.
No other effects from STDCALL, such as pass-by-value, are provided. The Fortran standard
VALUE attribute (not ATTRIBUTES VALUE) may be used if desired. For all other platforms,
specifying STDCALL with BIND(C) has no effect.
3.2.5 Other Features
For information on these features, please see the compiler documentation.
New environment variable INTEL_PROF_DYN_PREFIX. Allows the user to have some
control over the naming PGO generated “.dyn” files to make it easy to distinguish files
from different runs. By setting this environment variable to the desired character string
prior to starting the instrumented application, the string will be included as prefix to the
.dyn file names.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 17
New intrinsic __intel_simd_lane() that represents the ‘lane id’ within a SIMD vector. This
feature supports writing short-vector hyperobject reducer implementation. It also
enables the performing of reduction operations inside SIMD-enabled functions.
3.2.6 Coarrays (13.0)
No special procedure is necessary to run a program that uses coarrays in a shared-memory
environment; you simply run the executable file. The underlying parallelization implementation is
Intel® MPI. Installation of the compiler automatically installs the necessary Intel® MPI run-time
libraries to run on shared memory.
A license for Intel® Parallel Studio XE Cluster Edition must be present in order to use the
/coarray:distributed option. For details on how to run a distributed coarray application
on Windows, please see Building and Running a Distributed Coarray Application on Windows.
Use of coarray applications with any MPI implementation other than Intel® MPI, or with
OpenMP*, is not supported at this time.
By default, the number of images created is equal to the number of execution units on the
current system. You can override that by specifying the option /Qcoarray-num-images:
on the ifort command that compiles the main program. You can also specify the number of
images in an environment variable FOR_COARRAY_NUM_IMAGES.
3.2.6.1 Coarrays and Intel® MPI Library compatibility
Coarrays with Intel® Fortran Compiler 14 is incompatible with Intel® MPI Library 5.0. If using
coarrays, ensure that either Intel® Fortran Compiler 15 or higher is used, or use a 4.x version of
Intel® MPI Library.
3.2.7 ATTRIBUTES ALIGN for component of derived type (13.0.1)
As of compiler version 13.0.1, the ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive may be specified for an
ALLOCATABLE or POINTER component of a derived type. The directive must be placed within
the derived type declaration, and if it is an extended type, the directive must not name a
component in a parent type.
If this is specified, the compiler will apply the indicated alignment when the component is
allocated, either through an explicit ALLOCATE or, for ALLOCATABLE components, through
implicit allocation according to Fortran language rules.
A module containing an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive for a derived type component cannot be
used with a compiler earlier than version 13.0.1.
3.2.8 Change in File Buffering Behavior (13.1)
In product versions prior to Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 (compiler version 13.0),
the Fortran Runtime Library buffered all input when reading variable length, unformatted
sequential file records. This default buffering was accomplished by the Fortran Runtime Library
allocating an internal buffer large enough to hold any sized, variable length record in memory.
For extremely large records this could result in an excessive use of memory, and in the worst
cases could result in available memory being exhausted. The user had no ability to change this
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 18
default buffering behavior on such READs. There was always the ability to request or deny
buffering of these records when writing them, but not when reading them.
This default buffering behavior was changed with the release of Intel® Visual Fortran Composer
XE 2013. Beginning with this version, all such records are not buffered by default, but rather
read directly from disk to the user program’s variables. This change helped programs that
needed to conserve memory, but could in fact result in a performance degradation when
reading records that are made of many small components. Some users have reported this
performance degradation.
The Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 Update 2 (compiler version 13.1) release of the
Fortran Runtime Library now provides a method for a user to choose whether or not to buffer
these variable length, unformatted records. The default behavior remains as it was in 13.0;
these records are not buffered by default. If you experience performance degradation when
using 13.1 with this type of I/O, you can enable buffering of the input the same way that you
choose whether to enable buffering of the output of these records – one of the following:
specifying BUFFERED=”YES” on the file's OPEN statement
specifying the environment variable FORT_BUFFERED to be YES, TRUE or an
integer value greater than 0
specifying -assume buffered_io on the compiler command line
In the past, these mechanisms applied only when issuing a WRITE of variable length,
unformatted, sequential files. They can now be used to request that the Fortran Runtime
Library buffer all input records from such files, regardless of the size of the records in the file.
Using these mechanisms returns the READing of such records to the pre-13.0 behavior.
3.2.9 Static Analysis has been deprecated
Static analysis is deprecated. It may be removed in a future major release. If you have
concerns or feedback, please comment.
3.2.10 New run-time routines to get Fortran library version numbers
FOR_IFCORE_VERSION returns the version of the Fortran run-time library (ifcore).
FOR_IFPORT_VERSION returns the version of the Fortran portability library (ifport).
3.3 New and Changed Compiler Options
Please refer to the compiler documentation for details.
3.3.1 New and Changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran
Windows*
/assume:[no]std_value
/assume:ieee_fpe_flags
/fast
/Qeliminate-unused-debug-types[-]
/Qinit:snan
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 19
/Qopt-dynamic-align[-]
/Qopt-report
/Qprof-gen:[no]threadsafe
For a list of deprecated compiler options, see the Compiler Options section of the
documentation.
3.3.1.1 /assume:std_value is now the default
As of compiler version 15.0, the Fortran standard VALUE attribute, (not ATTRIBUTES VALUE),
when specified for a dummy argument of a non-interoperable procedure (a procedure whose
declaration does not include the BIND(C) language binding attribute), applies Fortran standard
semantics by default. The standard specifies that for a non-interoperable procedure, VALUE
causes a temporary, redefinable copy of the actual argument to be passed using the default
passing mechanism. In earlier compiler versions, VALUE always caused the actual argument to
be passed by value. Compiler version 14.0 introduced /assume:std_value to specify the
standard-conforming semantics and this was enabled if /standard-semantics was specified.
3.3.1.2 /assume:ieee_fpe_flags enabled with /standard-semantics and /fp:strict or
/fp:except
As of compiler version 15.0, if /standard-semantics and one of /fp:strict or /fp:except is specified,
/assume:ieee_fpe_flags is also enabled. This option causes the state of floating point
exceptions to be saved on entry to a procedure and restored on exit. The save and restore
operation has a significant performance penalty so it should be used only by applications that
manipulate or query the floating point exception environment. Note that Intel Fortran requires
that you specify /fp:strict if you are using the Fortran standard intrinsic modules
IEEE_ARITHMETIC, IEEE_EXCEPTIONS and/or IEEE_FEATURES.
3.3.1.3 Change to /fast option
/fp:fast=2 has been added to the /fast option. This option makes it easier to tune for
performance.
3.3.1.4 New /Qinit:snan Compiler Option
A new command line option to help find a class of uninitialized variables at run-time by
initializing floating-point variables to signaling NaNs which can then be trapped if their values
are fetched before being set.
3.3.1.5 New /Qopt-dynamic-align[-] Compiler Option
When this option is set the compiler implements conditional optimizations based on dynamic
alignment of the input data for maximum performance of vectorized code especially for long trip
count loops. This, however, may result in different bitwise results for aligned and unaligned
data with the same values. When unset the compiler will not perform these optimizations
providing bitwise reproducibility.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 20
3.3.1.6 New Optimization Report interface, report structure, and options in Intel®
Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition
The four kinds of optimization reports (/Qopt-report, /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qparreport)
have been consolidated under one /Qopt-report interface in this version of Intel® Parallel
Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition. This consolidated optimization report has been rewritten to
improve the presentation, content, and precision of the information provided so that users better
understand what optimizations were performed by the compiler and how they may be tuned to
yield the best performance.
The output of this report no longer defaults to stderr due to issues with parallel builds. Instead,
by default an output file (extension .optrpt) containing the report for each corresponding source
file is created in the target directory of the compilation process (i.e. the same directory where
object files would be generated). /Qopt-report-file (for example: /Qopt-report-file:stderr) can be
used to change this behavior.
The /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qpar-report options have been deprecated, but they
remain and map to corresponding values of the /Qopt-report option. However, the report
information and formatting, and the default to reporting to a file, will follow the new opt-report
model.
It is strongly recommended that you read the documentation for full details. See the Intel
Compiler User’s Guide under Compiler Reference->Compiler Option Categories
and Descriptions->Optimization Report Options.
3.3.1.7 New mode for PGO instrumentation /Qprof-gen:[no]threadsafe
This change adds a mode to the PGO instrumentation that allows for the collection of PGO data
on applications that use a high level of parallelism, such as from OpenMP 3.1. This functionality
improves PGO usage for the IA-32 and Intel® 64 architectures, as well as enables the support
of PGO with the native Intel® MIC Architecture programming model.
3.4 Visual Studio Integration Changes
3.4.1 DLL Libraries Default in New Projects (14.0)
New Fortran projects, created after Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran
Windows*has been installed, have the project properties set so that the DLL form of the runtime
libraries is used. This is consistent with Microsoft Visual C++, but is a change from
previous versions of Intel® Visual Fortran. If you wish to use the static libraries, you can change
the project property Fortran > Libraries > Use Runtime Library. Note that the OpenMP* library,
libiomp5md.dll, is provided in DLL form only and will be used no matter which setting you select,
should your application use OpenMP.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 21
3.4.2 Parallel Build Option (13.1)
An enhancement to the Visual Studio build environment has been added which allows for
parallel builds of sources without unresolved dependencies on multicore or multiprocessor
systems. This can reduce the total time needed to build larger projects.
To enable this, open the project property page Fortran > General and set the property “Multiprocessor
compilation” to Yes.
3.4.3 Improved source code navigation in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE
The Visual Studio IDE now provides a “tree-view” for easy module/procedure navigation (similar
to the Solution explorer view). For more information, see the compiler documentation.
3.4.4 Changes in Optimization Report Options support in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE
Optimization Diagnostic Level, Optimization Diagnostic Phase, Vectorizer Diagnostic Level,
OpenMP Diagnostic Level, Auto-Parallelizer diagnostic Level project properties’ values
(Configuration Properties->Fortran->Diagnostics) were updated in Intel® Parallel Studio XE
2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. If you are using these properties, you may need
to update their values, using project property pages dialog in Visual Studio. If you change your
settings to use older compiler, you may need to update these properties’ values again.
3.4.5 Changes in Online Help format in Microsoft Visual Studio*
The online help format is now browser-based. When you view Intel documentation from the
Microsoft Visual Studio Help menu, or when you view context-sensitive help using F1 or a help
button in a dialog box or other GUI element, your default browser shows the corresponding help
topic. You may encounter some minor functionality issues depending on your default browser.
Known issues include:
When Set Help Preference is set to Launch in Browser and you hit F1 in
Tools>Options>F# Tools or Tools>Options>Intellitrace, the browser appears twice.
Chrome*: When arriving at a topic from Search or Index, the Table of Contents (TOC)
does not sync, nor does the Sync TOC link work.
Firefox*: The TOC loses context easily. Search is case sensitive
Safari*: Response on Windows is slow.
3.5 Known Issues
3.5.1 Command-Line Diagnostic Issue for Filenames with Japanese Characters
The filename in compiler diagnostics for filenames containing Japanese characters may be
displayed incorrectly when compiled within a Windows command shell using the native
Intel® 64 architecture compiler. It is not a problem when using Visual Studio or when using the
Intel® 64 architecture cross-compiler or IA-32 architecture compiler.
3.5.2 Debugging might fail when only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013 is installed
On Microsoft Windows* systems with only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013* installed
debugging of Fortran applications might fail. Some symptoms might be failing watches
(expression evaluations) or conditional breakpoints.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 22
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* provides a debugger
extension called Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) to enable debugging of Fortran
applications. For some FEE functionality the Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* libraries are
required.
One solution is to install Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* in addition to Microsoft Visual Studio
2012/2013*. An alternative is to install the Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 SP1 Redistributable
Package (x86) found here.
3.5.3 Debugging mixed language programs with Fortran does not work
To enable debugging Fortran code called from a .NET managed code application in Visual
Studio 2012 or later, unset the following configuration:
Menu Tools ->Options, under section Debugging->General, clear the Managed C++
Compatibility Mode check box
For any managed code application, one must also check the project property Debug > Enable
unmanaged code debugging.
3.5.4 Update for Windows 7 causes LNK1123 error when building Visual Studio 2010
projects
A Microsoft Windows Update for .NET Framework 4.5.1, or installing Visual Studio 2012, installs
a new version of a DLL used in the linking process, causing the original Visual Studio 2010
linker to give the error “LNK1123: failure during conversion to COFF: file invalid or corrupt”. The
fix for this issue is to install Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Service Pack 1* which can be found
here.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 23
3.5.5 Certain uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types are not yet
fully implemented
The following uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types (PDTs) are not yet
fully implemented:
PDT parameter constants with length type parameters
%RE and %IM are not yet implemented
There is a syntax error in the FEE displaying extended types that are parameterized
3.6 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, 2012 and 2013 Notes
Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 brings several changes that primarily affect building of mixedlanguage
applications where the main program is in C or C++. These changes were carried
forward into Visual Studio 2012/ 2013.
3.6.1 Configuring Microsoft Visual C++ to Reference Intel® Fortran Run-Time Libraries
In previous releases, one used the Tools > Options > Projects and Solutions > VC++ Directories
dialog to make the Intel Fortran LIB folder available to C/C++ projects. In Visual Studio 2010,
the method of doing this is very different.
1. In Visual Studio, with a solution open that contains a C++ project, select View > Property
Manager. If you do not see Property Manager under the View menu, you will find it
under View > Additional Windows. The Property Manager window will appear. Note that
this is not Properties Window or Properties Pages.
2. Click on the triangles or + signs to expand the property tree under the Debug|Win32
configuration
3. Double click on Microsoft.Cpp.Win32.user
4. Select VC++ Directories
5. Click in the field to the right of "Library Directories"
6. Click the triangle that appears to the right and select
7. Click the New Line button or press Ctrl-Insert
8. In the new field that appears, type:
$(IFORT_COMPILER15)\compiler\lib\ia32
9. Click OK, OK
10. In the Visual Studio toolbar, select File > Save All
If you will be building Intel® 64 (x64) configurations:
1. Back in the Property Manager, expand the Debug|x64 configuration
2. Double click on Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user
3. Select VC++ Directories
4. Click in the field to the right of "Library Directories"
5. Click the triangle that appears to the right and select
6. Click the New Line button or press Ctrl-Insert
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 24
7. In the new field that appears, type:
$(IFORT_COMPILER15)\compiler\lib\intel64
8. Click OK, OK
9. In the Visual Studio toolbar, select File > Save All
Click on the Solution Explorer tab, or press Ctrl-Alt-L, to make it visible again.
If you do not see the Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user property page listed for the x64 configuration, right
click on Debug|x64 and select Add Existing property Sheet. Browse to the location which
contains the MsBuild 4.0 property pages. On Windows XP, this is typically:
C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\M
icrosoft\MSBuild\v4.0
On Windows 7 and Windows 8, it is typically:
C:\Users\\AppData\Local\Microsoft\MSBuild\v4.0
You may need to enable viewing of hidden files and folders to see these paths.
Select Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user.props and click Open. Now follow the steps above.
3.6.2 Adjusting Project Dependencies
If you are converting a project from an earlier version of Visual Studio and had established
Project Dependencies, these are converted to References by Visual Studio 2010/2012/2013. A
Fortran project that is referenced by a C/C++ project will prevent the C/C++ project from
building, with an MSB4075 error. To solve this:
1. Right click on the C/C++ project and select References.
2. If any Fortran project is shown as a reference, click Remove Reference. Repeat this for
all Fortran projects shown as a reference. Click OK.
3. Repeat the above steps for any other C/C++ project
Now you have to reestablish project dependencies.
1. Right click on the C/C++ project and select Project Dependencies. (For Visual Studio
2013 select Build Dependencies > Project Dependencies).
2. Check the box for each project that is a dependent of this project.
3. Click OK.
4. Repeat the above steps for any other C/C++ project that has dependencies.
Unlike earlier versions of Visual Studio, Visual Studio 2010/2012 does not automatically link in
the output library of dependent projects, so you will need to add those libraries explicitly to the
parent project under Linker > Additional Dependencies. You can use the Visual Studio macros
$(ConfigurationName) and $(PlatformName) as required to qualify the path. For example:
..\FLIB\$(ConfigurationName)\FLIB.lib
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 25
Where $(ConfigurationName) will expand to Release or Debug, as appropriate. Similarly,
$(PlatformName) will expand to Win32 or x64 as appropriate.
3.6.3 Showing Documentation Issue with Visual Studio 2012 and Windows Server* 2012
and Windows Server* 2008
If on Windows Server 2012* and Windows Server* 2008 you find that you cannot display help or
documentation from within Visual Studio 2012, correcting a security setting for Microsoft Internet
Explorer* usually corrects the problem. From Tools > Internet Options > Security, change the
settings for Internet Zone to allow “MIME Sniffing” and “Active Scripting”.
3.7 Fortran 2003 and Fortran 2008 Feature Summary
The Intel Fortran Compiler supports all features from the Fortran 2003 standard. The Intel®
Fortran Compiler also supports many features from the Fortran 2008 standard. Additional
features will be supported in future releases. Fortran 2008 features supported by the current
version include:
Maximum array rank has been raised to 31 dimensions (Fortran 2008 specifies 15)
Coarrays
o CODIMENSION attribute
o SYNC ALL statement
o SYNC IMAGES statement
o SYNC MEMORY statement
o CRITICAL and END CRITICAL statements
o LOCK and UNLOCK statements
o ERROR STOP statement
o ALLOCATE and DEALLOCATE may specify coarrays
o Intrinsic procedures ATOMIC_DEFINE, ATOMIC_REF, IMAGE_INDEX,
LCOBOUND, NUM_IMAGES, THIS_IMAGE, UCOBOUND
CONTIGUOUS attribute
MOLD keyword in ALLOCATE
DO CONCURRENT
NEWUNIT keyword in OPEN
G0 and G0.d format edit descriptor
Unlimited format item repeat count specifier
A CONTAINS section may be empty
Intrinsic procedures BESSEL_J0, BESSEL_J1, BESSEL_JN, BESSEL_YN, BGE, BGT,
BLE, BLT, DSHIFTL, DSHIFTR, ERF, ERFC, ERFC_SCALED, GAMMA, HYPOT, IALL,
IANY, IPARITY, IS_CONTIGUOUS, LEADZ, LOG_GAMMA, MASKL, MASKR,
MERGE_BITS, NORM2, PARITY, POPCNT, POPPAR, SHIFTA, SHIFTL, SHIFTR,
STORAGE_SIZE, TRAILZ,
Additions to intrinsic module ISO_FORTRAN_ENV: ATOMIC_INT_KIND,
ATOMIC_LOGICAL_KIND, CHARACTER_KINDS, INTEGER_KINDS, INT8, INT16,
INT32, INT64, LOCK_TYPE, LOGICAL_KINDS, REAL_KINDS, REAL32, REAL64,
REAL128, STAT_LOCKED, STAT_LOCKED_OTHER_IMAGE, STAT_UNLOCKED
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 26
An OPTIONAL dummy argument that does not have the ALLOCATABLE or POINTER
attribute, and which corresponds to an actual argument that: has the ALLOCATABLE
attribute and is not allocated, or has the POINTER attribute and is disassociated, or is a
reference to the NULL() intrinsic function, is considered not present
A dummy argument that is a procedure pointer may be associated with an actual
argument that is a valid target for the dummy pointer, or is a reference to the intrinsic
function NULL. If the actual argument is not a pointer, the dummy argument shall have
the INTENT(IN) attribute.
BLOCK construct
intrinsic subroutine EXECUTE_COMMAND_LINE
4 Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core
Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture)
This section summarizes new features and changes, usage and known issues related to the
Intel® Debugger Extension. This debugger extension only supports code targeting Intel® Many
Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture).
4.1 Features
• Support for both native coprocessor applications and host applications with offload
extensions
• Debug multiple coprocessor cards at the same time (with offload extension)
4.2 Using the Intel® Debugger Extension
The Intel® Debugger Extension is a plug-in for Microsoft Visual Studio* IDE. It transparently
enables debugging of projects defined by that IDE. Applications for Intel® Xeon Phi™
coprocessors can be either loaded and executed or attached to.
Instructions on how to use Intel® Debugger Extension can be found in the documentation
4.3 Documentation
The full documentation for the Intel® Debugger Extension can be found here:
\Documentation\en_US|ja_JP]\debugger\
mic\gdb_quickstart_win.pdf
4.4 Known Issues
Offload debugging is only supported in Microsoft Visual Studio 2012* and Microsoft
Visual Studio 2013*.
Disassembly window cannot be scrolled outside of 1024 bytes from the starting address
within an offload section.
Handling of exceptions from the Intel® MIC Architecture application is not supported.
Changing breakpoints while the application is running does not work. The changes will
appear to be in effect but they are not applied.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 27
Starting an Intel® MIC Architecture native application is not supported. You can attach to
a currently running application, though.
The Thread Window in Microsoft Visual Studio* offers context menu actions to Freeze,
Thaw and Rename threads. These context menu actions are not functional when the
thread is on a coprocessor.
Setting a breakpoint right before an offload section sets a breakpoint at the first
statement of the offload section. This only is true if there is no statement for the host
between set breakpoint and offload section. This is normal Microsoft Visual Studio*
breakpoint behavior but might become more visible with interweaved code from host and
coprocessor. The superfluous breakpoint for the offload section can be manually
disabled (or removed) if desired.
Only Intel® 64 applications containing offload sections can be debugged with the Intel®
Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture.
Stepping out of an offload section does not step back into the host code. It rather
continues execution without stopping (unless another event occurs). This is intended
behavior.
The functionality “Set Next Statement” is not working within an offload section.
If breakpoints have been set for an offload section in a project already, starting the
debugger might show bound breakpoints without addresses. Those do not have an
impact on functionality.
For offload sections, using breakpoints with the following conditions of hit counts do not
work: “break when the hit count is equal to” and “break when the hit count is a multiple
of”.
The following options in the Disassembly window do not work within offload sections:
“Show Line Numbers”, “Show Symbol Names” and “Show Source Code”
Evaluating variables declared outside the offload section shows wrong values.
Please consult the Output (Debug) window for detailed reporting. It will name
unimplemented features (see above) or provide additional information required to
configuration problems in a debugging session. You can open the window in Microsoft
Visual Studio* via menu Debug->Windows->Output.
When debugging an offload enabled application, the debugger does not evaluate
expressions that contain assignments which read memory locations before writing to
them (e.g. x = x + 1). Please do not use such assignments when evaluating expressions
(e.g. Immediate Window, Watch Window, …)
Using conditional breakpoints for offload sections might stall the debugger. If a
conditional breakpoint is created within an offload section, the debugger might hang
when hitting it and evaluating the condition. This is currently analyzed and will be fixed
with a future version of the product.
Depending on the debugger extensions provided by Intel the behavior (e.g. run control)
and output (e.g. disassembly) could differ to what is known from the Microsoft Visual
Studio debugger. This is because of different debugging technologies used underneath.
It is intended and does not have any disproportional impact on debugging experience.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 28
5 Intel® Math Kernel Library
This section summarizes changes, new features and late-breaking news about this version of
the Intel® Math Kernel Library (Intel® MKL). Bug fixes can be found here.
5.1 What's New in Intel MKL 11.2
Intel MKL now provides optimizations for all Intel® Atom™ processors that support
Intel® Streaming SIMD Extensions 4.1 (Intel® SSE4.1) and Intel® Streaming SIMD
Extensions 4.2 (Intel® SSE4.2) instruction sets
Introduced support for Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions 512 (Intel® AVX-512)
instruction set with limited optimizations in BLAS, DFT and VML
Introduced Verbose support for BLAS and LAPACK domains, which enables users to
capture the input parameters to Intel MKL function calls
Introduced support for Intel® MPI Library 5.0
Introduced the Intel Math Kernel Library Cookbook (http://software.intel.com/enus/mkl_cookbook)
, a new document that describes how to use Intel MKL routines to
solve certain complex problems
Introduced the MKL_DIRECT_CALL or MKL_DIRECT_CALL_SEQ compilation feature
that provides ?GEMM small matrix performance improvements for all processors (see
the Intel® Math Kernel Library User's Guide for more details)
Added the ability to link a Single Dynamic Library (mkl_rt) on Intel® Many Integrated
Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture)
Added a customizable error handler. See the Intel Math Kernel Library Reference
Manual description of mkl_set_exit_handler() for further details
Extended the Intel® Xeon Phi™ coprocessor Automatic Offload feature with a resource
sharing mechanism.See the Intel Math Kernel Library Reference Manual for the
description of mkl_mic_set_resource_limit() function and the
MKL_MIC_RESOURCE_LIMIT environment variable for further details
Parallel Direct Sparse Solver for Clusters:
o Introduced Parallel Direct Sparse Solver for Clusters, a distributed memory
version of Intel MKL PARDISO direct sparse solver
o Improved performance of the matrix gather step for distributed matrices
o Enabled reuse of reordering information on multiple factorization steps
o Added distributed CSR format, support of distributed matrices, RHS, and
distributed solutions
o Added support of solving of systems with multiple right hand sides
o Added cluster support of factorization and solving steps
o Added support for pure MPI mode and support for single OpenMP thread in
hybrid configurations
BLAS:
o Improved threaded performance of ?GEMM for all 64-bit architectures supporting
Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions 2 (Intel® AVX2)
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 29
o Optimized ?GEMM, ?TRSM, DTRMM for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set
o Improved performance of ?GEMM for outer product [large m, large n, small k]
and tall skinny matrices [large m, medium n, small k] on Intel MIC Architecture
o Improved performance of ?TRSM and ?SYMM in Automatic Offload mode on
Intel MIC Architecture
o Improved performance of Level 3 BLAS functions for 64-bit processors
supporting Intel AVX2
o Improved ?GEMM performance on small matrices for all processors when
MKL_DIRECT_CALL or MKL_DIRECT_CALL_SEQ is defined during compilation
(see the Intel® Math Kernel Library User’s Guide for more details )
o Improved performance of DGER and DGEMM for the beta=1, k=1 case for 64-bit
processors supporting Intel SSE4.2, Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions (Intel®
AVX), and Intel AVX2 instruction sets
o Optimized (D/Z)AXPY for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set
o Optimized ?COPY for Intel AVX2 and AVX512 instruction sets
o Optimized DGEMV for Intel AVX-512 instruction set
o Improved performance of SSYR2K for 64-bit processors supporting Intel AVX
and Intel AVX2
o Improved threaded performance of ?AXPBY for all Intel processors
o Improved DTRMM performance for the side=R, uplo={U,L}, transa=N, diag={N,U}
cases for Intel AVX-512
LINPACK:
o Improved performance of matrix generation in the heterogeneous Intel®
Optimized MP LINPACK Benchmark for Clusters
o Intel MIC Architecture offload option of the Intel Optimized MP LINPACK
Benchmark for Clusters package now supports Intel AVX2 hosts
o Improved performance of the Intel Optimized MP LINPACK for Clusters package
for 64-bit processors supporting Intel AVX2
LAPACK:
o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)RDB
o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)EV when eigenvectors are needed
o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)(EV/EVR/EVD) when eigenvectors are not
needed
o Improved performance of ?GELQF,?GELS and ?GELSS for underdetermined
case (M less than N)
o Improved performance of ?GEHRD,?GEEV and ?GEES
o Improved performance of NaN checkers in LAPACKE interfaces
o Improved performance of ?GELSX, ?GGSVP
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 30
o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)(EV/EVR/EVD) when eigenvectors are not
needed
o Improved performance of ?GETRF
o Improved performance of (S/D)GE(SVD/SDD) when M>=N and singular vectors
are not needed
o Improved performance of ?POTRF UPLO=U in Automatic Offload mode on Intel
MIC Architecture
o Added Automatic Offload for ?SYRDB on Intel MIC Architecture, which speeds
up ?SY(EV/EVD/EVR) when eigenvectors are not needed
PBLAS and ScaLAPACK:
o Enabled Automatic Offload in P?GEMM routines for large distribution blocking
factors
Sparse BLAS:
o Optimized SpMV kernels for Intel AVX-512 instruction set
o Added release example for diagonal format use in Sparse BLAS
o Improved Sparse BLAS level 2 and 3 performance for systems supporting Intel
SSE4.2, Intel AVX and Intel AVX2 instruction sets
Intel MKL PARDISO:
o Added the ability to store Intel MKL PARDISO handle to the disk for future use at
any solver stage
o Added pivot control support for unsymmetric matrices and out-of-core mode
o Added diagonal extraction support for unsymmetric matrices and out-of-core
mode
o Added example demonstrating use of Intel MKL PARDISO as iterative solver for
non-linear systems
o Added capability to free memory taken by original matrix after factorization stage
if iterative refinement is disabled
o Improved memory estimation of out-of-core (OOC) portion size for reordering
algorithm leading to improved factorization-solve performance in OOC mode
o Improved message output from Intel MKL PARDISO
o Added support of zero pivot during factorization for structurally symmetric cases
Poisson library:
o Added example demonstrating use of the Intel MKL Poisson library as a
preconditioner for linear systems solves
Extended Eigensolver:
o Improved message output
o Improved examples
o Added input and output iparm parameters in predefined interfaces for solving
sparse problems
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 31
FFT:
o Optimized FFTs for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set
o Improved performance for non-power-of-2 length on Intel® MIC Architecture
VML: Added v[d|s]Frac function computing fractional part for each vector element
VSL RNG:
o Added support of ntrial=0 in Binomial Random Number Generator
o Improved performance of MRG32K3A and MT2203 BRNGs on Intel MIC
Architecture
o Improved performance of MT2203 BRNG on CPUs supporting Intel AVX and
Intel AVX2 instruction sets
VSL Summary Statistics:
o Added support for group/pooled mean estimates
(VSL_SS_GROUP_MEAN/VSL_SS_POOLED_MEAN)
Data Fitting: Fixed incorrect behavior of the natural cubic spline construction function
when number of breakpoints is 2 or 3
Introduced an Intel MKL mode that ignores all settings specified by Intel MKL
environment variables
o User can set up the mode by calling mkl_set_env_mode() routine which directs
Intel MKL to ignore all environment settings specific to Intel MKL so that all Intel
MKL related environment variables such as MKL_NUM_THREADS,
MKL_DYNAMIC, MKL_MIC_ENABLE and others are ignored; users can instead
set needed parameters via Intel MKL service routines such as
mkl_set_num_threads() and mkl_mic_enable()
5.2 Notes
Intel MKL now provides a choice of components to install. Components necessary for
PGI compiler, Compaq Visual Fortran Compiler, SP2DP interface, BLAS95 and
LAPACK95 interfaces, Cluster support (ScaLAPACK and Cluster DFT) and Intel MIC
Architecture support are not installed unless explicitly selected during installation
Unaligned CNR is not available for MKL Cluster components (ScaLAPACK and Cluster
DFT)
Examples for using Intel MKL with BOOST/uBLAS and Java have been removed from
the product distribution and placed in the following articles:
o How to use Intel® MKL with Java*
o How to use BOOST* uBLAS with Intel® MKL
API symbols, order of arguments and link line have changed since Intel MKL 11.2 Beta
Update 2. (see the Intel® Math Kernel Library User's Guide for more details)
Important deprecations are listed in Intel® Math Kernel Library (Intel® MKL) 11.2
Deprecations
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 32
5.3 Known Issues
Automatic Offload on Windows with large matrices may cause data corruption or crash.
There is a problem in COI: HSD4868293 (critical). COI Cannot allocate a buffer with >=
2**32 bytes and 2M pages on Windows
Workaround: Set MKL_MIC_MAX_MEMORY=3G. Note: This issue is resolved in Intel®
MPSS 3.3
A full list of the known limitations can be found in the Intel® MKL Article List at Intel® Developer
Zone
5.4 Attributions
As referenced in the End User License Agreement, attribution requires, at a minimum,
prominently displaying the full Intel product name (e.g. "Intel® Math Kernel Library") and
providing a link/URL to the Intel® MKL homepage (www.intel.com/software/products/mkl) in
both the product documentation and website.
The original versions of the BLAS from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be
obtained from http://www.netlib.org/blas/index.html.
The original versions of LAPACK from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be
obtained from http://www.netlib.org/lapack/index.html. The authors of LAPACK are E. Anderson,
Z. Bai, C. Bischof, S. Blackford, J. Demmel, J. Dongarra, J. Du Croz, A. Greenbaum, S.
Hammarling, A. McKenney, and D. Sorensen. Our FORTRAN 90/95 interfaces to LAPACK are
similar to those in the LAPACK95 package at http://www.netlib.org/lapack95/index.html. All
interfaces are provided for pure procedures.
The original versions of ScaLAPACK from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be
obtained from http://www.netlib.org/scalapack/index.html. The authors of ScaLAPACK are
L. S. Blackford, J. Choi, A. Cleary, E. D'Azevedo, J. Demmel, I. Dhillon, J. Dongarra, S.
Hammarling, G. Henry, A. Petitet, K. Stanley, D. Walker, and R. C. Whaley.
PARDISO in Intel® MKL is compliant with the 3.2 release of PARDISO that is freely distributed
by the University of Basel. It can be obtained at http://www.pardiso-project.org.
Some FFT functions in this release of Intel® MKL have been generated by the SPIRAL software
generation system (http://www.spiral.net/) under license from Carnegie Mellon University. The
Authors of SPIRAL are Markus Puschel, Jose Moura, Jeremy Johnson, David Padua, Manuela
Veloso, Bryan Singer, Jianxin Xiong, Franz Franchetti, Aca Gacic, Yevgen Voronenko, Kang
Chen, Robert W. Johnson, and Nick Rizzolo.
The Intel® MKL Extended Eigensolver functionality is based on the Feast Eigenvalue Solver 2.0
(http://www.ecs.umass.edu/~polizzi/feast/)
6 Disclaimer and Legal Information
INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL(R)
PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 33
ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS
PROVIDED IN INTEL'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL
ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS
INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR
OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING
BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED NOR INTENDED FOR ANY
APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A
SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR.
Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice.
Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked
"reserved" or "undefined." Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no
responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them.
The information here is subject to change without notice. Do not finalize a design with this
information.
The products described in this document may contain design defects or errors known as errata
which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. Current characterized
errata are available on request.
Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and
before placing your product order.
Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or
other Intel literature, may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725, or go to:
http://www.intel.com/design/literature.htm
Intel processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor numbers differentiate
features within each processor family, not across different processor families. Go to:
http://www.intel.com/products/processor_number/
for details.
The Visual Intel® Fortran Compiler and Intel® Math Kernel Library are provided under Intel
Corporation’s End User License Agreement (EULA).
The GNU* Project Debugger, GDB is provided under the General GNU Public License, GPL V3.
Celeron, Centrino, Intel, Intel logo, Intel386, Intel486, Intel Atom, Intel Core, Itanium, MMX,
Pentium, VTune, Xeon and Xeon Phi are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries.
* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*
Installation Guide and Release Notes 34
Copyright © 2014 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Product Brief
Intel® High-Performance SATA Solid-State Drive Product Line
NAND Storage Solutions from Intel
Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives
Extreme Performance and Reliability for Servers, Storage, and Workstations
The Intel® Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives (SSDs) offers outstanding performance and reliability for
servers, storage, and high-end workstations.
Reduce Your Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)
Enterprise applications place a premium on performance, reliability, power consumption, and space. Unlike traditional
hard disk drives, Intel® Solid-State Drives have no moving parts, resulting in a quiet, cool storage solution that also offers
significantly higher performance than traditional server drives. Imagine replacing up to 50 high-RPM hard disk drives
with one Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive in your servers—handling the same server workload in less space,
with no cooling requirements and lower power consumption. That space and power savings, for the same server workload,
will translate into a tangible reduction in your TCO.
Better by Design
Drawing from decades of memory engineering experience, the Intel X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive is designed
to deliver outstanding performance and reliability, featuring the latest generation native SATA interface with an advanced
architecture employing 10 parallel NAND Flash channels equipped with single-level cell NAND Flash memory for even
greater overall performance and reliability. With powerful Native Command Queuing to enable up to 32 concurrent operations,
these Intel SSDs deliver higher input/output per second and throughput performance than other SSDs on the market
today—and drastically outperform traditional hard disk drives. These Intel drives also feature low write amplification
and a unique wear-leveling design for higher reliability, meaning Intel drives not only perform better—they last longer.
Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive
1. Active power is measured on an IOMeter workload of full bandwidth 64 K sequential writes with queue depth 1.
INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE,
TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS,
INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING
LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL
PROPERTY RIGHT. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life-saving, or lifesustaining applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any
time, without notice.
Copyright © 2008 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel and the Intel logo are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Printed in the United States. 0808/SD/HBD/PDF 319660-001US
www.intel.com
For more information, visit www.intel.com/go/ssd.
Technical Specifications
Model Name Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive
Capacity 32 GB and 64 GB
NAND Flash Components Intel® Single-Level Cell (SLC) NAND Flash Memory
10 Parallel Channel Architecture with 50nm SLC ONFI 1.0 NAND
Bandwidth Sustained sequential read: up to 250 MB/s
Sustained sequential write: up to 170 MB/s
Read Latency 75 microseconds
I/O Per Second (IOPS) Random 4 KB reads: >35,000 IOPS
Random 4 KB writes: >3,300 IOPS
Interface SATA 1.5 Gb/s and 3.0 Gb/s
Form Factor 2.5¨ industry standard hard drive form factor
Compatibility SATA revision 2.6 compliant. Compatible with SATA 3 Gb/s with
Native Command Queuing and SATA 1.5 Gb/s interface rates
Life Expectancy 2 million hours Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF)
Power Consumption Active: 2.4 W typical (server workload1
Order Number: 319984-003US
January 2009
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
SSDSA2SH032G1, SSDSA2SH064G1
Product Manual
Available in 2.5” Form Factor
Capacity: 32 GB, 64 GB
Uses Intel NAND flash memory Single Level
Cell (SLC) components
Bandwidth Performance Specifications
— Sustained Sequential Read: up to 250 MB/s
— Sustained Sequential Write: up to 170 MB/s
Read and Write IOPS Specifications
(IOmeter Queue Depth 32)
— Random 4 KB Reads: 35 K IOPS
— Random 4 KB Writes: 3.3 K IOPS
Compatibility
— Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
— SATA Revision 2.6 compliant, compatible
with SATA 1.5 Gb/s and 3 Gb/s interface
rates
— ATA/ATAPI-7 Compliant
— SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
— Native Command Queuing (NCQ) command
Compliance
— UL*
— CE*
— C-Tick*
— BSMI*
— MIC*
— Microsoft* WHQL
— RoHS*
Power Management
— 5 V SATA Supply Rail
— Supports ATA Power Management and
Advanced Power Management Specifications
— SATA Interface Power Management
— OS-Aware Hot Plug/Removal
Power Specifications
— Active: 2.4/2.6 W (32 GB/64 GB) TYP
— Idle: .060 W TYP
Temperature
— Operating: 0o C to 70o C
— Non-Operating: -55o C to 95o C
Reliability
— Bit Error Rate (BER): 1 sector per 1015 bits
read
— Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)
2,000,000 Hours
— Write Endurance: 1 petabyte of random
writes
Shock
— Operating and Non-operating: 1,000G/0.5
msec
Vibration
— Operating: 2.17 G (7-800 Hz)
— Non-operating 3.13 G (10-500 Hz)
Weight:
— 80 +/- 2 grams (32 GB)
— 90 +/- 2 grams (64 GB)
(2.5” 7 mm Form Factors)
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
2 Order Number: 319984-003US
Legal Lines and Disclaimers
Ordering Information
INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR
OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS
OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING
TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. Intel products are not intended for
use in medical, life saving, life sustaining, critical control or safety systems, or in nuclear facility applications.
Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice.
Intel Corporation may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights that relate to the
presented subject matter. The furnishing of documents and other materials and information does not provide any license, express or implied, by estoppel
or otherwise, to any such patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights.
Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked “reserved” or “undefined.” Intel reserves these for
future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them.
Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any
means without the express written consent of Intel Corporation.
Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Copies of documents
which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725 or by visiting
Intel's website at http://www.intel.com.
Intel and Intel logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.Copyright © 2009, Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Decoder
Intel High Performance Solid State Drive Ordering Information
Part Number MM # Device Nomenclature Packaging
SSDSA2SH032G101 896432 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 1 unit
SSDSA2SH032G1C5 900342 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 5 unit
SSDSA2SH032G1 896474 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 50 unit
SSDSA2SH064G101 899386 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 1 unit
SSDSA2SH064G1C5 901316 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 5 units
SSDSA2SH064G1 899387 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 50 units
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US Intel Confidential 3
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Contents
1.0 Introduction ..............................................................................................................5
1.1 Product Overview ................................................................................................5
1.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................6
1.3 Architecture........................................................................................................6
2.0 Certifications and Compliance ...................................................................................7
3.0 Product Specifications ...............................................................................................7
3.1 Capacity ............................................................................................................7
3.2 Performance .......................................................................................................7
3.3 Electrical Characteristics.......................................................................................8
3.3.1 Supply Voltage.........................................................................................8
3.3.2 Power Consumption ..................................................................................8
3.4 Environmental Conditions .....................................................................................9
3.4.1 Temperature............................................................................................9
3.4.2 Altitude...................................................................................................9
3.4.3 Shock and Vibration..................................................................................9
3.4.4 Acoustics .............................................................................................. 10
3.4.5 Electromagnetic Immunity....................................................................... 10
3.5 Reliability ......................................................................................................... 10
3.5.1 Non-recoverable read errors .................................................................... 11
3.5.2 Mean Time Between Failure ..................................................................... 11
3.5.3 Power On/Off Cycles ............................................................................... 11
3.5.4 Write Endurance .................................................................................... 11
4.0 Mechanical Information........................................................................................... 12
5.0 Pin and Signal Descriptions ..................................................................................... 13
5.1 Pin Locations .................................................................................................... 13
5.2 Signal Description Table ..................................................................................... 13
5.3 Hot Plug Support ............................................................................................... 14
6.0 Command Sets ........................................................................................................ 15
6.1 ATA Commands ................................................................................................ 15
6.1.1 ATA General Feature Command Set .......................................................... 15
6.1.2 Power Management Command Set............................................................ 18
6.1.3 Security Mode Feature Set....................................................................... 18
6.1.4 SMART Command Set ............................................................................. 19
6.1.5 Host Protected Area Command Set ........................................................... 19
6.1.6 48-Bit Address Command Set .................................................................. 19
6.1.7 Device Configuration Overlay Command Set .............................................. 19
6.1.8 General Purpose Log Command Set .......................................................... 20
6.2 SATA Commands............................................................................................... 20
6.2.1 Software Settings Preservation................................................................. 20
6.2.2 Native Command Queuing ....................................................................... 20
7.0 References .............................................................................................................. 21
8.0 Glossary .................................................................................................................. 22
9.0 Revision History ...................................................................................................... 23
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
4 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 5
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
1.0 Introduction
The Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive (SSD) delivers ultimate performance in an
industry standard 2.5” form factor while simultaneously improving system
responsiveness over standard rotating media or hard disk drives (HDD) in some of the
most demanding applications. By combining Intel’s leading NAND flash memory
technology with our innovative controller, Intel delivers an SSD for Native Serial
Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) hard disk drive drop-in replacement with
enhanced performance, reliability, ruggedness and power savings.
Since there are no rotating platters, moving heads, fragile actuaters, unnecessary spinup
time or positional seek time that can significantly slow down the storage subsystem,
the Intel X25-E SATA SSD enables fast read/write access times and significant
I/O, as well as performance improvement when compared to rotating media.
This document describes the specifications of the Intel X25-E SATA SSD in the 2.5”
form factor.
1.1 Product Overview
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD primarily targets high-end workstations, desktops, gaming
and various server/storage applications. Key attributes include extremely high
performance, low power, enhanced reliability and improved ruggedness as compared to
standard 10,000 and 15,000 RPM SATA hard drives. The Intel X25-E SATA SSD is
available in an industry standard 2.5” form factor that is electronically, mechanically,
and software compatible with existing SATA and Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) slots and
cables.
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
6 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
1.2 Block Diagram
1.3 Architecture
The Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drives utilize a cost effective System on a Chip
(SOC) design to manage a full SATA 3 Gb/s bandwidth with the host while managing
multiple flash memory devices on multiple channels internally.
Figure 1. Block Diagram
Intel
System
On A Chip
(SOC)
SATA Interface
Flash Memory
Channel 0
Flash Memory
Channel ...
Flash Memory
Channel n
NAND
Flash
Memory
NAND
Flash
Memory
NAND
Flash
Memory
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 7
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
2.0 Certifications and Compliance
3.0 Product Specifications
3.1 Capacity
Notes:
1. 1 GB = 1,000,000,000 Byte and not all of the memory can be used for data storage.
2. 1 Sector = 512 Byte.
3.2 Performance
Notes:
1. Performance measured using IOmeter with queue depth set to 32.
2. Write Cache enabled.
Table 1. Device Certifications
Certification/Compliance Description
CE Compliant Indicate conformity with the essential health and safety requirements set out in European
Directives Low Voltage Directive and EMC directive.
UL Certified Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Component Recognition UL60950-1.
C-Tick Compliant Compliance with EN 55022:2006 and the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Framework
requirements of the Australian Communication Authority (ACA).
BSMI Compliant Compliance to the Taiwan EMC standard “Limits and methods of measurement of radio
disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment, CNS 13438 Class B.”
MIC Certified
Compliance with paragraph 1 of Article 11 of the Electromagnetic Compatibility control
Regulation and meet the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Framework requirements of
the Radio Research Laboratory (RRL) Ministry of Information and Communication Republic
of Korea.
Microsoft WHQL Certified Microsoft Windows Hardware Quality Labs
RoHS Compliant Restriction of Hazardous Substance Directive
Table 2. User Addressable Sectors
Unformatted Capacity Total User Addressable Sectors in LBA Mode
32 GB 62,500,000
64 GB 125,045,424
Table 3. Maximum Sustained Read and Write Bandwidth
Access Type MB/s
Sequential Read up to 250
Sequential Write up to 170
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
8 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Notes:
1. Performance measured using IOmeter with queue depth set to 32.
2. Write Cache enabled.
3. Random IOPS cover the entire range of legal logical block addresses (LBAs). Measurements are performed on a full drive
(all LBAs have valid content).
Notes:
1. Write Cache enabled.
2. Device measured using IOmeter*.
3. Power On to Ready (POR) time assumes proper shutdown (power removal preceded by STANDBY command).
4. Read/Write latency measured on 4 k transfers.
5. Queue depth set to 1.
6. Sequential IOPS cover the entire range of legal logical block addresses (LBAs). Measurements are performed on a full
drive (all LBAs have valid content).
3.3 Electrical Characteristics
3.3.1 Supply Voltage
3.3.2 Power Consumption
Table 4. Random Read and Write Input/Output Operations per Second (IOPS)
Access Type IOPS
4K Read 35,000
4K Write 3,300
Table 5. Latency Specifications
Type Average Latency
Read 75 µs (TYP)
Write 85 µs (TYP)
Power On to Ready 1 s
Table 6. Operating Voltage
Description Min Max Unit
Operating Voltage for 5 V (+/- 5%) 4.75 5.25 V
Table 7. Typical Power Consumption
Mode Typ Unit
Active
2.4
(32 GB)
2.6
(64 GB)
W
Idle 0.06 W
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 9
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Drive will transition to idle power level once idle for 25 ms whether or not sleep or
standby command is received. Standby power levels assume DIPM enabled. Active
power is measured on an IOMeter workload of full bandwidth 64 K sequential writes
with queue depth 1.
3.4 Environmental Conditions
3.4.1 Temperature
Note: Measured without condensation.
3.4.2 Altitude
The drive is not sensitive to changes in altitude because it has no moving parts. Drive
tested between -1K and 40K feet.
3.4.3 Shock and Vibration
Notes:
1. Shock specifications assumes that the SSD is mounted securely with the input vibration applied to the drive mounting
screws. Stimulus may be applied in the X, Y or Z axis.
2. Vibration specifications assumes that the SSD is mounted securely with the input vibration applied to the drive mounting
screws. Stimulus may be applied in the X, Y or Z axis.
3. Sine wave sweeping 1 oct/min.
Table 8. Temperature Related Specifications
Mode Min Typ Max Unit
Ambient Temperature
Operating 0 70 oC
Non-Operating -55 95 oC
Temperature Gradient
Operating 20 oC/hr *
Non-Operating 30 oC/hr *
Humidity
Operating 5 95 %
Non-Operating 5 95 %
Table 9. Shock and Vibration Specifications
Mode Timing Max Unit
Shock1 Operating at 0.5 msec 1,000 G
Non-Operating at 0.5 msec 1,000 G
Vibration2 Operating 2.17 G 7-800 Hz
Non-Operating 3.13 G 10-500 Hz3
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
10 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
3.4.4 Acoustics
The drive has no moving or noise-emitting parts; therefore, it produces negligible
sound (0 dB) in all modes of operation.
3.4.5 Electromagnetic Immunity
Electromagnetic Immunity tests assume the SSD is properly installed in the
representative host system. The drive will operate properly without errors or
degradation in performance when subjected to radio frequency (RF) environments
defined in the following table:
Notes:
1. Performance Criteria A = The device shall continue to operate as intended, i.e., normal unit operation with no
degradation of performance.
2. Performance Criteria B = The device shall continue to operate as intended after completion of the test. However, during
the test, some degradation of performance is allowed as long as there is no data loss operator intervention to restore
device function.
3. Performance Criteria C = temporary loss of function is allowed. Operator intervention is acceptable to restore device
function.
4. Electrostatic Discharge applied to drive enclosure.
3.5 Reliability
Table 10. Electromagnetic Immunity Specifications
Test Description Performance
Criteria Reference Standard
Electrostatic discharge Contact, HCP, VCP: ±8 kV; Air: ± 15 kV B EN 61000-4-2: 1995
Radiated RF immunity
80 to 1,000 MHz, 3 V/m,
80% AM with 1 kHz sine
900 MHz, 3 V/m, 50% pulse modulation at
200 Hz
A EN 61000-4-3: 1996
ENV 50204: 1995
Electrical fast transient ± 1 kV on AC mains, ± 0.5 kV on external
I/O B EN 61000-4-4: 1995
Surge immunity ± 1 kV differential, ± 2 kV common, AC
mains B EN 61000-4-5: 1995
Conducted RF immunity 150 kHz to 80 MHz, 3 Vrms, 80% AM with 1
kHz sine A EN 61000-4-6: 1996
Voltage dips, interrupts
0% open, 5 seconds
0% short, 5 seconds
40%, 0.10 seconds
70%, 0.01 seconds
C
C
C
B
EN 61000-4-11: 1994
Table 11. Reliability Specifications
Parameter Value
Nonrecoverable read errors (BER) 1 sector in 1015 bits read, max
Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) 2,000,000 hours
Power On/Off Cycles 50,000 cycles
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 11
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
3.5.1 Non-recoverable read errors
The nonrecoverable read error rate will not exceed one sector in the specified number
of bits read. In the extremely unlikely event of a nonrecoverable read error, the drive
will report it as a read failure to the host; the sector in error is considered corrupt and
is not returned to the host.
3.5.2 Mean Time Between Failure
The Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) is calculated based on a Part Stress Analysis.
It assumes nominal voltage, with all other parameters within specified range.
3.5.3 Power On/Off Cycles
Defined as power being removed from the drive, and then restored. Note that host
systems and drive enclosures may remove power from the drive for reasons other than
a system shutdown.
3.5.4 Write Endurance
The drive supports 1 petabyte of lifetime random writes.
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
12 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
4.0 Mechanical Information
Note: All dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 2. Dimensions
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 13
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
5.0 Pin and Signal Descriptions
This section identifies the pin locations and signal descriptions of the Intel High
Performance SSDs.
5.1 Pin Locations
5.2 Signal Description Table
Note: Key and spacing separate signal and power segments.
Figure 3. Layout of Signal and Power Segment Pins
Signal Segment S1 Power Segment P1
Table 12. Serial ATA Connector Pin Signal Definitions
Pin Function Definition
S1 Ground 2nd mate
S2 A+
Differential signal pair A
S3 AS4
Ground 2nd mate
S5 BDifferential
signal pair B
S6 B+
S7 Ground 2nd mate
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
14 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Notes:
1. All pins are in a single row, with a 1.27 mm (0.050”) pitch.
2. Pins P1, P2 and P3 are connected together, although they are not connected internally to the device. The host may put
3.3 V on these pins.
3. The mating sequence is:
• the ground pins P4-P6, P10, P12 and the 5v power pin P7.
• the signal pins and the rest of the 5V power pins P8-P9.
4. Ground connectors P4 and P12 may contact before the other 1st mate pins in both the power and signal connectors to
discharge ESD in a suitably configured backplane connector.
5. Power pins P7, P8,and P9 are internally connected to one another within the device.
6. The host may ground P11 if it is not used for Device Activity Signal (DAS).
7. Pins P13, P14 and P15 are connected together, although they are not connected internally to the device. The host may put
12 V on these pins.
5.3 Hot Plug Support
Hot Plug insertion and removal are supported in the presence of a proper connector
and appropriate operating system (OS) support as described in the SATA 2.6
specification. This product supports Asynchronous Signal Recovery and will issue an
unsolicited COMINIT when first mated with a powered connector to guarantee reliable
detection by a host system without hardware device detection.
Table 13. Serial ATA Power Pin Definitions
Pin1 Function Definition Mating Order
P1 Not connected.2 3.3 V Power 2nd Mate
P2 Not connected2. 3.3 V Power 2nd Mate
P3 Not connected.2 3.3 V Power 1st Mate
P4 Ground3, 4 1st Mate
P5 Ground3 1st Mate
P6 Ground3 1st Mate
P7 V5
3, 5 5 V Power 1st Mate
P8 V5
3, 5 5 V Power 2nd Mate
P9 V5
3, 5 5 V Power 2nd Mate
P10 Ground3 1st Mate
P11 DAS6 Device Activity Signal6 2nd Mate
P12 Ground3, 4 1st Mate
P13 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate
P14 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate
P15 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 15
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
6.0 Command Sets
6.1 ATA Commands
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports all the mandatory ATA commands defined in the
ATA/ATAPI-7 specification.
6.1.1 ATA General Feature Command Set
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the ATA General Feature command set (nonPACKET),
which consists of
• EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
• FLUSH CACHE
• IDENTIFY DEVICE
• READ DMA
• READ SECTOR(S)
• READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)
• SEEK
• SET FEATURES
• WRITE DMA
• WRITE SECTOR(S)
• READ MULTIPLE
• SET MULTIPLE MODE
• WRITE MULTIPLE
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD also supports the following optional commands:
• READ BUFFER
• WRITE BUFFER
• NOP
• DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
6.1.1.1 IDENTIFY DEVICE Data
The following table details the sector data returned after issuing an IDENTIFY DEVICE
command.
Table 14. Returned Sector Data
Word
F = Fixed
V = Variable
X = Both
Default Value Description
0 F 0040h General configuration bit-significant information
1 X 3FFFh Obsolete - Number of logical cylinders (16,383)
2 V C837h Specific configuration
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
16 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
3 X 0010h Obsolete - Number of logical heads (16)
4-5 X 0h Retired
6 X 003Fh Obsolete - Number of logical sectors per logical track (63)
7-8 V 0h Reserved for assignment by the CompactFlash Association
9 X 0h Retired
10-19 F Varies Serial number (20 ASCII characters)
20-21 X 0h Retired
22 X 0h Obsolete
23-26 F Varies Firmware revision (8 ASCII characters)
27-46 F Varies Model number (Intel Solid State Drive)
47 F 8010h 7:0—Maximum number of sectors transferred per interrupt on MULTIPLE
commands
48 F 0h Reserved
49 F 2F00h Capabilities
50 F 4000h Capabilities
51-52 X 0h Obsolete
53 F 0007h Words 88 and 70:64 Valid
54 X 3FFFh Obsolete - Number of logical cylinders (16,383)
55 X 0010h Obsolete - Number of logical heads (16)
56 X 003Fh Obsolete - Number of logical sectors per logical track (63)
57-58 X 00FBFC10h Obsolete
59 F 0101h Number of sectors transferred per interrupt on MULTIPLE commands
60-61 F
03B9ACA0h
(32 GB)
07740AB0h
(64 GB)
Total number of user addressable sectors
62 X 0h Obsolete
63 F 0007h Multi-word DMA modes supported/selected
64 F 0003h PIO modes supported
65 F 0078h Minimum Multiword DMA transfer cycle time per word
66 F 0078h Manufacturer’s recommended Multiword DMA transfer cycle time
67 F 0078h Minimum PIO transfer cycle time without flow control
68 F 0078h Minimum PIO transfer cycle time with IORDY flow control
69-70 F 0h Reserved (for future command overlap and queuing)
71-74 F 0h Reserved for the IDENTIFY PACKET DEVICE command.
75 F 001Eh Queue depth
76 F 0106h Serial ATA capabilities
77 F 0h Reserved for future Serial ATA definition
78 F 0048h Serial ATA features supported
79 V 0040h Serial ATA features enabled
Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued)
Word
F = Fixed
V = Variable
X = Both
Default Value Description
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 17
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
80 F 00FCh Major Version Number
81 F 001Ah Minor Version Number
82 F 746Bh Command set supported.
83 F 7C01h Command sets supported.
84 F 6123h Command set/feature supported extension.
85 V 7469h Command set/feature enabled.
86 V BC01h Command set/feature enabled.
87 V 6123h Command set/feature default.
88 V 407Fh Ultra DMA Modes
89 F 0001h Time required for security erase unit completion
90 F 0001h Time required for Enhanced security erase completion
91 V 0h Current advanced power management value
92 V FFFEh Master Password Revision Code
93 F 0h Hardware reset result. The contents of bits (12:0) of this word shall change
only during the execution of a hardware reset.
94 V 0h Vendor’s recommended and actual acoustic management value.
95 F 0h Stream Minimum Request Size
96 V 0h Streaming Transfer Time - DMA
97 V 0h Streaming Access Latency - DMA and PIO
98-99 F 0h Streaming Performance Granularity
100-103 V
03B9ACA0h
(32 GB)
07740AB0h
(64 GB)
Maximum user LBA for 48-bit Address feature set.
104 V 0h Streaming Transfer Time - PIO
105 F 0h Reserved
106 F 4000h Physical sector size / logical sector size
107 F 0h Inter-seek delay for ISO-7779 acoustic testing in microseconds
108-111 F Varies Unique ID
112-115 F 0h Reserved for world wide name extension to 128 bits
116 V 0h Reserved for technical report
117-118 F 0h Words per Logical Sector
119 F 401Ch Supported Settings
120 F 401Ch Command Set/Feature Enabled/Supported
121-126 F 0h Reserved
127 F 0h Removable Media Status Notification feature set support
128 V 0021h Security status
129-159 X 0h Vendor specific
160 F 0h CompactFlash Association (CFA) power mode 1
161-175 X 0h Reserved for assignment by the CFA
Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued)
Word
F = Fixed
V = Variable
X = Both
Default Value Description
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
18 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Notes:
1. F = Fixed. The content of the word is fixed and does not change. For removable media devices, these values may change
when media is removed or changed.
2. V = Variable. The state of at least one bit in a word is variable and may change depending on the state of the device or
the commands executed by the device.
3. X = F or V. The content of the word may be fixed or variable.
6.1.2 Power Management Command Set
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Power Management command set, which
consists of
• CHECK POWER MODE
• IDLE
• IDLE IMMEDIATE
• SLEEP
• STANDBY
• STANDBY IMMEDIATE
6.1.3 Security Mode Feature Set
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Security Mode command set, which consists of
• SECURITY SET PASSWORD
• SECURITY UNLOCK
• SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
• SECURITY ERASE UNIT
• SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
• SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD
176-205 V 0h Current media serial number
206-216 F 0h Reserved
217 F 0001h Non-rotating media device
218-221 F 0h Reserved
222 F 101Fh Reserved
223-233 F 0h Reserved
234 F 0001h Reserved
235 F 02A0h Reserved
255 X Varies Integrity word (Checksum and Signature)
Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued)
Word
F = Fixed
V = Variable
X = Both
Default Value Description
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 19
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
6.1.4 SMART Command Set
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the SMART command set, please refer to Intel®
High Performance SATA Solid State Drive S.M.A.R.T Features User Guide Order Number
320520-002US.
6.1.5 Host Protected Area Command Set
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Host Protected Area command set, which
consists of
• READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS
• SET MAX ADDRESS
• READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT
• SET MAX ADDRESS EXT
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD also supports the following optional commands:
• SET MAX SET PASSWORD
• SET MAX LOCK
• SET MAX FREEZE LOCK
• SET MAX UNLOCK
6.1.6 48-Bit Address Command Set
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the 48-bit Address command set, which consists of
• FLUSH CACHE EXT
• READ DMA EXT
• READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT
• READ SECTOR(S) EXT
• READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT
• SET MAX ADDRESS EXT
• WRITE DMA EXT
• WRITE MULTIPLE EXT
• WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT
6.1.7 Device Configuration Overlay Command Set
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Device Configuration Overlay command set,
which consists of
• DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK
• DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTITY
• DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE
• DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
20 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
6.1.8 General Purpose Log Command Set
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the General Purpose Log command set, which
consists of
• READ LOG EXT
• WRITE LOG EXT
6.2 SATA Commands
The SATA 2.6 specification is a super set of the ATA/ATAPI-7 specification with regard to
supported commands. The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the following features that
are unique to the SATA specification.
6.2.1 Software Settings Preservation
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the SET FEATURES parameter to enable/disable the
preservation of software settings.
6.2.2 Native Command Queuing
The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Native Command Queuing (NCQ) command
set, which consists of
• READ FPDMA QUEUED
• WRITE FPDMA QUEUED
Notes: With a maximum queue depth equal to 31.
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 21
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
7.0 References
This document references standards defined by a variety of organizations. Use the
following list to identify the location of an organization’s standards information.
Table 15. Standards References
Date or
Rev. # Title Location
July 2007 RoHS Search for material data declaration sheets at http://
intel.pcnalert.com
July 2007 SFF-8144, 1.8” drive form factor http://www.sffcommittee.org
June 2007 Intel Matrix Storage Manager http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/imsm/
February 2007 Serial ATA Revision 2.6 http://www.sata-io.org
May 2006 SFF-8223, 2.5" Drive w/Serial Attachment
Connector http://www.sffcommittee.org
May 2005 SFF-8201, 2.5” drive form factor http://www.sffcommittee.org
April 2004 ATA-6 spec http://www.t13.org/project/d1410r3b-ATA-ATAPI-6.pdf
April 2004 ATA-7 Volume 1
http://www.t13.org/Documents/UploadedDocuments/
docs2007/D1532v1r4b-AT_Attachment_with_Packet_
Interface_-_7_Volume_1.pdf
1995
1996
1995
1995
1996
1994
International Electrotechnical Commission
EN 61000-
4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 4: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Section 2: Electrostatic
Discharge Immunity Test
4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 4: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Section 3: Radiated,
Radio Frequency, Electromagnetic
Field Immunity Test
4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 4: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Section 4: Electrical Fast
Transient/Burst Immunity Test
4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 4: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Section 5: Surge
Immunity Test
4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 4: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Section 6: Immunity to
Conducted Disturbances, Induced by
Radio-Frequency Fields
4-11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 4: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Section 11: Voltage Dips,
Short Interruptions and Voltage
Variations Immunity Tests
http://www.iec.ch
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
22 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
8.0 Glossary
This document incorporates many industry- and device-specific words. Use the
following list to define a variety of terms and acronyms.
Table 16. Glossary of Terms and Acronyms
Term Definition
ATA Advanced Technology Attachment
ATAPI Advanced Technology Attachment Packet Interface
BER Bit error rate, or percentage of bits that have errors relative to the total number of bits received
DIPM Device Initiated Link Power Management. The ability of the device to request SATA link power state changes.
DMA Direct Memory Access
EXT Extended
FP First Party
GB Giga-byte defined as 1x109 bytes
HDD Hard Disk Drive
Hot Plug A term used to describe the removal or insertion of a SATA hard drive when the system is powered on.
iMSM The Intel Matrix Storage Manager device driver and associated system software.
IOPS Input output operations per second
LBA Logical Block Address
MB Mega-bytes defined as 1x106 bytes
MTBF Mean time between failures
NCQ Native Command Queuing. The ability of the SATA hard drive to queue and re-order commands to maximize
execution efficiency.
NOP No Operation
OS Operating System
Port The point at which a SATA drive physically connects to the SATA controller.
RMS Root Mean Squared
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
SAS Serial Attached SCSI
SATA Serial ATA
SFF Small Form Factor
SMART Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology: an open standard for developing hard drives and
software systems that automatically monitors a hard drive’s health and reports potential problems.
SSD Solid State Drive
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
January 2009 Product Manual
Order Number: 319984-003US 23
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
9.0 Revision History
Date Revision Description
January 2009 003
Added new capacity of 64 GB to the datasheet.
Added power numbers and weight for 64 GB on page 1 and page 8.
Added weight information for 64 GB on page 1.
Updated reliability information on write endurance on page 1 and page 11.
Added user addressable sectors on page 7.
Modified Random IOPs table on page 8.
Modified latency specification notes on page 8.
Updated Identify Device ID words 59, 60, 84, 85, 87, 100 and 106 on page 15.
Added a reference to 6.1.4 on page 19.
July 2008 002
Updated the power number on page 1 and Table 7 on page 8.
Updated standby shock spec on page 1 and Table 9 on page 9.
Modified weight numbers on page 1.
Updated Device decoder on page 2.
Updated Random Write Speed on Table 4 on page 8.
Update Sustained Sequential Read spec on page 1 and Table 3 on page 7.
Changed maximum queue depth to 31 on 6.2.2.
Updated Identify device information on 6.1.1.1.
Added extra info on altitude in 3.4.2.
RoHS link updated on Table 15 on page 21.
June 2008 001 Initial Release. Earlier information released as Intel® Extreme Performance Solid State
Drive Advance Product Manual - 318776-003US.
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive
Product Manual January 2009
24 Order Number: 319984-003US
Intel® X25-E SATA SSD
)
Idle (DIPM): 0.06 W typical
Operating Shock 1,000 G/0.5 ms
Voltage 5V SATA supply rail
Operating Temperature 0°C to +70°C
RoHS Compliance Meets the requirements of EU RoHS Compliance Directives
Product Health Monitoring Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART)
commands, plus additional SSD monitoring
Validated and Tested by Intel, on Intel
All Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives are tested and validated on the latest Intel-based server and workstation
platforms, for your peace of mind.
Copyright © 1997 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Intel Corporation
5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497
Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this
guide, nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information
herein.
*Other brands and names are the property of their respective owners.
Check your computer's owner's manual ......................................... 4
Installation steps ............................................................................. 4
Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 14
Getting help .................................................................................. 21
Registration .................................................................................. 22
Three-year limited warranty ......................................................... 23
First Edition January 1997
Second Edition March 1997
Third Edition August 1997
Part number: 669409-003
Contents
This symbol indicates a CAUTION or WARNING.
It identifies operations or situations that may be
harmful or dangerous to you or your equipment.
For your safety and to protect your equipment,
read and observe all cautions and warnings.
Explanation of symbols used in this guide:
This symbol indicates a NOTE. It identifies items
of special interest that pertain to the section or
procedure you are reading. Notes typically clarify
or expand the material in the text.
4
Step 1—Check your computer's BIOS.
Caution: Failure to update an incompatible BIOS will
cause your computer to lock up after installation.
The system control program (BIOS) in some computers doesn't support the
higher speed of the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology.
You must update an incompatible BIOS before installing the processor.
Failure to update your incompatible BIOS will cause your computer to lock
up after installation. This lock-up may occur every time you start your
computer or only after you install new hardware such as graphics or audio
cards.
Follow these steps to determine whether your computer's BIOS must be
updated.
1. Insert the OverDrive Processor Diagnostic diskette in drive A.
2. Choose File (for Windows* 3.1 or Windows NT*)
or Start (Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0).
3. Choose Run.
4. Type a:\diag, click OK, then choose Run Diagnostics from the menu.
If your computer's BIOS is incompatible with the Pentium OverDrive
processor with MMX technology, you must update the BIOS before
installing the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology (see
"BIOS update needed" on page 17).
A successful result indicates that the likelihood of encountering a
problem due to a BIOS incompatibility is low. Please continue the
installation with Step 2. This diagnostic is limited to certain BIOS
tests only; it does not test for other possible incompatibilities
between the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology and a
particular PC hardware configuration.
If you experience problems after installing the Pentium OverDrive
processor with MMX technology, contact Intel customer support for more
information. (See "Getting Help" on page 21.)
First check your computer owner's manual to see if it has a section on
installing computer upgrade hardware such as the Pentium OverDrive
processor with MMX technology. If it does, follow the owner's manual
procedure. Otherwise, use this manual.
Check your computer's owner's manual
5
Step 3—Unplug computer and remove cover.
Step 2—Ground yourself.
To prevent damaging the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX
technology and your computer with a static discharge, ground yourself by
touching the metal back or side panel of your computer’s system unit.
Warning: Danger to equipment! The Pentium
OverDrive processor with MMX technology can be
damaged by static discharge. Before handling the
Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology,
be sure to ground yourself by touching the metal on
your computer. Limiting your movements during
installation reduces static electricity.
Warning: Don't burn yourself! Many components can
become hot enough to cause mild skin burns. Wait at
least 15 minutes after turning off the power before
handling any parts.
Turn off the computer and any attached equipment (such as a monitor or
printer), unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.
OFF
ON
6
Step 4—Find the computer's Pentium
processor.
Find the Pentium processor in the computer. The Pentium processor in
most computers looks like the following:
Some computers have a power cable attached to the Pentium processor's fan
or have a passive heat sink (which may be attached with a clip) on top of
the Pentium processor .
Pentium
processor
Your computer's owner's manual may show the location of the processor. If
you can't locate your computer's original processor, contact your dealer or
your computer manufacturer for assistance.
Some computers have an empty second socket next to
the processor. For more information on the installation
process for these computers, see page 15.
PC-3785
PC-3786
Clip Fan power
cable
OverDrive
processor
socket
7
After locating the processor, examine the socket to determine the socket
type. Most Pentium processor-based computers use a socket with a handle
that locks and unlocks, called a zero insertion force (ZIF) socket.
If the socket in your computer doesn't have a handle,
Intel strongly recommends that you have a qualified
professional install the Pentium OverDrive processor
with MMX technology rather than installing it yourself.
Typical LIF socket
(no handle)
Typical ZIF socket
(with handle)
Some computers use a socket without a handle, called a low insertion force
(LIF) socket.
• If your computer has either a power cable attached to the Pentium
processor's heat sink or a heat sink attached with a clip, go to step 5.
• If your computer doesn't have a power cable attached to the heat sink
and doesn't have a heat sink attached with a clip, skip step 5 and go to
step 6.
Handle
8
The heat sink on your computer's original processor is either clipped to the
socket or fastened directly to the top of the processor. If the heat sink is
fastened directly to the processor without a clip and doesn't have a fan
cable, go to step 6 now.
You do not need the fan, fan cable, or clip to install the
Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology.
After removing these parts, store them with your
original processor.
Step 5—Unplug the fan power cable or unfasten
the heat sink clip.
Unplug the fan power cable
Some computers have a power cable attached to the fan. Carefully unplug
the fan power cable from the power source.
After unplugging the fan power cable, carefully fold the
power source cable out of the way so it doesn't touch
any computer components.
After unplugging
the fan power
cable from the
computer power
source, fold the
computer power
source cable out
of the way.
PC-3252
System power
source cable
Fan power cable
9
PC-3312
Removing the heat sink clip
If the heat sink is clipped to the socket, remove the clip by pressing down
and unfastening it from the tab on the socket. Be sure to hold your hand
over the clip while unfastening it to prevent it from flying loose.
Heat sink
fins
Heat sink clips to
socket tab
Heat sink
fan
Socket
Typical fan heat sink clip
Heat sink clip
surrounds fan and
hooks to socket
tabs. Remove heat
sink fan and fins as
one piece.
PC-2822
Heat sink clips to
socket tab
Press down on tab to
release heat sink clip
Typical passive heat sink clip
Some heat sinks clamp tightly over the socket tab and require a tool such as
a screwdriver to loosen the clip enough to slide over the tab. Carefully
insert the tool between the heat sink and the socket, just above the socket
tab, and gently pry outward to allow the heat sink to slip over the tab. You
should then be able to completely release the heat sink from all the other
socket tabs.
Use screwdriver to loosen clip while
pressing down
Fan
Processor
Socket
10
Step 6—Open the socket handle and remove the
existing processor from the socket.
Push the handle slightly sideways to slide it over the lever lock tab, then
move the handle to a 90-degree, upright position. Be sure the socket is
completely open. Don't use excessive force. Your computer’s motherboard
should not bend or flex while you are opening the socket. Once the socket
is open, remove the processor.
Be sure the socket is
completely open.
PC-2833
Some manufacturers use thermal grease to attach the
heat sink to the processor. Thermal grease is a
conductive material and can damage your computer if it
gets on socket pin holes, processor pins, or other
components. Avoid getting thermal grease residue on
your hands or the computer when you remove the heat
sink from the processor.
Save the original processor in case you need it later. Store it in a safe place,
such as in the box that the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX
technology came in.
11
Step 7—Insert the Pentium OverDrive
processor with MMX technology into the
socket.
Correctly orienting your Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX
technology in the socket is crucial to the success of your installation. The
Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fits in the socket only
one way.
Incorrectly aligning your Pentium OverDrive processor
with MMX technology can damage the processor and
your computer.
Orient the notch on one corner of the OverDrive processor with MMX
technology to the notch on one corner of the socket. Place the Pentium
OverDrive processor with MMX technology on the socket and align the
pins with the pin holes.
Notch
Notch
Once the pins and pin holes are properly aligned, gently insert the processor
into the socket. Don't use force to insert the processor in the socket.
Don't apply pressure to the
center of the fan. PODP5V
109X4405H6J05
DC 5V 0.14A
SANYO DENKI
12
Step 8—Close the socket handle.
Close the socket handle to lock the OverDrive processor with MMX
technology in place.
Once it is locked in place, the OverDrive processor with MMX technology
should fit snugly in the socket.
Step 9—Replace the cover, plug in the computer,
and turn it on.
Put the cover back on the computer. Reconnect all the cables and cords, and
plug the power cord into the wall outlet.
Turn on your computer. If your computer requires it, run the computer’s
setup or configuration program. Refer to your computer's owner’s manual.
If you have problems with your computer after installing the Pentium
OverDrive processor with MMX technology, turn to the "Troubleshooting"
section.
If your computer requires setting jumpers or switches,
refer to your computer's owner's manual or the
"Troubleshooting" section.
13
Installation of your Intel Pentium OverDrive processor with
MMX technology is complete.
When you ran the diagnostics in step 1, the program stored information
about your old processor. Run the diagnostics again to see how much faster
your computer performs with your new Pentium OverDrive processor with
MMX technology. The disk also contains the following diagnostics to test
your installation:
Processor Instruction Test Tests various processor functions to see
whether they are working properly.
Floating Point Tests the processor's floating-point unit by
Conformance Test comparing the value the floating-point unit
calculates to the value established by the
IEEE standard.
MMX Instruction Test Tests the various MMX technology
instructions to see whether they are working
properly.
MMX Technology Checks whether your computer is
Video Test compatible with the MMX technology
instructions.
In addition, you can test your installation by running software programs
you use frequently and experiencing the increased performance.
If you don't see increased performance, or if you have difficulty getting the
computer to run successfully, see the "Troubleshooting" section to
determine possible problems. If you still need help, contact your dealer.
Step 10—Test the installation of the Pentium
OverDrive Processor with MMX Technology.
14
Troubleshooting
Read through the symptoms below. If you find one that resembles the
problem you’re having, try the corresponding possible solutions.
The computer doesn’t power on when you turn on the switch, or the
operating system prompt doesn’t appear on the screen.
• Be sure:
• The power cord is plugged into the wall outlet.
• The cables and cords are attached correctly.
• Any cards you removed are reinstalled properly.
• The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology
and the socket are correctly aligned.
• Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in your
computer owner's manual? For further information on jumpers and switches,
see page 20.
• Your computer may need an updated control program (BIOS). Contact
the technical support department at your computer vendor or dealer for
BIOS information.
• If you have access to another Pentium processor-based computer,
remove your Pentium OverDrive processor and install it in the second
computer.
Your application programs don’t run any faster with the Pentium
OverDrive processor with MMX technology installed.
• Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in
your computer's owner’s manual? For further information on jumpers
and switches, see page 20.
• Does your computer require you to run its setup program? Check your
computer's owner's manual or contact your dealer to verify.
• If your computer appears to be functioning normally and you have eliminated
jumper settings and setup requirements as the problem, but you still don't see
a speed improvement, see the "Getting Help" section on page 21.
Some of the pins on the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX
technology are bent.
• Carefully straighten any bent pins with needlenose pliers or tweezers
before inserting the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology
in the socket.
15
Your computer has an extra processor socket.
• Some computers have two processor sockets that can be used for dual
processing as well as for single processing. The Pentium OverDrive
processor with MMX technology does not support dual processing.
However, if you use your two-socket computer in single-processing
mode, you can upgrade your computer with the Pentium OverDrive
processor with MMX technology.
To install:
1. Remove the original processor from the socket. Refer to installation
steps 4 through 6 for more information on removing the
original processor.
2. Align and seat the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX
technology in an upgrade socket. (Usually this is the same socket
that contained the original processor. Refer to your computer's
owner's manual for information on locating the upgrade socket.)
Refer to installation step 7 for more information on aligning and
seating the OverDrive processor with MMX technology.
3. Continue with installation step 8.
Motherboard with two processor sockets
Caution: After operating for several hours, many chips
in your computer, including the Pentium OverDrive
processor with MMX technology, can become hot
enough to cause mild skin burns if handled. Let the
computer cool off before handling the Pentium
OverDrive processor with MMX technology.
The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology feels hot.
• It is normal for the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology to
generate heat while operating.
PC-3787
16
Your computer powers on and runs normally for a few minutes then
hangs up or shuts down.
• Is the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology socket
handle fully locked?
• Is the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fully
inserted?
• Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in your
computer's owner's manual?
• Check to see if your fan is functioning properly.
Warning: When your computer is plugged in, the power
is on, and the cover is off, don't touch your computer or
the fan. Exercise extreme care, as injury may occur
from moving parts or death may occur from
electrocution. If uncertain, seek expert technical
assistance.
1. Remove the computer cover.
2. Check that nothing is blocking the airflow from the fan. Are there
cables, cards, or other components that prevent good airflow to
the vents in the chassis?
3. Observe the fan on the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX
technology. The fan blades should be turning. If the fan works,
turn off and unplug your computer, then replace the cover.
Note: There must be adequate clearance between the
top of the fan and the nearest object to ensure proper
airflow. After unplugging your computer, you can
measure the space above the fan. It should be at least
0.4 inch, or about the thickness of your finger.
• Your computer may not be providing enough airflow to adequately cool
the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. Call your
computer manufacturer for information about evaluating a possible
thermal condition in your computer.
17
BIOS update needed
Here's what to do when the Intel diagnostic tells you to update your
computer's BIOS before installing the OverDrive processor with MMX
technology.
1. Collect this information:
BIOS serial number. The BIOS serial number is usually displayed on
the initial power-on screen. Most computers can be halted at this screen
by pressing the Pause key. Press the Enter key to continue.
Motherboard model number. Check your computer's owner's manual.
Computer name, model, and serial number. Check your computer's
owner's manual and the back of the computer.
2. Determine the proper BIOS update for your computer. With the
information you collected in the previous step, the motherboard's or
computer manufacturer's customer support can help determine the BIOS
update you need. Intel supplies information on contacting many
manufacturers of motherboards and computers: on the World Wide Web,
www.intel.com/overdrive/bios; on the Intel Bulletin Board Service (BBS),
(503) 264-7999 (ask for the BIOS update document on the OverDrive area
of the BBS); and by FaxBack, (800) 525-3019 (ask for FaxBack document
1522).
3. Obtain the proper BIOS update file for your computer. Either
download a file containing the new BIOS from the motherboard or
computer manufacturer's web site or BBS (see the Intel web site at
www.intel.com/overdrive/bios for links to many manufacturers) or get a
disk directly from the manufacturer.
The BIOS file or disk typically contains two parts: a flash update utility
program and a BIOS data file. Most Pentium processor-based
motherboards store the system BIOS in a flash memory component, which
lets the BIOS be easily updated through a flash update utility program.
This program is provided by most manufacturers and provides the
capability to save, verify, and update the system BIOS. The BIOS file(s) is
specific to your computer. Some manufacturers distribute the utility
program and the data file in a single compressed file (such as
NEW_BIOS.ZIP) that you must uncompress.
18
4. Install the new BIOS on your computer. The procedure for updating
the BIOS is different for every model of computer. Read and follow your
motherboard's or computer manufacturer's instructions exactly. The
following is just an outline of the BIOS update procedure. Use your
motherboard or computer manufacturer's instructions.
a) Record the current BIOS settings. Most computers prompt you
during power-up to press a specific key (such as F1) to view the setup
screens.
b) Create a DOS-bootable diskette. Most BIOS update utilities require
that they be run from a disk from which the computer is started. This
requires the computer to run in a basic mode without memory
managers or drivers in memory. Refer to your operating system's
manual for instructions on creating a DOS-bootable disk.
c) Update the BIOS. Before starting the update, be sure you read and
understand the manufacturer's instructions. Often the instructions are
in a README file on the disk.
In general, you'll copy the BIOS utility and data files to the bootable
disk you created earlier and restart your computer from the disk.
Then run the BIOS update utility, following the manufacturer's
instructions. If the utility allows it, save your old BIOS. Do not turn
off the computer while the BIOS update utility is running. An
interruption in power can corrupt the BIOS code, making your
computer non-functional.
d) After the update, verify the BIOS settings against the settings you
recorded in step a.
If updating the BIOS sounds risky, have a qualified technician update the
BIOS for you. If you update the BIOS yourself, follow the manufacturer's
instructions exactly.
Your computer's BIOS or CMOS setup program doesn't identify the new
Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, but the Intel
diagnostic program indicates that it is working correctly.
The BIOS in many older computers cannot identify the Pentium OverDrive
processor with MMX technology; however, those systems might still
operate correctly with the new processor. If the processor passes the Intel
diagnostic program and the system seems to be operating correctly with
satisfactory performance, then the fact that the BIOS does not correctly
display the name of the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX
technology probably will not affect the system's or the processor's
operation, and it probably is not worth the effort to update the BIOS.
19
Your Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fan is not working.
• Is the fan fully seated? The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX
technology fan is powered from three power connections on the processor top.
To ensure your fan is fully seated:
1. Ground yourself by touching the metal on your computer, then
unplug your computer. Limiting your movements during installation
reduces static electricity, which can damage the part and
your computer.
2. Release the corner of the fan assembly by gently squeezing
together the two retaining clips.
3. While keeping the clips squeezed together, slowly lift up the
corner, pivoting it against the opposite corner.
4. When the fan assembly is at an approximately 45-degree angle,
gently lift straight up from the processor.
5. Hold the fan at an approximately 45-degree angle, and align the
fan assembly over the base unit, starting with the corner opposite
the retaining clip.
Take special care to align the contact pins on the fan assembly
to the three pads on the base unit.
6. Carefully lower the fan onto the base.
7. Secure the fan assembly to the base unit by ensuring that the
retaining clips have snapped into place.
If the fan still does not work properly after reseating, see the "Getting Help"
section.
Retaining Clips
Base unit contact pads
Lift 45o
Contact pins
20
You need to set jumpers or switches to configure your computer for the
Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology.
• In most computers, the jumper and switch settings for the original Pentium
processor and the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology are
the same. In some cases, however, you may need to specifically configure
your system for a Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. Your
computer's owner's manual or your computer manufacturer should have the
correct settings for your computer. Intel also has information about some
computers. See the "Getting Help" section for how to get this information.
Jumpers are very small pins fastened to the motherboard. If you look closely,
you can see that each jumper is labelled with a number or letter that typically
is printed on the motherboard, as shown below.
The pins are connected (ON) when a tiny plastic connector covers two pins.
The connector has a metal piece embedded in the plastic that allows current
to pass between the pins.
To turn the connection OFF, remove the jumper connector from the pins. You
can also place the connector over only one of the pins for safekeeping as
shown. To turn the connection ON, place the connector over the two indicated
pins. Note that while some jumpers appear in pairs, others may appear in sets
of four or more, as shown.
PC-2913
J1 JP1
1 2 3 4 5 J 1
JP1
21
Getting Help
Intel Customer Support on the World Wide Web
Support information for Intel Brand products is available on the Internet for
downloading by anonymous FTP and for viewing or downloading on the
World Wide Web. Try Intels newsgroup forum for answers to common
questions or post your question to be answered.
Intel web site http://www.intel.com
Customer support web site http://support.intel.com
Intel FTP hostname ftp.intel.com
Customer support files ftp.intel.com/pub/support
Intel Internet newsgroup news://cs.intel.com or http://cs.intel.com
Intel Customer Support FaxBack* Service
Have documents sent to your fax machine or fax/modem. For information
about Intel support services options, order FaxBack document #8549. For
information about support for discontinued Intel products, order FaxBack
document #8715.
In North America (Oregon, USA) 800-525-3019
In Europe (Swindon, UK) +44-1793-432-509
Intel Customer Support Technicians
If you are unable to find the information you need on one of our electronic
services, you may need to call a customer support technician.
Country Customer Support Hours (Local Time)
Telephone Number Monday through Friday
U.S. and Canada 1-800-321-4044 07:00-17:00
Swindon, UK
English +44-1793-404-900 08:00-24:00
French +44-1793-404-988 08:00-17:00
German +44-1793-404-777 08:00-17:00 (Tuesday 08:00-16:00)
Italian +44-1793-404-141 08:00-17:00 (Tuesday 08:00-16:00)
Japan 03-5350-0860 09:00-17:00
Asia-Pacific
Australia (Sydney) +1-800-649-931 05:00-15:00
Hong Kong +852-2-844-4456 05:00-15:00
Korea +822-767-2595 05:00-15:00
Singapore +65-831-1311 05:00-15:00
Taiwan +886-2-718-9915 05:00-15:00
From anywhere in the world, contact your local dealer or distributor, or call the
North American Service Center at +1-916-377-7000 (hours are 07:00-15:00, Pacific
Time).
22
Registration
Please take a few moments to fill out your OverDrive processor registration
card. Returning this card allows us to send you important OverDrive
processor announcements and new product information.
Three Year Limited Warranty
Intel warrants that the OverDrive® processor, if properly used and installed, will be
free from defects in material and workmanship and will substantially conform to
Intel's publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date
the OverDrive processor was purchased.
If the OverDrive processor which is the subject of this Limited Warranty fails
during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at
its option, will:
REPAIR the OverDrive processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR
REPLACE the OverDrive processor with another OverDrive processor; OR, if
Intel is unable to repair or replace the OverDrive processor,
REFUND the then-current value of the OverDrive processor.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT
MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL
PURCHASER OF THE OVERDRIVE PROCESSOR AND LAST ONLY FOR AS
LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR.
Extent of Limited Warranty
Intel does not warrant that your OverDrive processor will be free from design
defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata for Pentium
OverDrive processors are available upon request.
This limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of
any OverDrive processor that is soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your
system's motherboard.
This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including
accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product
instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper
testing. If you do not wish to install the OverDrive processor yourself, you should
have the vendor from whom you purchased the product install it.
How to Obtain Warranty Service
To obtain warranty service, you must return the OverDrive processor to the vendor
from whom you purchased it, or, with proof of purchase, to Intel. Before returning
the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must contact Intel Customer Support at 916-
377-7000 or toll free in the U.S., 1-800-321-4044.
23
If you obtain warranty service from Intel, upon Intel's verification that the
OverDrive processor is or may be defective, you will be issued a Return Material
Authorization (RMA). When you return the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must
include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any
returned OverDrive processor that has no RMA number on the package.If you
return the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must assume the risk of damage or loss
during shipping. You must use the original packaging or the equivalent, and you
must pay the postage.
Intel may require you to verify that you are the original end user purchaser of the
OverDrive processor. Intel may elect to replace or repair the OverDrive processor
with either a new or reconditioned product. The returned product shall become
Intel's property on receipt by Intel.
The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject
to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty
period or one (1) year, whichever is longer.
WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS
THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES
BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS
LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION
TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER
THAT PERIOD. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON
HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
INTEL'S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY,
IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR
REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS
NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF
WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO
OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS
OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY
PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM
CONTAINING YOUR OVERDRIVE PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY
ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
www.samsung.com
Mode d’emploi
SM-T230
2
À propos de ce mode d’emploi
Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité,
basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement
conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et les caractéristiques de votre appareil.
• Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil
correctement et en toute sécurité.
• Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil.
• Les images et les captures d’écran peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit.
• Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version
logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de
ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung : www.samsung.com.
• Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM
peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en
rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques
de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation.
• Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier selon l’appareil, votre
version logicielle ou votre opérateur.
• Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou
des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de
performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des éditeurs de logiciels autres que Samsung.
• Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités
découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de
personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de
l’appareil ou de ses applications.
• Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s
avec cet appareil sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée.
L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent
une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement
responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia.
À propos de ce mode d’emploi
3
• Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être
disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie
avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications
installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs.
• Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non
officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions
constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie.
Icônes
Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui.
Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements.
Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires.
Droits d’auteur
Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics
Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur.
Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque
moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement
ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce
document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics.
À propos de ce mode d’emploi
4
Marques
• SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics.
• Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
• Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des
marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires
respectifs.
5
Table des matières
Démarrage
7 Présentation de l’appareil
8 Touches
9 Contenu du coffret
10 Charger la batterie
12 Insérer une carte mémoire
14 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil
15 Manipuler l’appareil
15 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil
15 Régler le volume
15 Activer le profil Discret
Fonctions de base
16 Icônes d’informations
17 Utiliser l’écran tactile
20 Reconnaissance des mouvements
22 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres
26 Notifications
27 Écran d’accueil
29 Liste des applications
31 Utiliser les applications
31 Aide
32 Saisir du texte
34 Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi
35 Créer un compte
36 Configurer les profils utilisateurs
36 Transférer des fichiers
37 Protéger l’appareil
38 Mettre l’appareil à jour
Communication
40 Contacts
44 Email
46 Google Mail
48 Hangouts
48 Google+
49 Google+ Photos
Web et réseau
50 Internet
51 Chrome
52 Bluetooth
Multimédia
54 Musique
56 Appareil photo
61 Galerie
65 Vidéo
66 YouTube
Table des matières
6
Géolocalisation
85 Maps
Paramètres
86 Accéder au menu des paramètres
86 Connexions
89 Appareil
94 Contrôle
97 Général
101 Paramètres Google
Dépannage
Boutiques d’applications et
multimédia
67 Play Store
68 Samsung Apps
68 Play Livres
69 Play Films
69 Play Musique
69 Play Jeux
69 Play Kiosque
Utilitaires
70 Mémo
71 S Planner
73 Mode Enfant
74 Dropbox
74 Cloud
75 Google Drive
75 Hancom Office Viewer
78 Alarme
79 Horloge mondiale
80 Calculatrice
80 S Voice
81 Recherche Google
82 Recherche vocale
82 Mes fichiers
7
Démarrage
Présentation de l’appareil
Touche Applications
récentes
Touche Accueil
Écran tactile
Objectif avant
Connecteur à fonctions Touche Retour
multiples
Touche de volume
Compartiment pour carte
mémoire
Microphone
Touche Marche/Arrêt
Antenne GPS
Objectif arrière
Haut-parleur
Prise audio 3,5 mm
Démarrage
8
• Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela
peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie.
• L’utilisation d’une protection d’écran agréée Samsung est recommandée. Les protections
d’écran non agréées peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement des capteurs.
• Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau
peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
Touches
Touche Fonction
Marche/Arrêt
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre
l’appareil.
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pendant 8 secondes pour
réinitialiser l’appareil en cas d’erreur fatale, ou s’il ne répond plus
ou se bloque.
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller
l’appareil. Lorsque l’écran tactile s’éteint, l’appareil passe en mode
Verrouillage.
Applications
récentes
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des applications
récentes.
Accueil
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil.
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer l’application de
recherche Google.
Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent.
Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil.
Démarrage
9
Contenu du coffret
Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents :
• Appareil
• Guide de prise en main rapide
• Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en
fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur.
• Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne
pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils.
• L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans
préavis.
• Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant
tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil.
• Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre
appareil.
• Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Les
dysfonctionnements résultant d’une utilisation d’accessoires non homologués ne sont
pas couverts par le service de garantie.
• La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour
plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung.
Démarrage
10
Charger la batterie
Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois.
Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung.
L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la
batterie ou endommager l’appareil.
• Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide.
• Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil,
même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant
d’allumer l’appareil.
• Si vous utilisez simultanément plusieurs applications, des applications réseaux ou des
applications qui nécessitent une connexion à un autre appareil, la batterie se déchargera
rapidement. Pour éviter toute déconnexion du réseau ou perte d’alimentation lors
d’un transfert de données, utilisez toujours ces applications lorsque la batterie est
parfaitement chargée.
Charger la batterie avec le chargeur
Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à
fonctions multiples de l’appareil.
Démarrage
11
Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les
dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.
• L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement
complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps.
• Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne
fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas,
débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil.
• Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène
est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la
température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre.
• Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur,
dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire,
débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant.
• Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le
chargeur n’étant pas muni d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la
prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise
en cours de chargement.
• Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément
accessible.
Vérifier la charge de la batterie
Lorsque vous chargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint, les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du
chargement :
Chargement en cours Chargement terminé
Démarrage
12
Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie
Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En
personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan,
vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements :
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche
Marche/Arrêt.
• Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du gestionnaire
de tâches.
• Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth.
• Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi.
• Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique.
• Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran.
• Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran.
Insérer une carte mémoire
L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 32 Go. Selon le
fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre
appareil.
• Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil.
L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte
mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées.
• Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté.
• Seules les structures de fichiers FAT et exFAT sont compatibles avec les cartes mémoire de
l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de
fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater.
• Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de
vie des cartes mémoire.
• Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la
carte apparaît dans le dossier SD card du menu Mes fichiers.
Démarrage
13
1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire.
2 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le bas.
3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son compartiment jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille.
4 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire.
Retirer une carte mémoire
Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en
toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage →
Démonter la carte SD.
1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire.
2 Appuyez avec précaution sur la carte mémoire pour la libérer, puis sortez-la du compartiment.
3 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire.
Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations.
Cela pourrait entraîner une perte ou une corruption des données, ou endommager la carte
mémoire ou l’appareil. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données
résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire.
Démarrage
14
Formater une carte mémoire
Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil.
Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Formater la
carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout.
Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de
toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas
la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur.
Allumer et éteindre l’appareil
Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour
procéder à sa configuration.
Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes.
• Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel
compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par
exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux.
• Pour désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions Wi-Fi et
Bluetooth, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Mode Hors-ligne.
Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre.
Démarrage
15
Manipuler l’appareil
Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner
des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie.
Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil
Pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle de l’appareil lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas, vous pouvez
le verrouiller. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et l’appareil passe en
mode Verrouillage. Il se verrouille également automatiquement si vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un
certain temps.
Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil alors que
l’écran est désactivé, appuyez ensuite sur l’écran, puis faites-y glisser votre doigt.
Régler le volume
Pour régler le volume de la musique ou des vidéos, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas.
Activer le profil Discret
Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Maintenez la touche de volume Bas enfoncée jusqu’à ce que le profil Discret soit activé.
• Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Muet.
• Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur Son.
16
Fonctions de base
Icônes d’informations
Les icônes susceptibles de s’afficher en haut de l’écran vous indiquent le statut de l’appareil. Les
icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes.
Icône Signification
Wi-Fi connecté
Fonction Bluetooth activée
GPS activé
Fonction Écran intelligent activée
Connecté à un ordinateur
Alarme activée
Profil Discret activé
Mode Hors-ligne activé
Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire
Niveau de charge de la batterie
Fonctions de base
17
Utiliser l’écran tactile
L’écran tactile réagit uniquement au doigt.
• Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges
électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
• Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et
n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts.
• Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors
de la zone de saisie dédiée.
• Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes
risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous
n’utilisez pas l’appareil.
Mouvements
Appuyer
Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une commande ou saisir un
caractère sur le clavier, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt.
Fonctions de base
18
Maintenir appuyé
Pour ouvrir une fenêtre d’options contextuelle, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément pendant
plus de 2 secondes.
Faire glisser
Pour déplacer un élément vers un nouvel emplacement, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément et
faites-le glisser sur l’écran.
Appuyer deux fois
Pour effectuer un zoom sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Appuyez à
nouveau à deux reprises pour annuler le zoom.
Fonctions de base
19
Effleurer
Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l’écran
d’accueil ou dans la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste, telle que celle
de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran.
Pincer
Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur
l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière.
Fonctions de base
20
Reconnaissance des mouvements
Vous pouvez contrôler l’appareil à l’aide de quelques mouvements simples.
Avant toute chose, vérifiez que la fonction de reconnaissance des mouvements est activée. Depuis
l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contrôle → Mouvement de paume, puis faites
glisser le curseur Mouvement de paume vers la droite.
Si l’appareil est soumis à des secousses ou à des chocs excessifs, cela peut entraîner un
comportement imprévu. Veillez à contrôler vos gestes.
Pivoter l’écran
De nombreuses applications autorisent l’affichage en mode Portrait ou Paysage. Lorsque vous faites
pivoter l’appareil, l’écran s’adapte automatiquement à la nouvelle orientation.
Pour empêcher l’écran de pivoter automatiquement, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et désélectionnez
l’option Rotation écran.
• Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran.
• Pour certaines autres applications, l’écran affiché diffère selon l’orientation. Par exemple,
pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique, vous devez pivoter l’écran en mode Paysage.
Fonctions de base
21
Balayer
Balayez l’écran avec le côté de la main pour réaliser une capture d’écran. L’image est enregistrée dans
Galerie → Screenshots. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications.
Recouvrir
Recouvrez l’écran avec la paume de la main pour effectuer une pause lors de la lecture d’un contenu
multimédia.
Fonctions de base
22
Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres
Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même temps.
• Seules les applications définies par défaut dans le volet Multi-fenêtres peuvent être
exécutées.
• La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Pour utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres, depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres →
Appareil → Fenêtres multiples, puis faites glisser le curseur Fenêtres multiples vers la droite.
Utiliser un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres
Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter des applications sur un écran partagé.
Lancer des applications sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres
1 Placez votre doigt sur le côté droit de l'écran et faites-le glisser vers le milieu de l’écran. Vous
pouvez également maintenir le doigt appuyé sur .
Le volet Multi-fenêtres s’affiche sur le côté droit de l’écran.
Volet Multi-fenêtres
Fonctions de base
23
2 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faitesla
glisser vers l’écran.
Relâchez l’icône de l’application lorsque l’écran devient bleu.
3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une autre application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis
faites-la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement.
Fonctions de base
24
Partager du contenu entre applications
Vous pouvez facilement partager du contenu entre des applications comme Email et Internet par un
mouvement de glisser-déposer.
Il est possible que certaines applications ne soient pas compatibles avec cette fonction.
1 Lancez les applications Email et Internet sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres.
Accéder aux options Multi-fenêtres
2 Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application, puis appuyez sur .
Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application pour accéder aux options
suivantes :
• : passer d’une application Fenêtres multiples à l’autre.
• : partager facilement des éléments comme des images, du texte ou des liens entre les
fenêtres d'application en réalisant un mouvement de glisser-déposer.
• : agrandir la fenêtre.
• : fermer l’application.
Fonctions de base
25
3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément dans la fenêtre Internet et faites-le glisser vers un
emplacement dans la fenêtre E-mail.
Fonctions de base
26
Notifications
Des icônes de notification peuvent apparaître dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran afin de
vous signaler les nouveaux messages, les événements à venir, le statut de l’appareil, et plus encore.
Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites glisser votre doigt de haut en bas sur le volet. Pour afficher
des notifications supplémentaires, faites défiler la liste vers le bas. Pour fermer le volet, faites-le
glisser de bas en haut.
Vous pouvez afficher tous les paramètres actuels de votre appareil à partir du volet des raccourcis.
Faites glisser le volet des raccourcis vers le bas, puis appuyez sur pour utiliser les options
suivantes :
• Wi-Fi : activer ou désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi.
• Position : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS.
• Son : activer ou désactiver le profil Discret.
• Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil.
• Bluetooth : activer ou désactiver la fonction Bluetooth.
• Fenêtres multiples : activer ou désactiver la fonction Multi-fenêtres.
• Synchro. : activer ou désactiver la synchronisation automatique des applications.
• Smart Stay : activer ou désactiver la fonction de veille intelligente Smart Stay.
• Éco. énergie : activer ou désactiver le mode économie d’énergie.
• Mode blocage : activer ou désactiver le mode blocage. En mode blocage, l’appareil bloque
toutes les notifications. Pour sélectionner les notifications à bloquer, appuyez sur Paramètres →
Appareil → Mode Blocage.
• Mode Hors-ligne : activer ou désactiver le mode Hors-ligne.
La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur.
Pour redisposer les options dans le volet des raccourcis, ouvrez-le, appuyez sur → , puis
maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement.
Fonctions de base
27
Écran d’accueil
L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des
icônes d’information, des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc.
L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la
gauche ou la droite.
Organiser les éléments de l’écran d’accueil
Ajouter une icône d’application
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur , maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une icône d’application, puis
faites-la glisser sur l’aperçu d’un volet.
Déplacer un élément
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement
souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de
l’écran.
Supprimer un élément
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille qui
apparaît en haut de l’écran d’accueil. Lorsque la corbeille devient rouge, relâchez l’élément.
Fonctions de base
28
Organiser les volets de widgets
Ajouter un volet
Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les, puis appuyez sur .
Déplacer un volet
Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les pour passer en mode Modification. Maintenez ensuite
le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité.
Supprimer un volet
Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis
faites-le glisser vers la corbeille en haut de l’écran.
Définir un fond d’écran
Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond d’écran d’accueil.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, appuyez
sur Définir fond d’écran → Écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez un des éléments suivants :
• Galerie : photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou images que vous avez
téléchargées depuis Internet.
• Fonds d’écran animés : fonds d’écran animés fournis par défaut avec votre appareil.
• Photos : images de l'application Google Photos.
• Fonds d’écran : fonds d’écran fournis par défaut avec votre appareil.
Sélectionnez une image, redimensionnez le cadre si nécessaire, puis définissez-la comme fond
d’écran.
Fonctions de base
29
Utiliser les widgets
Les widgets sont de petites applications qui permettent d’accéder à des fonctions et des
informations pratiques sur l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez ajouter des widgets depuis le volet des
widgets sur l’écran d’accueil.
• Certains widgets permettent de se connecter à des services Web. L’utilisation d’un widget
Internet peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires.
• La disponibilité des widgets dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Widgets. Faites défiler le volet des widgets vers la gauche
ou la droite, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget pour l’ajouter à l’écran d’accueil. Placezle
à l’endroit souhaité, redimensionnez-le en étirant son cadre, puis, le cas échéant, appuyez à un
endroit quelconque de l’écran pour valider le nouvel emplacement du widget.
Liste des applications
La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment
installées.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications.
Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite.
Organiser les applications
Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode d’affichage Grille personnalisable.
Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser
jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le
bord droit ou gauche de l’écran.
Fonctions de base
30
Organiser les applications dans des dossiers
Placez les applications similaires dans un même dossier pour faciliter leur utilisation.
Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers
l'option Créer dossier. Saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Placez les applications dans
le nouveau dossier en les faisant glisser, puis appuyez sur Sauveg. pour sauvegarder la nouvelle
configuration.
Installer des applications
Utilisez les boutiques d’applications, comme Samsung Apps, pour télécharger et installer des
applications.
Désinstaller des applications
Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à
désinstaller.
Il est impossible de désinstaller les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil.
Désactiver des applications
Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à
désactiver.
Pour activer de nouveau des applications depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Afficher
les applications désactivées, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK.
• Les applications téléchargées et certaines des applications fournies par défaut avec
l’appareil ne peuvent pas être désactivées.
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, les applications désactivées disparaissent de la liste
des applications, mais restent enregistrées dans l’appareil.
Fonctions de base
31
Utiliser les applications
Cet appareil peut exécuter différent types d’applications, vous permettant d’utiliser aussi bien des
contenus multimédia que des contenus Internet.
Ouvrir une application
Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application
correspondante.
Certaines applications sont regroupées dans des dossiers. Appuyez sur un dossier, puis sur
une application pour l’ouvrir.
Ouvrir des applications récemment utilisées
Appuyer sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées.
Appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante.
Fermer une application
Fermez les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan pour économiser la batterie et
optimiser les performances de l’appareil.
Appuyez sur → Gest. tâches, puis sur Fin à côté de l’application à fermer. Pour fermer toutes
les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur Fermer tout près du nombre total d’applications
actives. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur → Tout fermer.
Aide
Accédez aux informations d’aide pour apprendre à utiliser l’appareil et les applications, ou configurer
des paramètres importants.
Appuyez sur Aide depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher des conseils, sélectionnez une
catégorie.
Pour trier les catégories par ordre alphabétique, appuyez sur .
Pour rechercher des mots-clés, appuyez sur .
Fonctions de base
32
Saisir du texte
Pour saisir du texte, utilisez le clavier Samsung ou la fonction de saisie vocale.
La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez
sélectionner une des langues prises en charge.
Modifier le type de clavier
Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis
choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser.
Utiliser le clavier Samsung
Passer à la ligne suivante. Supprimer le caractère précédent.
Saisir des signes de ponctuation.
Saisir des majuscules.
Accéder aux paramètres du clavier
Samsung.
Insérer un espace.
Saisir des majuscules.
Ajouter un élément du
presse-papier.
Mots-clés suggérés
Saisir des majuscules
Appuyez sur avant de saisir un caractère. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules,
appuyez deux fois sur cette touche.
Modifier le type de clavier
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur pour activer le clavier flottant.
Sur le clavier flottant, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur et déplacez le clavier flottant vers un autre
emplacement.
Fonctions de base
33
Modifier la langue du clavier
Ajoutez des langues au clavier, puis faites glisser la barre d’espace vers la gauche ou la droite pour
modifier la langue du clavier.
Écrire de façon manuscrite
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , appuyez ensuite sur , puis écrivez un mot à l’aide du doigt. Les
mots suggérés apparaissent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Sélectionnez une suggestion.
Utilisez les gestes de saisie manuscrite pour effectuer des opérations, comme la modification ou la
suppression de caractères, et l’insertion d’espaces. Pour afficher les didacticiels, maintenez le doigt
appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur → Aide → Utiliser les gestes de saisie manuscrite.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Dicter du texte
Activez la fonction de saisie vocale, puis parlez dans le microphone. L’appareil affiche à l’écran ce que
vous venez de dire.
Si l’appareil ne reconnaît pas correctement les mots, appuyez sur le texte mis en surbrillance et
sélectionnez une autre proposition dans la liste déroulante qui apparaît.
Pour modifier la langue de la reconnaissance vocale ou en ajouter une autre, appuyez sur la langue
actuellement prise en charge.
Fonctions de base
34
Copier et coller du texte
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte souhaité, faites glisser l’icône ou pour redimensionner
la sélection, puis appuyez sur Copier pour copier le texte ou sur Couper pour le couper. Le texte
sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier.
Pour le coller dans une zone de saisie, placez le curseur à l’endroit où vous souhaitez insérer le texte,
puis appuyez sur → Coller.
Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi
Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers
multimédia avec d’autres appareils (p. 86).
Assurez-vous que la connexion Wi-Fi est activée avant d’utiliser les applications Internet.
Activer ou désactiver un réseau Wi-Fi
Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Wi-Fi pour activer ou désactiver la fonction.
• Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée et est conçu pour fonctionner dans
tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner
sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur.
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie.
Établir une connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Wi-Fi, puis faites glisser
le curseur Wi-Fi vers la droite.
Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi détectés, saisissez un mot de passe, le cas
échéant, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par
une icône représentant un verrou. Après connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, l’appareil s’y connectera
automatiquement dès qu’il sera disponible.
Fonctions de base
35
Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi
Si le réseau souhaité n’apparaît pas dans la liste, appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi au bas de la
liste des réseaux. Saisissez le nom du réseau dans la zone SSID du réseau, sélectionnez le type de
sécurité, indiquez votre mot de passe si le réseau est protégé, puis appuyez sur Connexion.
Supprimer un réseau Wi-Fi
Si un réseau ne doit plus être utilisé, même s’il s’agit du réseau actuellement activé, vous pouvez le
supprimer afin que l’appareil ne s’y connecte plus automatiquement. Sélectionnez le réseau dans la
liste, puis appuyez sur Oublier.
Créer un compte
Les applications Google, comme Play Store, nécessitent un compte Google et Samsung Apps
requiert un compte Samsung. Créez des comptes Google et Samsung afin de profiter au maximum
de votre appareil.
Ajouter des comptes
Lorsque vous ouvrez une application Google, suivez les instructions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Pour
créer un compte Google, vous n’avez pas besoin de vous connecter.
Pour vous connecter à un compte Google ou en créer un, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez
sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Ajouter compte → Google. Appuyez ensuite sur
Nouveau pour créer un compte ou sur Compte existant pour vous connecter, puis suivez les
instructions à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs comptes
Google sur l’appareil.
Vous pouvez également créer un compte Samsung.
Supprimer un compte
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes, sélectionnez un
nom de compte sous l’option MES COMPTES, choisissez le compte à supprimer, puis appuyez sur
Supprimer le compte.
Fonctions de base
36
Configurer les profils utilisateurs
Configurez des profils utilisateurs, puis sélectionnez-en un lorsque vous déverrouillez l’appareil
pour utiliser des paramètres personnalisés. En configurant plusieurs profils utilisateurs, plusieurs
utilisateurs peuvent partager l’appareil sans affecter les paramètres personnels des autres, tels que
les comptes de messagerie électronique ou les préférences de fond d’écran.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Utilisateurs → → OK,
puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer un nouveau profil utilisateur.
Pour accéder à l’appareil avec un profil utilisateur, sélectionnez un profil en haut à droite de l’écran
verrouillé.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Transférer des fichiers
Vous pouvez transférer différents types de fichiers (sons, vidéos, images, etc.) de l’appareil vers un
ordinateur, et inversement.
Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies
Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer vos contenus multimédia et vos informations
personnelles avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir
du site Web Samsung.
1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement sur l’ordinateur. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas,
double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur.
2 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur.
Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies.
Connecter l’appareil à Windows Media Player
Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est bien installé sur votre ordinateur.
1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
2 Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers audio.
Fonctions de base
37
Connecter l’appareil en tant qu’appareil multimédia
1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
2 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Connecté en tant que périphérique
multimédia → Périphérique multimédia (MTP).
Appuyez sur Appareil photo (PTP) si votre ordinateur ne gère pas le protocole MTP (Media
Transfer Protocol) ou ne dispose pas du pilote approprié.
3 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur.
Protéger l’appareil
Vous pouvez empêcher toute personne d’utiliser votre appareil et de consulter les données et
informations personnelles qui y sont enregistrées. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir
un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé.
Déverrouillage par modèle
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage →
Déverrouillage de l'écran → Modèle.
Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un
code PIN de déverrouillage de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle.
Fonctions de base
38
Déverrouillage par code PIN
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage →
Déverrouillage de l'écran → Code PIN.
Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider.
Déverrouillage par mot de passe
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage →
Déverrouillage de l'écran → Mot de passe.
Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour
valider.
Déverrouiller l’appareil
Allumez l’écran en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis saisissez le
code ou dessinez le modèle de déverrouillage.
Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service
après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser.
Mettre l’appareil à jour
L’appareil peut être mis à jour avec la version logicielle la plus récente.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Mettre l’appareil à jour avec Samsung Kies
Démarrez Samsung Kies et raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur. Samsung Kies reconnaît
automatiquement l’appareil et affiche, le cas échéant, les mises à jour disponibles. Pour lancer la mise
à jour, cliquez sur la touche Mettre à jour dans la boîte de dialogue. Pour plus d’informations sur la
mise à jour, consultez l’aide Samsung Kies.
• Lorsque vous mettez votre appareil à jour, n’éteignez pas l’ordinateur et ne déconnectez
pas le câble de USB.
• Ne raccordez pas non plus d’autres appareils multimédia à l’ordinateur. Cela pourrait
interférer avec le processus de mise à jour.
Fonctions de base
39
Mettre l’appareil à jour sans connexion PC
Grâce au service FOTA (Firmware Over The Air), le logiciel de l’appareil peut être mis à jour sans
passer par une connexion avec un ordinateur.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → À propos de l’appareil →
Mise à jour logicielle → Mettre à jour maintenant.
40
Communication
Contacts
Utilisez cette application pour gérer les contacts, y compris les numéros de téléphone, les adresses
e-mail, et plus encore.
Appuyez sur Contacts depuis la liste des applications.
Gérer les contacts
Appuyez sur Contacts.
Créer un contact
Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage, puis saisissez les informations d’un contact.
• : ajouter une image.
• / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d’information.
Modifier un contact
Sélectionnez un contact à modifier, puis appuyez sur .
Supprimer un contact
Appuyez sur .
Communication
41
Rechercher des contacts
Appuyez sur Contacts.
Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes :
• Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas.
• Pour faire défiler la liste rapidement, placez votre index à gauche de la liste de contacts et faites
défiler vers le haut ou le bas.
• Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos
critères de recherche.
Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes :
• : ajouter le contact aux favoris.
• : rédiger un e-mail.
Afficher les contacts
Appuyez sur Contacts.
Par défaut, l’appareil affiche tous les contacts enregistrés.
Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contacts à afficher, puis sélectionnez la source à partir de laquelle
les contacts doivent être affichés.
Synchroniser des contacts
Appuyez sur Contacts.
Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Google
Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Google.
Les contacts Google sont caractérisés par l’icône .
Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Samsung
Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Samsung.
Les contacts Samsung sont caractérisés par l’icône .
Communication
42
Importer et exporter des contacts
Appuyez sur Contacts.
Importer des contacts
Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation.
Exporter des contacts
Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’exportation.
Partager des contacts
Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Plusieurs contacts, sélectionnez les contacts à
partager, appuyez sur OK, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage.
Contacts favoris
Appuyez sur Favoris.
Appuyez sur pour ajouter des contacts à vos favoris.
Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes :
• Rechercher : rechercher des contacts.
• Supprimer des favoris : supprimer des contacts des favoris.
• Affichage Liste / Affichage Grille : afficher les contacts sous forme de tableau ou de liste.
• Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts.
Communication
43
Groupes de contacts
Appuyez sur Groupes.
Créer un groupe
Appuyez sur , configurez les détails du groupe, ajoutez des contacts, puis appuyez sur Enreg.
Ajouter des contacts à un groupe
Sélectionnez un groupe, puis appuyez sur → Ajouter membre. Sélectionnez les contacts à ajouter,
puis appuyez sur OK.
Gérer les groupes
Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes :
• Rechercher : rechercher des contacts.
• Supprimer des groupes : sélectionner des groupes auxquels vous avez ajouté des contacts, puis
appuyer sur OK. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les groupes par défaut.
• Modifier le groupe : modifier les paramètres du groupe.
• Ajouter membre : ajouter des membres au groupe.
• Supprimer du groupe : retirer un membre du groupe.
• Envoyer un e-mail : envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe.
• Modifier l’ordre : maintenir le doigt appuyé sur l’icône près du nom du groupe, faire glisser
l’icône vers le haut ou le bas jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité, puis appuyer sur OK.
• Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts.
Envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe
Sélectionnez un groupe, appuyez sur → Envoyer un e-mail, sélectionnez des membres, puis
appuyez sur OK.
Communication
44
Carte de visite
Appuyez sur Contacts.
Créez une carte de visite et envoyez-la à vos contacts.
En haut de la liste des contacts, appuyez sur Profil configuré, saisissez vos coordonnées, comme
votre numéro de téléphone, votre adresse e-mail et votre adresse postale, puis appuyez sur Enreg.
Si, lorsque vous avez configuré votre appareil, vous avez enregistré vos coordonnées d’utilisateur,
sélectionnez la carte de visite, puis appuyez sur pour la modifier.
Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Contact sélectionné, puis sélectionnez un mode
de partage.
Email
Utilisez cette application pour envoyer ou consulter des e-mails.
Appuyez sur Email depuis la liste des applications.
Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique
Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie
électronique.
Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie
électronique privé, comme Google Mail, appuyez sur ; pour configurer un compte de messagerie
électronique professionnel, appuyez sur Config manuelle. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui
s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte.
Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur →
Paramètres → Ajouter compte.
Envoyer des e-mails
Sélectionnez le compte de messagerie électronique que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur
en haut de l’écran. Saisissez les destinataires, l’objet et le message, puis appuyez sur pour envoyer
l’e-mail.
Pour ajouter un destinataire figurant dans votre liste de contacts, appuyez sur .
Appuyez sur +Moi pour vous ajouter comme destinataire.
Pour ajouter davantage de destinataires, appuyez sur .
Appuyez sur pour joindre des images, vidéos, contacts, mémos, événements, etc.
Appuyez sur → pour insérer dans le message des images, événements, contacts, informations
de localisation et bien plus encore.
Communication
45
Envoyer des e-mails programmés
Lorsque vous rédigez un e-mail, appuyez sur → Envoi programmé. Cochez la case Envoi
programmé, définissez une heure et une date, puis appuyez sur OK. L’appareil envoie le message à
l’heure et à la date indiquées.
• Le message ne sera pas envoyé à l’heure et à la date programmées, si l’appareil est éteint,
s’il n’est pas connecté au réseau ou si le réseau est instable.
• Cette fonction est basée sur l’heure et la date configurées sur l’appareil. Si vous changez
de fuseau horaire et que le réseau ne met pas ces informations à jour, il se peut que
l’heure et la date soient incorrectes.
Lire des e-mails
Sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour
récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur .
Appuyez sur un message pour le lire.
Ouvrir les pièces jointes.
Passer au message suivant ou
revenir au message précédent.
Supprimer le message.
Rédiger un message.
Répondre au message.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre
liste de contacts.
Transférer le message.
Identifier le message comme favori.
Appuyez sur l’onglet de la pièce jointe pour l’ouvrir ou sur Enreg. pour l’enregistrer.
Communication
46
Google Mail
Utilisez cette application pour accéder directement au service Google Mail.
Appuyez sur Google Mail depuis la liste des applications.
• La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
• Cette application peut s’intituler différemment selon votre zone géographique ou votre
opérateur.
Envoyer des e-mails
Dans la boîte de réception, appuyez sur , saisissez les destinataires et un objet, rédigez un
message, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER.
Pour enregistrer le message afin de l’envoyer ultérieurement, appuyez sur → Enregistrer le
brouillon.
Pour joindre des photos, des vidéos, de la musique et d’autres fichiers, appuyez sur → Joindre un
fichier.
Pour annuler votre message, appuyez sur → Supprimer.
Appuyez sur → Paramètres pour modifier les paramètres de Google Mail.
Appuyez sur → Envoyer des commentaires pour indiquer votre opinion sur le développement de
l’application.
Appuyez sur → Aide pour accéder aux informations d’aide à propos de Google Mail.
Communication
47
Lire des e-mails
Afficher la pièce jointe.
Supprimer le message.
Archiver le message.
Répondre au message.
Identifier le message comme non
lu.
Déplacer le message vers une autre
messagerie.
Répondre à tous les destinataires
ou imprimer le message.
Transférer le message.
Identifier le message comme favori.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Libellés
Google Mail utilise des libellés pour classer les messages. Par défaut, Google Mail affiche les
messages du libellé Boîte de réception.
Appuyez sur → Actualiser pour récupérer manuellement les nouveaux messages.
Pour afficher des messages portant d’autres libellés, appuyez sur .
Pour ajouter un libellé à un message, sélectionnez le message, appuyez sur → Modifier les
libellés, puis sélectionnez le libellé que vous souhaitez lui attribuer.
Communication
48
Hangouts
Utilisez cette application pour discuter avec vos amis.
Appuyez sur Hangouts depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Sélectionnez un ami dans la liste ou saisissez des critères de recherche et sélectionnez un ami dans
les résultats pour commencer à discuter.
Google+
Utilisez cette application pour rester connecté à votre entourage via le service de réseau social de
Google.
Appuyez sur Google+ depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Appuyez sur Tous pour modifier la catégorie, puis faites défiler la liste vers le haut ou le bas pour
afficher les publications de vos cercles d’amis.
Communication
49
Google+ Photos
Utilisez cette application pour afficher et partager des images ou des vidéos via le service de réseau
social de Google.
Appuyez sur Photos depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes :
• TOUT : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos prises ou téléchargées sur l’appareil.
• SÉLECTION : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos regroupées par date ou par album. Appuyez
sur pour afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos du groupe.
Sélectionnez ensuite une photo ou une vidéo.
En mode affichage d'une photo ou d'une vidéo, utilisez l’une des icônes suivantes :
• : modifier la photo ou la vidéo.
• : partager la photo ou la vidéo avec d’autres personnes.
• : supprimer la photo ou la vidéo.
50
Web et réseau
Internet
Utilisez cette application pour naviguer sur Internet.
Appuyez sur Internet depuis la liste des applications.
Afficher des pages Web
Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, saisissez l’adresse Web, puis appuyez sur Aller à.
Appuyez sur pour accéder à des options complémentaires lors de l’affichage d’une page Web.
Pour changer de moteur de recherche, appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis appuyez sur l’icône du
moteur de recherche près de l’adresse Web.
Ouvrir un nouvel onglet
Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet.
Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le
titre pour le sélectionner.
Effectuer une recherche oralement
Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis sur → , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des
suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Favoris
Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur → → Enregistrer.
Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez la page
souhaitée.
Web et réseau
51
Historique
Pour ouvrir une page figurant dans la liste des pages récemment consultées, appuyez sur →
Favoris → Historique. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur .
Pages enregistrées
Pour afficher des pages Web enregistrées, appuyez sur → Favoris → Pages enreg.
Liens
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un lien d’une page Web pour l’ouvrir dans une nouvelle page,
l’enregistrer ou le copier.
Pour afficher les liens enregistrés, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Mes fichiers →
Historique des téléchargements.
Partager des pages Web
Pour partager l’adresse d’une page Web avec d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager via.
Pour partager une partie d’une page Web, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte de votre choix, puis
appuyez sur Partager via.
Chrome
Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des informations et parcourir des pages Web.
Appuyez sur Chrome depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Afficher des pages Web
Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis saisissez une adresse Web ou des critères de recherche.
Ouvrir un nouvel onglet
Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet.
Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le
titre pour le sélectionner.
Web et réseau
52
Favoris
Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur → Enregistrer.
Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur → Favoris, puis sélectionnez
la page souhaitée.
Effectuer une recherche oralement
Appuyez sur , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à
l’écran.
Synchroniser votre appareil avec d’autres appareils
Synchronisez des onglets et des favoris ouverts afin de les utiliser avec Chrome sur un autre appareil
lorsque vous êtes connecté au même compte Google.
Pour afficher des onglets ouverts sur d’autres appareils, appuyez sur → Autres appareils.
Sélectionnez la page Web à ouvrir.
Pour afficher les favoris, appuyez sur FAVORIS.
Bluetooth
La fonction Bluetooth crée une connexion sans fil directe entre deux appareils sur de courtes
distances. Pour échanger des données ou des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils, utilisez la
fonction Bluetooth.
• Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais
usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction Bluetooth.
• Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement
protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les
deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action.
• Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains appareils, en particulier
ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG.
• N’utilisez pas la fonction Bluetooth de manière illégale (par exemple, pour la copie pirate
de fichiers ou l’enregistrement de communications à des fins commerciales).
Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des répercussions d’une utilisation illégale de la
fonction Bluetooth.
Pour activer la fonction Bluetooth, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres →
Connexions → Bluetooth, puis faites glisser le curseur Bluetooth vers la droite.
Web et réseau
53
Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth → Analyser
pour afficher la liste des appareils détectés. Sélectionnez l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous
connecter, puis acceptez la demande d’autorisation automatiquement générée sur les deux
appareils pour confirmer l’opération.
Envoyer et recevoir des données
De nombreuses applications prennent en charge le transfert de données via la fonction Bluetooth.
C’est le cas, par exemple, de l’application Galerie. Ouvrez l’application Galerie, sélectionnez une
image, appuyez sur → Bluetooth, puis sélectionnez un appareil Bluetooth. Ensuite, pour recevoir
l’image, confirmez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur l’autre appareil.
Lorsqu’un autre appareil vous envoie des données, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth
émanant de cet autre appareil. Les fichiers reçus sont enregistrés dans le dossier Download. Si vous
recevez un nouveau contact, il est automatiquement ajouté à votre liste de contacts.
54
Multimédia
Musique
Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique.
Appuyez sur Musique depuis la liste des applications.
Écouter de la musique
Sélectionnez une catégorie de musique, puis un morceau à écouter.
Appuyez sur l’image de l’album en bas de l’écran pour afficher le lecteur MP3 en plein écran.
Passer au morceau suivant.
Maintenir la touche appuyée pour
effectuer une avance rapide.
Mettre en pause et reprendre la
lecture.
Régler le volume.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Modifier le mode de répétition.
Redémarrer le morceau en cours
de lecture ou revenir au morceau
précédent. Maintenir la touche
appuyée pour effectuer un retour
rapide.
Activer la lecture aléatoire.
Ouvrir la liste de lecture.
Recherche d’autres appareils pour
lire le fichier.
Définir le fichier comme votre
morceau favori.
Multimédia
55
Pour écouter de la musique à volume égal, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Lecteur → Volume
intelligent.
Lorsque la fonction Volume intelligent est activée, le volume effectif peut être plus élevé
que celui réglé sur l’appareil. Soyez prudent et évitez toute exposition prolongée à des
niveaux sonores élevés, car cela pourrait provoquer des séquelles auditives.
Volume intelligent peut ne pas être activée pour certains fichiers.
Pour personnaliser vos réglages audio lors de l’écoute de musique avec un casque ou un écouteur,
appuyez sur → Paramètres → Lecteur → Adapt Sound → Activé. Lorsque vous réglez le volume
au niveau 14 ou supérieur, l’option d’adaptation du son (Adapt Sound) n’est pas appliquée. Si vous
baissez le volume au niveau 13 ou inférieur, l’option est de nouveau appliquée.
Définir un morceau comme sonnerie d’alarme
Pour utiliser le morceau de musique en cours de lecture comme sonnerie d’alarme, appuyez sur →
Définir comme tonalité d’alarme.
Créer des listes de lecture
Faites votre propre sélection de morceaux de musique.
Appuyez sur Listes lect., puis sur → Créer une liste de lecture. Saisissez un titre, puis appuyez sur
OK. Appuyez sur Ajouter, sélectionnez les morceaux à inclure dans la liste de lecture, puis appuyez
sur OK.
Pour ajouter le morceau de musique en cours de lecture à une liste de lecture, appuyez sur → Aj.
liste lecture.
Écouter de la musique par catégorie
Écoutez de la musique classée par atmosphère musicale. L’appareil crée automatiquement la liste de
lecture.
Appuyez sur → Coin musique et sélectionnez une atmosphère. Vous pouvez également
sélectionner plusieurs atmosphères en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran.
Multimédia
56
Appareil photo
Utilisez cette application pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos.
Pour visionner les photos et des vidéos prises avec l’appareil, utilisez l’application Galerie (p. 61).
Appuyez sur Appareil photo depuis la liste des applications.
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement.
• Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne
pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées.
Bon usage de l’appareil photo
• Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur
consentement.
• Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit.
• Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui.
Prendre des photos
Prendre une photo
Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur .
Afficher le mode en cours.
Modifier le mode de prise
de vue.
Modifier les paramètres
de l’appareil photo.
Basculer entre l’objectif
avant et arrière.
Sélectionner un des
divers effets disponibles.
Afficher davantage
d’options.
Basculer entre l’appareil
photo et le caméscope.
Afficher les photos et les
vidéos que vous avez
prises.
Multimédia
57
Mode de capture
Il existe plusieurs effets de photo.
Appuyez sur MODE, puis faites défiler les modes à droite de l’écran vers le haut ou le bas.
• Auto : ce mode permet à l’appareil photo d’évaluer l’environnement et de déterminer le mode
idéal de prise de vue.
• Beauté : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de visages plus claires pour obtenir des images
plus douces.
• Son & prise : ce mode permet de prendre une photo et d'enregistrer le son de la scène.
Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . L’appareil enregistre quelques secondes de contenu
audio après la prise de vue.
Lorsque vous prenez des photos dans ce mode, le son est enregistré par le microphone
interne.
• Panorama : ce mode permet de prendre une photo panoramique composée de différents
clichés assemblés les uns aux autres.
Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils :
– Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix.
– Maintenez l’objectif, de l’appareil photo dans le cadre de guidage.
– Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un
ciel ou un pan de mur uni.
• Sports : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de sujets en action.
• Nuit : ce mode permet de prendre des photos dans l’obscurité.
Photos panoramiques
Une photo panoramique est une large image en mode paysage constituée de plusieurs clichés.
Appuyez sur MODE → Panorama.
Appuyez sur et déplacez l’appareil photo dans le sens de votre choix. Lorsque les deux cadres de
prise de vue sont alignés, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement un autre cliché pour constituer
une séquence panoramique. Pour mettre fin à la prise de vue, appuyez sur .
Si l’objectif n’est plus aligné, la prise de vue s’interrompt.
Multimédia
58
Appliquer des effets de filtre
Utilisez les effets de filtre pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos uniques.
Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un effet de filtre. Les options disponibles varient selon le mode
sélectionné.
Enregistrer des vidéos
Enregistrer une vidéo
Faites glisser le curseur vers l’icône de caméscope, puis appuyez sur pour enregistrer une vidéo.
Pour interrompre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, appuyez sur .
La mise au point manuelle n’est pas disponible en mode caméscope.
Mode d’enregistrement
Basculer entre l’objectif
avant et arrière.
Afficher les photos et les
vidéos que vous avez
prises.
Sélectionner un des
divers effets disponibles.
Modifier les paramètres
de l’appareil photo.
Afficher davantage
d’options.
Afficher le mode en cours.
Basculer entre l’appareil
photo et le caméscope.
Multimédia
59
Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière
Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Utilisez la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière.
• Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un
zoom arrière, rapprochez-les.
La fonction zoom avant/arrière est disponible en cours d’enregistrement d’une vidéo.
Partager des photos
Appuyez sur → , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Partage : envoyer directement une photo à un autre appareil Wi-Fi Direct.
• Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer la photo à la personne dont le visage est utilisé comme
libellé.
Multimédia
60
Configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo et du caméscope
Pour configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo, appuyez sur . Les options suivantes sont
disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope). Les options disponibles peuvent
varier selon le mode utilisé.
• Taille des photos / Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une option de résolution. Pour obtenir une
meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée
nécessite davantage de mémoire.
• Mesure : sélectionner une méthode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les
valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrière-plan
au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la luminosité à un endroit spécifique. Matrice
calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière.
• Balise de localisation : joindre une étiquette de géolocalisation GPS à la photo.
• Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux
où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible
altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises.
• Votre localisation est susceptible d’apparaître sur vos photos au moment où vous les
publiez sur le Web. Pour empêcher l’affichage de ces données, désactivez le paramètre de
balise GPS.
• Touche de volume : paramétrer l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la touche de volume pour
contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom.
• Retardateur : prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo à l’issue d’un délai de retardement
prédéfini.
• Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images
offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des
situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de
balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels.
• Luminosité : modifier la luminosité.
Multimédia
61
• Guide : afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu.
• Nom de fichier contextuel : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche des balises
contextuelles. Activez cette fonction pour utiliser les tags contexuels dans la Galerie.
• Retourner l’image : inverser l’image pour créer une image miroir de la scène initiale. Cette
fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque vous utilisez l’objectif avant.
• Stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et vidéos.
• Réinitialiser : réinitialiser les paramètres de l’appareil photo/caméscope.
• Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide pour utiliser l’appareil photo.
Raccourcis
Réorganisez les raccourcis pour accéder facilement aux différentes options de l’appareil photo.
Appuyez sur et maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de raccourci.
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une option et faites-la glisser vers un autre emplacement en haut de
l’écran.
Galerie
Utilisez cette application pour visualiser des photos ou des vidéos.
Appuyez sur Galerie depuis la liste des applications.
Afficher des images
Lorsque vous lancez l’application, la Galerie affiche les dossiers disponibles. Lorsqu’une autre
application, telle que Email, enregistre une image, le dossier Download contenant l’image est
automatiquement créé. De même, si vous effectuez une capture d’écran, le dossier Screenshots est
automatiquement créé. Sélectionnez un dossier pour l’ouvrir.
Les images d’un dossier sont affichées par date de création. Appuyez sur une image pour l’afficher en
plein écran.
Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher l’image précédente ou suivante.
Multimédia
62
Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière
Pour effectuer un zoom sur une image, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez deux fois sur l’image à l’endroit de votre choix.
• Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran à l’endroit de votre
choix ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les ; pour revenir à l’affichage initial, appuyez
deux fois sur l’écran.
Lire des vidéos
Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône . Sélectionnez la vidéo que vous souhaitez regarder,
puis appuyez sur .
Découper les segments d’une vidéo
Sélectionnez une vidéo, puis appuyez sur . Déplacez le crochet d’ouverture au début de la section
souhaitée et le crochet de fermeture à la fin, puis enregistrez la vidéo.
Modifier des photos
En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes :
• Favoris : ajouter à votre liste de favoris.
• Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos du dossier ouvert.
• Cadre photo : ajouter un cadre et des notes à une image. L’image modifiée est enregistrée dans
le dossier Photo frame.
• Note photo : écrire une note à l’arrière de l’image. Pour modifier la note, appuyez sur .
• Copier dans le presse-papier : copier l’image dans le presse-papiers.
Multimédia
63
• Imprimer : imprimer l’image en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes
peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil.
• Renommer : renommer le fichier.
• Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer l’image à une personne dont le visage sert de libellé.
• Rotation à gauche : pivoter dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre.
• Rotation à droite : pivoter l’image dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre.
• Rogner : redimensionner le cadre bleu pour couper l’image.
• Définir comme : définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou image d’un contact.
• Détails : afficher les détails d’une image.
• Paramètres : modifier les paramètres de la Galerie.
Mes photos favorites
En mode affichage d’une image, appuyez sur → Favoris pour ajouter l’image à votre liste de
favoris.
Supprimer des photos
Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez
sur .
• En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur .
Partager des photos
Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez
sur pour l'envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux.
• En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur pour l’envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via
des services de réseaux sociaux.
Multimédia
64
Définir une image comme fond d’écran
En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Définir comme pour définir l’image comme fond
d’écran ou l’affecter à un contact.
Libellés de portraits
En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags, puis cochez la case Libellé
de portrait. Un cadre jaune apparaît autour du visage identifié. Appuyez sur le visage, puis sur
Ajouter un nom, et sélectionnez ou ajoutez un contact.
Lorsque le libellé de portrait apparaît sur une image, appuyez sur le nom et utilisez les fonctions
disponibles, comme la messagerie.
Selon l’angle du visage, la taille, l’expression, les conditions lumineuses ou les accessoires
portés par la personne, il est possible que la reconnaissance faciale ne fonctionne pas.
Utiliser les tags contextuels
Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags → Tag contextuel, puis faites glisser le curseur Tag
contextuel vers la droite pour afficher une balise contextuelle (météo, localisation, date et nom de la
personne) lors de l’ouverture d’une image.
Organiser les applications dans des dossiers
Créez un dossier pour organiser les images ou les vidéos enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez
copier ou déplacer des fichiers d’un dossier à un autre.
Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur . Saisissez le nom du dossier, appuyez sur OK, puis
cochez les images ou les vidéos à intégrer au nouveau dossier. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur
une image ou une vidéo, faites-la glisser vers le nouveau dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur
Copier pour copier ou sur Déplacer pour déplacer.
Multimédia
65
Vidéo
Utilisez cette application pour lire des fichiers vidéo.
Appuyez sur Vidéo depuis la liste des applications.
Lire des vidéos
Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire.
Déplacer le volet de
commande vers la
gauche.
Ouvrir la liste de lecture.
Effectuer un retour ou
une avance rapide en
faisant glisser la barre.
Recherche d’autres
appareils pour lire le
fichier.
Redémarrer la vidéo en
cours de lecture ou
revenir à la vidéo
précédente. Maintenir la
touche appuyée pour
effectuer un retour
rapide.
Passer à la vidéo suivante.
Maintenir la touche
appuyée pour effectuer
une avance rapide.
Régler le volume.
Mettre en pause et
reprendre la lecture.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires. Passer en mode d’écran
flottant.
Modifier le format
d’écran.
Déplacer le volet de
commande vers la droite.
Supprimer des vidéos
Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez des vidéos, puis appuyez sur Supprimer.
Multimédia
66
Partager des vidéos
Appuyez sur → Partager via, sélectionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur OK, puis choisissez une
méthode de partage.
Utiliser le lecteur contextuel
Utilisez cette fonctionnalité pour utiliser d’autres applications sans fermer le lecteur vidéo. Lorsque
vous visionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur pour utiliser le lecteur contextuel.
Pour agrandir le lecteur, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour le réduire, rapprochezles.
Pour déplacer le lecteur, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé, puis faites-le glisser vers un autre
emplacement.
YouTube
Utilisez cette application pour regarder des vidéos à partir du site Web YouTube.
Appuyez sur YouTube depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Visionner des vidéos
Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un mot-clé. Sélectionnez l’un des résultats de recherche obtenus pour
visionner la vidéo correspondante.
Appuyez sur l’écran, puis sur et faites pivoter ensuite l’appareil vers la gauche pour afficher la
vidéo en plein écran.
Partager une vidéo
Sélectionnez la vidéo à partager, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mode de partage.
Mettre une vidéo en ligne
Appuyez sur → Vidéos ajoutées → , sélectionnez une vidéo, saisissez les informations de la
vidéo, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER.
67
Boutiques d’applications et
multimédia
Play Store
Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications et des jeux, gratuits ou payants, pouvant
s’exécuter sur votre appareil.
Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Installer des applications
Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour effectuer une recherche à l’aide
d’un mot-clé.
Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur
INSTALLER. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à
l’écran pour effectuer l’achat.
Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à
jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et
appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application.
Désinstaller des applications
Désinstallez les applications téléchargées sur Play Store.
Appuyez sur → Mes applications, sélectionnez une application à supprimer depuis la liste des
applications installées, puis appuyez sur DÉSINSTALLER.
Boutiques d’applications et multimédia
68
Samsung Apps
Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications Samsung, gratuites ou payantes. Pour
plus d’informations, visitez le site apps.samsung.com.
Appuyez sur Samsung Apps depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Installer des applications
Parcourez les applications par catégorie. Appuyez sur CATÉGORIES pour sélectionner une catégorie.
Pour rechercher une application, appuyez sur en haut de l’écran, puis saisissez un mot-clé dans le
champ de recherche.
Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur
Gratuit. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à
l’écran pour effectuer l’achat.
Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à
jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et
appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application.
Play Livres
Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des fichiers de livre.
Appuyez sur Play Livres depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Boutiques d’applications et multimédia
69
Play Films
Utilisez cette application pour regarder, télécharger et louer des films ou des émissions TV.
Appuyez sur Play Films depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Play Musique
Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique à l’aide de l’appareil ou de la musique diffusée
sur le service Cloud de Google.
Appuyez sur Play Musique depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Play Jeux
Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des jeux et y jouer.
Appuyez sur Play Jeux depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Play Kiosque
Utilisez cette application pour lire les articles les plus récents.
Appuyez sur Play Kiosque depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
70
Utilitaires
Mémo
Cette application permet d’enregistrer des informations importantes à sauvegarder et à consulter
ultérieurement.
Appuyez sur Mémo depuis la liste des applications.
Ajouter et gérer des catégories
Créez des catégories afin de trier et gérer vos mémos.
Pour ajouter une catégorie, appuyez sur → Ajouter une catégorie, saisissez le nom d’une
catégorie, puis appuyez sur OK.
Pour supprimer une catégorie, appuyez sur → Modifier les catégories, puis sur près de la
catégorie concernée.
Pour renommer une catégorie, sélectionnez une catégorie, appuyez sur → Renommer une
catégorie, nommez la catégorie, puis appuyez sur OK.
Pour modifier l’ordre des catégories, appuyez sur → Modifier les catégories, puis appuyez sur
près de la catégorie concernée et faite-la glisser vers le haut ou le bas, vers une nouvelle position.
Créer un mémo
Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos et saisissez votre mémo. Lors de la rédaction d’un mémo,
utilisez les options suivantes :
• : créer ou définir une catégorie.
• : insérer des images.
• : enregistrer un mémo vocal et l’insérer.
Pour enregistrer le mémo, appuyez sur Enreg.
Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo, puis sur le contenu du mémo.
Utilitaires
71
Naviguer parmi les mémos
Parcourez les mémos miniatures en faisant défiler l’écran vers le haut ou le bas.
Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur .
Pour envoyer un mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez un mémo,
puis appuyez sur .
Pour imprimer les mémos en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur →
Sélectionner, sélectionnez les mémos, puis appuyez sur . Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas
être compatibles avec l’appareil.
Pour supprimer des mémos, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez les mémos, puis appuyez
sur .
Afficher un mémo
Appuyez sur la miniature d’un mémo pour l’ouvrir.
Pour supprimer le mémo, appuyez sur .
Pour envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur .
Pour imprimer le mémo en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur . Certaines
imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil.
S Planner
Utilisez cette application pour gérer des événements et des tâches.
Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications.
Créer un événement ou une tâche
Appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Événement : saisir un événement avec un paramètre de répétition en option.
• Tâche : saisir une tâche avec un paramètre de priorité en option.
Utilitaires
72
Pour ajouter plus rapidement un événement ou une tâche, appuyez deux fois sur une date.
Saisissez un titre et indiquez le calendrier que vous souhaitez utiliser pour la synchronisation.
Appuyez ensuite sur Modif. détails événement ou sur Modifier détails tâche pour ajouter d’autres
détails, comme la fréquence de répétition de l’événement ou de la tâche, son association ou non à
une alerte préalable ou le lieu concerné.
Invitez d’autres personnes à l’événement en envoyant un e-mail. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail dans la
zone Participants ou appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste de contacts.
Joignez une carte indiquant le lieu de l’événement. Saisissez l’adresse dans le champ Emplacement,
appuyez sur près du champ, puis signalez l’endroit précis en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur la
carte qui apparaît.
Synchroniser avec Google Agenda
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Google sous
Mes comptes, sélectionnez le compte Google, puis cochez la case Synchroniser Calendrier.
Pour réaliser la synchronisation manuellement et mettre le calendrier à jour, appuyez sur S Planner
→ → Synchroniser depuis la liste des applications.
Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches synchronisés, appuyez sur → Calendriers, puis cochez
le compte Google.
Utilitaires
73
Modifier le type de calendrier
En mode paysage, appuyez en haut à gauche de l’écran, puis sélectionnez l’un des différents types
de calendrier incluant l’année, le mois, la semaine, etc.
Rechercher un événement ou une tâche
Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un critère de recherche.
Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches de la date du jour, appuyez sur Aujourd’hui tout en haut
de l’écran.
Supprimer un événement ou une tâche
Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, puis appuyez sur → Supprimer.
Partager un événement ou une tâche
Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, appuyez sur → Partager via, puis sélectionnez un mode
de partage.
Mode Enfant
Utilisez ce widget pour offrir à vos enfants un environnement ludique et sécurisé en les empêchant
d’accéder à certaines applications ou certains contenus.
Avant d’utiliser ce widget, vous devez le télécharger et l’installer. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez
sur Mode Enfant → Installer. Une fois installé, le widget apparaît sur l’écran d’accueil et dans la liste
des applications.
Pour démarrer le mode Enfants, appuyez sur Mode Enfant depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des
applications.
Lorsque vous lancez ce widget pour la première fois, appuyez sur Définir un code PIN au bas de
l’écran. Suivez ensuite les instructions affichées à l’écran.
• Si le widget Mode Enfant est accidentellement désinstallé, vous pouvez le réinstaller.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Widgets, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur
le widget Mode Enfant. Faites glisser le widget sur l’écran d’accueil et appuyez sur Mode
Enfant pour le réinstaller.
• La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Utilitaires
74
Dropbox
Utilisez cette application pour enregistrer et partager des fichiers avec d’autres personnes via le
stockage Cloud Dropbox. Lorsque vous enregistrez des fichiers dans Dropbox, votre appareil les
synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel le service
Dropbox est installé.
Appuyez sur Dropbox depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Connectez-vous à votre compte Dropbox. Si vous n’en possédez pas, créez un compte Dropbox.
Une fois la Dropbox activée, appuyez sur Activer Chargements appareil photo pour télécharger
automatiquement sur Dropbox les photos et les vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo de l’appareil.
Pour afficher les photos ou les vidéos importées, appuyez sur . Pour partager ou supprimer des
fichiers ou créer des albums, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez les fichiers.
Pour importer des fichiers dans Dropbox, appuyez sur → → Transférer ici → Photos ou vidéos
ou Autres fichiers. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans Dropbox, sélectionnez un fichier.
En mode affichage d’une image ou d’une vidéo, appuyez sur pour les ajouter à la liste des favoris.
Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans la liste des favoris, appuyez sur .
Pour afficher les notifications, appuyez sur .
Cloud
Utilisez cette fonction pour synchroniser vos fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou Dropbox.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Cloud.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Synchroniser avec le compte Samsung
Pour synchroniser les fichiers, sélectionnez votre compte Samsung ou appuyez sur Paramètres sync.
Utilitaires
75
Sauvegarder ou restaurer des données
Pour sauvegarder ou restaurer des données avec votre compte Samsung, appuyez sur Sauvegarder
ou Restaurer.
Synchroniser avec la Dropbox
Appuyez sur Associer le compte Dropbox, puis accédez au compte Dropbox. Suivez les instructions
qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration.
Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Autoriser afin que l’appareil synchronise
automatiquement les fichiers avec la Dropbox dès que vous effectuez des modifications.
Google Drive
Utilisez cette application pour créer et modifier des documents et les partager avec d’autres
personnes via le service de stockage Google Drive. Lorsque vous créez des documents ou
téléchargez des fichiers dans Google Drive, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le
serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel Google Drive est installé. Accédez à vos fichiers sans
transfert ou téléchargement.
Appuyez sur Drive depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Hancom Office Viewer
Cette application permet de consulter des documents dans différents formats, y compris des feuilles
de calcul et des présentations.
Appuyez sur Hancom Office Viewer depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Utilitaires
76
Rechercher des documents
Appuyez sur Ouvrir pour parcourir un document.
Lorsque vous parcourez un document, utilisez l’une des options suivantes :
• : créer un dossier.
• : récupérer de nouveaux documents.
• : trier des documents et des dossiers.
• : modifier le mode d’affichage.
• : sélectionner des documents ou des dossiers.
Pour rechercher des documents récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Documents récents.
Lire des documents
Appuyez sur un document dans Documents récents ou dans un dossier.
Appuyez sur ou sur , puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes :
Traitement de texte
• Rechercher : rechercher du texte.
• Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage.
• Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur.
• Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines
imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil.
• Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager.
• Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer
l’application.
• Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer.
Utilitaires
77
Présentation
• Rechercher : rechercher du texte.
• Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage.
• Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur.
• Diaporama : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la première page.
• À partir de la diapositive active : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la page en cours.
• Mode Présentateur : afficher les outils de présentation sur l’appareil lorsque celui-ci est
connecté à un moniteur externe.
• Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines
imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil.
• Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager.
• Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer
l’application.
• Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer.
Feuille de calcul
• Rechercher : rechercher du texte.
• Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage.
• Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur.
• Trier : trier les cellules selon des critères spécifiques.
• Afficher les formules : afficher les formules à l’intérieur des cellules à la place des résultats.
• Figer les volets : garder la ligne sélectionnée en place.
• Quadrillage : afficher ou masquer les grilles de ligne.
• Afficher tous les commentaires : afficher ou masquer des mémos sur le document.
• Zone d’impression : sélectionner une zone à imprimer.
• Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines
imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil.
• Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager.
• Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer
l’application.
• Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer.
Utilitaires
78
PDF
• Rechercher : rechercher du texte.
• Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager.
• Propriétés : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur.
• Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage.
• Masquer les commentaires : afficher ou masquer les commentaires sur le document.
• Défilement vertical / Affichage en continu / Défilement horizontal : modifier le mode
d’affichage.
• Mode lecture : afficher le contenu du document uniquement, sans les marges.
• Atteindre la page : accéder à une page indiquée.
• Signets : afficher des signets sur le document.
• Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines
imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil.
Alarme
Utilisez cette application pour définir des alarmes pour les événements importants.
Appuyez sur Alarme depuis la liste des applications.
Activer ou désactiver cette alarme.
Utilitaires
79
Créer une alarme
Appuyez sur , sélectionnez l’heure d’activation de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition de
l’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg.
• Alarme géolocalisée : définir une position. L’alarme ne se déclenche qu’une fois que vous vous
trouvez à l’endroit indiqué.
• Répéter : définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’alarme doit sonner une nouvelle fois et le nombre de
répétitions.
• Alarme intelligente : utiliser cette option pour que votre appareil simule des sons naturels avant
le déclenchement de l’alarme principale.
Arrêter ou répéter une alarme
Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Pour répéter l’alarme après une
période donnée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône .
Supprimer une alarme
Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez l'alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK.
Horloge mondiale
Utilisez cette application pour vérifier l’heure de nombreuses grandes villes dans le monde.
Appuyez sur Horloge mondiale depuis la liste des applications.
Créer une horloge
Appuyez sur , puis saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste.
Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez une horloge, puis appuyez
sur .
Supprimer une horloge
Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur .
Utilitaires
80
Calculatrice
Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes.
Appuyez sur Calculatrice depuis la liste des applications.
Faites pivoter l’appareil vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si
l’option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice
scientifique.
Pour afficher l’historique des calculs, appuyez sur pour masquer le clavier.
Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur → Effacer l’historique.
S Voice
Utilisez cette application pour commander vocalement l’appareil pour qu’il exécute différentes
fonctions.
Appuyez sur S Voice depuis la liste des applications. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur la
touche Accueil.
• La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
• Cette application n’est pas prise en charge dans certaines langues.
Voici quelques exemples de commandes vocales :
• Ouvrir le lecteur MP3
• Lancer la calculatrice
• Vérifier le calendrier
Conseils pour améliorer la reconnaissance vocale :
• Parlez clairement.
• Parlez dans des endroits tranquilles.
• N’utilisez pas de langage injurieux ni d’argot.
• Évitez de parler avec un accent local.
Selon l’environnement où vous vous trouvez ou la manière dont vous parlez, il se peut que l’appareil
ne reconnaisse pas vos commandes ou qu’il exécute des commandes erronées.
Utilitaires
81
Recherche Google
Utilisez cette application pour effectuer une recherche non seulement sur Internet, mais aussi dans
les applications et le contenu de l’appareil.
Appuyez sur Google depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Effectuer une recherche sur l’appareil
Appuyez sur le champ de recherche, puis saisissez un mot-clé. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur
, puis énoncer un mot-clé.
Si les applications ne renvoient aucun résultat, le navigateur Web apparaît, affichant les résultats de
recherche.
Étendre la recherche
Pour sélectionner les applications qui doivent faire l’objet d’une recherche, appuyez sur →
Paramètres → Recherche sur la tablette, puis cochez les éléments correspondants.
Google Now
Démarrez la recherche Google pour afficher les cartes Google Now qui vous indiquent, dès que vous
en avez besoin, la météo du jour, les infos trafic en temps réel, vos prochains rendez-vous, et bien
plus encore.
Rejoignez Google Now lorsque vous ouvrez pour la première fois la recherche Google. Pour modifier
les paramètres de Google Now, appuyez sur → Paramètres, puis faites glisser le curseur Google
Now vers la gauche ou la droite.
Utilitaires
82
Recherche vocale
Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des pages Web oralement.
Appuyez sur Recherche vocale depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Quand l’instruction Parlez maintenant apparaît à l’écran, prononcez un mot-clé ou une expression.
Mes fichiers
Utilisez cette application pour accéder à tous les types de fichiers stockés dans l’appareil, y compris
les images, vidéos, musiques et clips musicaux.
Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications.
Visionner des fichiers
Les fichiers enregistrés dans l’appareil sont triés par critères. Depuis le volet gauche de l’écran,
sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes :
• Date : afficher les fichiers regroupés par date.
• Dossiers Favoris : afficher les raccourcis vers les dossiers.
• Dossiers : afficher les fichiers enregistrés dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire,
ainsi que les raccourcis vers les serveurs FTP.
• Catégories : afficher les fichiers triés selon leurs types.
• Applications : afficher les fichiers enregistrés ou créés dans des applications spécifiques.
Sélectionnez une catégorie, puis un fichier ou un dossier à ouvrir.
Utilitaires
83
Sélectionnez une catégorie, appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes :
• Sélectionner : sélectionner des fichiers ou des dossiers.
• Trier par : trier les fichiers ou les dossiers.
• Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers le dossier dans Dossiers Favoris.
• Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci à un fichier ou un dossier vers l’écran
d’accueil.
• Ajouter FTP : ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans Dossiers.
• Rechercher des périphériques : rechercher des périphériques dont le partage multimédia est
activé.
• Options d’affichage : modifier les options d’affichage des fichiers.
Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez un fichier ou un dossier, puis utilisez l’une des options
suivantes :
• : envoyer des fichiers à d’autres contacts ou les partager.
• : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers.
• : déplacer des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier.
• : copier des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier.
• → Accéder au dossier : accéder au dossier où se trouve le fichier sélectionné.
• → Renommer : renommer un fichier ou un dossier.
• → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers le dossier dans Dossiers Favoris.
• → Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci à un fichier ou un dossier vers
l’écran d’accueil.
• → Zip : compresser des fichiers ou des dossiers pour créer un fichier zip.
• → Détails : afficher les détails d’un fichier ou d’un dossier.
Rechercher un fichier
Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un critère de recherche.
Afficher les informations de mémoire
Appuyez sur pour afficher les informations de mémoire relatives à l’appareil et à la carte mémoire.
Utilitaires
84
Modifier le mode d’affichage
Appuyez sur pour modifier le mode d’affichage.
Créer un dossier
Appuyez sur , saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK.
Ajouter des raccourcis à des dossiers
Ajoutez un raccourci aux dossiers fréquemment utilisés dans Dossiers Favoris. Sélectionnez un
dossier et appuyez sur → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris.
Ajouter des raccourcis de serveur FTP à l’appareil
Ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans Dossiers. Appuyez sur → Ajouter FTP, saisissez les
informations sur le serveur FTP, puis appuyez sur OK.
85
Géolocalisation
Maps
Utilisez cette application pour repérer la position de votre appareil, rechercher des lieux ou obtenir
un itinéraire.
Appuyez sur Maps depuis la liste des applications.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Rechercher des lieux
Recherchez des lieux en saisissant une adresse ou un mot-clé. Une fois le lieu trouvé, sélectionnez-le
afin d’afficher des informations détaillées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’aide.
Obtenir un itinéraire
Appuyez sur pour définir une adresse de départ et une adresse de destination, et choisir un mode
de transport. L’appareil affiche l’itinéraire à suivre pour arriver à destination.
86
Paramètres
Accéder au menu des paramètres
Utilisez cette application pour configurer l’appareil, définir les paramètres d’une application et
ajouter des comptes.
Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications.
Connexions
Wi-Fi
Activez la fonction Wi-Fi pour permettre la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi et accéder à Internet ou à
d’autres périphériques réseau.
Pour utiliser des options, appuyez sur .
• Paramètres avancés : personnalisez les paramètres Wi-Fi.
• Touche WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’une touche WPS.
• Entrée PIN WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’un code PIN WPS.
• Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Wi-Fi.
Politique de mise en veille Wi-Fi
Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés → Wi-Fi
activé en mode veille.
Paramètres
87
Paramètres de notification réseau
L’appareil détecte les réseaux Wi-Fi ouverts et affiche une icône dans le volet des raccourcis lorsqu’un
réseau est disponible.
Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés et cochez la
case Notification réseau pour activer cette fonctionnalité.
Wi-Fi Direct
Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par
un point d’accès.
Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi Direct.
Bluetooth
Activez la fonction Bluetooth pour échanger des informations sur de courtes distances.
Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur .
• Délai d'expiration de la visibilité : définissez la durée pendant laquelle l’appareil est visible.
• Fichiers reçus : affichez les fichiers reçus via la fonction Bluetooth.
• Renommer le périphérique : changez le nom de l’appareil.
• Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Bluetooth.
Mode Hors-ligne
Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de l’appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services
hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth.
Paramètres
88
Utilisation des données
Suivez le trace du volume de données utilisées.
• Cycle d’util. des données : indiquez la date à laquelle effectuer la vérification mensuelle des
données.
Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur .
• Synchroniser les données automatiquement : activez ou désactivez la synchronisation
automatique des applications. Vous pouvez sélectionner les informations à synchroniser pour
chaque compte dans Paramètres → Général → Comptes.
• Points d’accès mobiles : sélectionnez des points d’accès mobiles Wi-Fi afin d’empêcher que les
applications fonctionnant en arrière-plan ne les utilisent.
Position
Modifiez les paramètres des informations de localisation.
• Mode : sélectionnez une méthode pour recueillir vos données de localisation.
• DEMANDES DE LOCALISATION RÉCENTES : affichez les applications qui requièrent votre
position et la batterie qu'elles consomment.
• SERVICES DE LOCALISATION : affichez les services de localisation que votre appareil utilise.
• Mes endroits : définissez des profils correspondant à des adresses spécifiques qui vous aideront
à localiser votre position lorsque vous utilisez des options GPS, Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth.
Plus de réseaux
Personnalisez les paramètres permettant de contrôler les connexions avec d’autres appareils ou
réseaux.
Impression
Configurez les paramètres pour les modules d’extension d’imprimante installés sur l’appareil. Vous
pouvez rechercher les imprimantes disponibles ou en ajouter une manuellement pour imprimer des
fichiers via le réseau Wi-Fi ou les services de Cloud.
Paramètres
89
VPN
Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter.
Appareils à proximité
• NOM DE L’APPAREIL : affichez le nom de l’appareil.
• Contenus partagés : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir partager son contenu avec d’autres
appareils.
• Appareils autorisés : affichez la liste des appareils qui peuvent accéder à votre appareil.
• Appareils refusés : affichez la liste des appareils qui ne sont pas autorisés à accéder à votre
appareil.
• Destination de téléchargement : sélectionnez l’emplacement de la mémoire dans laquelle
enregistrer les fichiers multimédia téléchargés.
• Téléch. depuis autres app. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser le chargement à partir
d’autres appareils.
Appareil
Son
Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de l’appareil.
• Volume : réglez le volume de la musique et des vidéos, des sons système et des notifications.
• Notifications : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les notifications, telles que les messages entrants.
• Sélections audibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez
une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile.
• Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez
ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile.
• APPLICATIONS SAMSUNG : modifiez les paramètres de notification pour chaque application.
• Son en cas d’appui : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur
une touche.
• Adapt Sound : personnalisez vos réglages audio pour écouter de la musique.
Paramètres
90
Affichage
Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage.
• Luminosité : définissez la luminosité de l’écran.
• Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre
automatiquement.
• Écran de veille : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer l’économiseur d’écran lorsque
l’appareil est connecté à une station d’accueil ou est en cours de chargement.
• Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la
batterie.
Fenêtres multiples
Activez la fonction Multi-fenêtres pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même
temps.
• Ouvrir en vue Multi-fenêtre : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il active la fonction Fenêtres
multiples lorsque vous ouvrez des fichiers dans Mes fichiers ou Vidéo. De même, l’appareil
désactive cette fonction lorsque vous affichez les pièces jointes des messages.
Écran de verrouillage
Modifiez les paramètres de l’écran de verrouillage.
• Déverrouillage de l’écran : activez la fonction de déverrouillage sécurisé de l’écran. Les options
suivantes peuvent varier selon la fonction de déverrouillage d’écran sélectionnée.
• Options du widget Horloge : configurez les paramètres pour le widget horloge.
– Taille de l’horloge : modifiez la taille de l’horloge.
– Afficher la date : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la date en même temps que l’heure.
• Raccourcis : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher et modifier les raccourcis des
applications sur l’écran verrouillé.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Paramètres
91
• Message personnel : paramétrez l’appareil pour afficher un message personnel sur l’écran
verrouillé.
– Modifier un massage personnel : modifiez le message personnel.
• Infos propriétaire : saisissez les informations que vous souhaitez voir apparaître sur l'écran
verrouillé.
• Effet de déverrouillage : sélectionnez un effet à appliquer lorsque vous déverrouillez l’écran.
• Texte d’aide : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher un texte d’aide sur l’écran verrouillé.
Fond d’écran
Modifiez les paramètres du fond d’écran.
• Écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil.
• Écran de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage.
• Écrans d’accueil et de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil et
de l’écran de verrouillage.
Police
Modifiez les paramètres de la police.
• Police : modifiez le type de police du texte affiché à l’écran.
• Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police.
Volet des raccourcis
Personnalisez les éléments apparaissant dans le volet des raccourcis.
• Luminosité et volume : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche les barres de réglage de la
luminosité et du volume dans le volet des raccourcis.
• Applications recommandées : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la liste des applications
recommandées dans le volet des raccourcis en fonction de vos actions, par exemple lorsque
vous connectez un casque ou un écouteur à l’appareil.
• Déf. bout. config. rapide : réorganisez les touches de paramétrage rapide dans le volet des
raccourcis.
Paramètres
92
Accessibilité
Les services d’accessibilité sont des fonctions spéciales destinées aux personnes présentant des
handicaps physiques. Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour améliorer l’accessibilité
à l’appareil.
• Rotation auto. écran : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote automatiquement en même
temps que l’appareil.
• Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre
automatiquement.
• Énoncer les mots de passe : paramétrez l’appareil pour que les mots de passe que vous
saisissez sur les sites Web à l’aide de la fonction TalkBack soient énoncés à voix haute.
• Mode appui unique : paramétrez l’appareil pour commander les notifications en appuyant sur
la touche plutôt qu’en la faisant glisser.
• Afficher le raccourci : ajoutez un raccourci vers le menu Accessibilité ou TalkBack dans le menu
rapide qui apparaît lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée.
• Gérer l’accessibilité : exportez ou importez les paramètres d’accessibilité afin de les partager
avec d’autres appareils.
– Exporter : exportez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours sous forme de fichier.
– Mise à jour : importez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours sous forme de fichier.
– Partager via : envoyez le fichier des paramètres d’accessibilité à d’autres personnes.
• TalkBack : activez le service TalkBack qui propose des commentaires parlés.
• Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police.
• Gestes d’agrandissement : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer un zoom avant ou
arrière à l’aide des doigts.
• Couleurs négatives : inversez les couleurs d’affichage pour une meilleure visibilité.
• Réglage des couleurs : définissez une zone de l’écran dans laquelle la saisie tactile est
inopérante.
• Rappel de notification : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne lorsque vous avez des
notifications et définissez un intervalle pour la répétition de l’alerte.
• Raccourci d’accessibilité : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer TalkBack lorsque vous
maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et maintenez deux doigts appuyés à l’écran.
Paramètres
93
• Options synthèse vocale :
– MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les
paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur .
– Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale.
– Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé.
– État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse
vocale.
• Balance audio : réglez la balance audio lors de l’utilisation d’un casque à double oreillette.
• Audio mono : activez le réglage audio monophonique lorsque vous utilisez une seule oreillette.
• Désactiver tous les sons : désactivez tous les sons de l’appareil.
• Sous-titres Google (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus
pris en charge par Google et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres.
• Sous-titres Samsung (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les
contenus pris en charge par Samsung et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres.
• Menu assistant : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher l’icône d’assistance qui vous
permettra d’accéder aux fonctions prises en charge par les touches externes ou les options du
volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez également modifier le menu de l’icône de raccourci.
– Main dominante : sélectionnez la main gauche ou droite pour une utilisation aisée du menu
d’assistance.
– Modif. : personnalisez les éléments apparaissant sur le menu d’assistance.
• Durée de l’appui prolongé : définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le
doigt appuyé sur l’écran.
• Contrôle interaction : activez le mode Contrôle par interaction afin d’éviter que l'appareil
réagisse aux saisies malencontreuses qui pourraient se produire dans une application.
Mode Blocage
Sélectionnez les notifications qui seront bloquées et la durée du blocage.
Paramètres
94
Contrôle
Langue et saisie
Modifiez les paramètres de la saisie de texte. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de la
langue sélectionnée.
Langue
Sélectionnez la langue d’affichage des menus et des applications.
Par défaut
Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte.
Clavier Samsung
Pour modifier les paramètres du clavier Samsung, appuyez sur .
La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur.
• Sélectionner langue de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie.
• Texte intuitif : activez le mode de saisie intuitive pour que des suggestions de mots s’affichent
au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de la
saisie intuitive.
• Remplacement automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour corriger les fautes d’orthographe et
les mots incomplets en appuyant sur la barre d’espace ou un signe de ponctuation.
• Majuscules auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre automatiquement en majuscules
la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point
d’exclamation).
• Espace auto : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les
mots.
• Ponctuation automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous
appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace.
• Aucun(e) : paramétrez l’appareil pour désactiver la fonction de balayage du clavier.
• Saisie en continu : autorisez la saisie continue qui consiste à faire glisser le doigt d’une lettre à
l’autre sur le clavier, sans le soulever.
Paramètres
95
• Contrôle du curseur : activez la fonction de navigation intelligente qui permet de déplacer le
curseur en faisant défiler le clavier.
• Son : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche.
• Aperçu du caractère : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche une image agrandie de chaque
caractère saisi.
• Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide du clavier Samsung.
• Réinitialiser paramètres : réinitialisez les paramètres du clavier Samsung.
Saisie vocale Google
Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur .
• Sélect. langues saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie.
• Bloquer termes choquants : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il bloque les mots injurieux lors de la
saisie vocale.
• Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques
pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne.
Outil reconnais. vocale
Sélectionnez un moteur de reconnaissance vocale.
Cette fonction apparaît lorsque vous utilisez une application de reconnaissance vocale.
Recherche vocale
Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Samsung, utilisez les options suivantes :
• Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale.
• Masquer mots injurieux : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale.
• A propos de : affichez les informations concernant la version.
• Ouvrir via touche accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer S Voice en appuyant deux
fois sur la touche Accueil.
• Réveil vocal : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide d’une
commande de réveil quand vous utilisez S Voice.
Paramètres
96
• Événements manqués : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie les messages ou événements
manqués lorsque vous lancez S Voice en appuyant sur la touche du casque/écouteur.
• Adresse personnelle : saisissez l’adresse à utiliser dans les informations de localisation de la
reconnaissance vocale.
• Se connecter à Facebook : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Facebook
pour utiliser Facebook à l’aide de l’application S Voice.
• Se connecter à Twitter : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Twitter pour
l’utiliser avec l’application S Voice.
Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Google, utilisez les options suivantes :
• Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale.
• Détection du mot clé Ok Google : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lance la reconnaissance
vocale lorsque vous prononcez la commande Ok Google lorsque vous utilisez l’application de
recherche.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
• Sortie vocale : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne de l’action en cours à l’aide d’un
retour vocal.
• Bloquer termes choquants : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche
vocale.
• Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques
pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne.
• Reconnais. personnalisée : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir optimiser la reconnaissance
vocale à l’aide des informations du tableau de bord Google.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
• Casque Bluetooth : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il autorise la recherche vocale avec un casque
Bluetooth lorsque ce dernier est connecté à l’appareil.
Options synthèse vocale
• MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres
des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur .
• Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale.
• Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé.
• État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse
vocale.
Paramètres
97
Vitesse du curseur
Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connectés à l’appareil.
Mouvement de paume
Activez la fonction des mouvements de la main pour contrôler l’appareil par un simple contact avec
l’écran tactile.
• Capture d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer une capture d’écran en balayant
l’écran avec le côté de la main vers la gauche ou vers la droite.
• Muet/Pause : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir interrompre la lecture d’un fichier multimédia
en effleurant l’écran de la paume de la main.
Smart Screen
• Smart Stay : paramétrez l’appareil pour empêcher le rétroéclairage de se désactiver lorsque
vous consultez l’écran.
Général
Comptes
Ajoutez des comptes de messagerie électronique ou de réseaux sociaux.
Cloud
Modifiez les paramètres de synchronisation des données ou des fichiers avec votre compte Samsung
ou le stockage Cloud Dropbox.
Paramètres
98
Sauvegarder et réinitialiser
Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des paramètres et des données.
• Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir sauvegarder vos paramètres et
vos données d’application sur le serveur Google.
• Compte de sauvegarde : configurez ou modifiez votre compte de sauvegarde Google.
• Restauration auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir restaurer vos paramètres et vos
données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées.
• Rétablir param. par défaut : restaurez les valeurs par défaut de l’appareil et supprimez toutes
vos données.
Date et heure
Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les afin de contrôler l’affichage de l’heure et de la date.
Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, l’heure et la date
sont alors réinitialisées.
• Définir la date : réglez la date du jour manuellement.
• Définir l’heure : réglez l’heure manuellement.
• Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : sélectionnez le fuseau horaire de votre zone géographique.
• Format 24 heures : affichez l’heure au format 24 heures.
• Format de date : sélectionnez le format de la date.
Accessoires
Modifiez les paramètres des accessoires.
• Son station d’accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous le connectez
à une station d’accueil ou l’en déconnectez.
• Mode de sortie audio : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser le haut-parleur de la station
d’accueil lorsque l’appareil y est connecté.
Paramètres
99
Gestionnaire d’applications
Affichez et gérez les applications installées sur votre appareil.
Applications par défaut
Sélectionnez un paramètre par défaut pour utiliser des applications.
Utilisateurs
Paramétrez et gérez les profils utilisateurs pour des réglages personnalisés.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Batterie
Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil.
• Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la
batterie.
Mode Éco. d’énergie
Activez le mode Économie d’énergie et modifiez les paramètres.
• Performances du CPU : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir limiter l’utilisation de certaines
ressources système de l’appareil.
• Sortie d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir diminuer la luminosité de l’écran.
• En savoir plus : découvrez comment réduire la consommation de la batterie.
Stockage
Affichez les informations relatives à la quantité de stockage disponible sur l’appareil et la carte
mémoire, ou formatez une carte mémoire.
Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont
stockées.
La mémoire interne de votre appareil a une capacité réelle disponible inférieure à la capacité
indiquée, car elle est en partie occupée par le système d’exploitation et les applications
installées par défaut. La capacité disponible peut varier lorsque vous mettez à jour l’appareil.
Paramètres
100
Sécurité
Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de l’appareil.
• Crypter l’appareil : définissez un mot de passe pour crypter les données enregistrées sur
l’appareil. Vous devez saisir ce mot de passe à chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil.
Chargez la batterie avant d’activer ce paramètre, car il peut arriver que le cryptage des
données dure plus d’une heure.
• Crypter la carte SD externe : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir crypter les fichiers contenus
sur une carte mémoire.
Votre appareil ne sera pas en mesure de lire les fichiers cryptés si vous le réinitialisez alors
que ces paramètres sont activés. Désactivez ces paramètres avant de réinitialiser votre
appareil.
• Contrôle à distance : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir le contrôler à distance via Internet
si vous l’égarez ou s’il vous est dérobé. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez vous
connecter à votre compte Samsung.
– ENREGISTREMENT DU COMPTE : enregistrez ou connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung.
– Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser la collecte des
données de localisation en cas de perte ou de vol ou retrouver l’appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi.
• Accéder au site Web : accédez au site Web Traçage du mobile (findmymobile.samsung.com). Ce
site vous permet de repérer et de contrôler un appareil égaré ou dérobé.
• Rendre les mots de passe visibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à
mesure que vous le saisissez.
• Admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de votre appareil. Vous pouvez autoriser
les administrateurs de l’appareil à appliquer de nouvelles règles à celui-ci.
• Sources inconnues : parametrez l’appareil pour autoriser l’installation d’applications provenant
de sources inconnues.
• Vérifier les applications : paramétrez l’appareil pour permettre à Google de vérifier que les
applications ne présentent aucun danger avant de les installer.
• Type de stockage : définissez un type de stockage pour les fichiers d’identification.
• Infos d’ident. sécurisées : recourez à des certificats et des identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation
des diverses applications.
Paramètres
101
• Installer depuis stock. périph. : installez les certificats cryptés stockés sur une clé USB.
• Effacer infos identification : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et
réinitialisez le mot de passe.
À propos de l’appareil
Accédez aux informations relatives à l’appareil, modifiez le nom de l’appareil ou mettez à jour le
logiciel de l’appareil.
Paramètres Google
Utilisez cette application pour configurer certaines fonctions proposées par Google.
Appuyez sur Paramètres Google depuis la liste des applications.
102
Dépannage
Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Samsung, veuillez essayer de mettre en œuvre
les solutions suivantes. Il est possible que certaines situations ne s’appliquent pas à votre appareil.
Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à
effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes :
• Mot de passe : lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe
que vous avez défini pour l’appareil.
• Code PIN : lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque vous avez activé le
verrouillage de votre appareil par code PIN, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM
ou USIM. Vous pouvez désactiver cette fonction à l’aide du menu de verrouillage de la carte SIM.
• Code PUK : si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, la carte SIM ou USIM est
bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur.
• Code PIN2 : lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant le code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code
PIN2 fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur.
Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de réseau et de service
• Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre
la connexion au réseau. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Lorsque vous vous déplacez, plusieurs
messages d’erreur peuvent apparaître.
• Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre
opérateur.
Votre appareil ne s’allume pas
• Lorsque la batterie est entièrement déchargée, il n’est pas possible d’allumer l’appareil.
Rechargez complètement la batterie avant d’allumer l’appareil.
• Si la batterie peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur, il est possible qu’elle n’ait pas été correctement
insérée. Réinsérez la batterie.
• Si la batterie peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur, essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réinsérez-la.
Dépannage
103
Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile
• Si vous fixez sur l’écran tactile un cache de protection ou tout autre accessoire en option, il est
possible que l’écran ne fonctionne pas correctement.
• Si vous portez des gants, si vos mains ne sont pas parfaitement propres, ou si vous appuyez
sur l’écran avec un objet pointu ou vos ongles, l’écran tactile risque de présenter des
dysfonctionnements.
• L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
• Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels
temporaires.
• Assurez-vous que vous disposez bien de la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil.
• Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales
Si votre appareil ne répond plus ou se bloque, vous devrez éventuellement fermer les applications,
ou éteindre l’appareil et le rallumer. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez la
touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant 8 secondes afin de le redémarrer.
Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la
réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres
→ Général → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le
périphérique → Supprimer tout. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil,
n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont
stockées.
Si le problème persiste, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
Impossible de passer des appels
• Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié.
• Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de
téléphone que vous composez.
• Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de
téléphone de l’appel entrant.
Vos interlocuteurs ne vous entendent pas
• Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert.
• Vérifiez que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de votre bouche.
• Si vous utilisez un kit piéton ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché.
Dépannage
104
Vous percevez un écho lors des appels
Réglez le volume en appuyant sur la touche de volume ou déplacez-vous.
Déconnexions fréquentes du réseau cellulaire ou d’Internet, ou mauvaise
qualité audio
• Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée à l’appareil.
• Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la
connexion au réseau. Vos problèmes de connectivité peuvent être dus à une panne au niveau
de votre opérateur. Déplacez-vous et réessayez.
• Si vous utilisez votre appareil tout en vous déplaçant, il est possible que les services de réseau
sans fil soient désactivés en raison de problèmes sur le réseau de votre opérateur.
L’icône de la batterie est vide
Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la s’il s’agit d’une
batterie remplaçable par l’utilisateur.
La batterie ne se charge pas correctement (pour les chargeurs
homologués Samsung)
• Assurez-vous que le chargeur est correctement branché.
• Si les bornes de la batterie sont sales, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger correctement ou
l’appareil risque de s’éteindre. Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réessayez de recharger la
batterie.
• Sur certains appareils, la batterie ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour remplacer ce
type de batterie, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
La batterie se décharge de plus en plus rapidement
• Lorsque la batterie est exposée à des températures extrêmes, la charge utile peut être réduite.
• La consommation de la batterie augmente lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctionnalités,
comme les SMS et MMS, ou certaines applications, comme les jeux ou Internet.
• La batterie est un consommable et sa charge utile diminue avec le temps.
Dépannage
105
L’appareil est chaud au toucher
Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications simultanément ou sur une période prolongée, l’appareil
peut chauffer. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de
l’appareil.
Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo
Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil doit disposer de suffisamment de mémoire et sa batterie
être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil
photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes :
• Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la s’il s’agit d’une batterie remplaçable par l’utilisateur.
• Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des
éléments de l’appareil.
• Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes persistent, contactez un centre de service après-vente
Samsung.
Qualité des photos inférieure par rapport à l’aperçu
• La qualité de vos photos peut varier selon l’environnement et les techniques photographiques
utilisées.
• Si vous prenez des photos avec une luminosité insuffisante, de nuit ou en intérieur, l’image
risque d’être floue.
Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers multimédia
Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur ou si vous ne parvenez pas à lire les fichiers multimédia
lorsque vous les ouvrez sur votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes :
• Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des
éléments de l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits
d’auteur). Si le fichier est protégé par des droits DRM, vous devez posséder une licence ou une
clé pour pouvoir le lire.
• Assurez-vous que les formats de fichiers sont pris en charge par l’appareil. Pour confirmer les
formats de fichier compatibles avec votre appareil, connectez-vous à www.samsung.com.
Dépannage
106
• Votre appareil est compatible avec les photos et vidéos capturées avec ce même appareil. Les
photos et vidéos capturées avec d’autres appareils peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement.
• Votre appareil prend en charge les fichiers multimédia autorisés par votre opérateur ainsi que
les opérateur, des autres services réseaux. Il est possible que certains contenus circulant sur
Internet, comme des sonneries, vidéos ou fonds d’écran, ne fonctionnent pas correctement.
Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth
• Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil.
• Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est également activée sur l’appareil auquel vous tentez
de vous connecter.
• Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se trouvent bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action
Bluetooth (10 m maximum).
Si les conseils ci-dessus ne résolvent pas le problème, contactez un centre de service après-vente
Samsung.
Problème de connexion avec un ordinateur
• Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil.
• Vérifiez que le pilote nécessaire est bien installé sur votre ordinateur et qu’il est à jour.
• Si vous utilisez Windows XP, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est équipé de Windows XP Service
Pack 3 ou de toute version ultérieure.
• Vérifiez que Samsung Kies ou Windows Media Player 10 (ou toute version ultérieure) est installé
sur votre ordinateur.
Votre appareil ne parvient pas à détecter votre position
À certains endroits, comme à l’intérieur d’un bâtiment, les signaux GPS peuvent être faibles. Si cela se
produit, configurez votre appareil pour l’utilisation d’un réseau Wi-Fi ou mobile afin de trouver votre
position.
Dépannage
107
Les données stockées sur l’appareil ont été perdues
Effectuez toujours des copies des données importantes stockées sur votre appareil. Dans le cas
contraire, vous ne pourriez pas récupérer vos données corrompues ou perdues. Samsung ne peut
être tenu responsable de la perte des données stockées sur votre appareil.
Un petit espace est apparu sur le bord externe du boîtier de l’appareil
• Cet espace est une caractéristique de fabrication, et il est possible d’observer un jeu ou une
vibration des pièces.
• Au fil du temps, la friction entre les pièces peut entraîner l’élargissement de cet espace.
www.samsung.com French. 07/2014. Rev.1.1
Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre
zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans
préavis.
www.samsung.com
User Manual
SM-G530FZ
English (EU). 01/2015. Rev.1.0
2
Table of Contents
Read me first
Getting started
6 Package contents
7 Device layout
9 Using the SIM or USIM card and
battery
14 Using a memory card
16 Turning the device on and off
16 Locking and unlocking the screen
Basics
17 Using the touch screen
20 Home screen layout
24 Notifications panel
26 Opening apps
26 Installing or uninstalling apps
28 Entering text
30 Screen capture
31 My Files
32 Power saving feature
Network connectivity
33 Mobile data
33 Wi-Fi
34 Tethering and Mobile hotspot
Personalising
36 Managing the Home and Apps screens
38 Setting wallpaper and ringtones
39 Changing the screen lock method
40 Transferring data from your previous
device
41 Setting up accounts
Phone
42 Making calls
43 Receiving calls
44 Options during calls
Contacts
45 Adding contacts
45 Importing and exporting contacts
46 Searching for contacts
Table of Contents
3
Connecting with other
devices
69 Bluetooth
71 Wi-Fi Direct
73 NFC
75 Screen Mirroring
77 Mobile printing
Device & data manager
78 Upgrading the device
79 Transferring files between the device
and a computer
80 Backing up and restoring data
80 Performing a data reset
Settings
81 About Settings
81 CONNECTIONS
85 DEVICE
88 PERSONAL
90 SYSTEM
Troubleshooting
Messages & email
47 Messages
48 Email
Camera
51 Basic shooting
53 Shooting modes
56 Camera settings
Gallery
58 Viewing content on the device
59 Editing photos
Useful apps and features
60 S Planner
61 Internet
62 Video
62 Calculator
63 Clock
64 Memo
65 Radio
66 Voice Recorder
67 Google apps
4
Read me first
Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use.
• Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings.
• Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or
device’s software.
• Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the
overall performance of the device. Apps related to the content may not work properly
depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in.
• Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by apps supplied by providers other
than Samsung.
• Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited
registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the
operating system may cause the device or apps to work improperly.
• Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device
are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other
purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal
use of media.
• You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and
downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services depending on your data plan. For
large data transfers, it is recommended to use the Wi-Fi feature.
• Default apps that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be
supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an app provided with
the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed apps, contact service
providers.
• Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources
may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations
of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty.
Read me first
5
Instructional icons
Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others
Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment
Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information
6
Getting started
Package contents
Check the product box for the following items:
• Device
• Battery
• Quick start guide
• The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary
depending on the region or service provider.
• The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible
with other devices.
• Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
• You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make
sure they are compatible with the device before purchase.
• Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Using unapproved accessories may cause
the performance problems and malfunctions that are not covered by the warranty.
• Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on
manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer
to the Samsung website.
Getting started
7
Device layout
Microphone
Touch screen
Front camera
Proximity sensor
Multipurpose jack
Home button
Recent apps button
Power button
Earpiece
Back button
Volume button
Speaker
Headset jack
GPS antenna
Back cover
Main antenna
Rear camera
Flash
NFC antenna (on the
battery)
Getting started
8
• Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause
connectivity problems or drain the battery.
• Using a Samsung-approved screen protector is recommended. Unapproved screen
protectors may cause the sensors to malfunction.
• Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction
in humid conditions or when exposed to water.
Buttons
Button Function
Power
• Press and hold to turn the device on or off.
• Press to turn on or lock the screen.
Recent apps
• Tap to open the list of recent apps.
• Tap and hold to access additional options for the current
screen.
Home
• Press to turn on the screen while the screen is locked.
• Press to return to the Home screen.
• Press and hold to launch Google.
Back • Tap to return to the previous screen.
Volume • Press to adjust the device volume.
Getting started
9
Using the SIM or USIM card and battery
Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery
Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the
included battery.
• Only microSIM cards work with the device.
• Some LTE services may not be available depending on the service provider. For
more information about service availability, contact your service provider.
1 Remove the back cover.
Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover.
Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover.
Getting started
10
2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards.
• Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to
be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to
remove the memory card.
• Use caution not to lose or let others use the SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not
responsible for any damages or inconveniences caused by lost or stolen cards.
3 Insert the battery with the battery’s gold-coloured contacts properly aligned with the
device’s contacts.
2
1
Getting started
11
4 Replace the back cover.
• Ensure that the back cover is closed tightly.
• Use only Samsung-approved back covers and accessories with the device.
Removing the SIM or USIM card and battery
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Pull out the battery.
3 Pull out the SIM or USIM card.
Getting started
12
Charging the battery
Use the charger to charge the battery before using it for the first time. A computer can be also
used to charge the battery by connecting them via the USB cable.
Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or
cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device.
• When the battery power is low, the battery icon appears empty.
• If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on
immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for
a few minutes before turning on the device.
• If you use multiple apps at once, network apps, or apps that need a connection
to another device, the battery will drain quickly. To avoid disconnecting from the
network or losing power during a data transfer, always use these apps after fully
charging the battery.
Connect the USB cable to the USB power adaptor and then plug the end of the USB cable into
the multipurpose jack.
Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any
damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.
Getting started
13
• The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge
the battery.
• If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen
may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device.
• While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the
device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger
may stop charging.
• If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a
Samsung Service Centre.
After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the
device, and then unplug it from the electric socket.
Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the
device.
To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a
power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in
use to avoid wasting power. The charger should remain close to the electric socket
and easily accessible while charging.
Reducing the battery consumption
Your device provides options that help you save the battery power. By customising these
options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between
charges:
• When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button.
• Close unnecessary apps using the task manager.
• Deactivate the Bluetooth feature.
• Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature.
• Deactivate auto-syncing of apps.
• Decrease the backlight time.
• Decrease the screen brightness.
Getting started
14
Using a memory card
Installing a memory card
Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the
memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your
device.
• Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an
incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data
stored in it.
• Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up.
• The device supports the FAT and the exFAT file systems for memory cards. When
inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the
memory card.
• Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards.
• When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory
appears in the My Files → SD card folder.
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing upwards.
3 Replace the back cover.
Getting started
15
Removing the memory card
Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap
Apps → Settings → Storage → Unmount SD card.
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Pull out the memory card.
3 Replace the back cover.
Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing
information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or can damage the
memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the
misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data.
Formatting the memory card
A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the
memory card on the device.
On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Format SD card → Format SD
card → Erase everything.
Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all
important data stored in the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss
of data resulting from user actions.
Getting started
16
Turning the device on and off
Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device.
When you turn on your device for the first time or after performing a data reset, follow the onscreen
instructions to set up your device.
To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off.
Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where
the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals.
Locking and unlocking the screen
Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and locks it. Also, the screen turns off and
automatically locks if the device is not used for a specified period.
To unlock the screen, press the Power button or the Home button and flick your finger in any
direction within the unlock screen area.
You can change the unlock code to unlock the screen. Refer to Changing the screen lock
method for more information.
17
Basics
Using the touch screen
• Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices.
Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction.
• To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply
excessive pressure to it with your fingertips.
• The device may not recognise touch inputs close to the edges of the screen, which
are outside of the touch input area.
• Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages
(screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the
device.
• It is recommended to use fingers when you use the touch screen.
Tapping
To open an app, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character
using the keyboard on the screen, tap it with a finger.
Basics
18
Tapping and holding
Tap and hold an item or the screen for more than 2 seconds to access available options.
Dragging
To move an item, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position.
Double-tapping
Double-tap on a webpage or image to zoom in. Double-tap again to return.
Basics
19
Flicking
Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Apps screen to see another panel. Flick up or
down to scroll through a webpage or a list of items, such as contacts.
Spreading and pinching
Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out.
Basics
20
Home screen layout
Home screen
The Home screen is the starting point for accessing all of the device’s features. It displays
widgets, shortcuts to apps, and more. Widgets are small apps that launch specific app
functions to provide information and convenient access on your Home screen.
To view other panels, scroll left or right, or tap one of the screen indicators at the bottom of
the screen. To customise the Home screen, refer to Managing the Home screen.
An app A folder
A screen indicator
Favourite apps
A widget
Basics
21
Home screen options
On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, or pinch your fingers together to access
the available options.
Basics
22
Apps screen
The Apps screen displays icons for all apps, including newly installed apps.
On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Apps screen. To view other panels, scroll left or
right, or select a screen indicator at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Apps screen,
refer to Managing the Apps screen.
Access additional
options.
An app
Screen indicators
Basics
23
Indicator icons
Indicator icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen. The icons listed in the table
below are most common.
The status bar may not appear at the top of the screen in some apps. To display the
status bar, drag down from the top of the screen.
Icon Meaning
No signal
Signal strength
Roaming (outside of normal service area)
GPRS network connected
EDGE network connected
UMTS network connected
HSDPA network connected
HSPA+ network connected
/ LTE network connected
Wi-Fi connected
Bluetooth feature activated
GPS activated
Call in progress
Missed call
Synced with the web
Connected to computer
No SIM or USIM card
New text or multimedia message
Alarm activated
Mute mode activated
Vibration mode activated
Basics
24
Icon Meaning
Flight mode activated
Error occurred or caution required
Battery power level
Notifications panel
Using the notifications panel
When you receive new notifications, such as messages or missed calls, indicator icons appear
on the status bar. To see more information about the icons, open the notifications panel and
view the details.
To open the notifications panel, drag the status bar downwards. To close the notifications
panel, drag the bar from the bottom of the screen upwards.
Basics
25
You can use the following functions on the notifications panel.
Launch Settings.
Tap a notification and perform
various actions.
Clear all notifications.
Adjust the brightness.
Activate or deactivate options.
Tap and hold a button to view
more detailed settings.
Using the quick setting buttons
You can activate or deactivate some features on the notifications panel. Tap the following
options to activate or deactivate them. You can view more detailed settings if you tap and
hold a button.
• Wi-Fi: Refer to Wi-Fi for more information.
• Location: Refer to Location for more information.
• Sound / Vibrate / Mute: Select a sound mode.
• Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device.
Some apps do not allow screen rotation.
Basics
26
• Bluetooth: Refer to Bluetooth for more information.
• Mobile data: Refer to Data usage or Mobile networks for more information.
• U. power saving: Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information.
• Mobile hotspot: Refer to Tethering and Mobile hotspot for more information.
• Screen Mirroring: Refer to Screen Mirroring for more information.
• NFC: Refer to NFC for more information.
• Sync: When you activate this feature, the device automatically syncs apps, such as
calendar or email.
• Flight mode: Refer to Flight mode for more information.
Opening apps
On the Home screen or the Apps screen, select an app icon to open it.
To open the list of recently-used apps, tap and select an app icon to open.
Closing an app
Tap and drag an app icon to the left or right to close it. To close all running apps, tap
→ .
Installing or uninstalling apps
Samsung GALAXY Apps
Use this app to purchase and download apps.
Tap GALAXY Apps on the Apps screen.
This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Basics
27
Installing apps
Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword.
Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap Install. To purchase
and download apps where charges apply, tap the button that shows the app’s price.
To change the auto update settings, tap → Settings → Auto update apps, and
then select an option.
Play Store
Use this app to purchase and download apps.
Tap Play Store on the Apps screen.
Installing apps
Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword.
Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap INSTALL. To purchase
and download apps where charges apply, tap the price and follow the on-screen instructions.
To change the auto update settings, tap → SETTINGS → Auto-update apps, and
then select an option.
Managing apps
Uninstalling or disabling apps
To disable default apps, open the Apps screen and tap → Uninstall/disable apps.
appears on the apps that you can disable. Select an app and tap OK.
To uninstall downloaded apps, open the Apps screen and tap → Downloaded apps → →
Uninstall. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Application manager, select an
app, and then tap Uninstall.
Basics
28
Enabling apps
On the Apps screen, tap → Show disabled apps, select apps, and then tap Done.
Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Application manager, scroll to DISABLED,
select an app, and then tap Enable.
• Hiding apps: Hide apps in the Apps screen only. You can continue to use hidden
apps.
• Disabling apps: Disable selected default apps that cannot be uninstalled from the
device. You cannot use disabled apps.
• Uninstalling apps: Uninstall downloaded apps.
Entering text
Keyboard layout
A keyboard appears automatically when you enter text to send messages, create memos, and
more.
Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the
input language to one of the supported languages.
Break to the next line.
Delete a preceding character.
Enter punctuation marks.
Enter uppercase. For all caps, tap
it twice.
Change the keyboard settings. Enter a space.
Basics
29
Changing the input language
Tap → Select input languages, and then select the languages to use. If you select two or
more languages, you can switch between the input languages by sliding the space key left or
right.
Changing the keyboard layout
Tap , select a language under INPUT LANGUAGES, and then select a keyboard layout to
use.
On 3x4 keyboard, a key has three or four characters. To enter a character, tap the
corresponding key repeatedly until the desired character appears.
Using additional keyboard functions
Tap and hold to use various functions. Other icons may appear instead of depending on
the last function that was used.
• : Enter text by voice.
Change the language.
Open the keyboard.
Start or pause entering text by
voice.
• : Change the keyboard settings.
• : Enter emoticons.
Basics
30
Changing the keyboard type
Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select
the type of keyboard to use.
If default keyboards do not appear in the list of available keyboards or you install new
keyboards, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Language and input, and then tick a
keyboard.
Copying and pasting
1 Tap and hold over text.
2 Drag or to select the desired text, or tap Select all to select all text.
3 Tap Copy or Cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard.
4 Tap and hold at the point where the text is to be inserted and tap Paste.
Screen capture
Capture a screenshot while using the device.
Press and hold the Home button and the Power button simultaneously. The image is saved in
the Gallery → Screenshots folder. After capturing a screenshot, you can edit the image and
share it with others.
It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some apps.
Basics
31
My Files
About My Files
Use this app to access various files stored in the device.
Tap My Files on the Apps screen.
Access additional options.
Search for files or folders.
View files by categories.
View the download history.
View files stored in the device.
Basics
32
Power saving feature
Ultra power saving mode
Use this mode to extend the device’s battery power. In ultra power saving mode, the device
performs the following:
• Restricts the available apps to essential and selected apps only.
• Deactivates the mobile data connection when the screen turns off.
• Deactivates the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth features.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Ultra power saving mode, and tap the Ultra power
saving mode switch to activate it.
To add an app to the Home screen, tap and select an app.
To change the settings for ultra power saving mode, such as network connectivity or sound,
tap → Settings.
To deactivate ultra power saving mode, tap → Disable ultra power saving mode.
The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery
power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your
device settings and operating conditions.
33
Network connectivity
Mobile data
Connect the device to a mobile network to use the Internet or share media files with other
devices. Refer to Data usage for additional options.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Data usage, and then tick Mobile data.
Alternatively, open the notifications panel and tap Mobile data to activate it.
Wi-Fi
Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other
devices. Refer to Wi-Fi for additional options.
Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use.
1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it.
2 Select a network from the Wi-Fi networks list. Networks that require a password appear
with a lock icon.
3 Tap Connect.
Once the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will reconnect to that
network each time it is available without requiring a password.
To prevent the device connecting to the network automatically, select it from the list
of networks and tap Forget.
Network connectivity
34
Tethering and Mobile hotspot
About tethering and mobile hotspots
Use this feature to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers and other
devices if an Internet connection is unavailable. Connections can be made via Wi-Fi, USB, or
Bluetooth.
You may incur additional charges when using this feature.
Using the mobile hotspot
Use your device as a mobile hotspot to share your device’s mobile data connection with other
devices.
1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot.
2 Tick Mobile hotspot.
• appears on the status bar. Other devices can find your device in the Wi-Fi networks
list.
• To set a password for the mobile hotspot, tap → Configure hotspot and select the
level of security. Then, enter a password and tap Save.
3 On the other device’s screen, search for and select your device from the Wi-Fi networks
list.
4 On the connected device, use the device’s mobile data connection to access the Internet.
Network connectivity
35
Using USB tethering
Share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices via a USB cable.
1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot.
2 Connect your device to the computer via the USB cable.
3 Tick USB tethering.
appears on the status bar when the two devices are connected.
4 On the computer, use your device’s mobile data connection.
Using Bluetooth tethering
Share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices via Bluetooth. Ensure that the
computer that you connect to supports the Bluetooth feature.
1 Pair your device with the other device via Bluetooth. Refer to Pairing with other Bluetooth
devices for more information.
2 On the Apps screen of your device, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot.
3 Tick Bluetooth tethering.
4 On the connected device, open the Bluetooth settings screen, tap → Internet access.
appears on the status bar when the two devices are connected.
5 On the connected device, use the device’s mobile data connection to access the Internet.
The connection methods may vary depending on the connected devices.
36
Personalising
Managing the Home and Apps screens
Managing the Home screen
Adding items
Tap and hold an app from the Apps screen, and then drag it to the Home screen.
To add widgets, open the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, tap Widgets, tap and
hold a widget, and then drag it to the Home screen.
Moving and removing an item
Tap and hold an item on the Home screen, and then drag it to a new location.
To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen.
You can also move frequently-used apps to the shortcuts area at the bottom of the Home
screen.
To remove an item, tap and hold the item. Then, drag it to Remove that appears at the top of
the screen.
Creating a folder
1 On the Home screen, tap and hold an app, and then drag it to Create folder that appears
at the top of the screen.
2 Enter a folder name.
3 Tap , select the apps to move to the folder, and then tap Done.
Personalising
37
Managing panels
On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area to add, move, or remove a panel.
To add a panel, scroll left to the last panel, and then tap .
To move a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location.
To remove a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to Remove at the top of
the screen.
To set a panel as the main Home screen, tap .
Managing the Apps screen
Changing the sorting method
On the Apps screen, tap → View as and select a sorting method.
Hiding apps
Hide apps that you do not want to see on the Apps screen.
On the Apps screen, tap → Hide apps, select apps, and then tap Done.
To display hidden apps, tap → Show hidden apps, select apps, and then tap Done.
Moving items
On the Apps screen, tap → Edit. Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location.
To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen.
To move an item to a new panel, drag it to Create page that appears at the top of the screen.
Personalising
38
Setting wallpaper and ringtones
Setting wallpaper
Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen or the locked
screen.
1 On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, and then tap Wallpapers. Alternatively,
on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Display → Wallpaper.
2 Select a screen to change or apply wallpaper to.
3 Scroll left or right and select from images displayed at the bottom of the screen. To select
photos taken by the device’s camera or other images, tap From Gallery.
4 Tap Set as wallpaper or Done.
Changing ringtones
Change ringtones for incoming calls and notifications.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Sound.
To set a ringtone for incoming calls, tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and then tap Done. To
use a song stored in the device or in your account as a ringtone, tap Add.
To set a ringtone for notifications, tap Notifications, select a ringtone, and then tap Done.
Personalising
39
Changing the screen lock method
You can change the way that you lock the screen to prevent others from accessing your
personal information.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock, and then select a screen
lock method. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it.
If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it.
Pattern
Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it.
Set a backup PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern.
PIN
A PIN consists of numbers only. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password
again to verify it.
Password
A password consists of characters and numbers. Enter at least four characters including
numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it.
Personalising
40
Transferring data from your previous device
Using backup accounts
You can transfer backup data from your previous device to your new device using your
Google account. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information.
Using Samsung Smart Switch
You can transfer data of the previous device to a new device via Smart Switch. Visit
www.samsung.com/smartswitch for more information.
Samsung Smart Switch is not supported on some devices or computers.
Using Smart Switch with computers
Use this feature to import a backup of your data (from selected manufacturer’s
mobile devices) from a computer to your device. You can download the app from
www.samsung.com/smartswitch.
1 Back up data from a previous device to the computer. For more information, contact the
device’s manufacturer.
2 On the computer, launch Smart Switch.
3 Connect your current device to the computer using the USB cable.
4 On the computer, click the manufacturer of the previous device and follow the on-screen
instructions to transfer data to your device.
Personalising
41
Using Samsung Kies
Import a backup of your data from your computer via Samsung Kies to restore data on your
device. You can also back up data to the computer via Samsung Kies. Refer to Connecting
with Samsung Kies for more information.
Setting up accounts
Adding accounts
Some apps used on your device require a registered account. Create accounts to have the
best experience with your device.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts → Add account and select an account service.
Then, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup.
To sync content with your accounts, select an account and tick items to sync.
Removing accounts
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts, select an account, and then tap → Remove
account.
42
Phone
Making calls
Tap Phone on the Apps screen.
Tap Keypad, enter a phone number, and then tap to make a voice call, or tap to make a
video call. You can also make calls to phone numbers listed in Logs, Favourites, and Contacts.
Add the number to the contacts Access additional options.
list.
Preview the phone number.
View favourite contacts.
Delete a preceding character.
View the contacts list.
View call and message logs.
Enter the number using the
keypad.
Making calls from call logs or contacts list
Tap Logs or Contacts, select a contact or a phone number, and then tap or .
Phone
43
Making an international call
Tap Keypad.
Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone
number, and then tap .
To block outgoing international calls, tap → Settings → Call → Additional settings → Call
barring → a voice call or video call. Then, tick International calls, enter password, and then
tap OK.
Receiving calls
Answering a call
When a call comes in, drag outside the large circle.
Rejecting a call
When a call comes in, drag outside the large circle.
To send a message when rejecting an incoming call, drag the reject message bar upwards.
To create various rejection messages, open the Apps screen and tap Phone → → Settings
→ Call → Set up call reject messages → .
Missed calls
If a call is missed, appears on the status bar. Open the notifications panel to view the list of
missed calls. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Phone → Logs to view missed calls.
Phone
44
Options during calls
During a voice call
The following actions are available:
• Add call: Dial a second call.
• Keypad: Open the keypad.
• End call: End the current call.
• Speaker: Activate or deactivate the speakerphone. When using the speakerphone, speak
into the microphone at the top of the device and keep the device away from your ears.
• Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you.
• Bluetooth: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device.
Tap to view more options.
During a video call
The following actions are available:
• → Hide me: Hide your image from the other party.
• → Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party.
• → Capture image: Capture the other party’s image.
• → Record video: Record a video of the other party’s images.
• → Memo: Create a memo.
• → Messages: Send a message.
• → Keypad: Open the keypad.
• → Speaker off / Speaker on: Activate or deactivate the speakerphone. When using the
speakerphone, speak into the microphone at the top of the device and keep the device
away from your ears.
• → Switch to headset / Switch to phone: Switch sound output to a connected
Bluetooth headset or back to the device’s speaker.
Tap the screen to use the following options:
• Switch: Switch between the front and rear cameras.
• Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you.
• End call: End the current call.
45
Contacts
Adding contacts
Moving contacts from other devices
You can move contacts from other devices to your device. Refer to Transferring data from
your previous device for more information.
Creating contacts manually
1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts.
2 Tap and enter contact information.
• : Add an image.
• / : Add or delete a contact field.
3 Tap Save.
To add a phone number to the contacts list from the keypad, tap Keypad, enter the number,
and then tap Add to contacts.
Importing and exporting contacts
Import contacts from storage services to your device or export contacts from the device to
storage services.
On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts.
Tap → Settings → Contacts → Import/export, and then select an import or export option.
Contacts
46
Searching for contacts
On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts.
Use one of the following search methods:
• Scroll up or down the contacts list.
• Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria.
Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions:
• : Add to favourite contacts.
• / : Make a voice or video call.
• : Compose a message.
• : Compose an email.
Adding shortcuts for contacts to the Home screen
Add shortcuts to contacts that you frequently communicate with on the Home screen.
1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts.
2 Select a contact.
3 Tap → Add shortcut to home screen.
47
Messages & email
Messages
Sending messages
Send text messages (SMS) or multimedia messages (MMS).
You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages when you are
roaming.
1 Tap Messages on the Apps screen.
2 Tap .
3 Add recipients and enter a message.
Access additional options.
Enter a message.
Attach files.
Select contacts from the
contacts list.
Enter recipients.
Send the message.
4 Tap to send the message.
Messages & email
48
Viewing incoming messages
Incoming messages are grouped into message threads by contact. Select a contact to view
the person’s messages.
You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages when you are
roaming.
While viewing a message, tap to view more options.
Email
Setting up email accounts
Tap Email on the Apps screen.
Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time.
Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account or tap Manual
setup for a company email account. After that, follow the on-screen instructions to complete
the setup.
To set up another email account, tap → Settings → Manage accounts → .
If you have more than one email account, you can set one as the default account. Tap →
Manage accounts, select an account, and then tick Default account.
Messages & email
49
Sending emails
Tap Email on the Apps screen.
Tap at the bottom of the screen to compose a message.
Add recipients.
Add a CC or BCC.
Add recipients from the contacts
Enter a message. list.
Enter a subject.
Send the message.
Access additional options.
Attach images, videos and
others.
Save the message for later
delivery.
Discard the message.
Messages & email
50
Reading emails
Tap Email on the Apps screen.
Tap , select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve
new messages, tap .
Tap a message to read.
Reply to the message.
Add this email address to the
contacts list or view other
options.
Reply to all recipients.
Forward the message.
Go to the previous or next
message.
Delete the message.
Open attachments.
Access additional options.
Mark the message as a reminder.
51
Camera
Basic shooting
Taking photos or recording videos
1 Tap Camera on the Apps screen.
2 Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus.
3 Tap to take a photo or tap to record a video.
• Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out.
• To capture an image from the video while recording, tap .
View photos and
videos you have
captured.
Start recording a
video.
Take a photo.
Change camera
settings.
Switch between the
front and rear
cameras.
Display current
mode.
Change the shooting
mode.
Camera
52
• The camera automatically shuts off when unused.
• Make sure that the lens is clean. Otherwise, the device may not work properly in
some modes that require high resolutions.
• The front camera lens is suitable for taking wide-angle photos. Minor distortion
may occur in wide-angle photos and does not indicate device performance
problems.
Launching Camera on the locked screen
To quickly take photos of special moments, launch Camera on the locked screen.
On the locked screen, drag outside the large circle. If is not shown, open the Apps
screen, tap Settings → Lock screen, and then tick Camera shortcut.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Camera etiquette
• Do not take photos or record videos of other people without their permission.
• Do not take photos or record videos where legally prohibited.
• Do not take photos or record videos in places where you may violate other people’s
privacy.
Camera
53
Shooting modes
Auto
Use this mode to allow the camera to evaluate the surroundings and determine the ideal
mode for the photo.
On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Auto.
Selfie
Use this mode to take a self-portrait using the front camera.
1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera.
2 Tap to use the front camera.
3 Tap → Selfie.
4 Show your palm to the screen or tap to take a photo of yourself.
Wide selfie
Use this mode to take a wide self-portrait using the front camera.
1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera.
2 Tap to use the front camera.
3 Tap → Wide selfie.
Camera
54
4 Show your palm to the screen or tap to take a photo of yourself.
5 Slowly rotate the device left and then right to take a panoramic photo. The device
combines the photos into a single panoramic image.
• Make sure to keep the blue frame inside the viewfinder window.
• The subjects should remain still while taking wide self-portraits.
• The resolution of a photo may be affected by lighting conditions.
• The top and bottom parts of the image displayed on the preview screen may be
cut out of the photo depending on the shooting conditions.
Beauty face
Use this mode to take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images.
On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Beauty face.
Panorama
Use this mode to take a photo composed of many photos strung together. The device
identifies the photo with in Gallery.
On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Panorama.
To get the best shot, follow these tips:
• Move the camera slowly in one direction.
• Keep the image within the frame on the camera’s viewfinder.
• Avoid taking photos of indistinct backgrounds, such as an empty sky or a plain
wall.
Camera
55
Rear-cam selfie
Use this mode to allow the camera to detect and focus your face automatically when you take
a self-portrait using the rear camera.
1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Rear-cam selfie.
2 Move the frame to the position where your face will appear and adjust the frame size.
3 Position the device so the rear camera is aimed at your face. When the face is detected,
the device beeps. Then, the device automatically takes the photo after 2 seconds.
Continuous shot
Use this mode to take a series of photos of moving subjects.
On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Continuous shot.
Tap and hold to take several photos continuously.
HDR (Rich tone)
Use this mode to take photos with rich colours and reproduce details even in bright and dark
areas.
On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → HDR (Rich tone).
Without effect With effect
Camera
56
Night
Use this mode to take a photo in low-light conditions, without using the flash.
On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Night.
Animated GIF
Use this mode to create an animated photo from a series of photos.
On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Animated GIF.
Camera settings
On the Apps screen, tap Camera → . Not all of the following options are available in both
still camera and video camera modes.
• : Activate or deactivate the flash.
• : Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene, when taking photos
with the front camera.
• : Use this for delayed-time shots.
• : Select a filter effect to use when taking photos or recording videos.
• / : Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more
memory.
To use more options, tap .
• Palm selfie: Set the device to detect your palm, so you can use it to take self-portraits.
• Beauty face: Set the device to take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images.
• Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the
camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure.
• ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera
equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are
for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects.
Camera
57
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour
range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar
to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras.
• Metering modes: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are
calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot
measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene.
• Tap to take pics: Tap the image on the preview screen to take photos.
• Video size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up
more memory.
• Recording mode: Change the recording mode.
• Location tags: Set the device to attach the location tag to the photo.
• To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be
obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather
conditions.
• When you share a photo with the location tag attached, the location information
may be exposed to others.
• Storage location: Select the memory location for storage.
• Grid lines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects.
• Voice control: Set the device to take photos with voice commands.
• The volume key: Set the device to use the Volume button to control the shutter or zoom
function.
• Reset settings: Reset the camera settings.
The available options vary depending on the mode used.
58
Gallery
Viewing content on the device
On the Apps screen, tap Gallery and select an image or a video.
Video files show the icon on the preview thumbnail.
To hide or show the menu bar and the preview thumbnails, tap the screen.
Access additional options.
Delete the image.
Modify the image.
Move to the previous screen.
Send the image to others.
Image and video preview
thumbnails
Gallery
59
Editing photos
Edit images by applying various effects.
Tap Gallery on the Apps screen.
To use this feature, you need to download and install the required app.
While viewing an image, tap and use the following functions:
• Rotate: Rotate the image.
• Crop: Crop the image.
• Colour: Adjust the saturation or brightness of the image.
• Effect: Apply effects to the image.
• Portrait: Correct red-eye, adjust and retouch faces, or make background blurry.
• Sticker: Attach stickers.
• Drawing: Draw on the image.
• Frame: Apply frames to the image.
When you are finished editing the image, tap .
60
Useful apps and features
S Planner
Creating events or tasks
1 Tap S Planner on the Apps screen.
2 Tap . Alternatively, select a date with no events or tasks in it and tap the date again.
If the date already has saved events or tasks in it, tap the date and tap .
3 Select either event or task and enter details.
• Add event: Set a start and end date for an event. You can set an optional repeat
setting.
• Add task: Add a task to do on a specific date. You can set an optional priority setting.
Enter a title.
Add more details.
Select a calendar to use or sync
with.
Select an item.
Set a start and end date for the
event.
4 Tap Save to save the event or task.
Useful apps and features
61
Syncing events and tasks with your accounts
Tap S Planner on the Apps screen.
To sync events and tasks with your accounts, tap → Sync.
To add accounts to sync with, tap → Calendars → Add account. Then, select an account
to sync with and sign in. When an account is added, a green circle is displayed next to the
account name.
To change an account’s syncing option, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts, and
then select an account service.
Internet
1 Tap Internet on the Apps screen.
2 Tap the address field. To change the search engine, tap the search engine icon next to the
web address field.
3 Enter the web address or a keyword, and then tap Go.
To view the toolbars, drag your finger downwards slightly on the screen.
Read an article in reading mode.
Bookmark the current webpage.
Open the homepage.
Move to the previously-visited
page.
View your bookmarks and recent
Internet history.
Access additional options.
Open the webpage window
manager.
Refresh the current webpage.
Useful apps and features
62
Video
Playing videos
Tap Video on the Apps screen.
Select a video to play.
Move forwards or
backwards by
dragging the bar.
Change screen ratio.
Skip to the previous
video. Tap and hold
to move backwards
quickly.
Skip to the next
video. Tap and hold
to move forwards
quickly.
Access additional
options.
Pause and resume
playback.
Rotate the screen's
orientation.
Adjust the volume.
Calculator
Use this app for simple or complex calculations.
Tap Calculator on the Apps screen.
Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen
rotation is disabled, tap → Scientific calculator.
Useful apps and features
63
Clock
Alarm
On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Alarm.
Setting alarms
Tap in the alarms list, set an alarm time, select the days on which the alarm will repeat, set
other various alarm options, and then tap Save. To activate or deactivate alarms, tap next
to the alarm in the alarms list.
• Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset
time.
• Smart alarm: Set a time and tone for the smart alarm. A smart alarm starts at a low
volume a few minutes before a preset alarm is scheduled to sound. The volume of the
smart alarm increases gradually until you turn it off or the preset alarm sounds.
Stopping alarms
Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. If you have previously enabled the snooze
option, drag outside the large circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time.
Deleting alarms
Tap → Select, select alarms, and then tap .
World clock
On the Apps screen, tap Clock → World clock.
Creating clocks
Tap and enter a city name or select a city from the cities list.
Deleting clocks
Tap → Select, select clocks, and then tap .
Useful apps and features
64
Stopwatch
On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Stopwatch.
Tap Start to time an event. Tap Lap to record lap times.
Tap Stop to stop timing. To clear lap times, tap Reset.
Timer
On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Timer.
Set the duration, and then tap Start.
Drag outside the large circle when the timer goes off.
Memo
Use this app to create memos and organise them by category.
Tap Memo on the Apps screen.
Composing memos
Tap on the memos list and enter a memo. While composing a memo, use the following
options:
• : Create or set a category.
• : Insert images.
• : Make a voice recording to insert.
To save the memo, tap Save.
To edit a memo, tap a memo, and then tap the content of the memo.
Searching for memos
Tap on the memos list and enter a keyword to search for memos that include the keyword.
Useful apps and features
65
Radio
Listening to the FM radio
Tap Radio on the Apps screen.
Before you use this app, you must connect a headset, which serves as the radio antenna.
The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically when running for the
first time.
Tap to turn on the FM radio. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap
to return to the FM radio screen.
View the list of favourite stations.
Access additional options.
Turn the FM radio on or off.
Adjust the volume.
Add the current radio station to
the favourites list.
Fine-tune the frequency.
View the list of available stations.
Record a song from the FM radio.
Enter radio station frequency
manually.
Search for an available radio
station.
Scanning radio stations
Tap Radio on the Apps screen.
Tap → Scan, and then select a scan option. The FM radio scans and saves available stations
automatically.
Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio
screen.
Useful apps and features
66
Voice Recorder
Recording voice memos
Tap Voice Recorder on the Apps screen.
Tap to start recording. Speak into the microphone. Tap to pause recording. To cancel
recording, tap . Tap to finish recording.
Display the list of voice memos.
Access additional options.
Start recording.
Recording elapsed time
Playing voice memos
Tap Voice Recorder on the Apps screen.
Tap and select a voice memo to play.
• / : Pause or resume playback.
• / : Skip to the previous or next voice memo.
Useful apps and features
67
Google apps
Google provides entertainment, social network, and business apps. You may require a Google
account to access some apps. Refer to Setting up accounts for more information.
To view more app information, open the each app’s main screen and tap → Help.
Some apps may not be available or may be labelled differently depending on the
region or service provider.
Chrome
Search for information and browse webpages.
Drive
Store your content on the cloud, access it from anywhere, and share it with others.
Gmail
Send or receive emails via the Google Mail service.
Google
Search quickly for items on the Internet or your device.
Google Settings
Configure settings for some features provided by Google.
Google+
Share your news and follow updates that your family, friends, and others share. You can also
back up your photos and videos, and more.
Hangouts
Chat with your friends individually or in groups and use images, emoticons, and video calls
while you are chatting.
Useful apps and features
68
Maps
Find your location on the map, search for locations, and view location information for various
places.
Photos
Manage photos, albums, and videos that you have saved on the device and uploaded to
Google+.
Play Books
Download various books from Play Store and read them.
Play Games
Download games from Play Store and play them with others.
Play Movies & TV
Watch videos stored on your device and download various content to watch from Play Store.
Play Music
Discover, listen to, and share music on your device.
Play Newsstand
Read news and magazines that interest you in one convenient location.
Voice Search
Search quickly for items by saying a keyword or phrase.
YouTube
Watch or create videos and share them with others.
69
Connecting with other devices
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use
Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices.
• Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or
received via Bluetooth.
• Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted
and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating
distance may be reduced.
• Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth
SIG, may be incompatible with your device.
• Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies
of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes).
Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth
feature.
Connecting with other devices
70
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices
1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth, tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it,
and then tap Scan.
The detected devices are listed.
To set the device as visible to other devices, tap the device name.
2 Select a device to pair with.
If your device has paired with the device before, tap the device name without confirming
the auto-generated passkey.
If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its
visibility option.
3 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on both devices to confirm.
Sending and receiving data
Many apps support data transfer via Bluetooth. You can share data, such as contacts or media
files, with other Bluetooth devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image
to another device.
Sending an image
1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery.
2 Select an image.
3 Tap → Bluetooth, and then select a device to transfer the image to.
If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its
visibility option. Or, set your device as visible to other devices.
4 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device.
Connecting with other devices
71
Receiving an image
When another device sends you an image, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request. The
received image is saved in the Gallery → Download folder.
Unpairing Bluetooth devices
1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth.
The device displays the paired devices in the list.
2 Tap next to the device’s name to unpair.
3 Tap Unpair.
Wi-Fi Direct
About Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct connects devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point.
Connecting to other devices
1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it.
2 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct.
The detected devices are listed.
3 Select a device to connect to.
To connect to multiple devices, tap → Multi-connect.
To change the device name, tap → Rename device.
4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device to confirm.
Connecting with other devices
72
Sending and receiving data
You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other devices. The following actions
are an example of sending an image to another device.
Sending an image
1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery.
2 Select an image.
3 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct, select a device to transfer the image to, and then tap Done.
4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device.
Receiving an image
When another device sends you an image, accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request. The
received image is saved in the Gallery → Download folder.
Ending the device connection
1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi.
2 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct.
The device displays the connected devices in the list.
3 Tap End connection → OK to disconnect the devices.
Connecting with other devices
73
NFC
About NFC
Your device allows you to read near field communication (NFC) tags that contain information
about products. You can also use this feature to make payments and buy tickets for
transportation or events after downloading the required apps.
The battery contains a built-in NFC antenna. Handle the battery carefully to avoid
damaging the NFC antenna.
Using the NFC feature
Use the NFC feature to send images or contacts to other devices, and read product
information from NFC tags. If you insert a SIM or USIM card that has a payment feature, you
can use the device to make payments conveniently.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it.
Place the NFC antenna area on the back of your device near an NFC tag. The information from
the tag appears.
Ensure that the device’s screen is unlocked. Otherwise, the device will not read NFC
tags or receive data.
Connecting with other devices
74
Making a purchase with the NFC feature
Before you can use the NFC feature to make payments, you must register for the mobile
payment service. To register or get more information about the service, contact your service
provider.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it.
Touch the NFC antenna area on the back of your device to the NFC card reader.
To set the default payment app, tap Tap and pay and select an app.
The payment services list may not include all available payment apps.
Sending data
Use the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled
devices.
1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it.
2 Tap Android Beam and tap the Android Beam switch to activate it.
3 Select an item and touch the other device’s NFC antenna to your device’s NFC antenna.
4 When Touch to beam. appears on the screen, tap your device’s screen to send the item.
Connecting with other devices
75
Screen Mirroring
About Screen Mirroring
Use this feature to connect your device to a large screen with an AllShare Cast dongle or
HomeSync and then share your contents. You can also use this feature with other devices that
support the Wi-Fi Miracast feature.
Screen mirroring
-enabled devices
(AllShare Cast dongle,
HomeSync and Wi-Fi
Miracast devices)
• This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
• Miracast-enabled devices that do not support High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP 2.X) may not be compatible with this feature.
• Some files may be buffered during playback, depending on the network
connection.
• To save energy, deactivate this feature when not in use.
• If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency, AllShare Cast dongles or HomeSync may not be
detected or connected.
• If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best
experience.
Connecting with other devices
76
Viewing content on a TV
Before you connect your device to a TV, connect the TV and the screen mirroring-enabled
device. To set up the connection, refer to the device’s user manual. The following actions are
an example of viewing content on a TV connected via an AllShare Cast dongle.
1 Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the TV using an HDMI cable.
2 On the TV, select a connection mode, such as HDMI mode, to connect an external device.
3 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Screen Mirroring.
The detected devices are listed.
4 Select a device to connect to.
Your device’s screen appears on the TV screen.
If you connect the device for the first time, tap and hold the dongle’s name in the list and
enter the PIN shown on the TV screen.
5 Open or play a file, and then control the display with the keys on your device.
Connecting with other devices
77
Mobile printing
Connect the device to a printer via Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct, and print images or documents.
Some printers may not be compatible with the device.
Adding printer plug-ins
Add printer plug-ins for printers you want to connect the device to.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Printing → Add printer, and search for a printer plug-in
in Play Store. Select a printer plug-in and install it.
Connecting to a printer
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Printing, select a printer plug-in, and then tap the switch
at the top right of the screen to activate it. The device searches for printers that are connected
to the same Wi-Fi network as your device. Select a printer to use as the default printer.
To add printers manually, select a printer plug-in, tap → Add printer → , enter details,
and then tap OK.
To change print settings, select a printer plug-in and tap → Printing settings.
Printing content
While viewing content, such as images or documents, tap → Print, and then select a printer.
78
Device & data manager
Upgrading the device
The device can be upgraded to the latest software.
Upgrading over the air
The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air
(FOTA) service.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → About device → Software update → Update.
Upgrading with Samsung Kies
Download the latest version of Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. Launch Samsung
Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the
device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the
dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information about
how to upgrade.
• Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is
upgrading.
• While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer.
Doing so may interfere with the update process.
Device & data manager
79
Transferring files between the device and a
computer
Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice
versa.
Do not disconnect the USB cable from the device when you are transferring files.
Doing so may cause data loss or device damage.
• Do not disconnect the device from the computer when you play files saved in the
device on the connected computer. After you finish playing the file, disconnect the
device from the computer.
• The devices may not connect properly if they are connected via a USB hub. Directly
connect the device to the computer’s USB port.
Connecting as a media device
1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable.
2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device → Media
device (MTP).
Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or
not have any appropriate driver installed.
3 Transfer files between your device and the computer.
Connecting with Samsung Kies
Samsung Kies is a computer app that manages media contents and personal information
with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website.
1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable.
Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch,
double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer.
2 Transfer files between your device and the computer.
Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information.
Device & data manager
80
Backing up and restoring data
Keep your personal information, app data, and settings safe on your device. You can back up
your sensitive information to a backup account and access it later.
1 Tap Settings on the Apps screen.
2 Tap Backup and reset and tick Back up my data.
3 Tap Backup account and select an account as the backup account.
To restore data, you must sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard. You can
launch and open the setup wizard by performing a factory data reset on the device.
If you do not sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard, you cannot restore
the backup data.
Performing a data reset
Delete all settings and data on the device. Before performing a factory data reset, ensure you
back up all important data stored on the device. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for
more information.
On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset
device → Erase everything. The device automatically restarts.
81
Settings
About Settings
Use this app to configure the device, set app options, and add accounts.
Tap Settings on the Apps screen.
CONNECTIONS
Wi-Fi
Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other
network devices.
On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it.
To use options, tap .
• Scan: Search for available networks.
• Wi-Fi Direct: Activate Wi-Fi Direct and connect devices directly via Wi-Fi to share files.
• Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings.
• WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button.
• WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN.
Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy
Tap → Advanced → Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep.
When the screen is turned off, the device automatically turns off Wi-Fi connections.
When this happens, the device automatically accesses mobile networks if it is set
to use them. This may incur data transfer fees. To avoid additional charges, set this
option to Always.
Settings
82
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct connects devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point.
Tap → Wi-Fi Direct.
Bluetooth
Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances.
On the Settings screen, tap Bluetooth, and then tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it.
To use more options, tap .
• Visibility timeout: Set duration that the device is visible.
• Received files: View received files via Bluetooth.
Tethering and Mobile hotspot
Use the device as a mobile hotspot to share the device’s mobile data connection with other
devices. Refer to Tethering and Mobile hotspot for more information.
On the Settings screen, tap Tethering and Mobile hotspot.
• Mobile hotspot: Use the mobile hotspot to share the device’s mobile data connection
with computers or other devices through the Wi-Fi network. You can use this feature
when the network connection is not available.
• USB tethering: Use USB tethering to share the device’s mobile data connection with
a computer via USB. When connected to a computer, the device is used as a wireless
modem for the computer.
• Bluetooth tethering: Use Bluetooth tethering to share the device’s mobile data
connection with computers or other devices via Bluetooth.
Settings
83
Flight mode
This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services.
On the Settings screen, tap Flight mode.
Data usage
Keep track of your data usage amount and customise the settings for the limitation.
On the Settings screen, tap Data usage.
• Mobile data: Set the device to use data connections on any mobile network.
• Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for mobile data usage.
• Data usage cycle: Set a monthly reset date to monitor data usage between periods.
To use more options, tap .
• Data roaming: Set the device to use data connections when you are roaming.
• Restrict background data: Set the device to disable sync in the background while using
a mobile network.
• Auto sync data: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of apps, such as calendar or email.
You can select what information to sync for each account in Settings → Accounts.
• Show Wi-Fi usage: Set the device to show your data usage via Wi-Fi.
• Mobile hotspots: Select mobile hotspots to prevent apps that are running in the
background from using them.
Location
Change settings for location information permissions.
On the Settings screen, tap Location, and then tap the Location switch to activate it.
• Mode: Select a method to collect your location data.
• RECENT LOCATION REQUESTS: View which apps request your current location
information and their battery usage.
• LOCATION SERVICES: View the location services your device is using.
Settings
84
NFC
Activate the NFC feature to read or write NFC tags that contain information.
On the Settings screen, tap NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it.
• Android Beam: Turn on the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and
contacts, to NFC-enabled devices.
• Tap and pay: Set the default payment app for mobile payments.
The payment services list may not include all available payment apps.
Screen Mirroring
Activate the screen mirroring feature and share your display with others.
On the Settings screen, tap Screen Mirroring.
Printing
Download a printer app to print files.
On the Settings screen, tap Printing.
More networks
Customise settings to control networks.
On the Settings screen, tap More networks.
Default messaging app
Select the default app to use for messaging.
Mobile networks
• Mobile data: Set the device to use data connections on any mobile network.
• Data roaming: Set the device to use data connections when you are roaming.
• Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs).
• Network mode: Select a network type.
• Network operators: Search for available networks and manually register a network.
Settings
85
VPN
Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs).
DEVICE
Sound
Change settings for various sounds on the device.
On the Settings screen, tap Sound.
• Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, system sounds, and
notifications.
• Ringtones: Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls.
• Notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages and missed calls.
• Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls.
• Dialling keypad tone: Set the device to sound when you tap the buttons on the keypad.
• Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when you select an app or option on the touch
screen.
• Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when you lock or unlock the touch screen.
Display
Change the display settings.
On the Settings screen, tap Display.
• Wallpaper:
– Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen.
– Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen.
– Home and lock screen: Select a background image for the Home screen and the
locked screen.
Settings
86
• Notification panel:
– Application notifications: Change the notification method for each app.
• Brightness: Set the brightness of the display.
• Auto rotate screen: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned.
• Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s
backlight.
• Daydream: Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is charging.
• Font style: Change the font type for display text.
• Font size: Change the font size.
Lock screen
Change settings for the locked screen.
On the Settings screen, tap Lock screen.
• Screen lock: Change the screen lock method. The following options may vary depending
on the screen lock method selected.
• Dual clock: Set the device to show the dual clock.
• Show date: Set the device to show the date with the clock.
• Camera shortcut: Set the device to show the camera shortcut on the locked screen.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
• Owner information: Enter your information that is shown with the clock.
• Unlock effect: Select an effect that you see when you unlock the screen.
• Help text: Set the device to show the help text on the locked screen.
Settings
87
Call
Customise the settings for calling features.
On the Settings screen, tap Call.
• Set up call reject messages: Add or edit the message sent when you reject a call.
• Answering/ending calls:
– Pressing the home key: Set the device to answer a call when you press the Home
button.
– Pressing the power key: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power button.
• Additional settings:
– Caller ID: Display your caller ID to other parties for outgoing calls.
– Call forwarding: Divert incoming calls to another number.
– Auto area code: Set the device to automatically insert a prefix (area or country code)
before a phone number.
– Call barring: Block incoming or outgoing calls.
– Call waiting: Allow incoming call alerts when a call is in progress.
– Fixed Dialling Numbers: Activate or deactivate FDN mode to restrict calls to numbers
in the FDN list. Enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card.
• Ringtones and keypad tones:
– Ringtones: Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls.
– Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls.
– Dialling keypad tone: Set the device to sound when buttons on the keypad are
tapped.
• Hide my video: Select an image to be shown to the other party.
• Voicemail service: Select your voicemail service provider.
• Voicemail settings: Enter the number to access the voicemail service. Obtain this number
from the service provider.
Application manager
View and manage the apps on your device.
On the Settings screen, tap Application manager.
Settings
88
PERSONAL
Accounts
Add email or SNS accounts.
On the Settings screen, tap Accounts.
Backup and reset
Change the settings for managing settings and data.
On the Settings screen, tap Backup and reset.
• Back up my data: Set the device to back up settings and app data to the Google server.
• Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account.
• Automatic restore: Set the device to restore settings and app data when the apps are
reinstalled on the device.
• Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data.
Accessibility
Use this feature to improve accessibility to the device.
On the Settings screen, tap Accessibility.
• Direct access: Set the device to open selected accessibility menus when you press the
Home button three times quickly.
• Answering/ending calls:
– Pressing the home key: Set the device to answer a call when you press the Home
button.
– Pressing the power key: Set the device to end a call when you press the Power
button.
• Single tap mode: Set the device to control incoming calls or notifications by tapping the
button instead of dragging it.
• SERVICES: Select an accessibility app to use.
Settings
89
• TalkBack: Activate TalkBack, which provides voice feedback. To view help information to
learn how to use this feature, tap Settings → Launch “Explore by touch” tutorial.
• Speak passwords: Set the device to read the password aloud when you enter the
password while TalkBack is activated.
• Font size: Change the font size.
• Magnification gestures: Set the device to magnify the screen and to zoom in on a
specific area.
• Accessibility shortcut: Set the device to activate TalkBack when you press and hold the
Power button, and then tap and hold the screen with two fingers.
• Text-to-speech options:
– PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select an engine for the text-to-speech feature. To change
the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap .
– Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature.
– Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example.
– Default language status: View the status of the current language set for the text-to
speech feature.
• Flash notification: Set the flash to blink when you have incoming calls, new messages, or
notifications.
• Turn off all sounds: Set the device to mute all device sounds, such as media sounds, and
the caller’s voice during a call.
• Google subtitles (CC): Set the device to display closed captions on content supported by
Google and to change the closed caption settings.
• Mono audio: Set the device to switch the sound output from stereo to mono when a
headset is connected.
• Sound balance: Set the device to adjust the sound balance when using a headset.
• Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen.
• Interaction control: Activate interaction control mode to restrict the device’s reaction to
inputs while using apps.
Settings
90
SYSTEM
Language and input
Change the settings for text input. Some options may not be available depending on the
selected language.
On the Settings screen, tap Language and input.
Language
Select a display language for all menus and apps.
Default
Select a default keyboard type for text input.
Samsung keyboard
To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap .
The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider.
• English(UK): Select a default keyboard layout.
• Select input languages: Select languages for text input.
• Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and
show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings.
• Auto replacement: Set the device to correct misspelled and incomplete words by
tapping the space bar or punctuation mark.
• Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a
final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark.
• Auto spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words.
• Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar.
• Keyboard swipe:
– None: Set the device to deactivate the keyboard swipe feature.
– Continuous input: Set the device to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard.
Settings
91
• Sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched.
• Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped.
• Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings.
Google voice typing
To change the voice input settings, tap .
• Choose input languages: Select languages for text input.
• Block offensive words: Set the device to prevent the device from recognising offensive
words in voice inputs.
• Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input.
Voice search
• Language: Select a language for voice recognition.
• Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current
action.
• “Ok Google” Detection: Set the device to begin voice recognition when you say the
wake-up command while using the search app.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
• Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input.
• Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results.
• Bluetooth headset: Set the device to allow voice input of search keywords via the
Bluetooth headset microphone when a Bluetooth headset is connected.
Text-to-speech options
• PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for
speech synthesis engines, tap .
• Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature.
• Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example.
• Default language status: View the status of the default language for the text-to-speech
feature.
Settings
92
Pointer speed
Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device.
Date and time
Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date.
On the Settings screen, tap Date and time.
If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date
is reset.
• Automatic date and time: Automatically update the time and date when moving across
time zones.
• Set date: Set the current date manually.
• Set time: Set the current time manually.
• Automatic time zone: Set the device to receive time zone information from the network
when you move across time zones.
• Select time zone: Set the home time zone.
• Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format.
• Select date format: Select a date format.
Ultra power saving mode
Extend standby time and reduce battery consumption by displaying a simpler layout and
allowing limited access to an app. Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information.
On the Settings screen, tap Ultra power saving mode, and then tap the Ultra power saving
mode switch to activate it.
The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery
power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your
device settings and operating conditions.
Settings
93
Battery
View the amount of battery power consumed by your device.
On the Settings screen, tap Battery.
• Display battery percentage: Set the device to display the remaining battery life.
Storage
View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card.
On the Settings screen, tap Storage.
Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it.
The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified
capacity because the operating system and default apps occupy part of the memory.
The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device.
Security
Change settings for securing the device and the SIM or USIM card.
On the Settings screen, tap Security.
• Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow
device administrators to apply new policies to the device.
• Unknown sources: Set the device to allow the installation of apps from unknown
sources.
• Verify apps: Set the device to check the apps for harmful content before installing them.
• Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the
password each time you turn on the device.
Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an
hour to encrypt your data.
• Encrypt external SD card: Set the device to encrypt files on a memory card.
If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device
will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the
device.
Settings
94
• Remote controls: Set the device to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely
via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account.
• SIM Change Alert: Activate or deactivate the Find my mobile feature which helps locate
the device when lost or stolen.
• Go to website: Access the Find my mobile website (findmymobile.samsung.com). You
can track and control your lost or stolen device from the Find my mobile website.
• Set up SIM card lock:
– Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before
using the device.
– Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data.
• Make passwords visible: Set the device to display passwords as they are entered.
• Security policy updates: Set the device to check and download security updates.
• Send security reports: Set the device to automatically send the updated security reports
to Samsung.
• Storage type: Set a storage type for credential files.
• Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various apps.
• Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage.
• Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password.
About device
Access device information, edit the device name, or update device software.
On the Settings screen, tap About device.
95
Troubleshooting
Before contacting a Samsung Service Centre, please attempt the following solutions. Some
situations may not apply to your device.
When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it
prompts you to enter one of the following codes:
• Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set
for the device.
• PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you
must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by
using the Lock SIM card menu.
• PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly
several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider.
• PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with
the SIM or USIM card. For more information, contact your service provider.
Your device displays network or service error messages
• When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move
to another area and try again. While moving, error messages may appear repeatedly.
• You cannot access some options without a subscription. For more information, contact
your service provider.
Your device does not turn on
• When the battery is completely discharged, your device will not turn on. Fully charge the
battery before turning on the device.
• The battery may not be inserted properly. Insert the battery again.
• Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and insert the battery again.
Troubleshooting
96
The touch screen responds slowly or improperly
• If you attach a protective cover or optional accessories to the touch screen, the touch
screen may not function properly.
• If you are wearing gloves, if your hands are not clean while touching the touch screen,
or if you tap the screen with sharp objects or your fingertips, the touch screen may
malfunction.
• The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water.
• Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs.
• Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version.
• If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, visit a Samsung Service Centre.
Your device freezes or has fatal errors
If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close apps or turn off the device and turn it
on again. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button and the
Volume button down simultaneously for more than 7 seconds to restart it.
If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Apps screen, tap
Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything.
Before performing the factory data reset, remember to make backup copies of all important
data stored in the device.
If the problem is still not resolved, contact a Samsung Service Centre.
Calls are not connected
• Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number.
Others cannot hear you speaking on a call
• Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone.
• Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth.
• If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected.
Troubleshooting
97
Sound echoes during a call
Adjust the volume by pressing the Volume button or move to another area.
A cellular network or the Internet is often disconnected or audio
quality is poor
• Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna.
• When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. You
may have connectivity problems due to issues with the service provider’s base station.
Move to another area and try again.
• When using the device while moving, wireless network services may be disabled due to
issues with the service provider’s network.
The battery icon is empty
Your battery is low. Charge the battery.
The battery does not charge properly (For Samsung-approved
chargers)
• Ensure that the charger is connected properly.
• If the battery terminals are dirty, the battery may not charge properly or the device may
turn off. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and try charging the battery again.
The battery depletes faster than when first purchased
• When you expose the device or the battery to very cold or very hot temperatures, the
useful charge may be reduced.
• Battery consumption increases when you use messaging features or some apps, such as
games or the Internet.
• The battery is consumable and the useful charge will get shorter over time.
Troubleshooting
98
Your device is hot to the touch
When you use apps that require more power or use apps on your device for an extended
period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect
your device’s lifespan or performance.
Error messages appear when launching the camera
Your device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera
app. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following:
• Charge the battery.
• Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device.
• Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera app after trying these
tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre.
Photo quality is poorer than the preview
• The quality of your photos may vary, depending on the surroundings and the
photography techniques you use.
• If you take photos in dark areas, at night, or indoors, image noise may occur or images
may be out of focus.
Error messages appear when opening multimedia files
If you receive error messages or multimedia files do not play when you open them on your
device, try the following:
• Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device.
• Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is
DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file.
• Ensure that the file formats are supported by the device. If a file format is not supported,
such as DivX or AC3, install an app that supports it. To confirm the file formats that your
device supports, visit www.samsung.com.
Troubleshooting
99
• Your device supports photos and videos captured with the device. Photos and videos
captured by other devices may not work properly.
• Your device supports multimedia files that are authorised by your network service
provider or providers of additional services. Some content circulated on the Internet,
such as ringtones, videos, or wallpapers, may not work properly.
Another Bluetooth device is not located
• Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device.
• Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect
to.
• Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum
Bluetooth range (10 m).
If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre.
A connection is not established when you connect the device to a
computer
• Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device.
• Ensure that you have the proper driver installed and updated on your computer.
• If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher
installed on your computer.
• Ensure that you have Samsung Kies or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on
your computer.
Your device cannot find your current location
GPS signals may be obstructed in some locations, such as indoors. Set the device to use Wi-Fi
or a mobile network to find your current location in these situations.
Troubleshooting
100
Data stored in the device has been lost
Always make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. Otherwise, you cannot
restore data if it is corrupted or lost. Samsung is not responsible for the loss of data stored in
the device.
A small gap appears around the outside of the device case
• This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of
parts may occur.
• Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly.
Copyright
Copyright © 2015 Samsung Electronics
This manual is protected under international copyright laws.
No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing
in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of
Samsung Electronics.
Trademarks
• SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics.
• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide.
• Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are
registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
Présentation de l’appareil
Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche
Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques
secondes.
Touche
Accueil
Touche
Retour
Touche
Marche/
Arrêt
Touche de
volume
Touche
Applications
récentes
Connecteur à fonctions multiples
Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la
batterie
Seules les cartes microSIM sont
compatibles avec cet appareil.
2
1
Charger la batterie
Avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois,
vous devez charger la batterie.
Le socle de prise de courant doit être
installé à proximité du matériel et doit être
aisément accessible.
Élimination correcte
Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur l’appareil et
la mise au rebut de la batterie, appuyez sur Applis →
Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions
légales → Consignes de sécurité.
Ce symbole apposé sur le produit, ses accessoires
ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit,
ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur,
casque audio, câble de connexion, etc.), ne
peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets
ménagers.
Ce symbole apposé sur la batterie, le manuel ou
l’emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit
ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les
autres déchets ménagers.
Déclaration de conformité
Samsung Electronics déclare que cet appareil est conforme
aux exigences essentielles et aux dispositions applicables de
la Directive 1999/5/CE.
Rendez-vous sur www.samsung.com/mobile_doc pour
afficher la Déclaration de conformité.
Consulter le mode d'emploi
Sur votre appareil, ouvrez le navigateur Web
et sélectionnez le favori correspondant au
mode d’emploi dans la liste des favoris.
Vous pouvez également vous rendre sur le
site www.samsung.com pour consulter des
informations sur l'appareil, le mode d'emploi,
etc.
• En fonction de votre navigateur ou de votre
opérateur, le mode d’emploi peut ne pas être
disponible dans les favoris.
• L’accès au Web peut entraîner des frais
supplémentaires.
SM-G530FZ
Guide de prise en main rapide
Respectez les avertissements ci-dessous,
afin d’éviter de blesser autrui ou
d’endommager l’appareil
• Ne laissez pas les jeunes enfants ou les animaux de compagnie
mordiller ou lécher l’appareil.
• N’enfoncez pas l’appareil dans les yeux, les oreilles ou toute
autre partie du corps, et ne l’introduisez pas dans la bouche.
• Si l’appareil photo de votre appareil est équipé d’un flash,
ne l’utilisez pas à proximité des yeux des personnes ou des
animaux.
• N’entreposez pas votre appareil dans des endroits extrêmement
chauds ou froids. Il est recommandé d’utiliser votre appareil à
des températures comprises entre 5°C et 35°C.
• Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de
radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine ou
de conteneurs à haute pression.
• Conservez votre appareil au sec.
• N’utilisez pas votre appareil en extérieur pendant un orage.
• Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et réglementations
relatives à l’utilisation de votre appareil lorsque vous vous
trouvez au volant d’un véhicule.
Pour protéger votre ouïe lorsque vous utilisez un
casque audio, n’écoutez pas à des volumes élevés
pendant trop longtemps.
Pour afficher la totalité des consignes de sécurité, appuyez
sur Applis → Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil →
Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité.
Consignes de sécurité
Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes de sécurité, afin de
pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité.
Avertissement
Suivez les avertissements indiqués cidessous,
afin d’éviter tout accident comme
un incendie ou une explosion
• Évitez de heurter ou d’endommager votre appareil.
- Ne placez pas l’appareil dans vos poches arrières ou à la
ceinture.
- Rangez les batteries de rechange dans un étui de protection
approprié.
• Utilisez des batteries, des chargeurs, des accessoires et des
fournitures homologué(e)s.
• Évitez que le connecteur à fonction multiple et les bornes de la
batterie n’entrent en contact avec des éléments conducteurs,
tels que du métal ou des liquides.
• Ne touchez pas l’appareil avec des mains humides. De même,
n’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des environnements humides,
tels que des toilettes, ou lors d’activités aquatiques, telles que
la nage.
• Si une partie quelconque de l’appareil est fissurée ou brisée,
ou si l’appareil chauffe, cessez immédiatement de l’utiliser et
apportez-le à un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
• N’allumez pas l’appareil et ne l’utilisez pas si le compartiment de
la batterie est exposé à l’air libre.
Printed in Korea
GH68-43006B Rev.1.0
French. 12/2014
Le contenu de ce guide de prise en
main rapide peut différer par rapport
à votre appareil en fonction de votre
zone géographique, votre opérateur ou
votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de
modifications sans préavis.
Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics
Informations sur la certification DAS
Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur la certification
DAS, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → À propos de
l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité.
CET APPAREIL MOBILE EST CONFORME AUX DIRECTIVES
INTERNATIONALES SUR L’EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRÉQUENCES
Votre appareil mobile a été conçu pour ne
pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux
radiofréquences recommandées par les
directives internationales et en vigueur en
France. Ces directives, développées par
un organisme scientifique indépendant
(ICNIRP), tiennent compte d’une marge
importante de sécurité permettant d’assurer la sécurité des
personnes, quels que soient leur âge et leur état de santé.
La valeur utilisée dans le cadre de ces directives est le DAS, ou
débit d’absorption spécifique. Pour les appareils mobiles, la valeur
DAS maximale autorisée est de 2,0 W/kg. Valeurs DAS maximales
pour ce modèle, conformément aux directives ICNIRP :
Valeurs DAS pour les pays de l’Union européenne : les valeurs
DAS indiquées ci-dessous sont valables uniquement pour les
appareils destinés à être utilisés au sein de l’Union européenne.
Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle
DAS au niveau de la tête 0,464 W/kg
DAS au niveau du corps 0,351 W/kg
Des essais DAS ont été réalisés avec ce produit porté à une
distance de 1,5 cm du corps. Afin de respecter les exigences en
matière d’exposition aux radiofréquences, cet appareil doit être
positionné au moins à cette distance du corps.
www.sar-tick.com
Cependant, quelques dispositions simples peuvent contribuer
à diminuer le niveau d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi,
afin de réduire au maximum la puissance d’émission de votre
appareil mobile, veillez à l’utiliser dans des conditions de réception
optimales, l’indicateur de puissance du signal affiché à l’écran
comportant alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général, plus
vous êtes proche d’un relais, plus la puissance utilisée par l’appareil
mobile est faible.
Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien
que l’utilisation des appareils mobiles exige de prendre de
quelconques précautions spéciales. Cependant, des organismes
tels que l’Organisation Mondiale de la Santé et la Food and
Drug Administration recommandent aux personnes souhaitant
minimiser leur exposition aux radiofréquences de réduire la durée
d'utilisation de l'appareil ou d’utiliser autant que possible un kit
mains-libres permettant d’éloigner l’appareil mobile de leur tête et
de leur corps durant son utilisation. Conformément à la législation
française en vigueur, nous sommes tenus de vous informer qu’il
est recommandé dans ce cas d’éloigner le téléphone du ventre des
femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des adolescents.
Valeurs DAS pour les autres pays : pour connaître les valeurs
DAS spécifiques à votre appareil, rendez-vous sur le site
www.samsung.com/sar où vous pourrez effectuer une recherche
en fonction de votre zone géographique et de la référence de
votre modèle.
Pour transférer des données de votre ancien
appareil vers votre nouvel appareil : visitez
www.samsung.com/smartswitch pour en
savoir plus.
www.samsung.com
Mode d'emploi
SM-G530FZ
French. 02/2015. Rev.1.0
2
Table des matières
À lire avant utilisation
Démarrage
6 Contenu du coffret
7 Présentation de l’appareil
9 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la
batterie
14 Utiliser une carte mémoire
16 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil
16 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’écran
Fonctions de base
17 Utiliser l’écran tactile
20 Disposition de l'écran d’accueil
24 Volet des raccourcis
26 Ouvrir des applications
26 Installer ou désinstaller des applications
28 Saisir du texte
30 Capture d'écran
31 Mes fichiers
32 Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie
Connectivité réseau
33 Données mobiles
33 Wi-Fi
34 Modem et point d'accès mobile
Personnaliser votre appareil
36 Gérer l’écran d’accueil et la liste des
applications
38 Définir un fond d’écran et des sonneries
39 Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de
l’écran
40 Transférer des données depuis votre
ancien appareil
41 Paramétrer des comptes
Téléphone
42 Passer des appels
43 Recevoir des appels
44 Options en cours d’appel
Contacts
45 Ajouter des contacts
45 Importer et exporter des contacts
46 Rechercher des contacts
Table des matières
3
Établir une connexion avec
d’autres appareils
69 Bluetooth
71 Wi-Fi Direct
73 NFC
75 Screen Mirroring
77 Fonction d’impression mobile
Gestionnaire d’appareils et
de données
78 Mettre l’appareil à jour
79 Transférer des fichiers entre l’appareil et
un ordinateur
80 Sauvegarder et restaurer des données
80 Réinitialiser les données
Paramètres
81 Accéder au menu des paramètres
81 CONNEXIONS
85 APPAREIL
88 PERSONNEL
90 SYSTÈME
Dépannage
Messages et e-mails
47 Messages
48 Email
Appareil photo
51 Prise de vue de base
53 Modes de prise de vue
56 Paramètres de l'appareil photo
Galerie
58 Afficher les photos et les vidéos de
l’appareil
59 Modifier des photos
Applications et fonctions
utiles
60 S Planner
61 Internet
62 Vidéo
62 Calculatrice
63 Horloge
64 Mémo
65 Radio
66 Enregistreur vocal
67 Applications Google
4
À lire avant utilisation
Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et
en toute sécurité.
• Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil.
• En fonction de votre zone géographique, de votre opérateur ou de la version logicielle, certains
contenus peuvent différer par rapport à votre appareil.
• Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM
peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en
rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques
de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation.
• Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications
fournies par des prestataires autres que Samsung.
• Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités
découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de
personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de
l’appareil ou de ses applications.
• Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s
avec cet appareil sont concédés sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée.
L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent
une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement
responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia.
• Les services de données tels que l’envoi ou la réception de messages, le téléchargement ou
le chargement de données, la synchronisation automatique ou l’utilisation de services de
localisation peuvent occasionner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre à laquelle vous
avez souscrit dans le cadre de votre forfait. Pour les transferts de données volumineux, il est
recommandé d’utiliser la fonction Wi-Fi.
• Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être
disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie
avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications
installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs.
• Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non
officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions
constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie.
À lire avant utilisation
5
Icônes
Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui
Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements
Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires
6
Démarrage
Contenu du coffret
Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents :
• Appareil
• Batterie
• Guide de prise en main rapide
• Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en
fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur.
• Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne
pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils.
• L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans
préavis.
• Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant
tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil.
• Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation
d’accessoires non homologués peut entraîner des problèmes de performances, ainsi que
des dysfonctionnements non couverts par la garantie.
• La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour
plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung.
Démarrage
7
Présentation de l’appareil
Microphone
Écran tactile
Objectif avant
Capteur de proximité
Connecteur à fonctions
multiples
Touche Accueil
Touche Applications
récentes
Touche Marche/Arrêt
Écouteur
Touche Retour
Touche de volume
Haut-parleur
Prise audio 3,5 mm
Antenne GPS
Cache arrière
Antenne principale
Objectif arrière
Flash
Antenne NFC (sur la
batterie)
Démarrage
8
• Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela
peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie.
• L’utilisation d’une protection d’écran agréée Samsung est recommandée. Les protections
d’écran non agréées peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement des capteurs.
• Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau
peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
Touches
Touche Fonction
Marche/Arrêt
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre
l’appareil.
• Appuyez sur cette touche pour activer ou verrouiller l'écran.
Applications
récentes
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des applications
récentes.
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour accéder à des options
supplémentaires dans l’écran actuel.
Accueil
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour allumer l’écran lorsqu’il est
verrouillé.
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil.
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer la fonction de
recherche Google.
Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent.
Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil.
Démarrage
9
Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie
Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie
Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM fournie par votre opérateur, ainsi que la batterie.
• Seules les cartes microSIM sont compatibles avec cet appareil.
• La disponibilité de certains services 4G dépend de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus sur
la disponibilité des services, contactez votre opérateur.
1 Retirez le cache arrière.
Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache arrière.
Évitez de plier ou de déformer excessivement le cache arrière. Vous risqueriez de
l’endommager.
Démarrage
10
2 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM, puce orientée vers le bas.
• N’introduisez pas de carte mémoire dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM. Si
une carte mémoire venait à se coincer dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM,
apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire retirer.
• Veillez à ne pas perdre ou à ne pas laisser d’autres personnes utiliser votre carte SIM ou
USIM. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de dommage ou désagrément
résultant d’une perte ou d’un vol de carte.
3 Insérez la batterie en alignant correctement ses bornes avec celles de l'appareil.
2
1
Démarrage
11
4 Remettez le cache arrière en place.
• Assurez-vous que le cache arrière est bien fermé.
• Avec cet appareil, utilisez uniquement des caches arrières et des accessoires homologués
par Samsung.
Retirer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie
1 Retirez le cache arrière.
2 Retirez la batterie.
3 Retirez la carte SIM/USIM.
Démarrage
12
Charger la batterie
Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Vous pouvez
également charger la batterie à l’aide d’un ordinateur en les connectant via le câble USB.
Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung.
L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la
batterie ou endommager l’appareil.
• Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide.
• Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil,
même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant
d’allumer l’appareil.
• Si vous utilisez simultanément plusieurs applications, des applications réseaux ou des
applications qui nécessitent une connexion à un autre appareil, la batterie se déchargera
rapidement. Pour éviter toute déconnexion du réseau ou perte d’alimentation lors
d’un transfert de données, utilisez toujours ces applications lorsque la batterie est
parfaitement chargée.
Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à
fonctions multiples de l’appareil.
Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les
dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.
Démarrage
13
• L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement
complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps.
• Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne
fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas,
débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil.
• Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène
est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la
température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre.
• Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur,
dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire,
débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant.
Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager
l’appareil.
• Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le
chargeur n’étant pas muni d'une touche Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la
prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise
lors du chargement.
• Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément
accessible.
Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie
Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En
personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan,
vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements :
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche
Marche/Arrêt.
• Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du Gestionnaire
de tâches.
• Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth.
• Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi.
• Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique.
• Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran.
• Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran.
Démarrage
14
Utiliser une carte mémoire
Installer une carte mémoire
L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 64 Go. Selon le
fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre
appareil.
• Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil.
L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte
mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées.
• Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté.
• Seules les structures de fichiers FAT et exFAT sont compatibles avec les cartes mémoire de
l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de
fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater.
• Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de
vie des cartes mémoire.
• Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la
carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier Mes fichiers → Carte SD.
1 Retirez le cache arrière.
2 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le haut.
3 Remettez le cache arrière en place.
Démarrage
15
Retirer une carte mémoire
Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer
en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage →
Démonter la carte SD.
1 Retirez le cache arrière.
2 Retirez la carte mémoire.
3 Remettez le cache arrière en place.
Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela
peut occasionner une perte ou une corruption des données ou des dommages au niveau
de la carte mémoire ou du périphérique. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de
perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une
carte mémoire.
Formater une carte mémoire
Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil.
Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Formater la carte SD →
Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout.
Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de
toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas
la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur.
Démarrage
16
Allumer et éteindre l’appareil
Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes.
Si vous allumez votre appareil pour la première fois ou après avoir réinitialisé les paramètres, suivez
les instructions à l'écran pour configurer votre appareil.
Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre.
Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel
compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par
exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux.
Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’écran
Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et se verrouille. De même, si vous
n’utilisez pas l’appareil pendant un certain temps, l’écran s’éteint et se verrouille.
Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis faites
glisser votre doigt sur l’écran dans le sens de votre choix.
Vous pouvez changer le code permettant de déverrouiller l'écran. Pour plus d’informations, reportezvous
à la section Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran.
17
Fonctions de base
Utiliser l’écran tactile
• Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges
électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
• Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et
n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts.
• Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors
de la zone de saisie dédiée.
• Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes
risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous
n’utilisez pas l’appareil.
• Il est recommandé d’utiliser l’écran tactile avec les doigts.
Appuyer
Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une touche à l’écran ou saisir
un caractère sur le clavier à l’écran, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt.
Fonctions de base
18
Maintenir appuyé
Pour ouvrir une fenêtre d'options contextuelle, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément ou
l'écran pendant plus de 2 secondes.
Faire glisser
Pour déplacer un élément, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé et faites-le glisser vers un nouvel
emplacement.
Appuyer deux fois
Pour effectuer un zoom sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Pour annuler
le zoom, appuyez à nouveau à deux reprises sur l'écran.
Fonctions de base
19
Effleurer
Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite depuis l’écran
d’accueil ou la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste d'éléments, telle que
celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran.
Écarter et rapprocher les doigts
Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur
l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière.
Fonctions de base
20
Disposition de l'écran d’accueil
Écran d’accueil
L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des
widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc. Les widgets sont de petits outils qui permettent
d’obtenir des informations comme la météo ou l’actualité par exemple.
Pour afficher d'autres volets, faites défiler l'écran vers la gauche ou la droite, ou sélectionnez l'icône
d'un type de volet en bas de l'écran. Pour personnaliser l’écran d’accueil, reportez-vous à la section
Gérer l’écran d’accueil.
Application Dossier
Volet d'écran d'accueil
Applications favorites
Widget
Fonctions de base
21
Options de l’écran d’accueil
Pour accéder aux options disponibles, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l'écran
d'accueil ou rapprochez-y deux doigts.
Fonctions de base
22
Liste des applications
La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment
installées.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher
d’autres volets, faites défiler la liste des applications vers la gauche ou la droite ou appuyez sur le
point d'un volet d’applications en bas de l’écran. Pour plus d’informations sur la personnalisation de
la liste des applications, reportez-vous à la section Gérer la liste des applications.
Accéder à des
options
supplémentaires.
Application
Volets d’applications
Fonctions de base
23
Icônes d’informations
Des icônes d'informations sont susceptibles de s'afficher dans la barre d'état en haut de l'écran. Les
icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes.
Il se peut que la barre d’état ne s’affiche pas en haut de l’écran dans certaines applications.
Pour afficher la barre d’état, faites glisser le doigt du haut de l’écran vers le bas.
Icône Signification
Aucun signal
Puissance du signal
Itinérance (hors de la zone de service locale)
Réseau GPRS connecté
Réseau EDGE connecté
Réseau UMTS connecté
Réseau HSDPA connecté
Réseau HSPA+ connecté
/ Réseau LTE (4G) connecté
Connecté au réseau Wi-Fi
Fonction Bluetooth activée
GPS activé
Appel en cours
Appel manqué
Synchronisation avec le Web
Connecté à un ordinateur
Carte SIM ou USIM absente
Nouveau SMS ou MMS
Alarme activée
Profil Discret activé
Mode Vibreur activé
Fonctions de base
24
Icône Signification
Mode Hors-ligne activé
Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire
Niveau de charge de la batterie
Volet des raccourcis
Utiliser le volet des raccourcis
Lorsque vous recevez de nouvelles notifications, telles que des messages ou des appels manqués,
des icônes d’information apparaissent en haut de votre écran. Pour en savoir plus sur les icônes,
ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et consultez les détails.
Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites-le glisser vers le bas. Pour fermer le volet des raccourcis,
faites-le glissser de bas en haut.
Fonctions de base
25
Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions suivantes dans le volet des raccourcis.
Ouvrir les Paramètres.
Appuyer sur une notification et
exécuter différentes actions.
Effacer toutes les notifications.
Régler la luminosité.
Activer ou désactiver des options.
Maintenir le doigt appuyé sur une
touche pour afficher les paramètres
détaillés.
Utiliser les touches de paramétrage rapide
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver certaines fonctions du volet des raccourcis. Appuyez sur les
options suivantes pour les activer ou les désactiver. Vous pouvez afficher des paramètres plus
détaillés en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur une option.
• Wi-Fi : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Wi-Fi.
• Position : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Localisation.
• Son / Vibreur / Muet : activer ou désactiver le son de votre appareil ou le profil Discret.
• Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil.
Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran.
Fonctions de base
26
• Bluetooth : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Bluetooth.
• Données mobiles : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux sections Utilisation des données
ou Réseaux mobiles.
• Ultra éco énergie : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Mode Ultra économie
d’énergie.
• Pt accès mobile : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Modem et point d'accès
mobile.
• Screen Mirroring : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Screen Mirroring.
• NFC : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section NFC.
• Synchro. : activer cette fonction permet à l'appareil de synchroniser automatiquement les
applications, comme le calendrier ou la messagerie électronique.
• Mode Hors-ligne : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Mode Hors-ligne.
Ouvrir des applications
Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application
correspondante.
Pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez l’icône
d’une application à ouvrir.
Fermer une application
Appuyez sur et faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l'icône d'une application
pour la fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur → .
Installer ou désinstaller des applications
Applications Samsung GALAXY
Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur GALAXY Apps.
La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Fonctions de base
27
Installer des applications
Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour rechercher une application à l’aide
d’un mot-clé.
Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour télécharger des applications
gratuites, appuyez sur Installer. Pour acheter et télécharger des applications payantes, appuyez sur
la touche qui indique le prix de l’application.
Pour modifier les paramètres de mise à jour automatique, appuyez sur → Paramètres →
Mettre à jour les applications automatiquement, puis sélectionnez une option.
Play Store
Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications.
Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications.
Installer des applications
Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour rechercher une application à l’aide
d’un mot-clé.
Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour télécharger des applications
gratuites, appuyez sur INSTALLER. Pour acheter et télécharger des applications payantes, appuyez
sur le prix et suivez les instructions à l’écran.
Pour modifier les paramètres de mise à jour automatique, appuyez sur → PARAMÈTRES
→ Mise à jour automatique des applis, puis sélectionnez une option.
Gérer les applications
Désinstaller ou désactiver des applications
Pour désactiver les applications par défaut, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →
Désinstaller/désactiver des applications. L'icône apparaît en haut à droite de chaque application
qu’il est possible de désactiver. Sélectionnez une application, puis appuyez sur OK.
Pour désinstaller des applications téléchargées, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →
Applications téléchargées → → Désinstaller. Une autre solution consiste à appuyer, depuis la liste
des applications, sur Paramètres → Gestionnaire d'applications, à sélectionner une application,
puis à appuyer sur Désinstaller.
Fonctions de base
28
Activer les applications désactivées
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Aff. applis désact., sélectionnez des applications à
activer de nouveau, puis appuyez sur OK. Vous pouvez également, depuis la liste des applications,
appuyer sur Paramètres → Gestionnaire d'applications, faire défiler jusqu'à l'onglet DÉSACTIVÉ,
sélectionner une application, puis appuyer sur Activer.
• Masquer des applications : masquer des applications uniquement dans la liste des
applications. Vous pouvez continuer à utiliser les applications masquées.
• Désactiver des applications : désactiver les applications fournies par défaut et ne
pouvant pas être désinstallées de l’appareil. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les applications
désactivées.
• Désinstaller des applications : désinstaller des applications téléchargées.
Saisir du texte
Disposition du clavier
Un clavier apparaît automatiquement lorsque vous saisissez du texte pour envoyer des messages,
créer des mémos, etc.
La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez
sélectionner une des langues prises en charge.
Passer à la ligne suivante.
Supprimer le caractère précédent.
Saisir des signes de ponctuation.
Saisir des majuscules. Pour saisir
l’ensemble de votre texte en
majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur
cette touche.
Modifier les paramètres du clavier. Insérer un espace.
Fonctions de base
29
Modifier la langue de saisie
Appuyez sur → Sélectionner langue de saisie, puis sélectionnez les langues à utiliser. Si vous
sélectionnez au moins deux langues, vous pouvez passer d'une langue de saisie à l’autre en faisant
glisser votre doigt sur la barre d'espace vers la gauche ou la droite.
Modifier la disposition du clavier
Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une langue sous LANGUES DE SAISIE, puis sélectionnez la disposition
de clavier à utiliser.
Sur le Clavier 3x4, une touche correspond à trois ou quatre caractères. Pour saisir un
caractère, appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur la touche correspondante jusqu’à ce que le
caractère souhaité s’affiche.
Utiliser les fonctions supplémentaires du clavier
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la touche pour utiliser diverses fonctions. Suivant la dernière
fonction utilisée, d’autres icônes peuvent apparaître à la place de l'icône .
• : saisir du texte en le dictant.
Changer de langue.
Ouvrir le clavier.
Démarrer ou interrompre la saisie
orale de texte.
• : modifier les paramètres du clavier.
• : insérer des émoticônes.
Fonctions de base
30
Modifier le type de clavier
Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis
choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser.
Si les claviers par défaut n'apparaissent pas dans la liste des claviers disponibles ou que vous installez
de nouveaux claviers, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Langue et saisie,
puis cochez un clavier.
Copier et coller du texte
1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte.
2 Faites glisser l'icône ou pour sélectionner le texte voulu, ou appuyez sur Sélectionner tout
pour sélectionner l’intégralité du texte.
3 Appuyez sur Copier ou sur Couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier.
4 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’emplacement où le texte doit être inséré et appuyez sur Coller.
Capture d'écran
Vous pouvez effectuer une capure d'écran lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil.
Maintenez les touches Accueil et Marche/Arrêt simultanément enfoncées. L'image est enregistrée
dans le dossier Galerie → Screenshots. Après avoir réalisé une capture d'écran, vous pouvez
modifier l'image et la partager avec d'autres personnes.
Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications.
Fonctions de base
31
Mes fichiers
À propos de Mes fichiers
Utilisez cette application pour accéder à divers fichiers enregistrés sur l'appareil.
Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Rechercher des fichiers ou des
dossiers.
Afficher les fichiers par catégories.
Afficher l'historique de
téléchargement.
Afficher les fichiers stockés sur
l'appareil.
Fonctions de base
32
Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie
Mode Ultra économie d'énergie
Utilisez cette fonction pour prolonger l’autonomie de la batterie. En mode Ultra économie d’énergie,
l’appareil se comporte comme suit :
• Il limite le nombre d’applications disponibles à l’essentiel et affiche uniquement les applications
sélectionnées.
• Il désactive la connexion de données mobiles quand l’écran s’éteint.
• Il désactive les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth.
Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Mode Ultra économie d'énergie, puis
appuyez sur le curseur Mode Ultra économie d'énergie pour activer la fonction.
Pour ajouter une application à l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une application.
Pour modifier les paramètres du mode Ultra économie d’énergie, par exemple la connectivité réseau
ou le son, appuyez sur → Paramètres.
Pour désactiver le mode Ultra économie énergie, appuyez sur → Désact. Ultra économie énergie.
Le délai de veille maximum estimé est le temps qu’il faut à la batterie pour se décharger
complètement lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé. Le délai de veille peut varier selon les
paramètres de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation.
33
Connectivité réseau
Données mobiles
Connectez l’appareil à un réseau mobile pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers
multimédia avec d’autres appareils. Pour connaître les options supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la
section « Utilisation des données ».
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Utilisation des données, puis cochez la
case Données mobiles.
Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, puis à appuyer sur Données mobiles
pour activer la fonction.
Wi-Fi
Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers
multimédia avec d’autres appareils Pour connaître les options supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la
section « Wi-Fi ».
Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie.
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Wi-Fi, puis appuyez sur le curseur
Wi-Fi pour activer la fonction.
2 Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe
sont signalés par une icône en forme de verrou.
3 Appuyez sur Connexion.
Une fois l’appareil connecté à un réseau Wi-Fi, il se reconnecte automatiquement à ce réseau
à chaque fois qu’il est disponible sans nécessiter de mot de passe.
Pour éviter la connexion automatique de l’appareil au réseau, sélectionnez le réseau dans la
liste de réseaux et appuyez sur Oublier.
Connectivité réseau
34
Modem et point d'accès mobile
À propos de la fonction Point d’accès mobile et modem
En l’absence de connexion Internet, utilisez cette fonction pour partager la connexion de données
de votre appareil avec des ordinateurs et d’autres appareils. Les connexions peuvent être effectuées
via la fonction Wi-Fi, USB ou Bluetooth.
L’utilisation de cette fonction peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires.
Utiliser le point d’accès mobile
Utilisez votre appareil comme point d’accès mobile pour partager sa connexion de données avec
d’autres appareils.
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point d'accès mobile.
2 Cochez la case Point d'accès mobile.
• L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état. Les autres appareils peuvent détecter le vôtre dans la
liste de réseaux Wi-Fi.
• Pour définir un mot de passe pour le point d’accès mobile, appuyez sur → Configurer le
point d'accès, puis sélectionnez le type de sécurité. Saisissez ensuite un mot de passe, puis
appuyez sur Enreg.
3 Sur l’écran de l’autre appareil, recherchez et sélectionnez votre appareil dans la liste des réseaux
Wi-Fi.
4 Sur l’appareil connecté, utilisez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil pour accéder
à Internet.
Connectivité réseau
35
Utiliser le modem USB
Partagez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil avec d’autres ordinateurs via un
câble USB.
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point d'accès mobile.
2 Connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
3 Cochez la case Modem USB.
L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état lorsque les deux appareils sont connectés.
4 Sur l’ordinateur, utilisez la connexion de données de votre appareil.
Utiliser le modem Bluetooth
Partagez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil avec d’autres ordinateurs via la fonction
Bluetooth. Assurez-vous que l’ordinateur auquel vous vous connectez prend en charge la fonction
Bluetooth.
1 Associez les deux appareils via la fonction Bluetooth. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à
la section Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth.
2 Depuis la liste des applications de votre appareil, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point
d'accès mobile.
3 Cochez la case Modem Bluetooth.
4 Sur l’appareil connecté, ouvrez l’écran des paramètres Bluetooth, puis appuyez sur → Accès
Internet.
L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état lorsque les deux appareils sont connectés.
5 Sur l’appareil connecté, utilisez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil pour accéder
à Internet.
Les modes de connexion peuvent varier en fonction des appareils connectés.
36
Personnaliser votre appareil
Gérer l’écran d’accueil et la liste des applications
Gérer l’écran d’accueil
Ajouter des éléments
Depuis la liste des applications, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser
vers l’écran d’accueil.
Pour ajouter des widgets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l'écran d'acceuil,
appuyez sur Widgets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un widget, puis faites-le glisser vers l’écran
d’accueil.
Déplacer et supprimer un élément
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément depuis l’écran d’accueil, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à
l’emplacement souhaité.
Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord de l’écran.
Vous pouvez également déplacer les applications fréquemment utilisées vers la zone de raccourcis
située en bas de l’écran d’accueil.
Pour supprimer un élément, maintenez le doigt appuyé dessus. Faites-le ensuite glisser vers l’option
Supprimer qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran.
Créer un dossier
1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers
l’option Créer dossier qui apparaît en haut de l’écran.
2 Saisissez un nom de dossier.
3 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez les applications à déplacer vers le dossier, puis appuyez sur OK.
Personnaliser votre appareil
37
Gérer les volets
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide pour ajouter, déplacer ou
supprimer un volet.
Pour ajouter un volet, faites défiler l'icône l’écran vers la gauche jusqu’au dernier volet, puis appuyez
sur .
Pour déplacer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son aperçu, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à
l’emplacement souhaité.
Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son aperçu, puis faites-le glisser vers l’option
Supprimer en haut de l’écran.
Pour définir un volet comme écran d’accueil principal, appuyez sur .
Gérer la liste des applications
Changer le mode d'affichage
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Type d'affichage et sélectionnez un mode
d'affichage.
Masquer des applications
Vous pouvez masquer les applications que vous ne voulez pas retrouver dans la liste des
applications.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Masquer les applications, sélectionnez des
applications, puis appuyez sur OK.
Pour afficher les applications masquées, appuyez sur → Afficher apps masquées, sélectionnez des
applications, puis appuyez sur OK.
Déplacer des éléments
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Modifier. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à
déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité.
Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord de l’écran.
Pour déplacer un élément vers un tout nouveau volet, faites-le glisser vers l’option Créer une page
qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran.
Personnaliser votre appareil
38
Définir un fond d’écran et des sonneries
Définir un fond d’écran
Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond de l’écran d’accueil ou
de verrouillage.
1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, puis appuyez sur Fonds
d'écran. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur Paramètres → Affichage → Fond d'écran dans la
liste des applications.
2 Sélectionnez un écran à modifier ou auquel appliquer un fond d’écran.
3 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite, puis sélectionnez une image parmi celles affichées
en bas de l’écran. Pour sélectionner les photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou
d’autres images, appuyez sur Depuis Galerie.
4 Appuyez sur Définir comme fond d'écran ou sur OK.
Modifier les sonneries
Modifiez les sonneries des appels entrants et des notifications.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Son.
Pour définir une sonnerie pour les appels entrants, appuyez sur Sonneries, sélectionnez une
sonnerie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour utiliser un morceau de musique stocké sur l’appareil ou sur l’un
de vos comptes, comme une sonnerie, appuyez sur Ajouter.
Pour définir une sonnerie pour les notifications, appuyez sur Notifications, sélectionnez une
sonnerie, puis appuyez sur OK.
Personnaliser votre appareil
39
Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran
Vous pouvez définir une méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran pour empêcher l’accès à vos
informations personnelles par autrui.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage →
Déverrouillage de l'écran, puis sélectionnez une méthode de déverrouillage. Pour protéger votre
appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être
déverrouillé.
Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service
après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser.
Modèle
Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un
code PIN de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle.
Code PIN
Un code PIN se compose uniquement de chiffres. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis
recommencez pour valider.
Mot de passe
Un mot de passe comprend des caractères et des chiffres. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y
compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider.
Personnaliser votre appareil
40
Transférer des données depuis votre ancien
appareil
Utiliser un compte de sauvegarde
Vous pouvez transférer des données de sauvegarde depuis votre ancien appareil vers votre nouvel
appareil à l'aide de votre compte Google. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section
Sauvegarder et restaurer des données.
Utiliser Samsung Smart Switch
Vous pouvez transférer des données de votre ancien appareil vers un nouvel appareil via Smart
Switch. Visitez www.samsung.com/smartswitch pour en savoir plus.
Samsung Smart Switch n’est pas pris en charge sur certains appareils ou ordinateurs.
Utiliser Smart Switch avec un ordinateur
Utilisez cette fonction pour importer une sauvegarde de vos données (depuis des appareils mobiles
d'un fabricant sélectionné) depuis un ordinateur vers votre appareil. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis www.samsung.com/smartswitch.
1 Sauvegardez les données d'un ancien appareil sur un ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations,
contactez le fabricant de l’appareil.
2 Sur l’ordinateur, lancez Smart Switch.
3 Connectez votre ancien appareil à l’ordinateur à l’aide d'un câble USB.
4 Sur l'ordinateur, sélectionnez le fabricant de l'ancien appareil, puis suivez les instructions à
l'écran pour transférer les données vers votre appareil.
Personnaliser votre appareil
41
Utiliser Samsung Kies
Importez un fichier de sauvegarde de vos données depuis votre ordinateur via Samsung Kies
pour restaurer les données sur votre appareil. Vous pouvez également sauvegarder les données
sur l'ordinateur via Samsung Kies. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la section Connecter
l’appareil avec Samsung Kies.
Paramétrer des comptes
Ajouter des comptes
Certaines applications utilisées sur l’appareil nécessitent un compte enregistré. Afin de profiter au
maximum de votre appareil, créez des comptes.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Comptes → Ajouter compte et
sélectionnez un service de compte. Ensuite, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour
procéder à la configuration du compte.
Pour synchroniser du contenu avec vos comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis cochez les éléments
à synchroniser.
Supprimer un compte
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis
appuyez sur → Supp. compte.
42
Téléphone
Passer des appels
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Téléphone.
Appuyez sur Clavier, composez un numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur pour passer un appel
vocal ou sur pour réaliser un appel visio. Vous pouvez également passer des appels aux numéros
de téléphone répertoriés dans les menus Journal, Favoris et Contacts.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Ajouter le numéro à la liste de
contacts.
Afficher un aperçu du numéro de
téléphone.
Afficher les contacts favoris.
Supprimer le caractère précédent.
Afficher la liste de contacts.
Afficher les journaux d’appels et de
messages.
Composer un numéro à l’aide du
clavier.
Passer des appels depuis le journal d’appels ou la liste de contacts
Appuyez sur Journal ou Contacts, sélectionnez un contact ou un numéro de téléphone, puis
appuyez sur ou .
Téléphone
43
Appeler un numéro à l’étranger
Appuyez sur Clavier.
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la touche 0 jusqu’à ce que le signe + apparaisse. Composez l’indicatif
du pays, l’indicatif régional et le numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur .
Pour interdire les appels passés à l’étranger, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Appel → Paramètres
supplémentaires → Restriction d'appel → pour les appels vocaux ou les appels visio. Ensuite,
cochez la case Appels internationaux, saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK.
Recevoir des appels
Répondre à un appel
Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône .
Rejeter un appel
Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône .
Pour envoyer un message lorsque vous rejetez un appel entrant, faites glisser la barre des messages
de rejet située en bas de l’écran vers le haut.
Pour créer des messages de rejet, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → →
Paramètres → Appel → Définir les messages de rejet → .
Appels manqués
Si vous manquez un appel, l’icône apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis. Ouvrez le volet des
raccourcis pour afficher la liste des appels manqués. Une autre solution consiste, depuis la liste des
applications, à appuyer sur Téléphone → Journal pour afficher les messages manqués.
Téléphone
44
Options en cours d’appel
Options au cours d’un appel vocal
Les options suivantes sont disponibles :
• Ajouter : passer un autre appel.
• Clavier : ouvrir le clavier.
• Fin : terminer l'appel en cours.
• HP : activer ou désactiver le haut-parleur. Lorsque vous utilisez le haut-parleur, parlez dans le
microphone en haut de l’appareil et éloignez l’appareil de vos oreilles.
• Muet : désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne puisse pas vous entendre.
• Bluetooth : sélectionner un casque Bluetooth, à condition qu’il soit connecté à l’appareil.
Appuyez sur pour afficher d'autres options.
Options au cours d’un appel visio
Les options suivantes sont disponibles :
• → Masquer mon image : masquer votre image à l'interlocuteur.
• → Image sortante : sélectionner l'image à afficher à votre correspondant.
• → Capturer une image : capturer l’image de votre correspondant.
• → Enregistrer une vidéo : enregistrer une vidéo de votre correspondant.
• → Mémo : créer un mémo.
• → Messages : envoyer un message.
• → Clavier : ouvrir le clavier.
• → Désactiver haut-parleur / Activer haut-parleur : activer ou désactiver le haut-parleur.
Lorsque vous utilisez le haut-parleur, parlez dans le microphone en haut de l’appareil et éloignez
l’appareil de vos oreilles.
• → Basculer sur le casque / Basculer sur le téléphone : basculer la sortie audio entre le casque
Bluetooth connecté ou le haut-parleur de l’appareil.
Appuyez sur l’écran pour utiliser les options suivantes :
• Objectif : basculer entre l'objectif avant et arrière, et inversement.
• Muet : désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne puisse pas vous entendre.
• Fin : terminer l'appel en cours.
45
Contacts
Ajouter des contacts
Transférer des contacts depuis d’autres appareils
Vous pouvez transférer des contacts depuis d'autres appareils sur votre appareil. Pour plus
d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil.
Créer manuellement des contacts
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts.
2 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage, puis saisissez les informations du
contact.
• : ajouter une image.
• / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d'information.
3 Appuyez sur Enreg.
Pour ajouter un numéro de téléphone à la liste de contacts à partir du clavier, appuyez sur Clavier,
composez le numéro, puis appuyez sur Ajouter aux contacts.
Importer et exporter des contacts
Importez des contacts depuis des services de stockage ou exportez-les vers ces services.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts.
Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contacts → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option
d’importation ou d’exportation.
Contacts
46
Rechercher des contacts
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts.
Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes :
• Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas.
• Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos
critères de recherche.
Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes :
• : ajouter le contact aux favoris.
• / : passer un appel vocal ou visio.
• : rédiger un message.
• : rédiger un e-mail.
Ajouter des raccourcis vers des contacts à l’écran d’accueil
Ajoutez des raccourcis vers les contacts avec lesquels vous communiquez fréquemment sur l’écran
d’accueil.
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts.
2 Sélectionnez un contact.
3 Appuyez sur → Ajouter un raccourci à l'écran d'accueil.
47
Messages et e-mails
Messages
Envoyer des messages
Envoyez des messages texte (SMS) ou des messages multimédia (MMS).
L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut
occasionner des frais supplémentaires.
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Messages.
2 Appuyez sur .
3 Ajoutez des destinataires, puis saisissez un message.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Insérer un message.
Joindre des fichiers.
Sélectionner des contacts depuis
votre liste de contacts.
Saisir les destinataires.
Envoyer le message.
4 Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message.
Messages et e-mails
48
Lire les messages entrants
Les messages entrants sont regroupés sous forme de fils de discussion par contact. Pour afficher les
messages d’un contact, sélectionnez ce dernier.
L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut
occasionner des frais supplémentaires.
En mode affichage d'un message, appuyez sur pour afficher d'autres options.
Email
Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email.
Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie
électronique.
Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Appuyez sur Suivant s’il s’agit d’un compte de
messagerie électronique privé ou sur Configuration manuelle s’il s’agit d’un compte de messagerie
électronique professionnel. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la
configuration du compte.
Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur →
Paramètres → Gérer les comptes → .
Si vous disposez de plus d’un compte de messagerie électronique, vous pouvez définir l’un d’eux
comme compte par défaut. Appuyez sur → Gérer les comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis
cochez la case Compte par défaut.
Messages et e-mails
49
Envoyer des e-mails
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email.
Appuyez sur l'icône en bas de l’écran pour rédiger un message.
Ajouter des destinataires.
Ajouter un destinataire en copie ou
copie cachée.
Ajouter des destinataires depuis la
liste de contacts. Insérer un message.
Entrer un objet.
Envoyer le message.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Joindre des images, des vidéos et
autres.
Enregistrer le message pour
l'envoyer ultérieurement.
Ignorer le message.
Messages et e-mails
50
Lire des e-mails
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email.
Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique à utiliser. Les nouveaux
messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur .
Appuyez sur un message pour le lire.
Répondre au message.
Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre
liste de contacts ou afficher d'autres
options.
Répondre à tous les destinataires.
Transférer le message.
Passer au message suivant ou
revenir au message précédent.
Supprimer le message.
Ouvrir les pièces jointes.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Identifier le message comme favori.
51
Appareil photo
Prise de vue de base
Prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo.
2 Appuyez sur l’écran d’aperçu à l’endroit où l’appareil photo doit faire la mise au point.
3 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo ou sur pour enregistrer une vidéo.
• Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer
un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les.
• Pour capturer une image de la vidéo en cours d’enregistrement, appuyez sur .
Afficher les photos et
les vidéos que vous
avez prises.
Enregistrer une vidéo.
Prendre une photo.
Modifier les
paramètres de
l’appareil photo.
Basculer entre
l'objectif avant et
arrière, et inversement.
Afficher le mode en
cours.
Modifier le mode de
prise de vue.
Appareil photo
52
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement.
• Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne
pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées.
• L’objectif avant est adapté à la prise de photos grand-angle. Il se peut qu’une distorsion
mineure se produise dans les photos grand-angle ; cela ne traduit pas un problème de
performances de l’appareil.
Ouvrir l’appareil photo depuis l’écran verrouillé
Pour prendre rapidement des photos de moments particuliers, depuis l’écran de verrouillage,
démarrez l’application Appareil photo.
Depuis l’écran verrouillé, faites glisser votre doigt sur l'icône . Si l’icône ne s’affiche pas, ouvrez
la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage, puis cochez la case
Raccourci Appareil photo.
La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre
opérateur.
Bon usage de l’appareil photo
• Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur
consentement.
• Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit.
• Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui.
Appareil photo
53
Modes de prise de vue
Auto.
Ce mode permet à l'appareil photo d'évaluer l'environnement et de déterminer le mode idéal de
prise de vue.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Auto.
Selfie
Utilisez ce mode pour faire un autoportrait avec l'objectif avant.
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo.
2 Appuyez sur pour utiliser l'objectif avant.
3 Appuyez sur → Selfie.
4 Présentez la paume de la main à l'écran ou appuyez sur pour faire un autoportrait.
Selfie panorama
Utilisez ce mode pour faire un autoportrait grand-angle avec l'objectif avant.
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo.
2 Appuyez sur pour utiliser l'objectif avant.
3 Appuyez sur → Selfie panorama.
Appareil photo
54
4 Présentez la paume de la main à l'écran ou appuyez sur pour faire un autoportrait.
5 Tournez lentement l'appareil vers la gauche, puis vers la droite pour prendre une photo
panoramique. L'appareil combine les photos en une seule image panoramique.
• Veillez à ce que le cadre bleu reste à l'intérieur du cadre de prise de vue.
• Les sujets ne doivent pas bouger pendant la prise de vue d'autoportraits grand-angle.
• Les conditions d'éclairage peuvent affecter la résolution d'une photo.
• Les parties supérieures et inférieures de l'image affichée sur l'écran d'aperçu peuvent être
coupées de la photo selon les conditions de prise de vue.
Beauté
Ce mode permet de photographier des portraits avec des couleurs plus claires afin d'obtenir des
images plus douces.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Beauté.
Panorama
Ce mode permet de prendre une photo composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres.
L’appareil identifie la photo à l’aide de l’icône dans la Galerie.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Panorama.
Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils :
• Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix.
• Maintenez l’image à l’intérieur du cadre de prise de vue de l’appareil photo.
• Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme
un ciel ou un pan de mur uni.
Appareil photo
55
Selfie arrière
Utilisez ce mode pour permettre à l'appareil photo de détecter votre visage et d'effectuer la mise au
point dessus automatiquement lorsque vous faites un autoportrait à l'aide de l'objectif arrière.
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Selfie arrière.
2 Déplacez le cadre jusqu'à votre visage et ajustez la taille du cadre.
3 Positionnez l'appareil de manière à ce que l'objectif arrière soit dirigé vers votre visage. Lorsque
le visage est détecté, l'appareil émet un bip. L'appareil prend alors automatiquement la photo
après 2 secondes.
Rafale
Ce mode permet de prendre une série de photos de sujets en mouvement.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Rafale.
Maintenez le doigt enfoncé sur la touche pour prendre plusieurs photos en continu.
HDR (Ton riche)
Ce mode vous permet de prendre des photos riches en couleurs et de reproduire chacun des détails,
même dans des conditions de luminosité extrêmes.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → HDR (Ton riche).
Sans effet Avec effet
Appareil photo
56
Nuit
Ce mode permet de prendre une photo dans des conditions de faible éclairage, sans utiliser le flash.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Nuit.
GIF animé
Ce mode permet de créer une photo animée à partir d'une série de photos.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → GIF animé.
Paramètres de l'appareil photo
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → . Les options suivantes sont
disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope) ou l'un ou l'autre des modes.
• : activer ou de désactiver le flash.
• : inverser l'image pour créer une image miroir de la scène originale, lorsque vous prenez des
photos avec l'objectif avant.
• : définir le délai à l'issue duquel l'appareil doit prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo.
• : sélectionner un effet de filtre à utiliser lorsque vous prenez des photos ou enregistrez des
vidéos.
• / : sélectionner une résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution
élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire.
Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur .
• Selfie paume : paramétrer l'appareil de manière à ce qu'il détecte votre paume et que vous
puissiez ainsi l'utiliser pour prendre des autoportraits.
• Beauté : paramétrer l'appareil de manière à ce qu'il photographie des portraits avec des
couleurs plus claires afin d'obtenir des images plus douces.
• Valeur d'expos. : modifier la valeur d'exposition. Ce paramètre détermine la quantité de lumière
reçue par le capteur de l’appareil photo. En cas de faible luminosité, utilisez une exposition plus
élevée.
• ISO : sélectionner une valeur ISO. Ce paramètre permet de contrôler la sensibilité lumineuse
de l’appareil photo. Celle-ci est mesurée en équivalents de caméra-film. Les valeurs faibles sont
destinées aux objets immobiles vivement éclairés. Les valeurs plus élevées sont pour les objets
en mouvement ou faiblement éclairés.
Appareil photo
57
• Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images
offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des
situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de
balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels.
• Modes de mesure : sélectionner un mode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont
les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrièreplan
au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la lumière à un endroit spécifique. Matrice
calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière.
• Photo par appui : appuyer sur l'image à l'écran pour prendre une photo.
• Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une
résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire.
• Mode enregistr. : modifier le mode d’enregistrement.
• Tags de localis. : paramétrer l'appareil pour qu'il joigne la balise de localisation à la photo.
• Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux
où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible
altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises.
• Lorsque vous partagez une photo comprenant une balise de localisation, il se peut les
informations de localisation soient exposées à des tiers.
• Emplac. de stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et des vidéos.
• Grille : afficher des lignes directrices sur l'écran d'aperçu.
• Contrôle vocal : paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il prenne des photos à l’aide de commandes
vocales.
• Touche de volume : utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom.
• Réinit. les paramètres : réinitialiser les paramètres de l'appareil.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon le mode utilisé.
58
Galerie
Afficher les photos et les vidéos de l’appareil
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie et sélectionnez une image ou une vidéo.
Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône dans l'aperçu miniature.
Pour masquer ou afficher la barre de menus et les miniatures, appuyez sur l'écran.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Supprimer l’image.
Modifier la photo.
Revenir à l’écran précédent.
Envoyer l’image à d’autres
personnes.
Miniatures d'aperçu des photos et
des vidéos
Galerie
59
Modifier des photos
Modifiez vos images en leur appliquant différents effets.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie.
Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l'application requise.
En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes :
• Pivoter : pivoter l’image.
• Rogner : rogner l’image.
• Couleur : ajuster la saturation ou la luminosité de l’image.
• Effet : appliquer des effets à l’image.
• Portrait : corriger les yeux rouges, ajuster ou retoucher les visages, ou appliquer un effet de flou
à l’arrière-plan.
• Autocollant : appliquer des autocollants à l’image.
• Dessin : dessiner sur l’image.
• Cadre : appliquer des cadres à l’image.
Une fois l’image modifiée, appuyez sur .
60
Applications et fonctions utiles
S Planner
Créer un événement ou une tâche
1 Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications.
2 Appuyez sur . Vous pouvez également sélectionner une date ne comportant aucun
événement ou tâche, et appuyer à deux reprise dessus.
Si la date comporte déjà des événements ou tâches, appuyez sur la date et sur .
3 Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, et saisissez les détails.
• Ajouter événement : définir la date de début et de fin d’un événement. Vous pouvez lui
appliquer une option de répétition.
• Ajouter une tâche : ajouter une tâche à faire à une date spécifique. Vous pouvez lui
appliquer une option de priorité.
Saisir un titre.
Ajouter des détails.
Sélectionner un calendrier à utiliser
ou à synchroniser.
Sélectionner un élément.
Définir une date de début et de fin
pour l’événement.
4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour sauvegarder l’événement ou la tâche.
Applications et fonctions utiles
61
Synchroniser les événements et les tâches avec vos comptes
Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications.
Pour synchroniser des événements et des tâches avec vos comptes, appuyez sur → Synchroniser.
Pour ajouter des comptes avec lesquels effectuer la synchronisation, appuyez sur → Calendriers →
Ajouter compte. Sélectionnez ensuite un compte avec lequel effectuer la synchronisation et ouvrez
une session. Une fois le compte ajouté, un cercle vert apparaît près du nom du compte.
Pour modifier l’option de synchronisation d'un compte, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur
Paramètres → Comptes, puis sélectionnez un service de compte.
Internet
1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Internet.
2 Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse. Pour changer de moteur de recherche, appuyez sur l’icône du
moteur de recherche près du champ d’adresse Web.
3 Saisissez une adresse Web ou un mot-clé, puis appuyez sur Aller à.
Pour afficher la barre de navigation, faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas de l’écran.
Lire un article en mode Lecture.
Enregistrer la page Web en cours
dans les favoris.
Ouvrir la page d'accueil.
Revenir à la page précédente. Afficher vos favoris et votre
historique Internet récent.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Ouvrir le gestionnaire de fenêtres
de page Web.
Actualiser la page Web en cours.
Applications et fonctions utiles
62
Vidéo
Lire une vidéo
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Vidéo.
Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire.
Effectuer un retour ou
une avance rapide en
faisant glisser la barre.
Modifier le format
d’écran.
Revenir à la vidéo
précédente. Maintenir
la touche appuyée
pour effectuer un
retour rapide.
Passer à la vidéo
suivante. Maintenir la
touche appuyée pour
effectuer une avance
rapide.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Mettre en pause et
reprendre la lecture.
Changer l'orientation
de l'écran.
Régler le volume.
Calculatrice
Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Calculatrice.
Faites pivoter l’appareil vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si
l'option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice
scientifique.
Applications et fonctions utiles
63
Horloge
Alarme
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Alarme.
Créer une alarme
Appuyez sur , réglez l’heure de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition, paramétrez diverses
autres options d’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Pour activer ou désactiver les alarmes, appuyez sur
près de l'alarme concernée dans la liste des alarmes.
• Répéter : définir le délai à l'issue duquel l'alarme doit sonner de nouveau et le nombre de
répétitions.
• Alarme intelligente : définir la tonalité de l’alarme intelligente et combien de temps avant
l'alarme principe elle doit sonner. Une alarme intelligente démarre à faible volume quelques
minutes avant l’heure prédéfinie de l’alarme. Le volume de l’alarme intelligente augmente
graduellement jusqu’à ce que vous l’éteigniez ou que vous désactiviez l’alarme principale.
Arrêter ou répéter une alarme
Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Si vous avez précédemment activé
l'option de répétition, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône pour répéter l'alarme à l'issue d'une
période de répétition prédéfinie.
Supprimer une alarme
Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur .
Horloge mondiale
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Horloge mondiale.
Créer une horloge
Appuyez sur , puis saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste.
Supprimer une horloge
Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur .
Applications et fonctions utiles
64
Chronomètre
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Chronomètre.
Appuyez sur Début pour commencer à chronométrer. Pour enregistrer des temps intermédiaires,
appuyez sur Tour.
Appuyez sur Arrêter pour arrêter le chronométrage. Pour effacer les temps intermédiaires, appuyez
sur Réinitialiser.
Minuteur
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Minuteur.
Définissez la durée, puis appuyez sur Début.
Lorsque la durée du minuteur est écoulée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône .
Mémo
Cette application permet de créer des mémos et de les organiser par catégorie.
Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Mémo.
Créer un mémo
Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos et saisissez votre mémo. Lorsque vous rédigez un mémo,
utilisez les options suivantes :
• : créer ou définir une catégorie.
• : insérer des images.
• : enregistrer un mémo vocal et l’insérer.
Pour enregistrer le mémo, appuyez sur Sauveg.
Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo, puis sur son contenu.
Rechercher des mémos
Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos, puis saisissez un mot-clé à rechercher dans les mémos.
Applications et fonctions utiles
65
Radio
Écouter la radio FM
Appuyez sur Radio depuis la liste des applications.
Avant d'utiliser cette application, vous devez brancher un casque ou des écouteurs qui font office
d’antenne radio.
Lorsque vous démarrez la radio FM pour la première fois, elle recherche et enregistre
automatiquement les stations disponibles.
Pour allumer la radio FM, appuyez sur . Sélectionnez la station radio à écouter dans la liste, puis
appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM.
Afficher la liste des stations
favorites.
Accéder à des options
supplémentaires.
Allumer ou éteindre la radio FM.
Régler le volume.
Ajouter la station de radio en cours
d’écoute à la liste des favoris.
Régler précisément la fréquence.
Afficher la liste des stations
disponibles.
Enregistrer un morceau depuis la
radio FM.
Entrer manuellement la fréquence
radio.
Rechercher manuellement les
stations de radio disponibles.
Rechercher des stations radio
Appuyez sur Radio depuis la liste des applications.
Appuyez sur → Analyser, puis sélectionnez une option de balayage. L’appareil recherche et
mémorise automatiquement les stations de radio FM disponibles.
Sélectionnez la station radio à écouter dans la liste, puis appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de la
radio FM.
Applications et fonctions utiles
66
